MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION - 11-0053-UT 0
>- Clearwater ENGINEERING E . R
CONSTRUCTION
T '. J
a
OFFICE COMMUNICATION
TO. SUBIJF'C'T� One N"car Warranty ("heck
aPEC"I(TIT,: iaTasaineering) Associates. Inc,
_ — . .........
-- –
T'I T TEC T 1 TI M4aa la all a RI `larifier 1-4 Rehabilitation (I 1 003 1' [`)
CONTRACTOR: Wharton-Sniitli- Inc,
i I
11.0. Box 4710i8
_ __..... �..
Lake Monroe, l1. )2717-1028
8131-288-0068
INSPECTOR:
�...�
DATE:
C M-.MEET - r.0
..
�..
Pt°rrcFta `-lat,lsh all t �O'l l° t l ari re.� � ..J�;R l��E) ji ,,[tio t:`����t�o�r,;t C °�r���1��� 11 (�t��'..11 i`
e
Loentiow f 605 i fa bor Drive Clearwater, FL _375
Clo ntr'aacat Dante: A-uglist 1,'?_l-12 Notice to Pruc°ced Date:
l.t rrrla•:Fr; 17. 2kl y..
Date of Substantial :`onarllletion, _ Dece niber 18, )01.1 3 _. ......_.
4 spar r rll ntry . n Linjigin Asctgtes, Ince..�_.
The work performed under this C;orrtr°acct, the rehabilitation of clarifiers and the clarifier influent
splitter box art the Marshall Street WRF, has bean inspected by authorized representatives of the
Owner, Contractor, and Consultant, and clarifiers 1,2, 3 and 4, and the splitter bans work are hereby
declared to besubstantially completed oil the above Tarte,
DEFINITION OFSUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
IO
Substantial completion is the stage in construction when ar pro'ject ordesignated llorticrrn thereof is sul�'iclently complete in accordance itln
contract documents so that the Owner can use the nvork or portiorn
thereof for its intended use, Reins that affect operational integrity and
Rinction of the work must be capable of continuous use.
tentative list of iterins to be completed or correc.led is pending, `finis list rnnary snot lne ex1laustive, anrncl
the Failure: to include an iteral on it clues not alter the responsibility of the Contractors to corinlnlete all
the work in aecordancac:Willi the Contract Documents.
,
Thomas A. "1 rarrna 1' Tly°� ..._
r.:
King Engineering Assoeiates, line. Arrthorizecl Repr°esentaafive � Dart€, ..
The Contractor accepts the. ,,'above Certificate of Substantial Completion and argrces to complete and
correct the items on the tentative list within the time inclicantecl,
srn
'By:
F
Wharto - rrlit11, 1110, tN tthor� Representative Dante
The Owner accepts the: specified area of (lie Project as Substantially Complete and will arssulne, frill
possession of the specified area of(lie Project ora_December 18, 20,13, The responsibility for wilities,
SeCLU-iter, and insurance uncia the Contract Documents shall be ars set forth in the Contract ntrarct Documents,
1`arra l Kiyett By$ '- ' A w.i k s d B rf 5
_... ._
City ol'C°leaar nater Autfiorized 1~epeseillaativc ;:Pante
�
'
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
Marshall Street WRF
Clarifier Rehabilitation
(PROJECT No. 11-0053-UT)
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS
��
Prepared for
� ����
�
BID DOCUMENTS
MAY 2012
�\
t
WHART-1 OP ID: DS
A�„°R°� CERTIFICATE OF L�ABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDDIYYYY)
08/01/12
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS
CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES
BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.
IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to
the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate dces not confer rights to the
certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
PRODUCER 4O%-GBO�HZ82 NAMEACT
Brown & Brown of Florida, Inc. 407-660-2012 ac "N EXt : ac No :
2600 Lake Lucien Dr., Ste. 330
Maitland, FL 32757-7234 E-MAIL
ADDRESS:
Tom D'Avanm_ CPA. CPCU __ _ __ _..._..
INSURED Wharton-Smith, Inc.
P.O. Box 471028
Lake Monroe, FL 32747
INSURER(S) AFFORDING
INSURER A: Amerisure Insurence Company
INSURER 8: American Guarantee Llab Ins Co
INSURER C; Catlin Specialty Insurance Co.
INSURER D :
INSURER E :
19488
15989
COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR 7ypE OF INSURANCE ADDL UBR pOLICY NUMBER MM DIYYYY MM/ DIYYYY LIMITS
LTR I
GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ ��OOO�OOO
A X COMMERCIAI GENERAL LIABILITY X X GL 2036108 0707 04107112 04/01/13 PREMISES Ea occurrence $ 300,���
CLAIMS-MADE � OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ � �,��Q
�( XCU Not Excluded PRODUCTSICOMPLETED OPS PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ i3OOO,OOO
X Broad Form PD GENERAL AGGREGATE $ Z,OOO,OOO
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000
POLICY X JE° �oc Emp Ben. $ 1,000,000
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY EO aBIN�eD SINGLE LIMIT $ 'I ,OOO,OOO
A X ANY AU70 X CA 2036107 0601 04/01I12 04101113 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $
ALLOWNED SCHEDULED BODILYINJURY(Peraccident) $
AUTOS AUTOS
X HIREDAUTOS X NON-0WNED Pe�a cident AMAGE $
AUTOS
Comp/Coll $ $1,000 De
)( UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ ZO,OOO�OOO
B EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE UC5966548-04 OM01/12 04/01/13 AGGREGATE $ 20����,���
DED RETENTION $ EXC25S Of $ GLIALIWC
WORKERS COMPENSATION X WC STATU- OTH-
AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TORY LIMITS ER
A ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y/ N X C 2036109 0601 04/01112 04101/13 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ ��OOO�OOO
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? � N / A
(Mandatory In NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ �,�0�,0�0
If yes, describe under
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ i3OOO,
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required)
RE: MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11-0053-UT
City of Clearvvater is named as an Additional Insured with regards to General
Liability as required by written contract. Waiver of Subrogation is provided
with re�ards to General Liability, Auto Liability and Workers Compensation
as required by written contract.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
City of Clearwater
100 South Myrtle Ave #210
Clearwater„ FL 33756
ACORD 25 (2010/OS)
CLEARW2
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE
THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
�� (I� l�
O 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD
x
��
, 1
2
' 3
4
5
, 6
7
8
, 9
10
11
' 12
13
14
� 15
16
17
, 18
19
20
' 21
22
23
' 24
25
26
� 27
28
29
' 30
31
32
' 33
34
35
� 36
37
38
' 39
40
41
� 42
43
44
� 45
46
47
� 48
�
DATE:
� A
ADDENDUM NO. 2
for
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Project Number 11-0053-UT
June 22, 2012
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 2 shall be attached to and made
part of the above-named Bid Documents, dated May 2012.
The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items
shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in
the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the
additions and revisions listed herein.
IN THE DRAWINGS
1. SHEET MS-E2.0
ADD the attached drawing SKE-1 to SHT. MS-E2.0.
GENERAL CLARIFICATIONS
l. Clarifier No. 2 rotating equipment was confirmed to be operational on June 22, 2012. No
inference is made with respect to the operational status of Clarifier No. 2 beyond that
date.
2. The status of the splitter box gate for No. 2 Clarifier is closed. It is not known if this gate
can be opened using the attached handwheel.
3. The status of the splitter box gates for Clarifier numbers l, 3, and 4 is open. It is not
known if these gates can be closed using the attached handwheels.
END OF ADDENDUM #2
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
Bv: /s/William B. Horne, II
City Manager
Page 1 of 1
♦
' �
t
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
'
,
'
�
�
'
,
'
,
'
/
<
� �x
/ / i
/ / �
/// I�
' / /
�� 4
/ LI •
/ 6 a
N
�2
11 �
N
T
13
�
IN
CLARIFIER �3
, �
♦ �
� ♦ ♦
♦; `� ` 4
� ♦
a �
u � � �
�
8 6 �� ♦`♦
� �
♦` � �
� N�
� `�`
�
yyp /(�N
�3 �
�
� 14
N
LS �T-OUT
LS ALARM
N
� 15
12
11
�
�
ELECTRICAL PLAN - CLARI�IE�S 1, 2, 3& 4
ADDENDUN /2
� O6/21/12
DR.
RB/L�
06/22/12
14 NEW 2 N0. 14 - 3/4"C. TO CLARIFIER MOTOR STARTER
� (FROM NORMALLY CLOSED LIMIT SWITCH) AND INTERLOCK
WITH MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT TO CUT-OFF CONTROL POWER
WHEN LIMIT SWITCH IS IN "OPENED" POSITION. (TYPICAL FOR
ALL CLARIFIERS).
15 NEW 2 N0. 14 - 3/4"C. TO DEVICENET PANEL (FROM
NORMALLY OPENED LIMIT SWITCH) TO SIGNAL "ALARM
CONDITION" WHEN LIMIT SWITCH IS 1N "CLOSED" POSITION.
(TYPICAL FOR ALL CLARIFIERS).
CLEARWATER CLARIFIER
REHABILTTATION
MARSHALL STREET WRF
PREVIOUSLY ISSUED DRAIMNG 5438-MS-E2.0
REFER TO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DATED
10/31/11 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
4921 Memorial Highway SHEET P{0.
���One Memorial Cwer, Sui1e 3D0
Temp; Flotida 33634
Phone 813 880.8861 S K E— �
Fau 813 880-8682
aKUr�o�ooca'�nie. wavav.kingengioeeringcom
Euginxring Lic�ee #2670
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
'
1
2
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
DATE
ADDENDUM NO. 1
for
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Project Number 11-0053-UT
June 21, 2012
SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1
TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 1 shall be attached to and made
part of the above-named Bid Documents, dated May 2012.
The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items
shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in
the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the
additions and revisions listed herein.
IN THE SPECIFICATIONS
L SECTION IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHANGE the second bulleted item on page 4 of 132 to read as follows:
"Remove four existing sludge blanket level detector assemblies from the existing clarifier
walkway bridges and turn over to the City. Install new sludge blanket level detector
assemblies, as well as new power and control wiring and conduit, on the new walkway
bridges and integrate the new level detection equipment and instrumentation into the
existing plant SCADA system."
2. SECTION IVA - TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADD "SECTION 02271 FABRIC-FORMED CONCRETE BAGS"
DELETE the words "(Not in this Contract)" after the words "13615 PROCESS
INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT"
3. SECTION IVA — SPECIFICATION SECTION 01014
CHANGE Line 22 on Page 01014-2 to read as follows:
"operators; installing new sludge blanket level detectors; modifying the existing clarifier
influent splitter box and"
Page 1 of 4
,
'
�
�
'
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
�
'
�
1
2
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
CI3ANGE Lines 16, 17 18 and 19 on Page 01014-3 to read as follows:
"the splitter box for one (1) brief (10-15 minute) period. The Contractor shall assist the
City by furnishing and operating a 1500 gpm temporary pumping and piping system to
dewater the splitter box, discharging half this water to each of two RAS telescoping valve
pits. This work must be performed at low flow periods during the night."
4. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 01152 MEASUREMENT AND
PAYMENT
CHANGE Line 46 and 47 on Page 01152-5 to read as follows:
"removal of the existing sludge blanket level detector assemblies, conduit and wiring;
furnishing and installing new sludge blanket level detector probes, controllers, conduit
and wiring; relocation of existing conduit, wiring and piping as required to construct the
new work; installing new clarifier"
5. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 02271 FABRIC-FORMED
CONCRETE BAGS
ADD the attached new specification SECTION 02271 FABRIGFORMED CONCRETE
BAGS.
6. SECTION IVA — SPECIFICATION SECTION 09900 PAINTING
CHANGE lines 44 and 45 on Page 09900-23 to read as follows:
"Paint the following equipment, piping, and structures as noted:
A. New, 30-inch piping, valves, and valve operating mechanisms above elevation
7.0. Color to match the color of the existing splitter box exterior wa11s.
B. New and existing splitter box exterior walls and steps above elevation 7.0.
Color to match the color of the existing splitter box exterior walls.
C. Existing splitter box walkway outside vertical edge. Color to match the color
of the existing splitter box exterior walls.
D. New Telescoping Valve operating mechanisms, pedestal supports, and
structural supports. Color to match the color of the existing components."
7. SECTION IVA - SPECIFICATION SECTION 12255 CLARIFIER
REHABILITATION
CHANGE Lines 19 and 20 on Page 11225-4 to read as follows:
"Contrary to the details shown on Sheet MS-85 and MS-86, none of the clarifiers are
equipped with drains or dewatering pipes and the Contractor shall be responsible for the
removal of water and sludge from the clarifier as required in performing the work. These
volumes shall be discharged to one of the RAS telescoping valve pits."
8. SECTION IVA - SECTION 13615 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND
EQUIPMENT
ADD the attached new specification SECTION 13615 PROCESS
INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT.
Page 2 of 4
�
'
��
�J
�
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
�
'
,
'
'
,
1
2
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
IN THE DRAWINGS
1. SHEET MS-58 SPLITTER BOX BELOW GRADE PLAN
DELETE the note on the inside of the splitter box that reads:
"GROUT FILL FROM BOTTOM TO EL. = 4.00"
ADD the following general note to this drawing:
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR RELOCATING ALL
EXISTING CONDUIT, WIRING AND PIPING THAT MAY BE IN CONFLICT WITH
PERFORMING ANY OF THE WORK."
2. SHEET MS-59 SPLITTER BOX SECTIONS
REPLACE SECTION A with the attached SECTION A.
3. SHEETS MS-57, MS-58 AND S-2
CHANGE the direction of the North Arrows by rotating approximately 45 degrees
counter-clockwise.
4. SHEET MS-86 CLARIFIER SECTION AND DETAILS
CHANGE the clarifier numbering to be as shown on Sheet MS-l.
5. SHEET S-2 EXISTING GATE PLAN, SECTION AND DETAILS
DELETE the note in Section 1 that reads:
"1500 PSI GROUT....NOTE ON S-3"
6. SHEET S-3 SPLITTER BOX PIPE PENETRATION PLAN, SECTION AND
DETAILS
ADD the following notes:
"l. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A PROPOSED SEQUENCE OF
CONSTRUCTION TO THE ENGINEER FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL
FOR ALL STRUCTURAL WORK RELATED TO THE SPLITTER BOX.
2. PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH THE NEW WALL MAY BE
CONSTRUCTED USING A 6-INCH BLOCKOUT AROUND THE
PERIMETER OF THE PIPE TO BE CAST AFTER THE PIPE IS INSTALLED.
3. ALL DRILL AND EPDXY DOWELS MUST HAVE A 4-INCH EDGE
DISTANCE."
DELETE the note in Section 1 that reads:
"2) GROUT FILL SHALL BE 1500 PSI AND 85 PCF MAXIMUM"
Page 3 of 4
,
'
�J
,
'
'
,
�J
'
'
'
,
'
t
'
'
'
,
'
'
1
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
CHANGE the Scale in Section 1 Detail A to "No Scale"
7. SHEET MS-E2.0 CLARIFIER 1, 2, 3& 4 ELECTRICAL PLAN
CHANGE the 6�' line of Drawing Note 5 to read as follows:
"(GASKETED), NEMA 4X RAINTIGHT AND"
ADD the following to the end of Drawing Note 8:
"The PLC/Termination cabinet is the panel mazked "Device Net Panel" and is located on
the north side of the splitter box influent channel, approximately 10-15 feet west of the
splitter box."
GENERAL CLARIFICATIONS
1. This project most closely aligns with the Florida DEP project types and goals, which are
9.00°Io MBE and 3.00% WBE. These percentages are goals. The Bidder must
demonstrate and document thorough utilization of the Good Faith Efforts as listed in the
EPA supplementals that they attempted to meet the goals for the project. If a Bidder
cannot clearly document their attempts to fuliill the Good Faith Efforts as discussed in
the pre-bid meeting, then it is possible for their bid to be rejected as non-responsive.
2. The new clariiier mechanisms are to be installed in the existing tanks. As such, the
Contractor shall be responsible for determining the elevations and dimensions of each
tank, which may not all be the same. The Contractor shall be responsible for fabricating
the equipment to properly fit in the existing tanks, regardless of whether the tanks all
have the same dimensions and elevations, including truss arm angles, perimeter wall and
center column support elevations, and seal plate mounting dimensions and elevations.
Grouting of the clarifier tank bottoms is not required.
3. The Work on the Return Activated Sludge telescoping valves must be performed while
the associated clariiier is out of service. It will be necessary to temporarily plug the
existing Return Activated Sludge effluent pipe while this work is being performed.
4. The Contractor sha11 be responsible to re-label the RAS pump starter panels (4) to reflect
the correct horsepower and pump ID number.
5. Rigid aluminum conduit is required for all above grade locations.
END OF ADDENDUM #1
THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
Bv: /s/William B. Horne, II
City Manager
Page 4 of 4
,
' 1
2
3
' 4
5
6
, �
8
' 9
10
11
' 12
13
14
' 15
16
17
' 18
19
20
� 21
22
23
' 24
25
26
' 27
28
29
' 30
31
32
' 33
34
35
' 36
37
38
, 39
40
41
' 42
43
'
,
,
SECTION 02271
FABRIC-FORMED CONCRETE BAGS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a single fabric-formed concrete-filled
bag where shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
C. Fabric bag shall be positioned where shown empty, and shall be filled with
grout through an attached fill pipe from above the liquid level until the required
final elevations are achieved. The grout shall be a mixture of Portland cement,
fine aggregate, and water so proportioned and mixed to provide a pumpable
slurry.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The fabric bag supplier shall show a minimum of 5 years experience in
manufacturing fabric bags for similar applications. The Contractor shall save
the Owner harmless from liability of any kind arising from the use of any
patented or unpatented invention in the performance of this work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and shall include.
1. Manufacturer's data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Certified test reports.
PART 2 — MATERIAL
A. The fabric bag shall be specially woven uncoated 100% nylon fabric of which
at least 50% by weight shall be textured multifilament nylon. Zipper teeth shall
be brass on nylon or mildew-proof tape.
B. Fiber and fabric materials shall meet the minimum requirements, as listed and
reported by an independent testing agency, shown below:
THE REST OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FABRIC-FORMED CONCRETE BAGS
02271-1
ADD. NO. 1
06/21 /12
2
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
PROPERTY TEST METHOD UNIT VALUE
PHYSICAL
Composition
NYLON
�
t
'
Weight ASTM D-3776 oz/yd 12 '
Thickness ASTM D-1777 in 0.025
MECHANICAL
Tensile
Strength
Tensile
Elongation
Tongue
Tear
ASTM D-5034
ASTM D-5034
ASTM D-2261
Ibs
%
Ibs
WARP
FILL
WARP
FILL
WARP
FILL
850
850
35
35
100
100
C. Fabric Bag Assembly: The 100% nylon fabric shall be sewn into
predetermined custom sized bag with the dimensions as shown on the
Drawings or required to meet the intended purpose with a tolerance of plus or
minus 3 inches. Seams shall be folded and double-needle stitched.
D. Each bag shall be furnished with a minimum of two (2) factory-installed inlets
of a size and where located by the Contractor. One inlet shall be used as a fill
port and the other inlet shall be used as both a vent and as a means of
determining when the bag is full. Both inlets shall be fitted with connections
for hoses, of approved size and construction, extending above the water line
to be used to fill/vent the bag.
E. Fine Aggregate Concrete (Grout)
Fine aggregate concrete (grout) shall consist of a mixture of portland cement,
fine aggregate and water so proportioned and mixed as to provide a readily
flowable grout. Admixtures and/or a pozzolan may be used with the approval
of the Engineer. Use of super plasticizers and/ or silica fume will not be
allowed. The hardened fine aggregate concrete shall exhibit a compressive
strength of 3,000 psi (17 MPa) at 28 days when specimens are made and
tested according to the provisions of ASTM C-31 and C-39. The average
compressive strength of fabric cast test cylinders, as described in Paragraph C
above, shall be at least 20% higher at 7 days than that of companion test
cylinders made in accordance with ASTM C-31, and not less than 3,000 psi
(21 MPa) at 28 days.
F. The concrete fabric bag shall be the Fabriform system manufactured by
Construction Techniques, Inc of Cleveland, Ohio and shall be of the material
type used for Ballistic Pile Jackets, or Engineer-approved equal.
FABRIC-FORMED CONCRETE BAGS ADD. NO. 1
02271-2 06/21 /12
C�
i
'
'
'
'
L
�
�
t
'
'
'
'
'
�
L
'
�
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
PART 3 — EXECUTION
I�
:
C
Fabric Storage
The fabric bag shall be inspected and stored in a clean, dry area not subject to
mechanical damage or exposure to moisture or direct sunlight. Fabric allowed
to become wet and then dried before installation will not be accepted.
Site Preparation
The surface to be protected shall be constructed to the line and dimensions as
shown on the contract drawings. The area shall be free of all obstruction and
sharp objects.
Concrete Bag Placement and Injection
The fabric bag shall be positioned over the gravel in the Splitter Box. The
Contractor must make the appropriate allowance for contraction of the fabric
bag in each direction which will occur as a result of grout injection. The bag
shall be positioned and filled in such a way to abut the adjacent walls tightly.
D. Fine aggregate concrete (grout) shall be introduced through suitably pipes or
hoses extending down to the bottom of the jacket. Mortar shall not be allowed
to fall freely through air or water and shall be injected in such a manner to
assure uniform sound and undiluted grout throughout the plan and section of
the bag. The injection pipe shall be held tightly at the point of injection. The
sequence of grout injection shall be such as to insure complete filling of the
concrete bag to the thickness required while minimizing excess grout loss.
E. Following installation of grout, fully remove the inlet/vent hoses from the bag.
END OF SECTION
FABRIC-FORMED CONCRETE BAGS
02271-3
ADD. NO. 1
06/21 /12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FABRIC-FORMED CONCRETE BAGS
02271-4
ADD. NO. 1
06/21 /12
'
'
'
'
'
,
r
,
�
'
'
'
'
i
�
'
,
'
'
SECTION 13615
2
3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all instrumentation and controls
hereinafter specified to perform the intended function and achieve a fully
integrated and operational system. The equipment and services defined
herein shall be furnished by a single instrumentation system integrator
who shall coordinate the instrument and control system for proper
operation with related equipment and materials provided by other
suppliers of the Owner.
B. Work shall include all labor, materials, plant facilities and equipment,
performance of all work necessary to complete the manufacture, to make
factory tests, to prepare and load for shipment, to deliver to the site, to
provide programming, calibration, installation supervision, training system
start-up, services and incidentals required to completely furnish and install
an instrumentation and control systems, including all work necessary
during the Warranty Period, as specified herein, in other specification
sections as listed below under related work, and as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
C. The equipment and services to be provided include:
1. All general instrumentation requirements as specified herein.
2. All field and analytical equipment and services as specified herein.
3. All control panels and control panel mounted equipment and
services as specified herein and in Division 16
4. All coordination and interfacing with the control system equipment
as required for a fully functioning system.
5. All coordination and interfacing with each piece of equipment
specified under Division 11 (equipment), Division 15 (mechanical),
and Division 16 (Electrical), where applicable.
D. Auxiliary and accessory devises necessary for system operation or
performance, such as transducers or relays to interface with existing
equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other Sections
of these Specifications, shall be furnished, coordinated and interfaced by
the instrumentation system integrator whether or not they are shown on
the drawings or specified herein.
E. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper
operating condition in full conformity with detail Drawings and
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-1 06/21 /12
1
2
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Specifications, engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
'
'
'
A. The submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and shall '
include.
1. Manufacturer's data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Certificates of compliance.
4. Certified test reports.
5. Operation and maintenance manual.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instrumentation and control equipment furnished shall be manufactured
by a firm regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture
of similar equipment. Equipment furnished shall be new and of current
design.
B. Equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and
access to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal
field adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily
accessible upon removal of a panel or cover.
C. Materials and Installation shall comply with the requirements of the
referenced electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards
referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the
materials and equipment supplied and installed. Equipment of the same
type shall be a product of the same manufacturer. Capacities of
equipment shall not be less than that indicated on the drawings or
specified.
D. All exposed pneumatic tubing shall be routed through a device designed
to protect the tubing from crushing through incidental contact. The
pneumatic tubing shall be attached to the protective track as required by
manufacturer's recommendations and shall be protected from crimping by
those attachment methods. The protective track devices shall be
stainless steel and shall be "Tube-Track" or approved equal.
E
F
All exterior mounted instruments shall be furnished with appropriately
sized stainless steel rain shields.
Model numbers and names for equipment listed herein are for the
purpose of establishing a standard of quality or matching existing
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-2 06/21 /12
'
,
'
'
L
,
'
'
,
'
��
L
'
��
lJ
'
,
'
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
instrumentation. Like equipment of a different manufacturer must be pre-
approved by the Engineer.
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
:
C
Shipping Precautions
1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval, all
equipment, cabinets and the panel insert shall be packed in
protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene
envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from
damage, dust and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside
the polyethylene coverings. Boxed weights shall be shown on
shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting,
storing and handling at job site.
2. Special instructions for proper field handling, storage and
installation required by manufacturer for proper protection shall be
securely attached to each piece of equipment prior to packaging
and shipment.
3. None of the central control and monitoring equipment shall be
shipped to the site until the room(s) is/are environmentally suitable.
Identification
1. Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number
and function in the system. Identification shall be prominently
displayed on the outside of the package.
2. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag
firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the
instrument tag number, as given in the tabulation, shall be provided
on each piece of equipment supplied.
Storage
1. Equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Equipment shall be
stored in dry permanent shelters including in-line equipment, and
shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any
apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by
the contractor at his own expense. If any apparatus has been
subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out
and put through such tests as directed by the engineer. This shall
be at the cost and expense of the contractor, or the apparatus shall
be replaced by the contractor at his own expense.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-3 06/21 /12
1
2
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL
A. Type
1. All instrumentation supplied shall be of the manufacturer's latest
design and shall produce or be activated by signals, which are
established standards for the water and wastewater industries.
,
��
,
'
�
2. All electronic instrumentation shall be of the solid-state type and ,
shall utilize linear transmission signals of 4 to 20 mA DC.
3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as
outlined, shall have the output immediately raised and/ or
converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission.
No zero based signals will be allowed.
4. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor
stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the
drawings or as required.
5. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet class, group
and division classification as shown on the electrical drawings, or
comply with the local or national electrical code, whichever
requirement is most stringent.
6. All indicators and recorder readouts shall be linear in process units.
7. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or
conduit mounted indicators in process units, accurate to two
percent.
8. Electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design,
utilizing printed circuitry and suitably coated to prevent
contamination by dust, moisture, and fungus. Solid-state
components shall be conservatively rated for their purpose, to
assure optimum long term performance and dependability over
ambient atmosphere fluctuations and 0 to 100 percent relative
humidity. The field mounted equipment and system components
shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly
corrosive service conditions.
9. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished hereunder shall be
heavy-duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The
system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-4 06/21 /12
,
'
,
'
u
,
r
,
'
'
'
L_J
�
'
'
,
C
'
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
possible, and shall consist of equipment models, which are
currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular
construction and shall be capable of field expansion.
B. Electrical
1. All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 hertz
alternating current power source at a normal 120 volts, plus or
minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. All regulators
and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be
provided between power supply and interconnected instrument
loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant
voltage transformers shall be furnished and installed.
2. All analog transmitter and
milliamps into a minimum
specifically noted otherwise.
controller outputs shall be 4 to 20
load range of 0-750 ohms, unless
3. All switches shall have double-pole, double-throw contacts rated at
a minimum of 600 volts-amperes (VA), unless specifically noted
otherwise.
4. Materials and equipment used shall be U.L. approved wherever
such approved equipment and materials are available.
5. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the
event of a power interruption, the equipment specified hereunder
shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when
power is restored.
2.02 LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION
A. General - in addition to manufacturer's standard, internal protection,
supplementary lightning/surge protection shall be provided to protect all
systems from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines.
The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not
interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument
surge withstand level, and shall be maintenance-free and self-restoring.
Instruments shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, and properly
grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a
good earth ground and, where practical, each ground wire shall be run
individually and insulated from each other. These protectors and
specified instrumentation/transmitters shall be mounted in a separate
NEMA 3R stainless steel vented enclosure with three (3) point latch. The
units shall be as manufactured by Telecommunications Industries inc.,
Joslyn, Edco or equal.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-5 06/21 /12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
B. Power supply - additional protection of all alternating current (ac)
instrument power supply lines shall be provided. Cabinet(s)/panel(s) and
groups of field instruments, as approved by the Engineer, shall be
protected by isolation transformers and surge suppressors. Individual
field instruments shall be protected by individual gas tube surge
suppressors or Edco Slac Series Hybrid AC suppressor with noise filter, or
approved equal. The hybrid ac suppressor shall be three stage type with
a response time of less than 5 nanoseconds, a maximum surge current of
10k amps, an input voltage of 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and be cap-able of
withstanding a minimum of 50 occurrences at 500 amps each.
C. Signal line - protection of all field analog, discrete, digital and telemetered
signal lines shall be provided. Protection devices shall be installed at the
both ends as close to the instrument being protected as possible. Where
signal lines enter control rooms through an interface cabinet, the
protection devices shall be mounted in the interface cabinet. Protection
shall be with the combined use of gas-tube surge arresters and Zener
diode protectors or Edco ss65 series multi-stage hybrid suppressor or
approved equal. The multi-stage hybrid suppressor shall be capable of
protecting a signal pair plus the cable shield with a DC clamping level of
36V +/-10% (I-g) and 72V +/-10% (I-I), a maximum let thru voltage of 44V
@ 400A (I-g) and 90v @ 400A (I-I) and capable of withstanding a
minimum of 400 occurrences at 500 amps each.
2.03 SLUDGE BLANKET LEVEL SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install one sludge blanket level indicator and transmitter
assembly for each of the existing clarifiers. The sludge blanket level
detection assembly shall consist of a detector and an interface controller.
30 B
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Sludge Blanket Level Detector
1. The sludge blanket level detector shall utilize ultrasonic
measurement principals and meet the following requirements:
a. Range: 0.2 to 12 m(0.6 to 40 ft.)
b. Resolution: 0.03 m(0.09 ft.)
c. Accuracy: ±0.1 m (±0.33 ft.)
d. Operating Temperature: 2 to 50°C (35 to 122°F)
e. Power Requirement: 12 V, 2.4 W
f. Measurement Interval: 10 to 600 seconds (adjustable)
g. Probe Mounting: Pivot mount assembly
h. Calibration: Factory calibrated
i. Probe Construction:
1) Wiper: Silicon
2) Body: Stainless steel
3) Face: Polyoxymethylene
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
ADD. NO. 1
13615-6 06/21 /12
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
'
'
�
�
�
�
'
�
'
'
�
t
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C.
j. Certifications:
1) CE certified to EN 61326-1:1998 /A1/A2/A3 and EN
61010-1:2001.
2. The sludge blanket detector shall be Sonatax by Hach, or approved
equal.
Interface Controller
1. The controller shall be a microprocessor-based instrument.
Connections between the sensor and the controller shall be "plug
and play." The controller shall have the option for
RS232/MODBUS or RS485/MODBUS serial inpuUoutput capability
for two-way communication to a computer and a have wireless
downloading capability through an IR Port located on the interface
unit to download and print real-time data, calibration history, and
current set points in a CSV format.
2. The Interface unit shall allow operators to control sensor and
interface functions with menu-driven software. The interface unit
shall have a built-in data logger with the capacity to store data on
15-minute intervals for up to 6 months with two sensors per
controller. The interface unit shall include one analog 4-20mA
input, two standard and four optional analog 4-20mA outputs, and
3 unpowered SPDT form 'C' alarm contacts. The interface unit
shall include two independent PID control functions.
3. The interface unit shall be housed in a NEMA-4X/IP66 metal
enclosure with corrosion resistant finish and have a 160 x 240 pixel
display. The controller shall be mounted horizontal or vertical on
surface, panel, or pipe as shown on the drawings.
4. The AC power supply shall be housed in the interface unit and
automatically accept input in the range of 100 to 230 VAC, 50/60
Hz. All system components shall be certified by ETL to UL
61010A-1, CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1.
�
�
The controller shall be warranted for two full years against defects
in material and workmanship.
The controller shall be Hach Company Model sc200 Controller or
pre-approved equal.
2.04 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER
A. Primary Flow Head
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615-7
. �� ���
06/21 /12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. Electromagnetic flowtube shall be AFTCO UniMag, Krohne
Enviromag, Endress Hauser PROline Promag 10W or Engineer
approved equaL
2. Each meter will have an epoxy-coated steel metering tube welded
at all joints and a non-conductive liner, suitable for the liquid being
metered.
3. Each connection will be steel flanged ANSI Class 150/300, for
meter sizes up to 24" and AWWA Class B, D or F for meters larger
than 24".
4. There will be no electronic components on the primary flow head.
An integral or remote converter will supply coil drive power. Output
signal from the primary will be fed through cable supplied with the
meter to the signal converter.
5
�
7
Electrode material will be compatible with the process fluid.
Meter will have field replaceable electrodes with access ports.
When installed in lined or non-metallic piping, the meter will be
provided with corrosion-resistant grounding rings or electrodes.
8. Meter calibration will be performed by a volumetric comparison
method. A calibration certificate will accompany each meter. The
calibration facility will be certified to 0.5% accuracy. The calibration
facility must be traceable to national standards.
9. The instrument will be manufactured in an ISO 9001 approved
facility. �
B. Converter
1. The Magnetic Flowmeter Converter shall be integrally mounted. It
will provide precisely controlled and regulated primary field
excitation. It shall convert the primary flowmeter signal into a 4-20
mA DC and pulse output directly proportional to the flow rate.
2. The full scale measuring range shall be a direct digital input in
engineering units and fully adjustable over a range from 1.0 to 40
ft/sec.
3. Each converter shall contain internal self-diagnostics, automatic
data integrity checking, and be completely interchangeable with
other converters of the same type without need for recalibration.
No auxiliary test meter or primary simulator shall be required for
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-8 06/21 /12
r
,
C�
,
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
�l
�
�
,
�
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
commissioning, zeroing, or interchanging of flow meter/converter.
4. Each converter shall contain the following features as standard
equipment:
• Simultaneous analog output (500-ohm load) and a scaled pulse
output.
• Status output.
• Low flow cutoff.
• Forward / reverse flow measurement capabilities.
• Integral rate of flow indicator and 7-digit resettable LCD
totalizer.
• Capability of testing analog and frequency outputs.
• Engineering units for display and programming; flow and total
shall be user programmable in any engineering unit of ineasure.
5. All adjustments and changes of programming shall be by direct
digital input.
6. For ease of repair / replacement all converter configuration and
totalizer data shall be stored on a removable EPROM. When
removed and placed into a replacement / spare converter, no
additional programming shall be required.
7. For ease of wiring, power and output wiring terminals shall be a
plug in type, removable from the instrument without disconnecting
wiring.
�
�'7
Repeatability shall be 0.10% of rate.
Accuracy of the system (Primary Flow Head and Converter) shall
be:
• Meter sizes 3/8" — 40" +/- 0.3% of actual flow rate (for velocities
> 1 m/sec)
� Meter sizes 1/10" — 1/4" +/- 0.5% of actual flow rate (for
velocities >1 m/sec)
10. The enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X. The converter shall
incorporate EMI/RFI protection / suppression as well as overload
protection for output circuits and meet the requirements of the EU-
EMC Directives and bear the CE Approval symbol.
11. The instrument shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 approved
facility.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-9 06/21 /12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2.05 LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH
A. Type SO ball float switch shall be installed in the following locations and
as shown on the drawings:
B. Functional/performance:
1. Differential - less than one-inch.
2. Switch rating - 4.5 amps at 115V AC, 3.0 amps at 230V AC
C. Physical:
1. Float - molded high density polyethylene.
2. Switch - totally encapsulated mercury switch.
3. Cable - heavy duty, synthetic rubber jacketed, integral to float.
D. Options/accessories required:
1. Provide 316 stainless steel adjustable clamp tubes, pipe brackets,
and u-bolts;
2. The floats shall be mounted on a vertical one-inch stainless steel
pipe with all stainless steel hardware;
3. The lead wire shall be a waterproof cable of sufficient length so that
no splice is required prior to the junction box; and,
4. Provide a castle-aluminum NEMA 4X junction box with terminals for
all floats and tapped as required for conduit connections.
;�4 c. iwanuracturers:
35
36 1. Consolidated Electric Co., Model LS.
37
38 2. Flygt ENH-10
39
40 3. Roto-float
41
42 4. Engineer approved equal
43
44 2.06 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
45
46 A. Ultrasonic level transmitter systems shall be furnished for fluid level
47 measurement. The ultrasonic level transmitter system shall include an
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-10 06/21 /12
'
�
�
r
'
�
'
'
'
�
'
r
'
�J
�
i
'
r
2
3
5
6
$
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
ultrasonic transducer and transmitter connected by a cable. The
ultrasonic level transducer shall be designed to operate on the principle of
sound echoing to provide level measurement without contact of fluid. The
transducer shall provide electronic signal output to the transmitter
proportional to the fluid level. The transmitter shall be furnished with all
equipment as necessary to meet the requirements as set forth herein shall
be included and connected so as to provide a complete and operational
system.
B. The Contractor shall furnish cable with sufficient length for connection of
the transducer and the transmitter. Contractor shall size ultrasonic
transducer to measure entire depth of wetwell structure.
C. The transmitter shall operate on 120 volts, 60Hz, and shall have a NEMA
4X polycarbonate enclosure. The transmitter output shall be 4-20 mA DC.
Calibration parameters shall be permanently stored even during power
interruptions. Contractor shall be responsible for calibration.
D. The ultrasonic level transducers shall be Siemens Echomax XPS and
transmitters shall be Siemens HydroRanger 200 or Engineer approved
equal.
E. Ultrasonic level indicators shall be installed in the locations as shown on
the drawings using the manufacturers recommended mounting
recommendations.
2.07 TRANSIENT PROTECTION/SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
A. Surge and transient protection devices shall be two-stage units
incorporating gas tube and electronic clamping. Either polarity in surges
shall be equally protected. The protection devices shall provide long life,
reliability and easy mounting. Surge protection devices for 4-20 mA loops
shall add no more than 50 ohms to the circuit and provide impulse
clamping levels of 100V maximum for line-to-line and 50V maximum for
line-to-ground. Surge protection shall be used on all 4-20 mA transmitters
(e.g. LIT, PIT, FIT). Surge protection devices for instrument loops of 4-20
mA shall be Model 1669-02 as manufactured by Joslyn Electronic
Systems Corporation or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Field mounted elements shall be installed, calibrated, and started-up in
strict compliance with the manufacturer's requirements and
recommendations. Conflicts between the manufacturer's requirements
and recommendations and these Specifications or the Drawings shall be
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-11 06/21 /12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
presented to the Engineer for resolution before any affected work is
started. Installed equipment shall be certified as appropriate for the
application and process by the Contractor.
B. Connections of instruments to process piping shall include, as close as
practical to the point of connection, a tight closing block valve suitable for
the maximum process pressure and temperature and for the material
involved. If connections are of threaded or welded pipe, there shall be a
union or flanged connection located to facilitate disassembly of the
connection and removal of the instrument without interrupting process
operation.
C. All field-mounted instruments shall be protected and isolated from
vibration, temperature extremes, radiant heat, rain, sleet or falling water,
and similar adverse conditions.
D. Impulse lines of pressure instruments shall be as short as practical and
shall be installed with a minimum slope of I-inch per foot (1:12) downward
toward the instrument in liquid system and upward toward the instrument
in gaseous systems. If this preferred direction of slope cannot be
maintained, the contractor shall submit for approval an installation
configuration utilizing traps, drains, and/or vents at high and low points,
which will ensure freedom from mixed phase offset effects and provide
ease of purging or draining. Pressure lines of pressure instruments shall
be insulated.
E. Field mounted elements shall be marked with data required for calibration
such as location of adjustments, span, offset, zero suppression, and test
voltages. If such data are not provided in permanent markings or on the
manufacturer's nameplate, a durable tag or label shall be affixed in a
protected location that will become readily visible in the normal course of
servicing the instrument.
F. Provide DC power supplies for devices as required. Mount on a stanchion �
in proximity of device in a NEMX 4X box. Provide conduit and wire to
device.
3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND CALIBRATION
A. Factory Tests and Calibration. All field-mounted elements shall be
factory-tested by the manufacturer to assure satisfactory pertormance
prior to shipment to the job site. Whenever possible, this shall include
calibration to the actual range and conditions of use. Calibration shall be
traceable to the National Bureau of Standards with an uncertainty not
more than 1/2 of the specified or claimed accuracy of the instruments.
'
r
�
B. Field Tests and Calibration. Field mounted elements which were not '
calibrated to final working values of range, span, and zero suppression at
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-12 06/21 /12
1
r
'
'
�
r
'
�
�
�
'
r
�
�
�
�
r
�
�
�
r
2
3
5
6
�
the factory shall be so calibrated prior to or at the time of installation. This
cafibration shall meet the same requirements for accuracy and be
traceable, as required for factory testing above. The Engineer shall be
given 48 hours notice and the opportunity to witness this calibration.
END OF SECTION
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-13 06/21 /12
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT ADD. NO. 1
13615-14 06/21 /12
� -
'
'
�
1
�
' �
, I
i
i
i
' '
i
L
i
C
' C
.
�
c
' C
'c
t
�
' ,
i
' C
`u
L
C
<
' C
e
u
C
C
a
`a
1 a
U
.�G
u
a
' �
C
c
4
Z
a
c
'c
1 �
n
'c
C
t �
u
�
u
t C
REMOVE EXISTNG GATE PEDESTAL
AND ALL ASSOCIATED COHPONENTS
AND HARDWARE ABOVE EL. 7.75
(TYP. 4)
flLL SPUT7ER BOIC FRON EL 20 TO EL 4.0
USING A SMGLE FABRIC-FORMED CONCRETE BAG.
SEE SPECIFlCATION SECTONS 01014 AND 02277
FlLL BOTfOM TO EL 20 W/
N0. 7 GRAVEL (WASHED)
30" FlANGE CWPLING
ADAPTER (TYP. 4)
30" PL 45' BEND - _ _..�
(TYP. 4) ....__.......
REMOVE AND REPLACE �
� (SEE�SHEET MS-3) � . � . . � . .. ._ . ...
SO' DI PIPE
��-)
30' FL 45' BEND
(TYP. 4) �
(TO REMAIN)
� y�•t �
�
� �-�. �.
(TO REM/UN) _
�/ CY r-'' I S'�`iL S
� �A�••, � �•
,JJ � � �.�
/ Lat �� . a �� �.: i14�..;�5''F
;.�,4•� .. ,st'�t .'.s
� _ x
(TO BE REMOVED)
(7D BE REMOVED)
EXISTNG GATES TD BE LEFT
IN THE CLOSED POSITON
SAW CUT EX. 30' CONC. PIPE
SEE SHEET S-3 FOR NEW
WALL CONC. COLLAR AND
PIPE CONNECTION DETAILS
30' RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVE
WITH FLANGED CONNECilONS (TYP. 4)
REMOVE AND REPUCE
EX. SIDEWALK
(SEE SHEET MS-3)
30' FL 90' BEND
(TYP. 4)
5.25
REMAIN) � �'�.
� FtOWABLE FILL AROUND PIPE AND
EXCAVATION MIN. 6' ALL AROUND
��%/� (TYP.4)
�./�%�/
%/J� , SAW CUT EX. 3D' RCP AND
�� ` CONNECT TO 30' DIP W/ FERNCO
STRONC BACK COUPl1NG MATH
I SHEAR RING AND BUSHING OR
EQUAL REWIRES EXCAVATION AND
:' t -:. �f � ACIUAL CIRCUMFERENCE
- � MEASUREMENT OF CONCRE7E PIPE
`�°- �- � -� ��� BEFORE ORDERING (TP.4)
��
.
t-__ , _ ...�.�_ . d_.
(TO REMAIN) AND FILL PIPE VOID WIT}i
NON-SHRINK GROUT (TYP. 4)
(TO REMAIN) (TO REMAINj
(TO BE REMOVED)
30' CONC. PoPE TD BE
REMOVED AS REQUIRED
(TO BE REMOVED)
(TO RENAIN)
REVISED SECTION n
N.rs. 5_
(TO REMAIN)
• 4921 Memorial Highway
OneMemorialCenter,Swte300 CLEARWATER CLARIFIER
�� T�Pa.Florida33634 REHABILITATION
Phone813 R80-8RR1
Far 813 880-A8A2 MARSHALL STREET WRF
Et�o�TVEE�uTVC� .�ssoctaTES, iNC. �'�'•��Bengineering.com SPLITTER BOX ADDENDUM 1
Engineering License #{2610
JOB N0.
11— 0053— U T
DATE: SHEET
JUNE 2012 MS-59A
�
. ,
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
'
SECTION I
SECTION II
SECTION III
City of Clearwater, Florida
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
Marshail Street WRF
Clarifier Rehabilitation
(PRO�ECT No. 11-0053-UT)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
,
SECTlON IIIA UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
AGENCY REGION 4 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL
CONDITIONS FOR FEDERALLY ASSISTED
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION iVA SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V
APPENDIX A
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
-i-
OS/14/12
�
'
'
LJ
Cl
'
�
�
�
CJ
,
,
�I
�
CJ
1
'
�
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
(PROJECT # 11-0053-UT)
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of tl�e Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection andlor
purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address:
www.myClearwater.com/citvprojects, on Friday, June 1, 2012 until no later than close of business
three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated
on the website, reflects reproduction cost only.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of the rehabilitation of four clarifiers and the
clarifier influent splitter bog at the Marshall Street WRF. The work of this project may
potentially be partially funded by the USEPA. See Section II, Paragraph 23.
A 1VIANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Thursday,
June 14, 2012 @ 10:00 a.m. on site at the Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facility, 1605
Harbor Drive, Clearwater, FL. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be
present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located
at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3�d Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520,
until 1:30 P.M. on Tuesday, June 26, 2012, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION, CONTRACT NUMBER
11-0053-UT.
A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits
and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers,
vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from
those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction
categoryo uf Wastewater and Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre-qualification
amount of $ 2,000,000.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10)
workdays prior to the bid opening date.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Michael Murray, Purchasing Manager
(727)562-4633
� Section 1 OS/14/2012
'
�
'
1
'
LJ
,
,
'
'
,
�
,
'
,
�
�
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents•
SECTIONII ................................................................................................................................... i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
COPIES OF BIDDING DOCTJMENTS ...........................................................................1
QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ...................................................................................1
EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ..................................1
INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ........................................................................2
BIDSECURITY OR BID BOND .....................................................................................3
CONTRACTTIME ...........................................................................................................3
LIQUIDATEDDAMAGES ..............................................................................................3
SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ..........................................................3
SUBCONTRACTORS .......................................................................................................4
BID/PROPOSAL FORM ..................................................................................................4
SUBMISSIONOF BIDS ...................................................................................................5
MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .....................................................5
REJECTIONOF BIDS .....................................................................................................5
DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER ...............................................................................5
OPENINGOF BIDS ..........................................................................................................6
LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ............................................6
IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ..............................6
AWARDOF CONTRACT ................................................................................................7
BIDPROTEST ...................................................................................................................7
TRENCHSAFETY ACT ..................................................................................................9
CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIlVIENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENTMEASURES ........................................................................................9
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS .................9
23 COMPLIANCE WITH THE Ul�IITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY REGION 4 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL
CONDITIONS FOR FEDERALLY ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTS....................................................................................................................9
� Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc
�
i
OS/14/2012
,
'
�i
'
Ll
Section II— Instiuctions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan
Room — website address: wwwm_yclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract
Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only,
which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications,
bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified
bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a
possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a"Subcontractor"
package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
, 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
'
�
�
,
�
�
�
,
,
�
�
�
,
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2
2.1
QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); 100 South
Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727)
562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of
Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for
the receipt of bids. Pre-Qualification requirements information is also available on City of
Clearwater Website at address:
www.mvclearwater.com/ o� v/depts/pwa/enain/Construction/prequal.asp.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks
(ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do
not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become fanuliar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
� been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc Page 1 of 10 OS/25/2012
Section II— Instructions to Bidders
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
which aze at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon tl�e accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with tl�e time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or cl�cations considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's plan room to all parties recorded
L_ J
,
,
LJ
'
J
�
�
�
�
,
LJ
�
�
,
L _J
�
,
Updated Secrion II Bid with Grant.doc Page 2 of 10 OS/25/2012
�
'
'
r
' 4.2
' S
Section II- Instructions to Bidders
by the Ciry's plan room as plan holder's having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received after the time frame specified at the pre-bid meeting prior to the date for
opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written
Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without
legal effect.
Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
� an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's m�imum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting
the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
'
,
,
�
,
�
,
�
,
�
,
,
'
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
5.4 The "UNTTED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY REGION 4
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FEDERALLY ASSISTED
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS" referenced in paragraph 23 below and included in
Section IIIA require a Bid guarantee (bond) equivalent to five percent of the bid price.
This is a minimum amount required by the funding agency. Bidders shall provide a Bid
Bond no less than 10% of the bid price per paragraph A. above.
6
6.1
7
7.1
8
CONTRACT TIME
The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Provisions for liquidated damages aze set forth in the Contract Agreement.
SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc Paee 3 of 10 OS/25/2012
Section II- Instructions to Bidders
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similaz projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in tl�e completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may awazd the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2
�
No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices
shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in
the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures,
the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents.
Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each
section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials. and labor for completing the
section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that
quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are
exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actua] construction of the work, the
amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the
unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations sha11 be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate off'icer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc Page 4 of 10
�
�'
�
�
,
'
�
,
LJ
�
,
,
�
�
'
LJ
�
r
�
,
OS/25/2012
,
'
'
,
'
�
'
'
�
,
'
1
�
1
�
'
�
�
�
'
Section II - Instructions to Bidders
103 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shail appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4
11
All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
1 L 1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xll" manila envelope with tl�e
project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwazded by mail, the Bid shall
be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and
addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at
the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or
facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modiiied or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modiiication shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and a11 Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for tYie rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposa,is for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
Updated Secuon II Bid with Grant.doc Page 5 of 10 OS/25/2012
15
15.1
�
Section II— Instructions to Bidders
OPENING OF BIDS
Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and pernuts (and sha11 pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor sha11 comply
with a11 Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building pernut fees
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor sha11 assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other ta�ces required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales t� on materials incorporated into the
WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase
(ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical
Speciiications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
,
�
r
'
�
�
,
�
,
,
��
,
,
LJ
u
�
�
'
Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc Page 6 of 10 OS/25/2012
,
,
�
,
,
�
�
,
,
,
u
'
,
,
�
,
,
�
1
,
Section II- Instructions to Bidders
(4) In the statement specif'ied in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City
deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and fumish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved
Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc Page 7 of 10
OS/25/2012
Section II— Ins�uctions to Bidders
person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts
giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals.
Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the
bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of tl�e City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions
should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated
with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10)
work days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 PROT'EST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid.
STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc Page 8 of 10
�
t
�'
�
,
�
'
,
'
LJ
��
,
r
r
�
�
�
'
OS/25/20I2
,
,
�`
Secrion II— Instructions to Bidders
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
' 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance
related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with tl�e Florida Trench Safety
Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational
' Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s
1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
, 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
, 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) storm water pernut
and implement storm water pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or storm water
' management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively
reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
,
�
,
'
�
22
,
'
'
1
�I
22.1
A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining
water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control
practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment
loadings to surface waters.
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and
sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion
and sediment control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater En ing eering
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best
Management Practices.
References EPA website.
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS AND
SUPPLIERS
Each Bidder shall submit with its Bid the Schedule of Equipment Manufacturers and
Suppliers included in SECTION V."
23 COMPLIANCE WITH THE UNITED STATES
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY REGION 4
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIOiVS FOR FEDERALLY
ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
23.1 The Contract to be awarded under this Invitation to Bid is expected to be funded in part
by a grant from the U. S. Environmental Agency's State and Tribal Assistance Grants —
Special Appropriations program. Neither the United States nor any of its departments,
agencies or employees is or will be a party to this Invitation to Bid or any resulting
contract.
� Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc
'
Page 9 of 10
OS/25/2012
Section II— Instructions to Bidders
23.2 Contractors shall take note of the "iJNTTED STAT'ES ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY REGION 4 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
FOR FEDERALLY ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS" (EPASGCs)
provided herein in Section IIIA. Bidders shall adhere to the provisions of these
EPASGCs when assembling their bids and shall be prepared to assist the City with
obtaining the grant funds by providing tl�e reports and documentation required by the
EPASGCs with their bid packages. Similarly, the selected Contractor shall adhere to the
requirements of the EPASGCs during construction.
END OF SECTION
Updated Section II Bid with Grant.doc Page 10 of ] 0 OS/25/2012
'�J
�
�
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
' SECTION III .................................................................................................................................. i
GENERALCONDITIONS ......................................................................................................... i
' Table of Contents :.......................................................................................................................... i
1 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................1
' 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5
2.1 DELiVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSUR.ANCE ............................ 5
, 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 5
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THEPROJECT ................................................................................................................ 5
, 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 5
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 6
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS ................................................................................................ 6
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
J
�
�
,
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7
3.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCEPOINTS .................................................................................................... 8
4.1 AVAII.ABILITY OF LANDS ......................................................................................... 8
42 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................ 8
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 9
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................... 9
5 .2 INSURANCE ..................................... .............................................................................. 9
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10
S. 2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 12
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES .....................................................................12
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ...................•----•--.................................... 13
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS ..............................................•---............ 14
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14
6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 15
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS .................................................................................................... 1 S
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ................................................................................ 1 S
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16
Updated Section III Bid.doc
0
OS/] 4/2012
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS .........................................................................
6.8 PERMITS ..........................................................................................................
6.9 SAFETY AND PRO'TECTION ........................................................................
6.10 EMERGENCIES ...............................................................................................
6.11 DRAWINGS .....................................................................................................
6.1 L 1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ...........
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ...............................................................................
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ......................................................................................
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES :.......................................................................................
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ..............
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ...........................................................................
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .......................................................................................
6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION ............................
........ 16
........ 16
........ 17
........ 18
........ 18
........ 18
........ 19
........ 21
........ 23
........ 23
........ 23
........ 24
........ 24
,
�
�
,
,
'
7 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 24 �
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SI'I'E ........................................................................................ 24
7.2 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................... 25
8
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
10
11
11.1
1L2
11.3
12
13
14
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
14.1
142
14.3
OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25
OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................... 25
CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 26
REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 26
SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 26
DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 26
LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBII.ITIES ............. 27
CHANGESIN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 28
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28
CHANGES IN THE C�NTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28
ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 30
UNITPRICE WORK .......................•--------.............------------..........................:........---•---. 30
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 31
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OFDEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 31
TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31
UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 32
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32
CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 33
WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 33
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33
OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 34
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34
APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34
CONTRACTOR'S WARR.ANTY OF TIT'L.,E ............................................................... 35
REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc
�
'
�J
,
,
'
,
,
�
�
�
�
OS/142012
,
I�
,
'
�1
'
,
'
'
,
��
,
'
�
1
'
1
,
'
1
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 36
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................... 37
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 37
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 38
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 38
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND 'I'HE WORK ...................................................................... 38
15.2 OWNER MAY 'I`ERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 40
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION .............................................................................................. 40
17 MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................................... 40
17.1 SUBMTI'TAL AND DOCiJMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40
17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 40
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 41
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 41
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 41
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................................... 41
17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ................................................. 41
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 41
19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 42
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 42
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 42
22.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 42
22.2 EXAMPLE ...................................................................................................:.................43
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 43
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 43
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 44
23.3 FAED SIGN -•-•-•---� .............................•--••---.....--•--........................................................ 44
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ...................................................................................................... 44
23.5 SIGN COLORING ......................................................................................................... 44
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT ..................................................................................................... 44
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 44
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN .......................................................................................... 45
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 45
Updated Section III Bid.doc iii OS/14/2012
�
�
'
'
�
�
�
,
'
1
�
,
'LJ
I�
�
r
'
,
1
,
,
Section III — General Conditions
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
City.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Wark to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer ar proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be perfortned.
Bi.dding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 1 of 46 OS/]4/2012
Section III — General Conditions
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, tl�e Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with a11 Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, ium or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identiiies which activity-is critical to the execution
of the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of iinal
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are refened to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 2 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
'
�
�i
�
�
�
�
,
�
,
,
'
'
LJ
�i
�
,
'
r
,
'
I
�
'
,
,
'
'
��
�
�
�
J
Secuon ID — General Conditions
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D.O.T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
� A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the �nal completion date.
�
,
'
,
'
�
,
�
�
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to tl�e Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, ium, organization, or other artiiicial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 3 of 46 05/14/2012
Section III — General Condiuons
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a speciiied part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's deiinitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufiiciently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and readyfor final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, iirm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 4 of 46 OS/14/2012
II
u
'
,
'
'
'
�
,
'
,
'
�
,
'
�
'
,
�
r--,
J
�I
i�
'
LJ
�,
�J
'
Section III — General Conditions
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
� The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of perfornung or furnishing labor and incoiporating materials and equipment into the
� construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
' A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
, performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
' Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
' 2
2.1
,
,
'
'
PRELIMINARY MATTERS
DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED;
STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
' sha11 start to perform the work on tt�e date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
1
'
'
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 5 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Condiuons
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clariiication from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor sha11 not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor,
Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the
parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
Typically, oversight of the project ofiicially passes from the Engineering Department to the
Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction
conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction
Manager.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a
color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events
including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a
completed Emergency Call List and a c�mpleted Authorized Signature List.
The Owner's Representative sha11 deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
project disk that has a11 of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of
construction stakeout and as-built survey.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for
reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification.
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting,
and all material test reports generated in the same time period.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 6 of 46 OS/14/2012
�
L. J
�
,
'
�
i
�
,
�
'
r
i
�
,
,-,
�,
i
�
'
,
,
,
'
�
'
'
'
��
i�,
�
�
�
'
'
'
'
LJ
'
�
L _�
�
�
Section III — General Condirions
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by a1L It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereo� to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be infened from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not speciiically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be speciiic or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification,
manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any
referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by
reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents,
shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's
Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in
these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such
provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the
Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed
with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor sha11 not be liable to Owner, or Owner's
Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
Contractar knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 7 of 46 OS/14/2012
0
Secrion III — General Conditions
AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands
which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but speciiically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in perfornung the Work. Easements for permanent
structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any
subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially
from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer
shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer
and Contractor. If Engineer fands that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
Updated Secrion III Bid.doc Page 8 of 46 OS/14/2012
!
i
�
,
,
'
'
�
'
'
,
'
i
�
'�
'
'
�
I
��
i
1
'
,
,
�
,
'
Section III — General Conditions
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner
and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or
destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and sha11 be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor
licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for
more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew
is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as deternuned by the Engineer, the
Contractor will be chazged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge
of one hour.
5
5.1
BONDS AND INSURANCE
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
' Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after
, the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws
and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor sha11 also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the
' Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of
Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff,
' Bureau of Govemment Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall
be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
' language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified
to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety
on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to
, do business is ternunated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet
the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within iive days after notice
thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner.
��
�
,
,
�
,
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of tY�e Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts, (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
Updated Secrion III Bid.doc Page 9 of 46 OS/14/2012
Secuon III — General Condirions
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner,
with copies to each additional insured identiiied in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this
paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and
maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect
of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identiiied in the
Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include
coverage for the respective ofiicers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include
completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's
indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal
refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor
and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the
Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at
all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each
other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and
telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1
WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
Updated Secrion III Bid.doc Page 10 of 46 OSl14/2012
�_�
!
L�
u
'
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
�
,
�
�
,
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
'
1
'
1
�,
�
".
�
�
1
�
,
'
,
,
Section III — General Condiuons
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occunence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which
may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for
purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's
Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide
full coverage from the iust dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be
accepted without prior approval from Owner.
Lon�shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page l 1 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor
waive a11 rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all
such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to
the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and;
(ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from iire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or
after final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efiiciently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's
Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The
Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 12 of 46 OS/14/2012
i
1
�
,
�
�
,
�
'
'
,
'
1
LJ
'
i
�
,,
�
�
'
�
,
'
�
'
'
Section III — General Condidons
from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the
Owner's Representative.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regulaz working hours or on the Owner normally
approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign
an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his
records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full
reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the
Owner has received this check. The minimum number of hours that will be charged to the
Contractor for inspection services on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of
overtime inspection per hour shall be $130.00 per hour.
Contractor sha11 provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
, accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
'
'
u
'
t
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities,. and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
' otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
' in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
' conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
,
'
'
,
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to
be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in
the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 13 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the speciiication or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
speciiication or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
suff'iciently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to deternune that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
tY�an Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or
equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
Contractor sha11 be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons perfornung or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create far the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor sha11 it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require a11
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons perfornung or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Speciiications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 14 of 46 OS/14/2012
�_�
0
,
�
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
CJ
'
'
'
'
'
I�
�
�
,
'
�
�
'
�
1
�
�I
Section III — General Conditions
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their ofiicials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
� waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove a11 waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
, equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
'
'
1
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging
and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction.
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
' • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• All arterial and collector roadways sha11 be restored ASAP.
'
• Loca1 streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shal] be maintained at all times.
� Updated Section III Bid.doc
L
Page l5 of 46
OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
• Sod must be restored within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful
pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of
driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a
period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of
denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay a1l license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is speciiied in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract
Documents.
To the fullest extent pernutted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against a11 claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not speciiied in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor
performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,
Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work:
however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Speciiications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not
relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as
described above.
When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02
shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E-Verify System to verify employment
eligibility.
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 16 of 46 OS/14/2012
�
'
'
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
�
�J
,
'
'
�
n
L�I
,
'
'
��'
�;
,
,
'
'
'
C'
�
'
�
,
�
,
'
L
�
,
'
'
Section III — General Conditions
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of
opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work,
and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Pernut Fees
will be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall,
and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident
prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and
supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition,
avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an
effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of
contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there
is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of
immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This
provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the
Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all
safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract
performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic
materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall
take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent
disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
Updated Section ffi Bid.doc Page 17 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any signiiicant changes in
the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or
Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFis, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, speciiied performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have deternuned and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) a11 materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisiied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a speciiic
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and
Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the
Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The
Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The
Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress
meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 18 of 46 OS/14/2012
�
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
,
LJ
,
'
'
�J
�1
1
'
n
��
�
'
'
L�
'
'
'
'
'
Section III — General Conditions
calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay
claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct speciiic attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
, responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by speciiic written
' notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
' Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a
' number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's
Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for a11 third submittals. The number
of first time submittals sha11 be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and
, Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings,
Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0
times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work
' completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all
of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to
Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor.
'
�
'
'
'
'
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, coniigurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and proiile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 19 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section IIl — General Conditions
The As-Built Drawings sha11 be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not
conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter SJ-17.052, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD iile.
SJ-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey perfonned to obtain horizontal and/or
vertical dimensional data so tliat constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also
knonw as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the
Owner with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
l. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe Construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 20 of 46
u
,
,
�
��
'
'
'
'
,
�
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
�
'
OS/14/2012
,
'
,
,
1
�
'
'
�
,
'
�
'
�
,
'
,
Section III — General Conditions
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall c�enote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor sha11
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of
1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of ineasurement
sha11 be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or
vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter SJ-17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP preiix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU preiix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX sufiix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix
' 6.11.3.1.2 Layer Naming Definitions:
I GAS I gas lines and appurtenances
, Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 21 of 46
�
OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRNE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property corners, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 22 of 46
u
'
,
'
'
,
CJ
�
'
,
�
'
r,
I
i
��
�
�
'
,
'
OS/14/2012
�
I
�
, Section III — General Conditions
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
� Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text
' height of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
'
�
The as-built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless
approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable
iile formats include: DWG, of a shape file.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com.
, 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modiiication or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
1 the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
, or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
' defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appeaz within a period of one year from the date of iinal acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
, Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
' Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
� Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's
Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by
the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or
, any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review
and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance
by the Engineer.
, 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
I Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
, Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 23 of 46 OS/14/2012
1
Section III — General Conditions
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
off'icers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itsel fl,
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemniiied party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims
against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, ofiicers, directors, or
employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in
company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email
addresses, etc.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and
perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether
related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for
these purposes.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 24 of 46
'
�_J
�
'
,
�
LJ
�
,
'
�
'
,
�
�
,
�
�
OS/14/2012
1
LJ
,
�
'
�
'
Section III — General Condirions
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity
is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with
the Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2 COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site,
the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
, 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
�
'
LI
'
,
,
�
,
'
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
the Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner°s right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractar under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner, The
, duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and sha11 not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
� Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 25 of 46 OS/14/2012
,
Secrion III — General Conditions
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clariiications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of
Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract
Documents. All other clariiications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued
form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as
provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to
the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change
Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection
with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on
Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will
be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event
giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and
the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 26 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
,
�
,
'
r
,
�
,
,
'
,
u
�
�
�
,
�
1
,
�
'
,
'
�
,
C�
'
'
,
�
'
�
�
�
i
�
'
LJ
�
Section III — General Condirions
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60)
days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and
Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have
under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute
or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any
other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in
good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,
exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall
create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of
the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the iinal Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered
by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certiiicates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 27 of 46 OS/]4/2012
Section III — General Condiuons
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions,
deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work
Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with
the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modifed and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance
of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on
Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days)
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 28 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
�
,
'
'
L:
,
'
�
��
'
�
,
�
r
�
�J
�
�
1
'
�
'
,
1
,
'
'
Secrion III — General Condirions
after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such
occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by
claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any
Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be
determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii)
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii)
where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for
directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall
apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and
other items of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
' payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
,
,
r
'
�
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales taY. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation
costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current
rental rates prevailing in the locality or as deiined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as
the full-unadjusted base rental rate far the appropriate item of construction equipment
and sha11 cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs
associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned
equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize
lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed
estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for
equipment on stand-by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
' The following iixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed
by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
' A. A fixed fee of iifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
' B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 29 of 46 OS/14/2012
II
L.�
Section III — General Conditions
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for a11 cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and a11 applicable tvices; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to iinal payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall
be correspondingly adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and deternuning an initial Contract Price. Deternunations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and proiit for each separately identiiied item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incuned
additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract
Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily
complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project
construction and completion that not a11 unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a
finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually
used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract
Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor
in his original bid.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 30 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
'
�
,
'
�
'
�
,
l_ J
,
LJ
�
�
LJ
r
CJ
,
�
'
�J
'
'
'
�
'
,
'
'
'
�
r
'
Section III — General Condirions
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that
the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract
Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with
the requirements of this pazagraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to tbe time lost due to such delay sball
be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable
to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including
but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for
Other Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
' ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
�
�
�
,
�
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the
Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 31 of 46 OS/14/2012
Secuon III — General Conditions
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof�
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay a11 costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certiiicates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required
for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work,
or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's
Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Wark be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor sha11 pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to a11 costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones}, or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufiicient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 32 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
�
L�
1
,
�
,
,
I��
,
,
1
�
,
u
�
,
'
r
'
�
LJ
'
Section III — General Condiuons
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
pazagraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
' conect all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by
, or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
, 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
' be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any speci�c provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in
, accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective
and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of
, others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the
Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
' all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by
Contractor.
�
'
r
,
'
r
'
C� 1
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and deternunation to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties aze unable to agree
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 33 of 46 OS/14/2012
SecUon III — Gener� Condiuons
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for
Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's
recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the
Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or
if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may,
after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In
exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from
all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall
allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors,
and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable
the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and
damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of
Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or
replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor sha11 not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable
to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described
herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for
review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated
in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully
installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of
the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey
and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 34 of 46 OS/14/2012
'.
�
,
,
,
'
1
'
'
'
'
�
,
�J
,
r
'
li
�
'
'
' Section III — General Conditions
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
, The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an
' Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site
marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the
Contract Documents.
' In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment af�davit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
� been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the
report is provided.
, 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
' any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work
shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
, conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner
, harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
' Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
, bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufiicient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
' whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this
Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the
, Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and
the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
, 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
'
1
il
�
'
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment,
unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires
review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment
will be paid by the Owner within twenty-iive (25) business days. If an Application for payment
is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the
reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in
writing, specifying deiiciencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper.
Updated Secrion III Bid.doc Page 35 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any
payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such
payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be
necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because:
(i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's
Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated
in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a speciiic Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
secure the satisfaction and dischazge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay
in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative
or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the
amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when
Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without signiiicant interference
with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to pernut the Owner to use any such
part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor
will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make
an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that
part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial
Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
access thereto.
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 36 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
�
li
u
,
,
��
'
LJ
'
'
'
'
,
,
'
,
'
'
'
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
,
,
,
,
,
1
'
,
,
'
,
'
1
Section III — General Conditions
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and
Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which
this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will
produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and
assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list.
Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the
contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract.
Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or
remedy such deficiencies.
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certiiicates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii)
consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in
connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the
Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i)
the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien
could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be
responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to
furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner a11 property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is signiiicantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor"s iinal
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without
term.inating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
Updated Section IIl Bid.doc Page 37 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for
such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing iinal
payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and iinal
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's
Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fuliilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in
writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment.
Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative
will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to
recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary conections and
resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as
to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay
contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees speciiied therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will iix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregazds Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
- if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 38 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
,
�
'
'
,
C�
�
��
'
�
'
�
�
'
,
�
�
'
�
'
�
�
u
,
'
'
'
Section III — General Condiuons
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the
Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise
than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifes in writing to
the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or
that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and,
to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, ternunate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such
excess will be paid to Contractor.
, If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incuned by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by
i Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
'
,
'
�
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to ternunate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of ternunation, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of ternunation in perfornung services
' and furnishing labor, materials or equi�ment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
proiit on such expenses;
'
,
,
n
',�
�
'
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of ternunated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 39 of 46 OS/]4/2012
Section III — General Conditions
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum iinally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor sha11
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act
on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has
failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally deternuned to be due, Contractor
may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work
until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended
to preclude Contractor from making claim under pazagraphs for Change of Contract Price or
Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to
Contractor's stopping Work as pernutted by this article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as eitl�er may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents pernutted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall
be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an offcer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
Updated Section ID Bid.doc Page 40 of 46 OS/14/2012
,
L�
CJ
�
U
,
�J
L�
'
'
1
,
,
�
,
,
'
,
�
'
�
J
' Section III — General Conditions
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
' Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any
enor, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's o�cers, employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to
' the other party within a reasonable time of the %rst observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
� 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
� each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
,
'
'
'
,
�J
�
,
,
'
�
i
„
'
,
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights
to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise speeified in the contract speciiications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction
Department.
17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS
All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers
andlor dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the
City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562-4923 or email:
Mi ch ael . Pryor @ m vC I earw ater. com.
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor sha11 work and order thereof.
19 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the iinal work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
Updated Secuon ffi Bid.doc Page 4l of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical
Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION
The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's
documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in
the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is
exempt from payment of sales tax. T'he Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable
t�es for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The
Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various
construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of
construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis.
Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See
SECTION N, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract
Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents.
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
22.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of
construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water
service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the
Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo
(optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances
which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the
scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by
the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and
durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/a by 11 inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's
activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected
by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas,
equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor
cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to
maintain suff'icient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain
appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 42 of 46 OS/14/2012
r-,
L�'
11
'
'
�
�
,
LJ
,
�
,
,
�
'
,
�
li
��
'
'
L J
,
�
, ;
,
'
�
i
��1
�
�
��
il
�
'
'
,
i
�
'
i
�
�
i
,
Section III — General Conditions
22.2 EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY' S DATE: / /
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor perfornung (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. Tl�e work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standazd asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for',
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures andlor materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active
work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s)
shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION.
Updated Section III Bid.doc Page 43 of 46 OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade
plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a
minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts
and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring
in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate
mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for
approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"x30") in size and will be
attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080-
inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl
lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs locate
barricade.
23.5 SIGN COLORING
d and attached to each side of the traffic
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun sha11
be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black.
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-
way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations
of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for iinal payment.
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 44 of 46 OS/14/2012
'
'
�
'
,
i
�
'
r-,
�
'
'
�
,
L1
�
!J
II
�
�
u
,
�
1
'
�
�
,
u
1
t
t
�
,
Section III - General Conditions
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
�
24
�
�
'
,
,
�
E°
��� PROJECT NAME
(C�ONTRACT NUMBER)
(�DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT
�� CONTRACTOR:
COMPLETION DATE:
FLJNDING:
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:
�—
�'�� ° Clearwater
�
,
� 2,-3„
s � �— -
�i
� ;
s q"x4" p T J
E �! �ost (Typ�;
�
EI
,
N,
-
,, �
I i
AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
Ca
;
�
�
;
_�
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendaz days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in
Article 2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar davs as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE
DESCRII'TION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor
fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the
Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be
discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee
Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the
Updated Section III Bid.doc
Page 45 of 46
OS/14/2012
Section III — General Conditions
Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars
($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
Updated Secuon III Bid.doc Page 46 of 46 OS/14/2012
LJ
'
'
�
'
,
LJ
'
,'�
'
�
'
C�
'
�
'
'
'
�
,
�
�
�
'
0
Revised: March 16, 2011
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
� REGION 4
1
'
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
FOR
, FEDERALLY ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
�
,
�
'
�
,
�
'
,
- _
'
�
'
�
'
'
'
�
�
1
'
'
�
'
'
,
'
,
'
EPA SPECIAL CONDITIONS
The attached instructions and regulations as listed below shall be incorporated into the
Specifications and comprise EPA�s Special Conditions.
EPA Special Provisions
Requirements for Subagreements Awarded by Prime Contractors
40 CFR 31.36 (Procurement)
Equal EmpIoyment Opportunity (EEO) Documents:
Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action
Contract Specifications (Executive Order 11246)
EEO Goals for Region 4 Economic Areas
Special Notice #1 - Check List of EEO Documentation
Employer information Report EEO-1 (SF 100)
Labor Standards Provisions for Federally Assisted Construction,
EPA Form 5720-4
Certifications
Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibility Matters
Anti-lobbying
Region 4 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE)
Negotiated Rates as of October 1, 2006
Bonds and Insurance
Revised 3/16/] 1 2 of 48
Attachment Number 1
Attachment Number 2
Attachment Number 3
Attachment Number 4
Attachment Number 5
Attachment Number 6
Attachment Number 7
Attachment Number 8
Attachment Number 9
Attachment Number 10
Attachment Number 11
Attachment Number 12
Attachment Number 13
Attachment Number 14
EPA Region 4
!
1
�
�
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
Attachment Number 1
EPA SPECIAL PROVISIONS
(a) The construction of the project shall conform to the applicable requirements for state,
territorial and local laws and ordinances to the extent that such requirements do not
conflict with Federal laws.
(b) The EPA shall have access to the site and the project.
(c) Any contract(s) awarded under this invitation for Bids are expected to be funded in part
by a grant from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Neither the United States
nor any of its departments, agencies or employees are or will be a part to this Invitation
for Bids or any resulting contract.
(d) The "Method of Award" is to the lowest responsible responsive bidder
(e) A statement that the bidder must make positive efforts to use Disadvantaged Business
Enterprises.
(� Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a to 276-7) does not apply to grants under the U. S.
Environmental Agency's State and Tribal Assistance Grants — Special Appropriations.
Compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act is not required by U. S. EPA under this contract.
Revised 3/16/11
3 of 48
EPA Region 4
Attachment Number 2
REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBAGREEMENTS
AWARDED BY A PRIME CONTRACTOR
A contractor must comply with the following provisions in its award of subagreements. (This
section does not apply to a supplier's procurement of materials to produce equipment, materials
and catalog, off-the-shelf, or manufactured items.)
(a) 40 CFR Part 32 (Debannent and Suspension Under EPA Assistance Programs);
(b) The limitations and subagreement award in 40 CFR 31.35, and 31.36(i) (3,4,6,10,12) ;
(c) The requirement for small, small rural, minority, women's and labor surplus area business
in 40 CFR 31.36(e);
(d) The specifications requirements of 40 CFR 31.36(c) (1);
(e) The Federal cost principles in 40 CFR 31.22 and 31.36(�(3);
(� The prohibited types of subagreements in 40 CFR 31.36(�(4);
(g) 40 CFR Part 34 (Anti-Lobbying under EPA Assistance Programs).
Revised 3/16/11
4 of 48
EPA Region 4
1
i
'
�
�
u
�
L_
,
CJ
,
I]
'
'
,
�
rJ
�
r
�
'
'
Attachment Number 3
Title 40: Protection of Environment
PART 31—UNIFORM ADMINISTRATNE REQUIREMENTS FOR GRANTS AND
COOPERATIVE AGREEMENTS TO STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENTS
Subpart C—Post-Award Requirements
Changes, Property, and Subawards
§ 31.36 Procurement.
(a) States. When procuring property and services under a grant, a State will follow the same
policies and procedures it uses for procurements from its non-Federal funds. The State will
ensure that every purchase order or other contract includes any clauses required by Federal
statutes and executive orders and their implementing regulations. Other grantees and subgrantees
will follow paragraphs (b) through (i) in this section.
(b) Procurement standards. (1) Grantees and subgrantees will use their own procurement
procedures which reflect applicable State and local laws and regulations, provided that the
procurements conform to applicable federal law, the standards identified in this section, and if
applicable, §31.38.
(2) Grantees and subgrantees will maintain a contract administration system which ensures that
contractors perform in accordance with the terms, conditions, and specifications of their contracts
or purchase orders.
(3) Grantees and subgrantees will maintain a written code of standards of conduct governing the
performance of their employees engaged in the award and administration of contracts. No
employee, officer or agent of the grantee or subgrantee shall participate in selection, or in the
award or administration of a contract supported by Federal funds if a conflict of interest, real or
apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when:
(i) The employee, officer or agent,
(ii) Any member of his immediate family,
(iii) His or her partner, or
(iv) An organization which employs, or is about to employ, any of the above, has a financial or
other interest in the firm selected for award. The grantee's or subgrantee's officers, employees or
agents will neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything of monetary value from
contractors, potential contractors, or parties to subagreements. Grantee and subgrantees may set
minimum rules where the financial interest is not substantial or the gift is an unsolicited item of
nominal intrinsic value. To the extent permitted by State or local law or regulations, such
standards or conduct will provide for penalties, sanctions, or other disciplinary actions for
Revised 3/16/11 5 of 48 EPA Region 4
violations of such standards by the grantee's and subgrantee's officers, employees, or agents, or
by contractors or their agents. The awarding agency may in regulation provide additional
prohibitions relative to real, apparent, or potential conflicts of interest.
(4) Grantee and subgrantee procedures will provide for a review of proposed procurements to
avoid purchase of unnecessary or duplicative items. Consideration should be given to
consolidating or breaking out procurements to obtain a more economical purchase. Where
appropriate, an analysis will be made of lease versus purchase alternatives, and any other
appropriate analysis to determine the most economical approach.
(5) To foster greater economy and efficiency, grantees and subgrantees are encouraged to enter
into State and local intergovernmental agreements for procurement or use of common goods and
services.
(6) Grantees and subgrantees are encouraged to use Federal excess and surplus property in lieu of
purchasing new equipment and property whenever such use is feasible and reduces project costs.
(7) Grantees and subgrantees are encouraged to use value engineering clauses in contracts for
construction projects of sufficient size to offer reasonable opportunities for cost reductions.
Value engineering is a systematic and creative anaylsis of each contract item or task to ensure
that its essential function is provided at the overall lower cost.
(8) Grantees and subgrantees will make awards only to responsible contractors possessing the
ability to perform successfully under the terms and conditions of a proposed procurement.
Consideration will be given to such matters as contractor integrity, compliance with public
policy, record of past performance, and financial and technical resources.
(9) Grantees and subgrantees will maintain records sufficient to detail the significant history of a
procurement. These records will include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:
rationale for the method of procurement, selection of contract type, contractor selection or
rejection, and the basis for the contract price.
(10) Grantees and subgrantees will use time and material type contracts only—
(i) After a determination that no other contract is suitable, and
�
(ii) If the contract includes a ceiling price that the contractor exceeds at its own risk.
(11) Grantees and subgrantees alone will be responsible, in accordance with good administrative
practice and sound business judgment, for the settlement of all contractual and administrative
issues arising out of procurements. These issues include, but are not limited to source evaluation,
protests, disputes, and claims. These standards do not relieve the grantee or subgrantee of any
contractual responsibilities under its contracts. Federal agencies will not substitute their judgment
for that of the grantee or subgrantee unless the matter is primarily a Federal concern. Violations
of law will be referred to the local, State, or Federal authority having proper jurisdiction.
(12) Grantees and subgrantees will have protest procedures to handle and resolve disputes
Revised 3/16/11
6 of 48
EPA Region 4
1
1
'
�
,
�
L'
�
,
�
�
,
'
i�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
,
'
,
,
,
�
�
�
'
l�
�
�
�
,
�
relating to their procurements and shall in all instances disclose information regarding the protest
to the awarding agency. A protestor must e�aust all administrative remedies with the grantee
and subgrantee before pursuing a protest with the Federal agency. Reviews of protests by the
Federal agency will be limited to:
(i) Violations of Federal law or regulations and the standards of this section (violations of State
or local law will be under the jurisdiction of State or local authorities) and
(ii) Violations of the grantee's or subgrantee's protest procedures for failure to review a complaint
or protest. Protests received by the Federal agency other than those specified above will be
referred to the grantee or subgrantee.
(c) Competition. (1) All procurement transactions will be conducted in a manner providing full
and open competition consistent with the standards of §3136. Some of the situations considered
to be restrictive of competition include but are not limited to:
(i) Placing unreasonable requirements on firms in order for them to qualify to do business,
(ii) Requiring unnecessary experience and excessive bonding,
(iii) Noncompetitive pricing practices between firms or between affiliated companies,
(iv) Noncompetitive awards to consultants that are on retainer contracts,
(v) Organizational conflicts of interest,
(vi) Specifying only a"brand name" product instead of allowing "an equal" product to be offered
and describing the performance of other relevant requirements of the procurement, and
(vii) Any arbitrary action in the procurement process.
(2) Grantees and subgrantees will conduct procurements in a manner that prohibits the use of
statutorily or administratively imposed in-State or local geographical preferences in the
evaluation of bids or proposals, except in those cases where applicable Federal statutes expressly
mandate or encourage geographic preference. Nothing in this section preempts State licensing
laws. When contracting for architectural and engineering (A/E) services, geographic location
may be a selection criteria provided its application leaves an appropriate number of qualified
firms, given the nature and size of the project, to compete for the contract.
(3) Grantees will have written selection procedures for procurement transactions. These
procedures will ensure that all solicitations:
(i) Incorporate a clear and accurate description of the technical requirements for the material,
product, or service to be procured. Such description shall not, in competitive procurements,
contain features which unduly restrict competition. The description may include a statement of
the qualitative nature of the material, product or service to be procured, and when necessary,
shall set forth those minimum essential characteristics and standards to which it must conform if
it is to satisfy its intended use. Detailed product specifications should be avoided if at all
Revised 3/16/11 7 of 48 EPA Region 4
possible. When it is impractical or uneconomical to make a clear and accurate description of the
technical requirements, a"brand name or equal" description may be used as a means to define
the performance or other salient requirements of a procurement. The specific features of the
named brand which must be met by offerors shall be clearly stated; and
(ii) Identify all requirements which the offerors must fulfill and all other factors to be used in
evaluating bids or proposals.
(4) Grantees and subgrantees will ensure that all prequalified lists of persons, firms, or products
which are used in acquiring goods and services are current and include enough qualified sources
to ensure maximum open and free competition. Also, grantees and subgrantees will not preclude
potential bidders from qualifying during the solicitation period.
(5) Construction grants awarded under Title II of the Clean Water Act are subject to the
following `Buy American" requirements in paragraphs (c)(5) (i)—(iii) of this section. Section 215
of the Clean Water Act requires that contractors give preference to the use of domestic material
in the construction of EPA-funded treatment works.
(i) Contractors must use domestic construction materials in preference to nondomestic material if
it is priced no more than 6 percent higher than the bid or offered price of the nondomestic
material, including all costs of delivery to the construction site and any applicable duty, whether
or not assessed. The grantee will normally base the computations on prices and costs in effect on
the date of opening bids or proposals.
(ii) The award official may waive the Buy American provision based on factors the award official
considers relevant, including:
(A) Such use is not in the public interest;
(B) The cost is unreasonable;
(C) The Agency's available resources are not sufficient to implement the provision, subject to the
Deputy Administrator's concurrence;
(D) The articles, materials or supplies of the class or kind to be used or the articles, materials or
supplies from which they are manufactured are not mined, produced or manufactured in the
United States in sufficient and reasonably available commercial quantities or satisfactory quality
for the particular project; or
(E) Application of this provision is contrary to multilateral government procurement agreements,
subject to the Deputy Administrator's concurrence.
(iii) All bidding documents, subagreements, and, if appropriate, requests for proposals must
contain the following "Buy American" provision: In accordance with section 215 of the Clean
Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq. ) and implementing EPA regulations, the contractor agrees
that preference will be given to domestic construction materials by the contractor, subcontractors,
materialmen and suppliers in the performance of this subagreement.
Revised 3/16/1 l 8 of 48 EPA Region 4
r
�
'
�
'
'
'
�
L�
�
��
�
,
,
�
�;
'
�
�
L�
�
��
'
'
�
,
'
�
r
�
(d) Methods of procurement to be followed— (1) Procurement by small purchase procedures.
Small purchase procedures are those relatively simple and informal procurement methods for
securing services, supplies, or other property that do not cost more than the simplified acquisition
threshold fixed at 41 U.S.C. 403(11) (currently set at $100,000). If small purchase procedures are
used, price or rate quotations shall be obtained from an adequate number of qualified sources.
(2) Procurement by sealed bids (formal advertising). Bids are publicly solicited and a firm-fixed-
price contract (lump sum or unit price) is awarded to the responsible bidder whose bid,
conforming with all the material terms and conditions of the invitation for bids, is the lowest in
price. The sealed bid method is the preferred method for procuring construction, if the conditions
in 31.36(d)(2)(i) apply.
(i) In order for sealed bidding to be feasible, the following conditions should be present:
(A) A complete, adequate, and realistic specification or purchase description is available;
(B) Two or more responsible bidders are willing and able to compete effectively and for the
business; and
(C) The procurement lends itself to a firm fixed price contract and the selection of the successful
bidder can be made principally on the basis of price.
(ii) If sealed bids are used, the following requirements apply:
(A) The invitation for bids will be publicly advertised and bids shall be solicited from an
adequate number of known suppliers, providing them sufficient time prior to the date set for
opening the bids;
(B) The invitaxion for bids, which will include any specifications and pertinent attachments, shall
define the items or services in order for the bidder to properly respond;
(C) All bids will be publicly opened at the time and place prescribed in the invitation for bids;
(D) A firm fixed-price contract award will be made in writing to the lowest responsive and
� responsible bidder. Where specified in bidding documents, factors such as discounts,
transportation cost, and life cycle costs shall be considered in determining which bid is lowest.
1 Payment discounts will only be used to determine the low bid when prior experience indicates
that such discounts are usually taken advantage of; and
'
�
��
�,
,
�J
(E) Any or all bids may be rejected if there is a sound documented reason.
(3) Procurement by competitive proposals. The technique of competitive proposals is normally
conducted with more than one source submitting an offer, and either a fixed-price or cost-
reimbursement type contract is awarded. It is generally used when conditions are not appropriate
for the use of sealed bids. If this method is used, the following requirements apply:
(i) Requests for proposals will be publicized and identify all evaluation factors and their relative
importance. Any response to publicized requests for proposals shall be honored to the maximum
Revised 3/] 6/1 l 9 of 48 EPA Region 4
extent practical;
(ii) Proposals will be solicited from an adequate number of qualified sources;
(iii) Grantees and subgrantees will have a method for conducting technical evaluations of the
proposals received and for selecting awardees;
(iv) Awards will be made to the responsible firm whose proposal is most advantageous to the
program, with price and other factors considered; and
(v) Grantees and subgrantees may use competitive proposal procedures for qualifications-based
procurement of architectural/engineering (A/E) professional services whereby competitors'
qualifcations are evaluated and the most qualified competitor is selected, subject to negotiation
of fair and reasonable compensation. The method, where price is not used as a selection factor,
can only be used in procurement of A/E professional services. It cannot be used to purchase other
types of services though A/E firms are a potential source to perform the proposed effort.
(4) Procurement by noncompetitive proposals is procurement through solicitation of a proposal
from only one source, or after solicitation of a number of sources, competition is determined
inadequate.
(i) Procurement by noncompetitive proposals may be used only when the award of a contract is
infeasible under small purchase procedures, sealed bids or competitive proposals and one of the
following circumstances applies:
(A) The item is available only from a single source;
(B) The public exigency or emergency for the requirement will not permit a delay resulting from
competitive solicitaxion;
(C) The awarding agency authorizes noncompetitive proposals; or
(D) After solicitaxion of a number of sources, competition is determined inadequate.
(ii) Cost analysis, i.e., verifying the proposed cost data, the projections of the data, and the
evaluation of the specific elements of costs and profits, is required.
(iii) Grantees and subgrantees may be required to submit the proposed procurement to the
awarding agency for pre-award review in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section.
(e) [Reserved]
( fl Contract cost and price. (1) Grantees and subgrantees must perform a cost or price analysis in
connection with every procurement action including contract modifications. The method and
degree of analysis is dependent on the facts sunounding the particular procurement situation, but
as a starting point, grantees must make independent estimates before receiving bids or proposals.
A cost analysis must be performed when the offeror is required to submit the elements of his
estimated cost, e.g., under professional, consulting, and architectural engineering services
Revised 3/16/11 10 of 48 EPA Region 4
�
�
�
�
��
�
L�
,
,
�
t�
�
�
,
�
r
�
'
�
,
'
contracts. A cost analysis will be necessary when adequate price competition is lacking, and for
� sole source procurements, including contract modifications or change orders, unless price
reasonableness can be established on the basis of a catalog or market price of a commercial
product sold in substantial quantities to the general public or based on prices set by law or
, regulation. A price analysis will be used in all other instances to determine the reasonableness of
the proposed contract price.
' (2) Grantees and subgrantees will negotiate profit as a separate element of the price for each
contract in which there is no price competition and in all cases where cost analysis is performed.
To establish a fair and reasonable profit, consideration will be given to the complexity of the
� work to be performed, the risk borne by the contractor, the contractor's investment, the amount of
subcontracting, the quality of its record of past performance, and industry profit rates in the
surrounding geographical area for similar work.
�J
'
�]
,
�
�
(3) Costs or prices based on estimated costs for contracts under grants will be allowable only to
the extent that costs incurred or cost estimates included in negotiated prices are consistent with
Federal cost principles (see §31.22). Grantees may reference their own cost principles that
comply with the applicable Federal cost principles.
(4) The cost plus a percentage of cost and percentage of construction cost methods of contracting
shall not be used.
(g) Awarding agency review. (1) Grantees and subgrantees must make available, upon request of
the awarding agency, technical specifications on proposed procurements where the awarding
agency believes such review is needed to ensure that the item and/or service specified is the one
being proposed for purchase. This review generally will take place prior to the time the
specification is incorporated into a solicitation document. However, if the grantee or subgrantee
desires to have the review accomplished after a solicitation has been developed, the awarding
agency may still review the specifications, with such review usually limited to the technical
aspects of the proposed purchase.
(2) Grantees and subgrantees must on request make available for awarding agency pre-award
' review procurement documents, such as requests for proposals or invitations for bids,
independent cost estimates, etc. when:
�
�
,
�
,
'
(i) A grantee's or subgrantee's procurement procedures or operation fails to comply with the
procurement standards in this section; or
(ii) The procurement is expected to exceed the simplified acquisition threshold and is to be
awarded without competition or only one bid or offer is received in response to a solicitation; or
(iii) The procurement, which is expected to exceed the simplified acquisition threshold, specifies
a "brand name" product; or
(iv) The proposed award is more than the simplified acquisition threshold and is to be awarded to
other than the apparent low bidder under a sealed bid procurement; or
Revised 3/16/1 ] 11 of 48 EPA Region 4
(v) A proposed contract modification changes the scope of a contract or increases the contract
amount by more than the simplified acquisition threshold.
(3) A grantee or subgrantee will be exempt from the pre-award review in paragraph (g)(2) of this
section if the awarding agency determines that its procurement systems comply with the
standards of this section.
(i) A grantee or subgrantee may request that its procurement system be reviewed by the awarding
agency to determine whether its system meets these standards in order for its system to be
certified. Generally, these reviews shall occur where there is a continuous high-dollar funding,
and third-party contracts are awarded on a regular basis.
(ii) A grantee or subgrantee may self-certify its procurement system. Such self-certification shall
not limit the awarding agency's right to survey the system. Under a self-certification procedure,
awarding agencies may wish to rely on written assurances from the grantee or subgrantee that it
is complying with these standards. A grantee or subgrantee will cite specific procedures,
regulations, standards, etc., as being in compliance with these requirements and have its system
available for review.
(h) Bonding requirements. For construction or facility improvement contracts or subcontracts
exceeding the simplified acquisition threshold, the awarding agency may accept the bonding
policy and requirements of the grantee or subgrantee provided the awarding agency has made a
determination that the awarding agency's interest is adequately protected. If such a determination
has not been made, the minimum requirements shall be as follows:
(1) A bid guarantee from each bidder equivalent to five percent of the bid price. The "bid
guarantee" shall consist of a firm commitment such as a bid bond, certified check, or other
negotiable instrument accompanying a bid as assurance that the bidder will, upon acceptance of
his bid, execute such contractual documents as may be required within the time specified,
(2) A performance bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A
"performance bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to secure fulfillment of all the
contractor's obligations under such contract.
(3) A payment bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A
"payment bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to assure payment as required by
law of all persons supplying labor and material in the execution of the work provided for in the
contract.
(i) Contract provisions. A grantee's and subgrantee's contracts must contain provisions in
paragraph (i) of this section. Federal agencies are permitted to require changes, remedies,
changed conditions, access and records retention, suspension of work, and other clauses
approved by the Office of Federal Procurement Policy.
(1) Administrative, contractual, or legal remedies in instances where contractors violate or breach
contract terms, and provide for such sanctions and penalties as may be appropriate. (Contracts
more than the simplified acquisition threshold)
Revised 3/16/11 12 of 48 EPA Region 4
�
'
r
�
,
�
�
,
,
,
�
�
�
'
�
L�J
�
�I
�
�
1
1
(2) Termination for cause and for convenience by the grantee or subgrantee including the manner
� by which it will be effected and the basis for settlement. (All contracts in excess of $10,000)
(3) Compliance with Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, entitled "Equal
, Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967, and as
supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR chapter 60). (All construction
contracts awarded in excess of $10,000 by grantees and their contractors or subgrantees)
'
�
�
(4) Compliance with the Copeland "Anti-Kickback" Act (18 U.S.C. 874) as supplemented in
Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR part 3). (All contracts and subgrants for construction
or repair)
(5) Compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.G 276a to 276a-7) as supplemented by
Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR part 5). (Construction contracts in excess of $2000
awarded by grantees and subgrantees when required by Federal grant program legislation)
(6) Compliance with Sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Wark Hours and Safety Standards Act
' (40 U.S.C. 327-330) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR part 5).
(Construction contracts awarded by grantees and subgrantees in excess of $2000, and in excess
of $2500 for other contracts which involve the employment of inechanics or laborers)
�
��
�
(7) Notice of awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to reporting.
(8) Notice of awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to patent rights with
respect to any discovery or invention which arises or is developed in the course of or under such
contract.
(9) Awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to copyrights and rights in data.
(10) Access by the grantee, the subgrantee, the Federal grantor agency, the Comptroller General
� of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representaxives to any books, documents,
papers, and records of the contractor which are directly pertinent to that specific contract for the
purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions.
C�
�
�
(11) Retention of all required records for three years after grantees or subgrantees make final
payments and all other pending matters are closed.
(12) Compliance with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements issued under section 306
of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857(h)), section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.G 1368),
Executive Order 11738, and Environmental Protection Agency regulations (40 CFR part 15).
(Contracts, subcontracts, and subgrants of amounts in excess of $ I 00,000)
(13) Mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the
� State energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation
Act (Pub. L. 94-163, 89 Stat. 871).
� (j) Payment to consultants. (1) EPA will limit its participation in the salary rate (excluding
Revised 3/16/11
r
LJ
13 of 48
EPA Region 4
overhead) paid to individual consultants retained by grantees or by a grantee's contractors or
subcontractors to the maximum daily rate for a GS-18. (Grantees may, however, pay consultants
more than this amount). This limitation applies to consultation services of designated individuals
with specialized skills who are paid at a daily or hourly rate. This rate does not include
transportation and subsistence costs for travel performed; grantees will pay these in accordance
with their normal travel reimbursement practices. (Pub. L. 99-591).
(2) Subagreements with firms for services which are awarded using the procurement
requirements in this part are not affected by this limitation.
(k) Use of the same architect or engineer during construction. (1) If the grantee is satisfied with
the qualifications and performance of the architect or engineer who provided any or all of the
facilities planning or design services for a waste-water treatment works project and wishes to
retain that firm or individual during construction of the project, it may do so without further
public notice and evaluation of qualifications, provided:
(i) The grantee received a facilities planning (Step 1) or design grant (Step 2), and selected the
architect or engineer in accordance with EPA's procurement regulations in effect when EPA
awarded the grant; or
(ii) The award official approves noncompetitive procurement under §3136(d)(4) for reasons
other than simply using the same individual or firm that provided facilities planning or design
services for the project; or
(iii) The grantee attests that:
(A) The initial request for proposals clearly stated the possibility that the firm or individual
selected could be awarded a subagreement for services during construction; and
(B) The firm or individual was selected for facilities planning or design services in accordance
with procedures specified in this section.
(C) No employee, officer or agent of the grantee, any member of their immediate families, or
their partners have iinancial or other interest in the firm selected for award; and
(D) None of the grantee's officers, employees or agents solicited or accepted gratuities, favors or
anything of monetary value from contractors or other parties to subagreements.
(2) However, if the grantee uses the procedures in paragraph (k)(1) of this section to retain an
architect or engineer, any Step 3 subagreements between the architect or engineer and the grantee
must meet all of the other procurement provisions in §31.36.
[53 FR 8068 and 8087, Mar. 1 l, 1988, and amended at 53 FR 8075, Mar. 11, 1988; 60 FR
19639, 19644, Apr. 19, 1995; 66 FR 3794, Jan. 16, 2001; 73 FR 15913, Mar. 26, 2008]
Revised 3/16/1 l
14 of 48
EPA Region 4
1
I] �
�
L_ J
�
�
L�
�
L_ J
,
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
��
�
�'
�
r
'
�
�
�
�
Attachment Number 4
NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246)
The following excerpts are from 45 FR 65984 (October 3, 1980):
"The minority and female goals apply to Federal and federally assisted construction contractors
and subcontractors which have covered contracts. The goals are expressed as a percentage of the
total hours worked by such a covered constractor's or subcontractor's entire onsite construction
workforce which is working on any construction site within a relevant area. The goal applies to
each construction craft and trade in the contractor's entire workforce in the relevant area
including those employees working on private nonfederally involved projects.
Until further notice, the following goals for minority utilization in each construction craft and
' trade shall be included in all Federal or federally assisted construction contracts and subcontracts
in excess of $10,000 to be performed in the respective geographic area. The goals are applicable
to each nonexempt contractor's total onsite construction workforce, regardless of whether or not
, part of that workforce is performing work on a Federal, federally assisted or nonfederally related
project, contract or subcontract.
'
'
Construction contractors which are participating in an approved Hometown Plan (see 41 CFR
60-4.5) are required to comply with the goals of the Hometown Plan with regard to construction
work they perform in the area covered by the Hometown Plan. With regard to all their other
covered construction work, such contractors are required to comply as follows:
Goals for female participation in each trade ...............6.9%
, Goals for minority participation in each trade............Insert goals for each year
(see Attachment Number 6)
,
�
�
,
�
r
�
These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal
or Federally assisted) performed in the covered area."
The following excerpts are from 45 FR 65977 (October 3, 1980):
"The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4
shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action
obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet
the goals established for the geographical area where the contract resulting from this solicitation
is to be performed. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be
substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and the contractor
Revised 3/16/11 15 of 48 EPA Region 4
,
,
shall make a good faith effort to employ minority and women evenly on each of its projects. The �
transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from
project to project for the sole purpose of ineeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the
contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the �
goals will be measured against the total work hours performed.
3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal
Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract
in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this
solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the
subcontractor; employer identification number; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract;
estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which
the contract is to be performed.
4. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is
(insert description of the geographical areas where the contract is to be performed giving the
state, country, and city, if any)."
�
�
�
^
I
�,
�
,
,
lJ
,
�
r
�
�
Revised 3/16/11 16 of 48 EPA Region 4 '
'
,
r
r
'
�
�
u
,
'
'
'
'
,
Attachment Number 5
STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246)
EEO Specifications
Following is the standard language which must be incorporated into all solicitations for offers
and bids on all Federal and Federally assisted construction contracts or subcontracts in excess of
$10,000 to be performed in designated geographical areas:
1. As used in these specifications:
a. "Covered Area" means the geographical area described in the solicitation from
which this contract resulted.
(b) "Director" means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Program,
United States Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates
authority;
(c)
(d)
"Employer identification number" means the Federal Social Security number used
on the Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form
941.
"Minority" includes:
(i)
�>i)
Black (all persons having origins in any of the Black African racial groups
not of Hispanic origin);
Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South
American or other Spanish Culture or origin, regardless of race);
(iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the origina]
' peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, tl�e Indian Subcontinent, or the
Pacific Islands); and
r
1
�
,
�
(iv) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of
the original peoples of North America and maintaining identifiable tribal
affiliations through membership and participation or community
identification).
2. Whenever the Contractor or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the
work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in
Revised 3/16/1 ] 17 of 48 EPA Region 4
excess of $10,000 the provisions of these specifications and the Notice which contains
the applicable goals for minority and female participation and which is set forth in the
solicitations from which this contract resulted.
3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan
approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or
through an association, its affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan area
(including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for those trades
which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be able to demonstrate
their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan.
Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating in an approved Plan is individually
required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, and to make a good faith
effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it has employees. The
overall good faith performance by other Contractors or Subcontractors toward a goal in
an approved Plan does not excuse any covered Contractor's or Subcontractor's failure to
take a good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals and timetables.
4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in
paragraphs 7-a through p of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation
from which this contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of
employment and training of minority and female utilization the Contractor should
reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees in the
covered area. The Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress toward
its goals in each craft during the period specified.
5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union
with whom the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either
minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor's obligations under these specifications,
Executive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto.
6. In order for the non-working training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in
meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the contractor
during the training period, and the Contractor must have made a commitment to employ
the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the availability
of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained pursuant to training programs
approved by the U.S. Department of Labor.
Revised 04/23/09
18 of 48
EPA Region 4
,
�
r
i
I
�_
�
LJ
LJ
'
'
,
�
�
'
��
,
'
�
1
L�
'
�
C
�
�J
�
,
7. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative action to ensure equal employment
opportunity. The evaluation of the Contractor's compliance with these specifications
shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its actions. The
Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative actions
steps at least as extensively as the following:
a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and
coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the contractor� employees are
assigned to work. The Contractor, where possible, will assign two or more women
to each construction project. The Contractor shall specifically ensure that all
foremen, superintendents, and other on-site supervisory personnel are aware of
and carry out the Contractor's obligation to maintain such a working environment,
with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or
in such facilities.
b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources,
' provide written notification to minority and female recruitment sources and to
community organizations when the contractor or its unions have employment
opportunities available, and maintain a record of the organizations' responses.
'
1
,
'
'
�
,
�
�
c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each
minority and female off-the-street applicant and minority or female referral from a
union, a recruitment source or community organization and of what action was
taken with respect to each such individual. If such individual was sent to the
union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor by the
union or, if referred, not employed by the contractor, this shall be documented in
the file with the reason therefore, along with whatever additional actions the
contractor may have taken.
d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or unions
with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not referred
to the Contractor a minority person ar woman sent by the Contractor, or when the
Contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the
Contractor's efforts to meet its obligation.
e. Develop on-the job training opporiunities and/or participate in training programs
for the area which expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading
programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to the Contractor's
employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the
Department of Labor. The Contractor shall provide notice of these programs to
the sources complied under 7-b above.
f. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to
unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the
Revised 04/23/09
�
�
19 of 48
EPA Region 4
g. Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any policy manual
and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper,
annual report, etc.; by specif e review of the policy with all management
personnel and with all minority and female employees at least once a year; and by
posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at
each location where construction work is performed.
h. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative action
obligations under these specifications with all employees having any
responsibility for hiring, assignment, lay-off, termination or other employment
decisions including specific review of these items with on-site supervisory
personnel such as Superintendents, General Foreman, etc., prior to the initiation of
construction work at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained
identifying the time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject matter
discussed, and disposition of the subject matter.
Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any
advertising in the news media, specifically including minority and female news
media, and providing written notification to and discussing the Contractor's EEO
policy with other Contractors and Subcontractors with whom the Contractor does
or anticipates doing business.
j. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and
community organizations, to schools with minority and female students and to
minority and female recruitment and training organizations serving the
Contractor� recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month
prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other
training by any recruitment source, the contractor shall send written notification to
organizations such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures,
and tests to be used in the selection process.
k. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority
persons and women and, where reasonable, provide after school, summer and
vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site and in other
areas of a Contractor's workforce.
Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to
do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3.
m. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation of all minority and female
personnel for promotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or
to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., such opportunities.
Revised 04/23/09
20 of 48
EPA Region 4
'
�
r
l_.
'
��
�
,
'
�
�
I
'
,
,
'
�il
�
�
'
'
�
�
,
'
'
n. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and other
personnel practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring
all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that EEO policy and the
Contractor's obligations under these specifications are being carried out.
o. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except that
separate or single-user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to
assure privacy between the sexes.
p. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from
, minority and female construction contractors and suppliers, including circulation
of solicitations to minority and female contractor associations and other business
associations.
,
'
CJ
�J
'
,
'
,
1
'
,
�
Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisor's adherence to and
performance under the Contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action
obligations.
8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in
fulfilling one or more of their affirmative actions obligations (7 a through p). The efforts
of a contractor association, joint contractor-union, contractor-community, of other similar
group of which the contractor is a member and participant may be asserted as fulfilling
any one or more of its obligations under 7 a through p of these specifications provided
that the contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the
group has a positive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry,
ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor+s minority
and female workforce participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals
and timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the
effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the Contractor. The obligation to comply,
however, is the Contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not
be defense for the Contractor's noncompliance.
9. A single goal far minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established.
The contractor, however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to
take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women,
both minority and non-minority. Consequently, the Contractor may be in violation of the
Executive Order if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner (for
example: even though the Contractor has achieved its goal for women generally, the
Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of
women is underutilized).
10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables for affirmative action standards to
discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin.
Revised 04/23/09
,
1
21 of 48
EPA Region 4
11
The Contractor shall not enter into any Subcontract with any person or firm debarred
from Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246.
12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these
specifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination
and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to
Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by the Office of
Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry out such
sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and executive Order
11246, as amended.
13. The Contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement
specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in
paragraph 7 of these specifications, so as to achieve maximum results from its efforts to
ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contractor fails to comply with the
requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these
specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8.
14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related
activity to ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports
relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the Government and to keep
records. Records shall at least include for each employee the name, address, telephone
numbers, construction trade, union aff'iliation, if any, employee identification number
when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice,
trainee, helper or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the
indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records
shall be maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the
degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to
maintain separate records.
15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other
laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the application of
requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public
Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block Grant
Program).
Revised 04/23/09
22 of 48
EPA Region 4
�
�
,
�
'
'
,
'
,
,
�
'
�
�
'
�J
'
'
,
'
i_.J
�
'
'
�
,
'
,
�`
.J
'
'
1
'
1
,
,
Attachment Number 6
EEO Goals for Economic Areas in Region 4
Source: Appendix B-80 in 45 FR 65984 (October 3, 1980)
Alabama:
047 Mobile, AL
SMSA Counties:
5160 Mobile, AL
AL Baldwin; AL Mobile.
6026 Pascagoula - Moss, Point MS
MS Jackson.
Non-SMSA Counties
AL Choctaw; AL Clarke; AL Conecuh; AL Escambia; AL Monroe; AL Washington; AL Wicox;
MS George; MS Greene.
048 Montgomery, AL:
SMSA Counties
5240 Montgomery, AL
AL Autauga; AL Elmore; AL Montgomery.
Non-SMSA Counties
AL Barbour; AL Bullock; AL Butler; AL Coffee; AL Coosa; AL Covington;
AL Crenshaw; AL Dale; AL Dallas; AL Geneva; AL Henry; AL Houston.;
AL Lowndes; AL Macon; AL Perry; AL Pike; AL Tallapoosa.
049 Birmingham, AL:
SMSA Counties:
0450 Anniston, AL
AL Calhoun
1000 Birmingham, AL
AL Jefferson, AL St- Clair; AL Shelby; AL Walker; AL Etowah
8600 Tuscaloosa, AL
AL Tuscaloosa.
Non-SMSA Counties
AL Bibb; AL Blount AL Cherokee; AL Chilton; AL Clay; AL Cleburne; AL Cullman;
AL Fayette; AL Greene; AL Hale; AL Lamar; AL Marion; AL Pickens; AL Randolph;
AL Sumter: AL Talladega; AL Winston.
050 Huntsville - Flore�ce, AL:
SMSA Counties:
2650 Florence, AL
AL Colbert; AL Lauderdale.
3440 Huntsville, AL
AL Limestone; AL Madison; AL Marshall.
Non-SMSA Counties
AL Franklin; AL Lawrence AL Morgan; TN Lincoln.
Georaia:
035 Augusta, GA:
SMSA Counties:
0600 Augusta, GA - SC
GA Columbia; GA Richmond; SC Aiken
Non-SMSA Counties
GA Burke; GA Emanuel; GA Glascock; GA Jefferson; GA Jenkins; GA Lincoln; GA
McDuffie; GA Taliaferro; GA Warren; GA Wilkes; SC Allendale, SC Bamberg;
SC Barnwell; SC Edgefield; SC McCormick
036 Atlanta, GA
SMSA Counties
0520 Atlanta
GA Butts; GA Cherokee; GA Clayton; GA Cobb; GA Dekalb; GA Douglas; GA Fayette;
GA Forsyth; GA Fulton; GA Gwinnett; GA Henry, GA Newton; GA Paulding; GA Rockdale;
GA Walton
Revised 04/23/09 23 of 48
,
�
I�I�
LJ'
EPA Region 4
26.9
16.9
26.4
29.9
29.9
14.3
24.9
20.6
20.7
11.9
12.0
112
27.2
32.8
21.2
Non-SMSA Counties
GA Banks; GA Barrow; GA Bartow; GA Carroll; GA Clarke; GA Coweta; GA Dawson;
GA Elbert; GA Fannin; GA Floyd; GA Franklin; GA Gilmer; GA Gordon; GA Greene;
GA Habersham; GA Hall; GA Haralson; GA Hart; GA Heard; GA Jackson; GA Jasper;
GA Lamar, GA Lumpkin; GA Madison, GA Morgan; GA Oconee, GA Oglethorpe;
GA Pickens; GA Pike; GA Polk; GA Rabun, GA Spalding; GA Stephens; GA Towns;
GA Union; GA Upson; GA White.
037 Columbus, GA:
SMSA Counties
1800 Columbus
AL Russell; GA Chattahoochee; GA Columbus.
Non-SMSA Counties
AL Chambers; AL Lee; GA Harris; GA Marion; GA Meriwether; GA Quitman;
GA Schley; GA Stewart; GA Sumter; GA Talbot; GA Troup; GA Webster.
038 Macon, GA:
SMSA Counties
4660 Macon, GA
GA Bibb; GA Houston; GA Jones; GA Twiggs.
Non-SMSA Counties
GA Baldwin; GA Bleckley; GA Crawford; GA Crisp; GA Dodge; GA Dooly; GA Hancock;
GA Johnson; GA Laurens; GA Macon; GA Monroe; GA Peach; GA Pulaski;
GA Putnam. GA Taylor; GA Telfair; GA Treutlen; GA Washington; GA Wheeler; GA Wilcox;
GA Wilkinson.
039 Savannah, GA:
SMSA Counties:
7520 Savannah, GA
GA Bryan; GA Chatham; GA Effingham
Non-SMSA Counties
GA Appling; GA Atkinson; GA Bacon; GA Bullock; GA Candler; GA Coffee;
GA Evans; GA Jeff Davis; GA Liberty; GA Long; GA Mclntosh; GA Montgomery;
GA Screven; GA Tattinall; GA Toombs; GA Wayne; SC Beaufort; SC Hampton; SC Jasper.
040 Albany, GA
SMSA Counties
0120 Albany, GA
GA Dougherty; GA Lee.
Non-SMSA Counties
GA Baker; GA Ben Hill; GA Berrien; GA Brooks; GA Calhoun; GA Clay; GA Clinch; GA
Colquitt; GA Cook; GA Decatur; GA Early; GA Echols; GA Grady; GA Irwin; GA Lanier,
GA Lowndes; GA Miller; GA Mitchell; GA Randolph; GA Seminole, GA Terrell; GA
Thomas; GA Tift; GA Turner; GA Worth
Florida:
041 Jacksonville, FL:
SMSA Counties
2900 Gainesville, FL
FL Alachua
3600 Jacksonville, FL
FL Baker; FIL Clay; FL Duval; FL Nassau; FL St. Johns.
Non-SMSA Counties
FL Bradford; FL Columbia; FL Dade; FL Gilchrist; FIL Hamilton; FL LaFayetle;
FL Levy; FL Marion; FL Putnam; FL Suwannee; FL Union; GA Brantley; GA Camden;
GA Chariton; GA Glynn; GA Pierce; GA Ware.
042 Orlando - Melbourne - Daytona Beach, FL.
SMSA Counties:
2020 Daytona Beach, FL
FL Volusia.
4900 Melbourne - Tutusville - Cocoa, FL
FL Brevard.
5960 Orlando, FL
FL Orange; FL Osceola; FL Seminole.
Revised 04/23/09
24 of 48
EPA Region 4
19.5
29.6
31.6
27.5
31.7
30.6
29.8
32.1
31.1
20.6
21.8
222
15.7
10.7
15.5
,
'
,
,
'
�
L _�
'
'
,
'
'
�
�
�
I
I
��
�
,
'
,
'
'
,
'
,
,
�I
��
�
,
�
�
'
,
'
� J'
�
r
Non-SMSA Counties
FL Flagler; FL Lake; FL Sumter.
043 Miami - Fort Lauderdale, FL:
SMSA Counties:
2680 Fort Lauderdale - Hollywood, FL
FL. Broward.
5000 Miami, FL
FL Dade.
8960 West Palm Beach - Boca Raton, FL
FL Palm Beach.
Non-SMSA Counties
FL Glades; FL Hendry; FL Indian River, FL Martin; FL Monroe:
FL Okeechobee; FL St. Lucie.
044 Tampa - St Petersburg, FL
SMSA Counties:
1140 Bradenton, FL
FL Manatee.
2700 Fort Myers, FL
FL Lee.
3980 Lakeland - Winter Haven, FL
FL Polk
7510 Sarasota, FL
FL Sarasota.
8280 Tampa - St. Petersburg, FL
FL Hillsborough, FL Pasco; FL Pinellas
Non-SMSA Counties
FL Charlotte; FL Citrus; FL Collier, FL Desoto; FL Hardee; FL Hernando; FL Highlands.
045 Tallahassee. FL:
SMSA Counties:
8240 Tallahassee, FL
FL Leon; FL Wakulla.
Non-SMSA Counties:
FL Calhoun; FL Franklin; FL Gadsden; FIL Jackson; FL Jefferson: FL Liberty;
FIL Madison; FL Taylor.
046 Pensacola - Panama City, FL
SMSA Counties:
8615 Panama City, FL
FIL Bay.
6080 Pensacola, FL
FL Escambia; FL Santa Rosa.
Non-SMSA Counties
FL Gulf, FIL Holmes; FIL Okaloosa; FL Walton; FL Washington.
Kentuc :
056 Paducah, KY:
Non-SMSA Counties
IL Hardin; IL Massac; IL Pope; KY Ballard; KY Caldwell; KY Calloway. KY Carlisle;
KY Crittenden; KY Fulton; KY Graves; KY Hickman; KY Livingston; KY Lyon. KY
McCracken; KY Marshall.
057 Louisville, KY:
SMSA Counties:
4520 Louisville, KY-IN
IN Clark; IN Floyd; KY Bullift; KY Jefferson; KY Oldham.
Non-SMSA Counties
IN Crawford; IN Harrison; IN Jefferson; IN Orange; IN Scott; IN Washington;
KY Breckinridge; KY Grayson; KY Hardin; KY Hart; KY Henry; KY Larue; KY Marion;
KY Meade; KY Nelson; KY Shelby; KY Spencer; KY Trimble; KY Washington.
,
Revised 04/23/09
,
,
25 of 48
EPA Region 4
14.9
15.5
39.5
22.4
30.4
15.9
15.3
18.0
10.5
17.9
17.1
24.3
29.5
14.1
18.3
15.4
5.2
11.2
9.6
058 Lexington, KY
SMSA Counties
4280 Lexington-Fayette, KY
KY Bourbon; KY Clark; KY Fayette; KY Jessamine; KY Scott; KY Woodford.
Non-SMSA Counties
KY Adair KY Anderson; KY Bath; KY Boyle; KY Breathitt; KY Casey; KY Clay;
KY Estill; KY Franklin- KY Garrard; KY Green; KY Harrison- KY Jackson; KY Knott;
KY Lee; KY Leslie; KY Letcher; KY Lincoln; KY Madison; KY Magoffin; KY Menifee;
KY Mercer; KY Montgomery; KY Morgan. KY Nicholas; KY Owsley; KY Perry;
KY Powell; KY Pulaski; KY Rockcastle; KY Russell; KY Taylor; KY Wolfe.
Mississippi:
112 Jackson, MS:
SMSA Counties;
3560 Jackson, MS
MS Hinds; MS Rankin.
Non-SMSA Counties
MS Attala; MS Choctaw; MS Choctaw; MS Clarke; MS Copiah;
MS Covington; MS Franklin; MS Holmes: MS Humphreys; MS Issaquena;
MS Jasper; MS Jefferson; MS Jefferson Davis; MS Jones; MS Kemper;
MS Lauderdale; MS Lawrence; MS Leake; MS Lincoln; MS Lowndes;
MS Madison; MS Neshoba; MS Newton; MS Noxubee,- MS Oktibbeha;
MS Scott; MS Sharkey; MS Simpson; MS Smith; MS Warren; MS Wayne;
MS Winston; MS Yazoo.
North Carolina:
024 Rocky Mount - Wilson - Greenville NC:
Non-SMSA Counties
NC Beaufort; NC Carteret; NC Craven,- NC Dare; NC Edgecombe; NC Greene; NC
Halifax; NC Hyde; NC Jones; NC Lenoir', NC Martin; NC Nash; NC Northampton; NC
Pamlico; NC Pitt; NC Tyrrell; NC Washington; NC Wayne; NC Wilson
025 Wilmington, NC:
SMSA Counties:
9200 Wilmington, NC
NC Brunswick; NC New Hanover.
Non-SMSA counties
NC Columbus; NC Duplin; NC Onslow; NC Pender.
026 Fayetteville, NC:
SMSA Counties:
2560 Fayetteville, NC
NC Cumberland.
Non-SMSA Counties
NC Bladen; NC Hoke; NC Richmond; NC Robeson; NC Sampson; NC Scotland.
027 Raleigh - Durham, NC.
SMSA Counties:
6640 Raleigh - Durham
NG Durham; NC Orange; NC Wake.
Non-SMSA Counties
NC Chatham; NC Franklin; NC Granville; NC Harnett; NC Johnston; NC Lee; NC Person;
NC Vance; NC Warren.
028 Greensboro - Winston Salem - High Point, NC:
SMSA Counties:
1300 Burlington, NC
NC Alamance.
3120 Greensboro - Winston Salem - High Point NC
NC Davidson; NC Forsyth; NC Guilford,- NC Randolf; NC Stokes; NC Yadkin.
Non-SMSA Counties
NC Alleghany; NG Ashe; NC Caswell; NC Davie; NC Montgomery; NC Moore; NC
Rockingham; NC Surry; NC Watauga; NC Wilkes.
Revised 04/23/09 26 of 48
EPA Region 4
10.8
7.0
30.3
32.0
31.7
20.7
23.5
26.2
33.5
22.8
24.7
16.2
16.4
15.5
'
'
r
'
�
'
,
'
'
,
,
S
�
r
�
�
�J
'
'
,
'
029 Charlotte, NC:
, SMSA Counties:
1520 Charlotte - Gastonia, NC
NC Gaston; NC Mecklenburg; NC Union.
Non-SMSA Counties
NC Alexander; NC Anson; NC Burke; NG Cabarrus; NC Caldwell; NC Catawba;
� NC Cleveland; NC Iredell; NC Lincoln; NC Rowan; NC Ruthertord; NC Stanley;
SC Chester, SC Lancaster SC York.
030 Asheville, NC
Non-SMSA Counties:
' 0480 Asheville, NC
NC Buncombe; NC Madison.
Non-SMSA Counties
NC Avery,- NC Cherokee; NC Clay; NC Graham; HC Heywood, NC Henderson;
' NC Jackson; NC McDowell; NC Macon; NC Mitchell; NC Swain; NC Transylvania;
NC Yancey.
South Carolina:
, 031 Greenville -Spartanburg, SC:
SMSA Counties:
316bGreenville -Spartanburg, SC
SC Greenville; SC Pickens; SC Spartanburg.
' Non-SMSA Counties
SC Polk; SC Abbeville; SC Anderson; SC Cherokee', SC Greenwood; SC Laurens;
SC Oconee; SC Union.
.032 Columbia, SC
, SMSA Counties:
1760 Columbia, SC
SC Lexington; SC Richland.
No'n-SMSA Counties
, SC Calhoun SC Clarendon; SC Fairfield; SC Kershaw; SC Lee; SC Newberry;
SC Orangeburg; SC Saluda; SC Sumter
033 Florence, SC
Non-SMSA Counties
' SC Chestertield; SC Darlington; SC Dillon; SC Florence; SC Georgetown; SC Horry;
SC Marion; SC Marlboro; SC Williamsburg.
034 Charleston - North Charleston, SC
SMSA Counties
1440 Charleston - North Charleston, SC
' SC Berkeley; SC Charleston; SC Dorchester.
Non-SMSA Counties
SC Collection
�
L
'
lJ
L_i
�'i
�
Tennessee:
051 Chattanooga, TN:
SMSA Counties
1560 Chattanooga, TN - GA
GA Catoosa; GA Dade; GA Walker; TN Hamilton;TN Marion; TN Sequatchie.
Non-SMSA Counties
AL De Kalb; AL Jackson; GA Chattooga; GA Murray; GA Whitfield;
TN Bledsoe; TN Bradley; TN Grundy; TN McMinn; TN Meigs; TN Monroe;
TN Polk; TN Rhea.
052 Johnson City - Kingsport - Bristol, TN-VA:
SMSA Counties'.
3660 Johnson City - Kingsport - Bristol. TN - VA
TN Carter; TN Hawkins- TN Sullivan; TN Unicoi; TN Washington; VA Scott;
VA Washington; VA Bristol.
Non-SMSA Counties
TN Greene; TN Hancock; TN Johnson; VA Buchanan; VA Dickenson; VA Lee;
VA Russell; VA Smyth; VA Tazewell; VA Wise; VA Norton; WV McDowell, WV Mercer.
Revised 04/23/09
,
,
27 of 48
EPA Region 4
18.5
15.7
8.5
6.3
16.0
17.8
23.4
32.0
33.0
30.0
30.7
12.6
8.6
2.6
3.2
053 Knoxville, TN
SMSA Counties:
3840 Knoxville, TN
TN Anderson; TN Blount; TN Knox; TN Union.
Non-SMSA Counties
KY Bell; KY Harlan; KY Knox; KY Laurel; KY McCreary; KY Wayne; KY Whitley; TN
Campbell; TN Claiborne; TN Cocke; TN Cumberland; TN Fentress; TN Grainger,
TN Hamblen; TN Jefferson; TN Loudon; TN Morgan; TN Roane; TN Scott;
TN Sevier.
054 Nashville, TN:
SMSA Counties:
1660 Clarksville - Hopkinsville, TN - KY
KY Christian; TN Montgomery.
5360 Nashville - Davidson, TN
TN Cheatham, TN Davidson; TN Dickson; TN Robertson; TN Rutherford; TN Sumner;
TN Williamson; TN Wilson.
Non-SMSA Counties
KY Allen; KY Barren; KY Butler; KY Clinton; KY Cumberland; KY Edmonson;
KY Logan; KY Metcalfe; KY Monroe; KY Simpson; KY Todd; KY Trigg; KY Warren;
TN Bedford; TN Cannon; TN Clay; TN Coffee; TN DeKalb; TN Franklin; TN Giles;
TN Hickman; TN Houston; TN Humphreys; TN Jackson; TN Lawrence; TN Lewis;
TN Macon; TN Marshall; TN Maury; TN Moore; TN Overton; TN Perry; TN Pickett;
TN Putnam; TN Smith„ TN Stewart; TN Trouslale; TN Van Buren; TN Warren;
TN Wayne; TN White.
055 Memphis, TN:
SMSA Counties:
4920 Memphis, TN-AR-MS
AR Critteriden; MS Do Soto; TN Shelby; TN Tipton.
Non-SMSA Counties
AR Clay; AR Craighead; AR Cross; AR Greene; AR Lawrence; AR Lee;
AR Mississippi; AR Phillips- AR. Poinsett; AR Randolph; AR St. Francis; MS Alcorn,
MS Benton; MS Bolivar; MSCalhoun; MS Carroll; MS Chickasaw, MS Clay;
MS Coahoma; MS Grenada; MS Itawamba; MS Lafayette; MS Lee; MS Leflore;
MS Marshall; MS Monroe; MS Montgomery; MS Panola; MS Pontotoc; MS Prentiss;
MS Quitman; MS Sunflower; MS Tallahatchie; MS Tate; MS Tippah; MS Tishomingo;
MS Union; MS Washington; MS Webster. MS Yalobusha; MO Dunklin;
MO New Madrid; MO Perniscot; TN Benton; TN Carroll; TN Chester; TN Crockett;
TN Decatur; TN Dyer; TN Fayette; TN Gibson; TN Hardeman; TN Hardin;
TN Haywood; TN Henderson- TN Henry; TN Lake; TN Lauderdale; TN McNairy;
TN Madison; TN Obion; TN Weakley.
Revised 04/23/09
28 of 48
EPA Region 4
6.6
4.5
18.2
15.8
12.0
32.3
26.5
'
,
'
�
'
,
'
'
'
r--�
i
�
,
�
�'
��
���
,
�
�
�
'
'
'
'
�
ul
Attachment Number 7
CHECK LIST OF EEO DOCUMENTATION FOR BIDDERS
ON EPA ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION
(Required by Executive Order 11246 as amended)
T'l�e low, responsive resnonsible bidder must forward the followin� items in duplicate to the
' owner (�ranteel no later than ten (10) days after bid openine The owner (�rantee) shall have one
(1) copv available for inspection by the Office of Federal Contracts Compliance within 14 davs
after the bid o ep nin� The web site for the OFCC is http://www.dol.�ov/esalofc� org.htm.
'
LJ
,
'
,
'
'
'
'
��
�
�
�i
�
��
'
,
,
1. EPA Project Number. Project Location. Type of Construction.
2. Proof of registration with the Joint Reporting Commission. (See Attachment Number 8.)
3. Copy of Affirmative Action Plan of contractor. Indicate company official responsible for
EEO.
4. List of current construction contracts, with dollar amount. List contracting Federal Agency,
if applicable.
5. Statistics concerning company percent workforce, permanent and temporary, by sex, race,
trade, handicapped, and age. 40 CFR Part 7.
6. List of employment sources for project in question. If union sources are utilized, indicate
percentage of minority membership within the union crafts.
7. Anticipated employment needs for this project, by sex, race and trade, with estimate of
minority participation in specific trades.
8. List of subcontractors (name, address and telephone) with dollar amount and duration of
subcontract. Subcontractor contracts over $10,000 must submit items 1- 8.
9. List of any subcontract work yet to be committed with estimate of dollar amount and duration
of contract.
10. Contract Price. Duration of prime contract.
11. DBE Documents - See special instructions regarding use of Minority, and Women Owned,
and Small Businesses.
Revised 04/23/09 29 of 48 EPA Region 4
Emplover Information Report EEO-1
Attachment Number 8
Under the direction of the US Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, the Joint Reporting
Committee is responsible for the full-length, multi-phase processing of employment statistics
collected on the Employer Information Report EEO-L This report, also termed Standard Form
100, details the sex and race/ethnic composition of an employer's work force by job category.
The Employer Information EEO-1 survey is conducted annually under the authority of Public
Law 88-352, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended by the Equal Employment
Opportunity Act of 1972. All employers with 15 or more employees are covered by Public Law
88-352 and are required to keep employment records as specified by Commission regulations.
Based on the number of employees and federal contract activities, certain large employers are
required to file an EEO-1 Report on an annual basis.
The EEO-1 Report must be filed by.
(A) All private employers who are: (1) subject to Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (as
amended by the Equal Employment Opportunity Act of 1972) with 100 or more employees
EXCLUDING State and local governments, primary and secondary school systems, institutions
of higher education, Indian tribes and tax-exempt private memberships clubs other than labor
organizations; OR (2)subject to Title VII who have fewer than 100 employees if the company is
owned or affiliated with another company, or there is centralized ownership, control or
management (such as central control of personnel policies and labor relations) so that the group
legally constitutes a single enterprise and the entire enterprise employs a total of 100 or more
employees.
(B) All federal contractors (private employers), who:(1) are not exempt as provided for by
41 CFR 60-1.5, (2) have 50 or more employees, and (a) are prime contractors or first-tier
subcontractors, and have a contract, subcontract, or purchase order amounting to $50,000 or
more; or (b) serve as depository of Government funds in any amount, or (c) is a financial
institution which is an issuing an paying agent for U.S. Savings Bonds and Notes.
Only those establishments located in the District of Columbia and the 50 states are required to
submit the EEO-1 Report. No Reports should be filed for establishments in Puerto Rico, the
Virgin Islands or other American Protectorates.
When filing for the EEO-1 Report for the first time, go to the web site at:
htt�://www.mimdms.com/jrc.html and select �'iling for the first time• from the box labeled
INFORMATION. File out the electronic questionnaire to enter your company into Joint
Reporting Committee (JRC) system. One you have completed the registration process, you will
be contacted on how to proceed with the EEO-1 Report. If you have previously registered
with the JRC, follow their instructions to update your information.
Revised 04/23/09 30 of 48 EPA Region 4
'
C�
�
�
�
L�
,
,
'
�J
,
LJ
,
,�
��,
�
,
�
i
,
Ir-,i
!
�
'
�
,
�
'
EPA Form 5720 Attachment Number 9
,
Labor Standards Provisions For Federallv Assisted Construction
' Labor standards provisions applicable to contracts covering federally financed and assisted
construction (29 CFR 5.5, Contract Provisions and Related Matters) that apply to EPA Special
� Appropriations Projects grants are:
(a)(4)(iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and
� journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity
requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.
' (a)(5) Compliance with Copeland Aet requirements. The contractor shall comply with the
requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract.
, (a)(6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses
contained in 29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) through (10) and such other clauses as the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the
' subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall
be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the
contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5.
, (a)(7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be
grounds for termination of the contract, and debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as
� provided in 29 CFR 5.12.
� (b) Contractor Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The Administrator, EPA shall cause or
require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(l ),(2),(3),
' and (4) of this section in full in any contract subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses
required by *Section 5.5(a) of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms �aborers. and
' �nechanics• include watchmen and guards.
(1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the
� contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall
require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any work week in which he or she is employed
on such work to in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic
' receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all
hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek.
,
Revised 04/23/09 31 of 48 EPA Region 4
�
�I
(2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of
the clause set forth in paragraph (b) (1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor
responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and
subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the
District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for unliquidated
damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or
mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in
paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual
was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without
payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized
representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys
payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract
or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally- assisted
contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same
prime contractor, such liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and
liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b) (2) of this section.
(4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses
set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the
subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall
be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses
set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section.
(c) In addition to the clauses contained in paragraph (b), in any contract subject only to the
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in
section 5.1, the Administrator of EPA shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert a
clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll
records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the
completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen,
working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such
employee, socia] security number, correct classifications, hourly worked, deductions made, and
actual wages paid. Further, the Administrator of EPA shall cause or require the contracting
officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under
this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying,
or transcription by authorized representaxives of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and
the Departrnent of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to
interview employees during working hours on the job. (Approved by the Office of Management
and Budget under OMB control numbers 1215-0140 and 1215-0017.)
Revised 04/23/09 32 of 48 EPA Region 4
�
'
�
�
'
�
�
J
'
�
�
�
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
LJ
'
u
' CERTIFICATIONS
Debarred Firms
� All prime Construction Contractors shall certify that Subcontractors have not and will not be
awarded to any firm that is currently on the EPA Master List of Debarred, Suspended and
� Voluntarily Excluded Persons in accordance with the provisions of 40 CFR 32.500(c).
Debarment action is taken against a firm for noncompliance with Federal Law.
' All bidders shall complete the attached certification (Attachment Number 10) in duplicate and
submit both copies to the owner with the bid proposal. The owner (grantee) shall transmit one
copy to EPA within 14 days after bid opening.
�
' Anti-lobbving Certification
All prime Construction Contractors must certify (Attachment Number 11) that no appropriated
' funds were or will be expended for the purpose of lobbying the Executive or Legislative
Branches of the Federal Government or Federal Agency concerning this contract (contract in
excess of $100,000). If the Contractor has made or agreed to make payment to influence any
' member of Congress in regard to award of this contract, a Disclosure Form must be completed
and submitted to the owner (grantee) with the bid proposal. The owner must transmit one copy
to the EPA Grants Management Office.
, All prime Contractors must require all Subcontractors to submit the certification which must also
be submitted to the owner (grantee).
'
�
'
�
�
'
Revised 04/23/09 33 of 48 EPA Region 4
��
'
EPA Form 5700-49
Attachment Number 10
CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT,
SUSPENSION AND OTHER RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS
The prospective participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that it and its
principals:
(A) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or
voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency;
(b) Have not within a three year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a
civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in
connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State, or
local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State
antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or
destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property;
(c) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government
entity (Federal. State, or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in
paragraph (1)(b) of this certification; and
'
�
'
�
�
'
1
�
�
(d) Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more '
public transactions (Federal, State, or local) terminated for cause or default.
I understand that a false statement on this certification may be grounds for rejection of this
proposal or termination of the award. In addition, under 18 USC Sec. 1001, a false staxement
may result in a fine of up to $10,000 or imprisonment for up to 5 years, or both.
Typed Name & Title of Authorized Representative
Signature of Authorized Representative
Date
I am unable to certify to the above statements. My explanation is attached.
Revised 04/23/09 34 of 48 EPA Region 4
'
L�
�
�
�
LJ
LJ
'
,
'
,
L�
'
Instructions for Certification Regarding Debarments
Under Executive Order 12549, an individual or organization debarred or excluded from
participation in Federal assistance or benefit programs may not receive any assistance award
under a Federal program, or a subagreement thereunder for $25,000 or more.
Accordingly, each prospective recipient of an EPA grant, loan, or cooperative agreement and any
' contract or subagreement participant thereunder must complete the attached certification or
provide an explanation why they cannot. For further details, see 40 CFR 32.510, Participants'
responsibilities, in the attached regulation.
' Where To Submit:
, The prospective EPA grant, loan, or cooperative agreement recipient must return the signed
certification or explanation with its application to the appropriate EPA Headquarters or Regional
office, as required in the application instructions.
'
�
I��
�
�
�
1
'
'
A prospective prime contractor must submit a completed certification or explanation to the
individual or organization awarding the contract.
Each prospective subcontractor must submit a completed certification or explanation to the prime
contractor for the project.
How To Obtain Forms:
EPA includes the certification form, instructions, and a copy of its implementing regulation (40
CFR Part 32) in each application kit. Applicants may reproduce these materials as needed and
provide them to their prospective prime contractor, who, in turn, may reproduce and provide
them to prospective subcontractors.
Additional copies/assistance may be requested from:
Compliance Branch
Grants Administration Division (PM-216F)
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
401 M Street, S W
Washington, DC 20460
(Telephone : 202/475 -802 5 )
'
iEPA Form 5700-49 (11-88)
Revised 04/23/09
'
'
35 of 48
EPA Region 4
Attachment Number 11
CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING
Certification for Contracts, Grants,
Loans, and Cooperative Agreements
The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that:
(1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the
undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of
an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a
Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any
Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement,
and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract,
grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.
(2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any
person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a
Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of
Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the
undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report
Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions.
(3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award
documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, and contracts under
grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose
accordingly.
This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this
transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certifcation is a prerequisite for making
or entering into this transaction imposed by section 1352, title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who
fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $l 0,000
and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.
TYPED NAME & TITLE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATNE
SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE
I am unable to certify to the above statements. My explanation is attached.
Revised 04/23/09 36 of 48 EPA Region 4
�
,
'
L_J
,
'
'
'
�
L
'
�
,
�
'
'
�
'
�
,
'
'
'
Attachment Number 12
EPA DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM
� EPA's Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program rule applies to contract procurement actions
funded in part by EPA assistance agreements awarded after May 27, 2008. The rule is found at
Federal regulation Title 40, Part 33. Specific responsibilities are highlighted below. The EPA
, EPA form 6100-2, 6100-3, and 6100-4 are not required to be submitted to EPA; because they are
out of date. However the information is still required to be sent to EPA and the forms can be
used.
'
'
i
,
,
�
'
,
I�
�
,
'
,
Grant recipient responsibilities:
• Conduct an Availability Analysis and negotiate fair share objectives with EPA (§ 33.411),
or adopt the fair share objectives of the oversight state agency revolving loan fund for
comparable infrastructure. (§ 33.405(b)(3)).
Include the Appendix A term and condition in each contract with a primary contractor (§
3.106). The term and coiidition is included in the EPA Region 4 contract specifications
insert FEDERAL REQUIREMENTSAND CONTRACT PROVISIONS FOR SPECIAL
APPROPRIATIONACT PROJECTS US ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONAGENCY,
Region III, June 2008.
• Employ the six Good Faith Efforts during prime contractor procurement (§ 33.301).
� Require prime contractor to comply with the following prime contractor requirements of
Title 40 Part 33:
- To employ the six Good Faith Efforts steps in paragraphs {a) through (e) of § 33.301
if the prime contractor awards subcontracts (§ 33.301( fl).
- To provide EPA form 6100-2 — DBE Subcontractor Participation Form to all DBE
subcontractors (§ 33.302(e)).
- To submit EPA forms 6100-3 — DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form and
6100-4 — DBE Program Subcontractor Utilization Form with bid package or
proposal. (§ 33.302 (� and (g)).
- To pay its subcontractor for satisfactory performance no more than 30 days from the
prime contractor's receipt of payment from the recipient (§ 33.302(a)).
- To notify recipient in writing by its prime contractor prior to any termination of a
DBE subcontractor for convenience by the prime contractor (§ 33.302(b)).
Revised 04/23/09
'
'
37 of48
EPA Region 4
- To employ the six good faith efforts described in § 33.301 if soliciting a replacement
subcontractor after a DBE subcontractor fails to complete work under the subcontract
for any reason. (§ 33.302(c)).
To employ the six good faith efforts described in § 33301 even if the prime
contractor has achieved its fair share objectives under subpart D of Part 33.
(§33302(d)).
Semiannually complete and submit to Charles Hayes, EPA Region 4 DBE Coordinator
EPA form 5700-52A summarizing DBE participation achieved during the previous six
months (§ 33.502).
• Maintain records documenting its compliance with the requirements of Title 40 Part 33,
including documentation of its, and its prime contractors', good faith efforts (§
33.501(a)). �
Prime Contractor Responsibilities:
• Employ the six Good Faith Efforts steps in paragraphs (a) through (e) of § 33.301 if the
prime contractor awards subcontracts (§ 33.301(fl).
• Provide EPA form number 6100-2 — DBE Progr-am Subcontractor Participation Form
and form number 6100-3 — DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form to each
DBE subcontractor prior to opening of the contractor's bid or proposal (§ 33302(e) and
�fl)•
• Complete EPA form number 6100-4 — DBE Program Subcontractor Utilization Form (§
33.302(g).
• Submit to recipient with it bid package or proposal the completed EPA form number
6100-4, plus an EPA form number 6100-3 for each DBE subcontractor used in the
contractor's bid or proposal (§ 33.302( fl and (g)).
• Pay subcontractors for satisfactory performance no more than 30 days from the prime
contractor's receipt of payment from the recipient (§ 33.302(a)).
• Notify the recipient in writing prior to prime contractor ternunation of a DBE
subcontractor for convenience (§ 33302(b)).
• Employ the six good faith efforts described in § 33.301 if soliciting a replacement
subcontractor after a DBE subcontractor fails to complete work under the subcontract for
any reason. (§ 33.302(c)).
Revised 04/23/09
38 of48
EPA Region 4
'
�
I�
,
'
CJ
�I
�
'
,
�
'
'
�
�
'
,
'
�
LJ
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
,
�
�
• Employ the six good faith efforts described in § 33.301 even if the prime contractor has
achieved its fau share objectives under subpart D of Part 33. (§33.302(d)).
• Semiannually inform recipient of DBE participation achieved (§ 33.502).
• Maintain records documenting its compliance with the requirements of Title 40 Part 33,
including documentation of its, and its prime contractors', good faith efforts (§
33.501(a)).
Subcontractor Responsibilities:
• May submit EPA form 6100-2 — DBE Subcontractor Participation Form to Charles
Hayes, EPA Region 4 DBE Coordinator (§ 33.302(e)).
• Must complete EPA form 6100-3 — DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form,
and submit it to the prime contractor soliciting services from the subcontractor prior to
the opening of bids for the prime contract.
Form Requirement Provided By: Completed By: Submitted To:
EPA Grant Recipients DBE EPA Region 4 DBE
Form required to have prime Prime Subcontractors Coordinator
6100-2 contractors provide form Contractors Charles Hayes
to Subcontractors
EPA Grant Recipients DBE Grant Recipients as
Form required to have prime Prime Subcontractors part of a bid or
6100-3 contractors provide form Contractors proposal package
to Subcontractors
EPA Grant Recipients Prime Grant Recipients as
Form required to have prime Grant Contractors part of a bid or
6100-4 contractors complete the Recipients proposal package
form
Revised 04/23/09 39 of 48 EPA Region 4
. i� ♦:� [4�:1�:. �..
• e ' �.�,
�c�;��. �
.$�E�'SC;': 's�g��
�:�5.. �7.,� ��`��
�' .., t� Ar • d i. i� _�t E: �'. , 1 8 `(�-Si � lE
II� III IIIII���� �� �
-i � �i � Y 1 A • .�, � �4:� i .4 . � 4.d '6� )t
�i�' !�� ',�I�I°�° ��... � .....�. � n R X�,..� ����
����e �����
�'E '�'�1 , �������in t�� �����
i i��nmj . i �nm qn � I�1 II �1 I�I I� �
�� �� p� � I• ,i i ��.
a •,
Pleasa aase �e spac� �Laes tic ��-}'�t�rE an� s�ems :���sraa ��txne EP�-#�aded �r��ct �e.��... rtias:m fcn
t�mi�sa�ent, �r � sarttrs�, ia#e pae��t atc.;'=.
.i�9G�L3�T
iG►Z6T�SaCT ITE�i Oa ii�'CYR� C9A DESC�S'i£?:k i3f S�A%'S�5 &E�ElS'EL P3�ia14 Si.'SC'Ca2�'I�1LIC►T.
iI'EbC Vfl. 'iT� PR� C�"T�A��'1"i}8 1P6.�3 P.� 8'3[' �
�A"i3tAC�A
�si�fr� ��.ze �ti�; ��
Revised 04/23/09
'^�hcn�Y��*ar,� �� �isrwd � x,esaaraass, f�: ��czdvn, �n trr,��t�aw: s�hr s;suusw tnt,k sa� a�,rK�ra�
m�� s�ca�ta.�sae' u+ �r��i�§r san�r:r� �va asa� � u, $��T`A av,�srd cx iu-aar�-�s ��aan: r.
£�� F'�3�+? 5:��r-: L"I}�� SSi���aC�' �.^�cjn�� � arIIi
40 of 48
EPA Region 4
'
�
�
'
CJ
IJ
C ���
�
,
��
�
,
'
,
�
�
LJ
�
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise
Program DBE Subcontractor
Participation Form
The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is
estimated to average fifteen (15) minutes. Burden means the total time, effort, or
financial resources expended by persons to generate, maintain, retain, or disclose or
provide information to or for a Federal agency. This includes the time needed to review
instructions; develop, acquire, install, and utilize technology and systems for the
purposes of collecting, validating, and verifying information, processing and
maintaining information, and disclosing and providing information; adjust the existing
ways to comply with any previously applicable instructions and requirements; train
personnel to be able to respond to a collection of information; search data sources;
complete and review the collection of information; and transmit or otherwise disclose
the information. An agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to
respond to, a collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control
number.
Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided
burden estimates, and any suggested methods for m;n;m;�ing respondent burden,
including the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection
Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822), 1200 Pennsylvania
Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any
correspondence. Do not send the completed EPA DBE Subcontractor Participation Form
to this address.
EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form)
Revised 04/23/09
�
'
41 of 48
EPA Region 4
.a �. ��s�a .
:.�`-5... Y �f - 'wr:D'v,�
'.z�f :uura3:tia ��+p4X*CS
i��� T�w:"if2s''
^sI ti3,P`�:.^ �1
T)ira�t �:tta�et� Bu�sn�SS EiiteIgr%� P��AI�1
D�E Subtt�ntractcs� Perf�e Fc�nn
P�.1�SE �f'JF SL"�C'C1'!7'ifl�,4�Tt}Ft., �Ri��EC'E' ��AASE
�iDD1�E55 BiL3�!FTkC]PYDaA�. �i7r�
'�i.EPiiQ:+.`� Iti 0. E �9:AIi ?iI9DRE55
P�L'4IE C43V'I'R.r�k�T�O� ;*t,414�fE
Ct�'ti�CT 1TEXS i?f Y1fYRT: C7� L?E,si�C'e73PTi5.'�ti C�F 5£Ft�'ICES S�'d3 ?U PRICE CsF iti'�3Rb:
i'I°El.3 :�tfl. PRIIeiE �i.BAa��D T'O
P'StIFaSE COA"�R S.�`'I'L>&
�'z�zrc�ntir ��€��ied as aaa ��� �€3 3�'� 3E � EP�'s �i�S� i�'r�am' �:"� .�� 5a.�a:a�r� ef
Ari�m� ���racE+¢�r'3,.'�ake Ps�: :aa�a� Tz�]e
;��..�9a3g � :sa��ac��ractes Liatbe
Fsix�t
g`'k�3Y3E T's£;�e
�:�a,nc�nzaira.�� yn xs.seas� e� � ar�n�a�ti��, farrve.. l� w,rtt�ar8:., �+�r �mal�o,tids;uq( rw$�:x� � �r�an�.:�e ��m..wre�r.rM a�.^�i#� a c.,:�r�rw:::ira
�a- � n�„7x� s�•e-a�:.°m� �trwawart xn � �'.Po. r�3a•cre:. az£ �xnl- :�sm;t:z�as;:.:..
.�"r:4 i�'J^.^^.�i �SI �G-: ;'L'i$� 51s3���'bcf€1r �€fi6¢s�E Fs�iL°�;i
Revised 04/23/09 42 of 48 EPA Region 4
'
'
�
,
'
� , .�
» �: . �,
�����
�,�t �s>��r��
__�-,��.: osf•�:y.���
D�adrantaged B�sin� Eaferprise i�ogr�
L7�8E 5�11�n��ct� P��an�axice F�n
,
'li^� �.k�lic r�� �vi re:c��kee�an�e k�-dez� fo� �� �i�c'tis�: c�f in��sar.ahs�a is es�tiu�te3 � ati-era�e i"ifaeer.
�`�5i rninu€�+s. a��er �eans tlr� ta:a3 tixn�, e:i�:. ea �ia.*�.� ses+�urs�+s r*:}�sc�ea br g�rsc� Err g�^,erate.
' aviniain, r�tr�ra� ssr �ios� c� p�s��ic#e � tfc�raufi�rz: :a �r fsr. a iede�a3 �� :i�sz ���ses ii�ue �e �3ed t�
r�;:.,e�a• i�s+avs�txix�; �esYel�, �a: .>e. isrstail, � utiii:� �hsua;t�� azs� z-.�st�ara �,a: 'i�e �tr�es +�f ca�.e�ti�
ra�fciaan�, az� rai#j� infarna��car4. �+r�esss� and aasa;.~�sra�:�t� s��f�rmatiar., aixd �i�c�ix!� �rt3 pzckrc.��°.�
in#��s�a��,: adius4 t� ex:s=�z,� 1z^at-s t. ��m�13* roa-itk! �r� �ec-�cus.,• ag���le ins�s�cti�zss and r�q�ea�n3s;
' tzain �zsta�,nei t+� �e a�� ��,d t� a ccs3l�ctia� �# �€aisiuti�r. sea�rh �aa �.urties. �:aa�g�e:e ar.3:e�i�- th�
�ll��s� o€ usfcuxtut��: a�� trar,s�it ez c-iheas�-is� uis+la�a �e iza#a.°sr�a��i �t s�e�u^� �z• .*�oot c+�u3uc: os
�crau�:, a.*ui a p�-�ax is nvt zequiied :rs res�� �c:. a cail�c�a ci infs�r:.a�,c�n arl:es5 :z c�:s�sun� a�entlr
r� �i� �,�n#m?' n��2�. �
'
�
�en;i :r�7u-i�x�.x^s ��.�gg��-r�-'s n�eci fo¢ tksis :s�fsa�iatis.u�z, tll� aesvratzt• �i t�� gret„�ed 'z*urd�tc s�st��ttes, an�i
assr s��s�e� ��th�u�s fs� mi:t:�:i�t� x�sg�ci�.t b�srser ux�?�� �se u� of autcutia�d .s:z=et ��s t�cltxuc�uu�s
t� ��is�tt�x, �rll�cti:a� �hat+e„�es I�zs��n, �' �+. E.�rT.zr��n3;a1 r rat�.�t�m ��� f?5_? i, °<'00 Far,r.st li=a,r�%a
A��e.. :��i�#. i�'ash:xt�r D�'. ?l'�bi�. Includ� kh� ��i'� c�t�al nwnbex in am; c�zr�s���der�ce. Ise A�t sex� tii�
comgle�ed �:P� D�� ��tzcenirackcxi F�foia�rice ���a #� tt+,is a��s�. �
'
'
�
'
'
,
�
Revised 04/23/09
,
,
�r'� �'J_�'�ii 5l3dfi-* �$E ��tKS�L'�atr�a: F;-€aasm�:�: �3
43 of 48
EPA Region 4
R.3 �
. ..
ca�s c�-� ::�:
�. �tt� ,, .
� ���- r��`�s rsr��
L'�i�ad�aint�ge,d 8t��x�ss Enter��e �r�gr�x
L7�SE SuLa�c�m#r�r.-t�r L�#iliaati� Faiu�
s�/P�t.��asaL r�t�. �st�J�'i �_���
'�'ti'A�rSE flF PitIA.fE �I'gL3�'PR�Pt3S�R £-�L4II. �I7DRE5.5
Ai3DRES5
TEL£P3�f3ti� i�Q_ �'� 2�G_
The f�a�I�w�•i.Bags�abeontrac�t�r� cui�i l�e ia�� on this �r�ject:
Ct�AdP�,9�1''1' :v' °ah4'€�, 3.�7�RE55:,. Piii.�'Yd+IE TY".F'£ �i'4'!'C7Riii: T�Q' P'@ P53I's1.`.3'E t^L'miR�+.'i'�'4 i
ZV'Z'dtl:48EStr .4_"n'i3 �£-7MI.aIZL .�I373SL.'ES�TS PERFLSA3SEQ � �LLAR C'ER°SIiiEZ9
.hItdGSL':'�IT' :w� s'ti: T duiBeE
4A WBE?
: ce��fi' aasu�ex �*�rwi'tt* o€ ��- �at ti� fie+r�s.� �Eat�exets �s� �°�ate and. r�arr��. Ses � �rex�t �r€ �
r�3�,:+ea�# a�' a s: kz��x�-�sEcrr, I�zli ���r� 5c+ �he re�lac�e�� x�ar���.'s se: ic¢-tiz ar. ?�+ �� 3's3�t �'�
S��ar. 3���i c3.
�zgnat�esr� c� P�..^^�e C€�rkr�aa� L�ata
P�i�.t ?�;axrs� : iti�
'�,<il:+��:^s��.-�:ss �x t�'areru a� a ���., �ar�,.. �� rnc�ux:r, +±r� r:n�3ian�N;3al w�= �raa+r� �r• �ra .�}'�°�nj�t wsi� a . xvt+sr���a
�r,- §. x-rM�3r, �s�sm-kc.;s- �,.air�a�snt :b+a �zn I:'.�'.� aa„�cs� a� farti��:.sa-4 � � :a�.. �
f'r 4 �=�"4: �I�SG-='s`�kB= �'ub��*im:tu ::t'1�'� : •(�a:�
Revised 04/23/09 44 of 48 EPA Region 4
'
L�
�
'
'
,
,
,
��R..��
�. �.� :a .
� �� ��; �
�. ��
a�+Fa�c�c'sl E�^'='xs- t�i: Si;':�521
�%'tS�BII� $�.i�55 ���S�C �T�311
I38E �u�antrac[o�� LTtilizaii�rn F�axm
I3�s gub',s� z�r;� �, ��tan-�e�xte� �nir3en fo3 �liis c.���oa� �# i�¢a��t�c�t as c�ti.a�at�t t4 es�era� �ift�n
E:.S� �tes. �u�-sl�er� �� th� i�E�& �e effa�r� � fi�srdrs�a resc�u�e> �:p�de�3 �ar p,ezson i� �ea�g�.
mai3t'rain t��'tai�s, su 3iscic� cu� p�rr�� �sf�uni,atia�: tc � f� a�e�-al a�-. 3his ineiia,d�s ti� �e nee�ed tc
r�e+`iekw zzcsaw:t�aars: �=eitr�a, a.c�virf. �.s;al�. ��aEs� � araci �rs:te�as #er thg �u�rs�s v€ c�em3�echsi�.
^aiicistin�, azui ��if� arr� in�a�a�ah�, gracas�:g �.d �air�t�a� ixrfarma� ais3 discic+s� ��ra��sc�g
rn#�-ma�mx: ad}us� the ��tsz•� sa-s�s-s to r�E� w-s�► anx �arezia�asJx a�?acahie �.s�vc�c� and :�,;*�ts;.
��n �sors�ef tc � a�le � resp�atSl ac� a c�u:��cm �# ixsf�saaor;.' se�ci� data �v:t�s: c�s�le� �d re�-a�sv tiv�
:c�llacta� �f irx,f�srn�a�aax; �d transaa�at c+r o�eru-ase disel�se tts� mfennla�� r's.aa ��enr�- ma�, xaa: eca�u� csx
s�crnsz�r �xa a g�r,�ms is nvt z�q�r!ed t�s res� #a, a e����cut ,af �.fc�smaaar. uisless i� �is��]a�-s a:�ass�r�:�
�-a��a a.""+.:vi� scxn�v.'> �itaua;��. -
�;ensl �wxe�as an the .:�°x•'s s�3. f�r t�.is �sfraxtia.tic+s��. t1� �:rura�• �# ti:� p.es:a�d �+urd�n �rs#;�saates, ar,�i
' atz�= s��s:eel zzseti�s har a��si�x� r�p�rzden# b�r�ea� �:�:,�r;� � us� �f aut�ru�a'teci c�s.:.�e+:�en L�1uliaugs
tC3 �IE �."71�2C�S' 2, �r'll@'C'�.iC%iY r`J�'3'���,1E5 �45�1'$r:7:i �:E.J', �S�RIifE"�Tb�1i'�3�. �''%'b�Ctn{S,�CS Y`�.��Eilt't�� S�^ f� �?�[) �TEE'�i:rl��d'�i
�ke., _�i":, i�as§s:x;�r D�. 2�_ inclu3� tt� i?Af8 can-�al numireF an arri c�..n�sp�ad��.e. ��:rat sfnzi t��e
�t*ati�1e;�� �I' �. D�� 5�k;:tns��-�-ta�r :'t•�:�a.�mri?�+�m €a #hi� ��dr�ss.
'
'
'
�
'
,
'
i�?L F£r�� �1�G-= ;L�$� 5°u*���ca�r :,'t:il�� �;
�
Revised 04/23/09
,
'
45 of 48
EPA Region 4
Attachment Number 13
Re ion 4
. � � ��+`. `:' . �BL� ::
�,..�. , �_ . _ � _
Kentuc Construction 0.70% 7.60%
Su lies 3.70% 4.60%
Services 1.20% 16.30%
Goods/E ui ment 1.20% 1.10%
Combined
�
Florida DEP Construction 9.00% 3.00%
Su lies
Services
Goods/E ui ment
Combined
Florida - Hillsborou h Coun Construction 20.00% 20.00%
Su lies 10.00% 10.00%
Services 10.00% 10.00%
Goods/E ui ment 10.00% 10.00%
Combined
�r.-'. ,. ,..
South Carolina Construction 3.60% 2.40%
Su lies 9.00% 9.00%
Services 11.00% 11.00%
Goods/E ui ment 10.00% 10.00%
Combined
.} } �.x n €
Tennessee Construction 2.60% 2.60%
Su lies 5.20% 5.20%
Services 5.20% 5.20%
Goods ui ment 5.20% 5.20%
Combined
_ . � �. . ,..,' „ 't f " ,. ,?�..' " '
Mississi i- Non-SRF Pro rams Construction
Su lies 7.70% 3.40%
Services 1.10% 2.20%
Goods/E ui ment 6.80% 5.10%
Combined
Revised 04/23/09
46 of 48
EPA Region 4
,
�
�
1
'
�
'
,
,
'
'
�
li�
LJ
,
'
'
i
,
'
,
,
�
LJ
�
�
,
LJ
'
'
,
,
�
1
,
'
�
�1
1
Revised 04/23/09 47 of 48 EPA Region 4
'
'
Attachment Number 14 �
BONDS AND INSURANCE
The minimum requirements shall be as follows:
Bonding requirements for contracts of $100,000 or less are contained in 40 CFR 31.36(h).
Bond requirements for contracts in excess of $100,000 axe:
< Bid guarantee equivalent to five percent of the bid price. The bid guarantee shall consist
of a firm commitment such as a certified check or bid bond submitted with the bid;
< Performance bond equal to 100 percent of the contract price, and
< Payment bond equal to 100 percent of the contract price. Bonds must be obtained from
companies holding Certificates of Authority as acceptable sureties, issued by the U. S.
Treasury.
Insurance requirements are contained in the General Conditions of the contract. In addition to
the other required insurance, the owner or the contractor, as appropriate, must acquire any flood
insurance made available by the Federal Emergency Management Agency as required by 44 CFR
Parts 59-79, if construction will take place in a flood hazard area identified by the Federal
Emergency Management Agency. The owner's requirements on Flood Insurance are contained
in the Special Conditions Section of the Contracts Documents.
Revise� 04/23/09
48 of 48
EPA Region 4
'
,
�
,
,
,
,
'
L�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
,
'
r
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents:
, SECTION IV .................................................................................................................................. i
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... i
�
�
�
'
�
'
'
'
'
1
,
�
�
�
'
1 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 5
2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 7
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 7
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS ............................................................................. 7
2.1.2 LAYO UT DATA ....................................................................................................... 7
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................. 7
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 7
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 8
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 8
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 9
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 9
6 CONCRETE ....................................................................................................................10
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .........................................11
7.1 EXCAVATION ...............................................................................................................11
7.2 FORMS ..........................................................................................................................11
8
�
10
REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................................................11
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..................................................................................................11
OBSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................11
RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
AND STREET PAVEMENT ..........................................................................................12
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................12
12 DEWATERING ...............................................................................................................13
12.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................13
12.2 PERMIT REQUIlZEMENTS ........................................................................................ 13
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 13
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND
WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY ........................... 13
13 SANITARY MANHOLES ..............................................................................................16
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 16
13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 16
Updated Secrion N Bid.doc i OS/14/12
13. 2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMEIV7' RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 17
13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 17
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 17
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 17
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES .................................................•-•......................... 17
14
15
16
16.1
17
17.1
17.2
18
18.1
18.2
BACKFILL......................................................................................................................17
STREET CROSSINGS, ETC . .......................................................................................18
RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES................................................................................................................18
BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 18
UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL .....................................................................18
BASIS OF MEASUREIv1ENT ...................................................................................... 18
BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 18
UNDERDRAINS.............................................................................................................18
BASIS OF MEASUREIVIENT ...................................................................................... 19
BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 19
19 STORM SEWERS ..........................................................................................................19
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ..................�....................................................................... 20
19.2 TESTING ..........................�............................................................................................20
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 20
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 20
20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 20
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 20
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 21
20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 21
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 21
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ...................... ....................................................................... 21
20.3 AS BUII,T DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 22
20.4 TESTING ......................................................................................................................22
20.4.1 TESTINGOFGRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................22
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 22
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 22
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 22
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 23
21 DRAINAGE .....................................................................................................................23
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 23
22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 23
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEAS UREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 24
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............................... 25
22.2 SUBGRADE .................................................................................................................25
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEAS UREMENT ................................................................................ 25
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 25
Updated Section N Bid.doc ri OS/14/12
1
1
�
'
i
�
�
'
�
'
'
,
'
'
�
r
1
'
'
,
,
'
�
,
,
�
,
,
'
,
'
�
,
'
'
,
'
�
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 25
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 25
23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................25
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 26
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALI'I'Y ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 26
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 26
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 27
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 27
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 28
23.6.1 CRACKS ................................................................................................................28
23.6.2 POTHOLES ...........................................................................................................28
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 28
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 29
23.9 SUPERPAVEASPHALTIC CONCRE'I'E .................................................................... 29
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 30
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 30
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 30
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 31
2
2
2
2
25 .1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 31
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................31
25.1.2 PRODUCTS ..........................................................................................................32
25.1.3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................................36
25.2 LANDSCAPE ...............................................................................................................40
25.2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................40
25. 2. 2 PROD UCTS .......................................................................................................... 45
25.2.3 EXECUTION.....-• ..................................................................................................48
6 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 55
26.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 55
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 55
26.3 MA'I'ERIALS ................................................................................................................ 55
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 56
26.5 'I'ELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 56
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 56
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ........................................................................��----....... 57
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 57
26.9 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................57
7 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 57
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 57
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 57
8 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 58
9 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 58
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ........................................•--........................................... 58
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 58
Updated Section IV Bid.doc
�
OS/14/12
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 58
30.1 CONCRE'I'E SIDEWALKS ..............................................................••-•••-..................... 58
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................................................................................... 58
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 59
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................•-•--................ 59
SODDING........................................................................................................................ 59
SEEDING......................................................................................................................... 59
STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES................................................................................................................ 60
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 60
33.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 60
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 61
MATERIALUSED ......................................................................................................... 61
CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 61
STREETSIGNS .............................................................................................................. 61
AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 61
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 61
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 61
37.3 PROF'ESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 61
37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 61
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 62
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 62
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 62
37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 62
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 62
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 63
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 63
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 63
EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 63
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 63
382 PROTECTION AND STABII.IZATION OF SOII. STOCKPILES ............................. 63
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 63
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ 64
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 64
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 64
38.7 SWALES, DI'I'CHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 64
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTII.ITY CONSTRUCTION ................................................ ... 65
38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 65
38.10 COMPLIANCE .............................................................................................................65
UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 68
AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 68
Updated Section IV Bid.doc iv
,
'
�
1
LJ
�
�
1
II
�
r
C�
'
�
�
'
,
�
'
'
OS/14/12
�
,
� 41
�
,
�
�
,
,
C
1
'
'
POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES....................................................................................................... 68
41.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 68
41.2 MA'I'ERIALS ................................................................................................................ 69
41.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 69
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 69
41.2.3 GATE UALVES ...................................................................................................... 71
41.2.4 UALVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 71
41.2.5 HYDRANTS ...........................................................................................................72
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 73
41. 2. 7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS .................................................................. 73
41.2. 8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................ 73
41. 2. 9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 74
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 74
41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................74
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 74
41. 3. 2 PIPE LAYING ....................................................................................................... 74
41. 3.3 SETTING OF UALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS ......................................... 76
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 76
41.4 TESTS ...........................................................................................................................77
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 77
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 77
41.5 STERII.,IZATION ......................................................................................................... 77
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 77
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 77
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCED URE .......................................................................... 77
41.5.4 RESID UAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 78
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 78
41.6 MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 78
41.6.1 GENER4L .............................................................................................................78
41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 79
41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITI7NGS ................................................................... 79
, 41. 6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE UALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND
COVERS..................................................................................................••-•-•---..... 79
41. 6. S FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 79
� 42
43
'
'
L
,
�
L�
GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 80
TENNISCOURTS .......................................................................................................... 80
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ...................................
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ......................................
43.1. 2 BASE CO URSE ..............................................
43.1.3 PRIME COAT ................................................
43.1.4 LEVELING CO URSE .....................................
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ......................................
43.1. 6 COLOR COAT ...............................................
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS .....................................
43.2.1 GENERAL ......................................................
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION .....................................
Updated Section N Bid.doc
v
..................................................... 80
..................................................... 80
..................................................... 80
..................................................... 80
..................................................... 80
..................................................... 80
.......... ........................................... 81
..................................................... 82
..................................................... 82
..................................................... 83
OSl14/12
43.2.3
43.2.4
43.2.5
43.2.6
43.2.7
43.2.8
43.2.9
43.2.10
43.2.11
43.2.12
43.2.13
43.2.14
43.2.15
43.2.16
43.2.17
SLOPE.... ................ .. . . . . ....... ....... ......................................... . ... ............ .................. 83
BASECONSTR UCTION ....................................................................................... 84
PERIMETERCURBING ....................................................................................... 84
SURFACECO URSE ............................................................................................. 84
ROOTBARRIER ..................................................................................••-•............. 84
FENCING............................................................................................................. 85
WINDSCREENS........................................................................ ............................ 85
COURT EQ UIPMENT .......................................................................................... 85
SHADESTRUCTURE ........................................................................................... 87
WATER SOURCE (Potable) .................................................................................. 87
CONCRETE. . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . ... ..... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .... . . . .. . . . ... . .. . . . . . .. . ... . . . 87
EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ................................................. 87
WATERCOOLER .................................................................................................. 88
DEMONSTRATION. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . 88
WARRANTY. . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 88
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 89
45
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 89
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 89
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ......................................................................................... 89
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 90
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ............................ 90
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ................. 90
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS> MINOR ARTERIALS ......................................................... 90
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ............................................................................................. 90
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 90
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 91
44.6 PAYMENT FOR W ORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 91
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 91
45.1
45.2
45.3
45.4
45.5
45.6
45.7
45.8
45.9
CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 91
INTENT........................................................................................................................ 91
PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABIL,ITY ........................ 92
MA'I'ERIALS ................................................................................................................ 92
CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 92
TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 93
LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 93
LA'I`ERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 93
TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 93
PAYMENT...................•---............................................................................................. 93
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHI'LENE SLIPLIIVING ..................................... 94
46.1 MATERIALS ................................................
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ...........................
46.1.2 Q UALI7'Y CONTROL ...........................
46.1.3 SAMPLES ..............................................
46.1.4 REJECTION ..........................................
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS .....................................
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES .................
Updated Section N Bid.doc
vi
........................................ 94
........................................ 94
........................................ 94
,.... ................................... 94
. .......................................
........................................ 94
........................................ 95
'
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
'
L;
l_J
�
LJ
L�
'
��
'
OS/14/12
,
'
,
'
,
'
,
'
,
1
�
,
,
,
,
�
�
'
'
'
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ........................................................................................... 95
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS .................................................................... 95
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING ..................................................................................................... 95
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ............................................................................. 95
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ........................................................................................ 95
46.4.1 PIPE REQ UIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS ...................................................... 95
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ........................................................................... 95
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .......................................................... 96
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ................................................................................ 96
46.4. S CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ...................................................................... 96
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ................................................ 96
46.4. 7 BACKFILLING ..................................................................................................... 97
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR ..................................................................................................... 97
46.4. 9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ................................................................................... 97
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 97
47.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 97
47.2 MA'I'ERIALS ................................................................................................................ 97
47.3 PIPE .............................................................................................................................. 97
47.4 JOINING SYS'I'EM ...................................................................................................... 98
47.5 FITTINGS ..................................................................................................................... 98
8 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 98
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 98
482 REHABII.TTATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 98
48.3 COMPOSITION ........................................................................................................... 98
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 99
48.5 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 99
48.6 WATER ......................................................................................................................... 99
48.7 REINFORCEMENT ..................................................................................................... 99
48.8 STORAGE OF MA'I'ERIALS ....................................................................................... 99
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ....................................................................................... 100
48.10 PROPORTIONING .....................................................................................................100
48.11 MIXING ......................................................................................................................100
48.12 APPLICATION ...........................................................................................................100
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................................... 101
48.14 SURFACE FINISH ..................................................................................................... 101
48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................................... 101
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ................................................................... 101
48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 102
48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 102
9 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION .........................103
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ............................................................................................... 103
49.2 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................. 103
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 103
49.3.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................103
49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTIDN .................................................................. 104
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 104
4
4
Updated Section N Bid.doc
vii
OS/14/12
49.4.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................105
49.5 INFII.TRATION CONTROL ...................................................................................... 105
49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 105
49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ 105
49.8 WA'TER ....................................................................................................................... 106
49.9 OTI�R MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 106
49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 106
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 106
49.11.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................106
49.11.2 MIXING ...............................................................................................................107
49.11.3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 107
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 107
49.11.5 CURING ..............................................................................................................107
49.11. 6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 108
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 108
49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................108
49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................108
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ...................................................................110
50
51
52
53
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ...........................................................................112
IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM .............................................................112
51.1 SCOPE ...............................................................
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ............................
51.2.1 ASPHALT ...................................................
51.2.2 CONCRETE ................................................
51.2.3 CO URT PATCH BINDER MIX ...................
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE.
51.5 PLEXIFI..OR APPLICATION ...........................
51 6 PLAYING LINES
.......................................................112
.......................................................113
.......................................................113
.......................................................
.......................................................113
.......................................................113
.......................................................114
.......................................................114
. .......................................................................................................:114
51.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 114
51.8 LIlVIITATIONS .............................................................................................................114
RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................115
GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................115
53.1 MA'TERIAL .................................................................................
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL ...................
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL : ...............
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ................................................................
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ........................................................
53.2 PERFORMANCE .............................................•..........................
........... .........115
....................11 S
....................117
....................118
....................118
....................118
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................119
54.1 SCOPE .........................................................................................................................119
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK .........................................................................................119
54.3 WORK METHODS ....--•-•-• ......................................................................................... 120
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ....................................................................... 120
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ........................................................................... 120
Updated Section N Bid.doc
viii
�
L
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
�
�
� _,
�
L�
�
,
r- ,
�
„
'
'
'
OS/14/12
,
a
,
,
,
,
,
�
,
,
'
'
,
�
�
�
'
'
'
�
54.4 LI'I"I'ER .......................................................................................................................120
54.5 VISUAL CHECK ....................................................................................................... 120
54.6 PLANT TRIlvIMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 120
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 120
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 120
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ 121
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 121
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... 121
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... 121
54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... 121
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 121
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... 121
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 121
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 122
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 122
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 122
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. l 22
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 122
55 MII,LING OPERATIONS ...........................................................................................123
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MII.LED SURFACE ...................................... 123
55.2 ADDITIONAL MII.LING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 123
55.3 SALUAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. 124
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 124
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 124
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 124
55.7 TYPES OF MII.LING ................................................................................................ 124
55.8 MII.,LING OF INTERSECTIONS ..............................•--�--..............................----....._.. 125
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 125
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 125
56
57
58
59
60
61
CLEARING AND GRUBBING ...................................................................................125
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 125
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 125
RIPRAP.........................................................................................................................125
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 125
572 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 126
TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................126
58.1 HAZARD PO'I'ENTIAL ............................................................................................. 126
58.2 REQUIlZED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 126
TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ...........................................126
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 127
SIGNING AND MARKING .........................................................................................127
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 127
ROADWAY LIGHTING ..............................................................................................127
Updated Section N Bid.doc
ix
OS/14/12
61.1
62
62.1
62.2
62.3
63
63.1
63.2
63.3
63.4
63.5
63.6
63.7
64
64.1
64.2
BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 127
TREE PROTECTION ..................................................................................................128
TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 128
ROOTPRUNING ....................................................................................................... 128
PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 129
PROJECT WEB PAGES ..............................................................................................130
WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 130
WEB ACCESSIBILI'I'Y GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 130
THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND TTS USE ....................................................... 130
MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 131
INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... 131
POS T1NG ..... .................. ............ ..... ............. ...... ................. . .......... ..................... ........ 131
WEB PAGES UPDA'I'ES ............................................................................................ 131
OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE ......................................................131
CLEARANCE OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 131
REQUIRED MINIMIJM CLEARANCE DISTANCES ............................................. 131
Updated Section IV Bid.doc x
'
L�
,
'
'
i�
��
,
'
,
,
'
'
,
�
!
1
1
1
OS/14/12
'
'
,
1
' 1.1
'
L�I!
,
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
SCOPE OF WORK
SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name: MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
Project Number: 11-0053-UT
Scope of Work:
The work consists of rehabilitating existing circular clarifiers and associated equipment at the
City's Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) as described herein.
Restrictions for this Project:
All work associated with this project is to be performed at the City of Clearwater's Marshall
Street WRF as part of an overall program to rehabilitate the clarifiers in all of the City's WRFs.
The work of this project only involves the Marshall Street WRF and the Contractor shall
disregard all references to the Northeast Plant (WRF) and the East Plant or (WRF�.
, This water reclamation facility is an operating facility that must remain in operation and comply
with FDEP Permit requirements at all times. The work of the contractor shall at all times be
scheduled and executed to ensure that the impact on plant operations is minimized.
'
'
LJ
'
IJ
i
�
�
'
L�
I
LJ
1. Northeast Plant: Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and North RAS Pump House
• Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 1 thru 4 including the center
columns, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge
handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports,
the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items.
• Replace the scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the
first pipe joint or fitting outside the clarifier wall. Replace the link seals for the wall
penetrations. Saw cut, remove and restore the overbearing concrete slab as required to
replace the scum pipe wall penetrations.
� Replace two RAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re-grout the pump bases.
Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping.
• Remove the existing copper piping associated with the existing flow matcher VFDs.
Plug the copper pipe to liquid connections with appropriate fittings on the RAS piping
and at the RAS well.
• Replace two RAS pump suction plug valves.
• Replace two RAS pump discharge check valves.
• Replace two RAS pump discharge butterfly valves,
• Replace two WAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re-grout the bases.
Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping.
• Replace the MCC, electrical panels, conduit, and wire as shown.
• Add current trip devices to the clarifier drive motor starters. Integrate the trip devices
into the plant SCADA system.
, • Replace the seals in four telescopic valves,
Updated Secrion N Bid.doc Page 1 of 132
�
��
OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specificarions
� Cut in and add a WAS flow meter to the WAS piping.
• Replace 1 WAS plug valve.
• Replace RAS piping supports. Replace a11 pipe supports on the suction piping for the
WAS pumps.
� Paint the new RAS and WAS pumps, piping, supports, and valves to match existing.
• Replace the supports under the RAS pump suction valves with fabricated stainless steel
supports. These are similar to Piping Technology & Products Figure 46 supports.
• Replace the nosings on iive sets of stairs.
� Replace one ultrasonic RAS well level detector. Replace one low level switch in the
RAS well.
• Relocate four existing sludge blanket level detector probes from the existing walkway
bridges to the new walkway bridges.
� Integrate monitoring and control signals for all clarifier drives and starters, all blanket
level detectors, both RAS pump motor VFDs, both WAS pump motor VFDs, the WAS
flow meter, the RAS well level detector, and the RAS well low level switch into pump
control logic and the plant SCADA system.
• Add 8 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of 32
ground water pressure relief valves are to be added.
• Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new bridge for scum control.
• Add a 1-inch hose bib to each new clarifier access platform.
• Add scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls to each scum trough for scum
control.
• Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and pernut a groundwater dewatering system as
required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty. The Contractor
shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks.
2. Northeast Plant: Clarifiers 5 thru 8 and South RAS Pump House
• Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 5 thru 8 including the center
columns, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge
handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports,
the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items.
• Replace the scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the
first pipe joint or fitting outside the clariiier wall. Use schedule 80 PVC pipe for the new
installation. Replace the link seals for the wa11 penetrations. Saw cut, remove and restore
the overbearing concrete slab as required to replace the scum pipe wall penetrations.
• Replace two RAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re-grout the pump bases.
Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 2 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
�
LJ
'
'
,
�
�
'
'
l�
'
'
'
r-
I
�
,
,
�J
'
r
,
�
�
,
,
�
�
'
�
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
• Remove the existing copper piping associated with the existing flow matcher VFDs.
Plug the copper pipe to liquid connections with appropriate fittings on the RAS piping
and at the RAS well.
• Replace two RAS pump suction plug valves.
• Replace two RAS pump discharge check valves.
• Replace two RAS pump discharge butterfly valves.
• Replace the MCC, electrical panels, conduit, and wire as shown.
• Add current trip devices to the clarifier drive motor starters.
into the plant SCADA system.
• Replace the seals in four telescopic valves.
Integrate the trip devices
• Replace RAS piping supports.
• Paint the new RAS pumps, piping, supports, and valves to match existing.
• Replace the supports under the RAS pump suction valves with fabricated stainless steel
supports. These are similar to Piping Technology & Products Figure 46 supports.
• Replace one ultrasonic RAS well level detector. Replace one low level switch in the
RAS well.
• Relocate four existing sludge blanket level detector probes from the existing walkway
bridges to the new walkway bridges.
� Integrate monitoring and control signals for all clarifier drives and starters, all blanket
level detectors, both RAS pump motor VFDs, both WAS pump motor VFDs, the WAS
flow meter, the RAS well level detector, and the RAS well low level switch into pump
control logic and the plant SCADA system.
• Replace 8 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of
32 ground water pressure relief valves are to be replaced.
• Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new bridge for scum control.
• Add a 1-inch hose bib to each clarifier access platform.
• Add scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls to each scum trough for scum
control.
• Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as
required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty. The Contractor
shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks.
3. Marshall Street Plant
� This project may potentially be funded by USEPA. See Section II, Paragraph 23 for
Bidder/Contractor requirements.
• Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clariiiers 1 thru 4 including the center
column, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge
, Updated Section IV Bid.doc
�
Page 3 of 132
05/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports,
the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items.
• Replace the scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the
scum well on the exterior of the clariiier as shown on the drawings. Install new scum
trough flush water system on each clarifier.
• Remove four existing sludge blanket level detectors from the existing clarifier walkway
bridges and re-install them on the new walkway bridges.
• Replace four RAS telescoping valves, valve operators, and support steel.
• Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new clarifier bridge for scum
control.
• Install a hose bibb and hose rack at each clarifier access platform.
� Replace the ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clariiier.
• Repair spalled concrete and coat the splitter box walkway with a waterprooiing system.
• Modify existing splitter box and piping; install new clarifier isolation valves, pipe, and
fittings as shown on the drawings.
• Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering and disposal
system as required to prevent the clarifier tanks, the RAS structures and the splitter box
from becoming buoyant while empty and to dispose of the product water from
dewatering in making the pipe modiiications associated with the splitter box and clariiier
work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused to structures due to
buoyancy.
• Perform all other work shown on the drawings, and/or described in tl�e Technical
Specifications.
4. East Plant
• Replace the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports,
the skimmer arms, the drives, and the weirs on both clarifiers.
• Repaint all rotating, mechanical, and structural ferrous equipment in both clarifiers that is
not being replaced.
• Replace the walkway bridge center access platform, and handrail on the East clari�er.
Paint the new platform to match existing.
• Replace one scum pump check valve and two scum pump discharge valves at the existing
scum pump location.
• Replace one clarifier effluent gate valve for the west clarifier.
• Replace one clarifier drain valve for the east clarifier. Take extra precaution to prevent
damage to the plant perimeter wall and the clariiier tank located near this valve. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all damages by excavating and repairing the drain
valve.
• Replace two RAS telescoping valve seals.
Updated Secuon N Bid.doc Page 4 of 132 OSl14/2012
'
'
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
,
�
�
��
'
,
,
1
'
'
,
�
' Section N — Technical Specifications
• Replace 12 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of
24 ground water pressure relief valves are to be replaced.
' • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to the new bridge for scum control.
• Add a 1-inch hose bib to each clarifier access platform.
, • Retrofit t1�e existing scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls for each
clarifier to the rehabilitated clarifiers.
� • Replace two existing ultrasonic sludge blanket level detectors with new units and mount
them on the on the walkway bridges.
• Furnish and install a scum decant system.
! • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as
required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty and during a11
' excavations. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant
tanks.
5. Project Sign
� The Contractor shall provide 1 fixed project sign as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23
of the Contract Documents.
' 6. Prn'ect Contract Period
J
' THE CONTRACT PERIOD IS 365 CONSECUTNE CALENDAR DAYS
,
r-,
J
�
i
1
1
1
0
L_ J
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABII.ITATION
Project Number: 11-0053-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 5 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
14 Backf'ill
15 Street Crossin s, Etc.
16 Raisin Or Lowerin Of Sanit Sewer, Storm Draina e Structures
17 Unsuitable Material Removal
18 Underdrains
19 Storm Sewers
20 Sani Sewers And Force Mains
21 ❑ Draina e
22 ❑ Roadway Base And Sub ade
23 As haltic Concrete Materials
24 Ad'ustment To The Unit Bid Price For As halt
25 General Plantin S ecifications
26 ❑ HDPE Deformed - Reformed Pi e Linin
27 Plant Mix Driveways
28 ❑ Re orting Of Tonna e Of Recycled Materials
29 Concrete Curbs
30 � Concrete Sidewalks And Drivewa s
31 Soddin
32 Seedin
33 Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 Material Used
35 Conflict Between Plans And S ecifications
36 ❑ Street Si ns
37 � Audio/Video Recordin Of Work Areas
38 � Erosion And Siltation Control
39 Utilit Tie In Location Mazkin
40 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and A urtenances
42 Gas S stem S ecifications
43 ❑ Tennis Courts
44 Work Zone Traff'ic Control
45 Cured-In-Place Pi e Linin
46 ❑ S ecifications for Pol ethylene Sli linin
47 S ecifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pi e
48 Gunite S ecifications
49 Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 Pro'ect Information Si s
51 In-Line Skatin Surfacin S stem
52 Resident Notification of Start of Construction
53 Gabions and Mattresses
54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance S eciiications
55 ❑ Millin O erations
56 Clearin and Grubbin
57 Ri ra
58 � Treatment Plant Safet
59 Traffic Si al E ui ment and Materials
60 Si in And Markin
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 6 of 132 OS/14/2012
,
,
'
,
��
�
�
'
t
Section IV — Technical Specifications
2 FIELD ENGINEERING
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall provide and pay for iield engineering service required for the project. Such
work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site
improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the
work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the
Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals
under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As-
built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section IlI
(General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
' Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and
' shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any
permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or
disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the
' proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land
Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida.
'
�l
1
�
,J
'
'
�
1
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have fumished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Speciiications, the definition of terms from SECTION III,
ARTICLE 1- DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 7 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that
the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a
basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not
assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated
quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate
of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations
pertaining thereto.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
'
[1
�J
'
,
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of
local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, speciiication, or tentative standard ,
adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:
AA Aluminum Association, Inc.
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
O�cials
ACI
AISI
AMA
AMCA
ANSI
APA
ASAE
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWG
AWMA
AWS
AWWA
CFR
CISPI
CRSI
CS
DEP
DOT
EPA
FAC
FBC
FFPC
FGC
American Concrete Institute
American Iron and Steel Institute
Acoustical Materials Association
Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
American National Standards Institute
American Plywood Association
American Society of Agricultural Engineers
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wire Gauge
Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Code of Federal Regulations
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards
Department of Environmental Protection (Florida)
Department of Transportation (Florida)
Environmental Protection Agency
Florida Administrative Code
Florida Building Code
Florida Fire Prevention Code
Florida Gas Code
Updated Secuon IV Bid.doc Page 8 of 132
,
,
1
�
1
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
OS/14/2012
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
,
,
'
LJ
'
�
1
'
1
'
'
'
'
�C
FPC
FedSpec
HI
IBBM
IEEE
IPS
MIL
NAAMM
NBFIJ
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
NPT
NWMA
PCA
PCI
SBC
SBCCI
SDI
SFPC
SGC
SJI
SMACCNA
SMC
SPC
SPIB
SSPC
TCA
UL
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Florida Mechanical Code
Florida Plumbing Code
Federal Specifications
Standards of Hydraulic Institute
Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Iron Pipe Size
Military Specification
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
National Board of Fire Underwriters
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Pipe Thread
National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association
Portland Cement Association
Prestressed Concrete Institute
Standard Building Code (SBCCI)
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
Steel Door Institute
Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI)
Standazd Gas Code (SBCCI)
Steel Joist Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI)
Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI)
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
Steel Structures Painting Council
Title Council of America
Underwriters' Laboratories
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE
WORK.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of a11 appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise speciiically stated in
these plans and speciiications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 9 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adj acent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a"Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench sha11 be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer sha11 direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, a11 concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Speciiications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
sha11 conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for a11 concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of a11
concrete placement.
All concrete sha11 be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 10 of 132 OS/14/2012
t
�
'
'
'
11
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
�I�
'
'
��
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
1
'
'
'
'
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
7
7.1
EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
�'"•
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
' Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered sha11 be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto sha11 be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
, Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notiiied of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
, Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
, otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
' Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 11 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS. SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged sha11 be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per squaze yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of a11
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justiiication for a temporary stop on primazy construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 12 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
LJ
'
'
�
'
'
.-,
i,l
i�
'
'
'
,
�
'
'
�
,
'
'
J
�
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
12.1 GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, a11 pipe, except subdrains, sha11 be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
' Well point systems must be eff'icient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points sha11 be designed especially for this type of service, and
' the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling lazge volumes of air as well as of water.
'
'
'
'
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL
The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for
' the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to
dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must
' collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The
following document has been incorporated into this section for reference...
' 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED
GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE
ACTIVITY
'
I�
�J
CI��
'
Citv Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental
Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities:
1) A copy of a11 groundwater laboratory results
2) A copy of the FDEP Notification
It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have
any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 13 of l32 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER
FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY
The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site
activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62-
620, RA.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the
listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites,
analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to
deternune if contamination exists.
Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be
sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement
of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued
coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit
shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be
sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1.
TABLE 1
Screening Values for Discharges into:
Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/1
PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6_5-8.5
Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631E 0.012 µg/1 0.025 µg/1
Tota1 Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/1
Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1
Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/1
Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1
Tota1 Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 µg/1
Benzene 1.0 µg/I 1.0 µg/l
Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1
If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the
discharge is not authorized by this pern�it or by the City of Clearwater.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 14 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
,
1
�
�
,
'
'
'
,
,
�
'
'
,
'
1
�I
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
,
'
'
�
�
I,�
�
'
�I
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
(a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which
may be caused by naturally occurring, high moleculaz weight organic
compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC
requirement. To request this exemption, the pernuttee shall submit additional
information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the
method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The
Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee aff'umatively demonstrates
that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, lugh moleculaz weight
organic compounds.
(b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty
(30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information:
1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued
to;
2. the name and address of the facility, including county location;
3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s);
4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and
longitude);
5. the name of the receiving water; and
6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit.
(c) Discharge shall not commence until notiiication of coverage is received from the
Department.
For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0
units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless
the permittee submits natural background data coniuming a natural background pH outside of
this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units
for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural
background or vary more than one {1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal
waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8_5 units,
the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural
background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH
of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this
permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration
of less than 1500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or
greater than 1500 mg/1.
In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), EA.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from
floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on
surface waters.
If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph
(2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an
individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface
waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other
applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit.
If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any
source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having
to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 15 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district off'ice
within one (1) week after dischazge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during
discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge
Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department.
All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, RA.C., are applicable to this Generic
Pemut. Tiiere are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes sha11 conform to this speciiication unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory sha11 be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to pernut proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 16 of 132 OSl14/2012
'
,
'
'
'
'
1
'
'
,
'
,
'
,
,
�
,
'
'
�
,
,
,
�
,
'
1
'
'
,
'
'
'
1
'
'
'
�
u
Section N — Technical Specifications
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classiiication soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section N, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete —
Adjustment of Manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, �ttings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers sha11 be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than �nished grade as directed. Refer to Detai1301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specifcation ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which
have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have
the inside plastered with U2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes sha11 be coated with at least 15 mils dry
thickness of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 122'7
Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated materia] or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Updated Secrion IV Bid.doc Page 17 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Backf'ill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modiiied Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backf'ill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backf'ill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches sha11 be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material sha11 include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor sha11 construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
Updated Secuon IV Bid.doc Page 18 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
'
'
�
'
CI
,
'
'
'
'
�
��I
C�
��
�
,
�
'
'
'
,
�
I
,
1
'
'
,
'
'
'
�J
Section N — Technical Specifications
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A#57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backiill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material sha11
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
sha11 include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
' otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941
of the current FDOT Speciiications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
' (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
' All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this iitting is to be done on the surface of the street
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they aze to be laid. No
, pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
not simply wedged up. Before iinishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to iind that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
' Updated SecUon IV Bid.doc Page 19 of 132 OS/14/2012
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
flling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the iniiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backf'illed until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior wa11s of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. a11 materials, equipment, iilter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM speciiication D 3034 for S.D.R.
35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying
length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 20 of 132 OS/14/2012
L�I
'
'
'
'
�
'
� _J
'
��
'
'
'
LJ
�
'
'
C�
'
,
'
'
'
'
�i
�
'
J
'
,
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Speciiications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
20.2 INSTALLATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and
compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be
performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted
haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insuff'icient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
, remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
� approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
' required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
'
,
,
'
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe sha11 be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 21 of 132 OS/]4/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of a11 main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor sha11 take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under a11
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exiiltration. In no case shall the iniiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exiiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The
Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of
bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4-
inches shall be cause for rejection.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as
described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backf'ill and grading.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc
Page 22 of 132
'
'
'
,
�
�
'
'
'
,
'
'
LI,
I'
�
I''�
I�
I��
'
OS/14/2012
'
'
J
'
'
��
'
'
,
,
�
,
,
'
r
,
'
,
'
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Speciiications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 1"Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Speciiications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section N, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Speciiications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell sha11 be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat sha11 be included in the bid item
price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 23 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base sha11 be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specif'ications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
The soil cement base design shall be by a certiiied lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader baz for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
iinished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200-7
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11 and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The basis of ineasurement sha11 be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (U2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc
Page 24 of 132
'
�
�i
u
'
�
��
,
'
'
'
'
L _J
'
�
�
,
,
,
OS/14/2012
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
, The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixmg, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
, complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
�i
'
'
�
�
�
'
'
�'
�
�
i�
'��
�
�
�
,
�
,�
'I
�
'
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be deternuned by the Engineer in
accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, iilling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 200U Standard Speciiications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deiicient in
thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable
tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the Ciry Engineer, may be left in place. No payment,
however, will be made for such deficient azeas that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mv�ing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This speciiication is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 25 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality controUassurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Speciiications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, conection, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Pavment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined bv the followin�:
l. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Fina1 surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/a" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2_3 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of 1/a" or greater, the Engineer will
deternune if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notifv the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of a11 asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Speciiications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may
be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 26 of 132 OS/14/2012
u
L_J
�
�
�
�
,'
�
I�'�
LJ
�
'
�
,
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
'
'
'
'
L�
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
'
'
�
LJ
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches) Type S—I Type S—I with Type S—III FC-3 Type S—III Type S—I
Type S—III with FC-3 with FG3
Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer
1 st 2nd 1 st 2°d 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd
1 1 1
11/z 11/i
2 11/a 3/a * 1 1
21/2 11/a 11/a 11/2 1 11/2 1
3 1 i/z 1 i/z 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S—III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise speciiied on the plans, Type S—III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 27 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely iilled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack iilling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
l. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor sha11 be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and sha11 have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not pernutted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backf'ill using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 28 of 132
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
�J
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
OS/14/2012
,
'
'
L1
�
'
�
'
,
1
,
'
'
'
'
C
'
'
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between
initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree
aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included
in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they
are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of
impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled
paving.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid
item for asphalt. �
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traff'ic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving,
all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or
mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be
equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the
Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day
before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of a11 curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt sha11 be 1/a" above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index 101.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All
asphaltic concrete pavement sha11 be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 29 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Speciiications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder sha11 be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Speciiications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of ineasurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as speciiied and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
l. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business
with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 30 of 132 OS/14l2012
'
'
'
'
'
�
,
'
��I
'
,
,
'
'
�
lJ
'
�
'
'
I�
�
'
CJ
�
,
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
speciiied. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a quali�ed irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
' the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work sha11
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
IJ
'
��
,
I�'�
�
,
'
'
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
L Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenanceo
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 31 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
iinal acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of traff'ic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and sha11 be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein speci�ed to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FIl?INGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All iittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 32 of 132
C!
1
'
�
�
'
,
,
'
,
LJ
,
L�
,
'
'
'
�
OS/14/2012
'
,
�I
1
�
'
'
'
,
'
,
r-,
�
u
,
,
'
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe-T Shear Stem
5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2�/i' IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-G509
2. 2001b. O.W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key�' shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
' A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
' Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 33 of 132 OS/14/2012
1
Section N — Technical Specifications
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSn. The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemicaVlTV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all intemal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traff'ic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (U2") low-density lineaz
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a speciiied spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wa11 of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure sha11 be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise speciiied on Plans. M�imum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or iiner. Bending radius
sha11 be 7".
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 34 of 132
'
�
�J
'
�I
'
'I�
,
�
J
'
,
1
'
'
'
�
,
'
OS/l4/2012
'
'
'
r
,
'
,
'
,
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6°Io. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a iixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS
' A. The filter sha11 be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
' 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections sha11 be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
, and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure tl�e
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
'
'
'
,
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller sha11 function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller sha11 operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
' of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
' Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 35 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller sha11 be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REGIUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent sha11 not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing pernuts and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 36 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
r
'
,
'
'
L
'
'
'
,
,
'
'
�
L_J
'
'
'
1
�
I
�
'
'
Section N — Technical Specificarions
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings sha11 be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and speciiic
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
' G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagramnlatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with a11 other
underground utilities. Contractor sha11 employ all data contained in the contract
' Documents and sha11 verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
' obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
speciiic notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
'
'
'
LJ
�
'
LJ
'
�
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be pernutted. Install all required sleeving
prior to roadway base.
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a�ne granular material with no foreign matter
larger than 1/z in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
, F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maa�imum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
' Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 37 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of inechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face azea of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3 I NSTALLATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 38 of 132
,
CJ
II
�
,
��
,
'
'
'
'
'
��
LJ
�
'
C,
�
'
'
OS/14/2012
,
�
' Section IV — Technical Specifications
B. Prepare a11 welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
� 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
' 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
' C. Curing
l. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
' hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
' 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
' 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
' pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
, 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
' 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
t 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at suff'icient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
' B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
, C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
' 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
' maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before bacl�'ill.
'
, Updated Secrion N Bid.doc Page 39 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, sha11 be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including fuush
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing iield will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work sha11 be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
sha11 be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with tl�ese Plans is provided only for the
Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 40 of 132 OS/14/2012
��
'
�
�
,
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
,
'
,
,
,
'
,
'
'
�_ 1
,
'
,
,
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible far maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
' must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
' B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
tt�e work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
' substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
'
CJ
'
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.:
The over-a11 height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
' no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
' Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 41 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
C.W:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SPR.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR.:
Straight trunk.
MIN.:
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
O. C..
On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.:
Diameter.
LVS.:
Leaves.
D.B.K:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.:
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner's Representative:
Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of
materials specified and execution of installation.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 42 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
'
'
,
�
J�
I
1
'
,
�I
�
�
'
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
Contractor:
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect:
This person or iu�m is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
25.2.1.8
25.2.1.8.1
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B& B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root ba11s covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the iield and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds sha11 be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Cleaz trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
' Updated Section IV Bid.doc
CJ
Page 43 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Deternune locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative andlor the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall casry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop a11 work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor sha11 perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 44 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
,
,
'
,
�
�
LJ
'
'
'
1
CJ
_ . _
,
, Section N — Technical Specificarions
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
' 25.2.2.1
25.2.2.1.1
MATERIALS
PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
' A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Speciiications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
� Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
�
'
l__1
'
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk fornung a"Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be speciiied and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
' for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II,
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
' D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated azea.
, E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
, F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
' When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
,
,
,
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for speciiied sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material sha11 be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
' Updated Section IV Bid.doc
�
Page 45 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
I. Ba11ed and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufiicient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessazy for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B& B
procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place.
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as speciiied on the plan.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, sha11 be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one tl�ousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/a the
nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
Updated Section IV Bid.doc
Page 46 of 132
'
'
��
�.
'
�
��
'
�
'
,
'
'
,
�
'I
�
�
'
'
,
OS/14/2012
�
�
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
� trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire sha11 not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper.
' Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
' a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2" x 4"
by 16" wood connected with two - 3/a" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
�
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
, A. Unless stated on the plans or in the speciiications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil bacl�'�ll. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
, unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
�
�
'
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1".
C. Backiill and clean iill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
' Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
,
'
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
' A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
, within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4- lh feet above grade.
i
� Updated Section N Bid.doc
�
Page 47 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
speci�cations.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
"Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the iinish grades sha11 be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even iinish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 48 of 132 OS/14/2012
I�
�_,
'
,
�
�',
lJ
i
�
,
�
�
'
I �
[__.
�1
'
'
r
'
,
�
'
'
'
'
1
'
'
'
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1- 1/z inches in any
dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off th� site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Speciiications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
' E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
, 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
u
1
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to a11ow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
' C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
' 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
' by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 49 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specificarions
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an i 8 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the sunounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backf'illing. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
1 gallon
3 gallon
5 gallon
7 gallon
Trees
Palms
1 - 21 gram tablet
2 - 21 gram tablet
3 - 21 gram tablet
4 - 21 gram tablet
3 tablets each'/z" (12 millimeters) caliper
7- 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back-iilling plant pits or as speciiied. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backf'ill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ba11 to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ba11.
Backiill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the bacl�'ill up to the proper grade.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc
Page 50 of l32
'
'
'
'
LJ
C�
L�
'
�
'
�
�
'
'
'
�
,
��
OS/14/2012
,
,
'
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
' H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be sc�ed vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
'
J
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
' B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn azeas j ust prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
,
'
'
�
L
'
'
'
I�
�
'
�
'
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used.
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 51 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two 3/a inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in speci�cations.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 52 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
�LJ
1
,
,
'
1
'
'
'
�J
�
'
1
'
,
,
'
'
�
' Section N — Technica] Specifications
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
, A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Admimstration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
,
C�
'
'
'
1
I��
1
'
,
'
'
'
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 I NSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
' Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
' Updated Section N Bid.doc
�
I�J
Page 53 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be iinal judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to dischazge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Speciiications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-speciiied plant materials. No
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor sha11 warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50°Io or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, sha11 replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
sha11 be given the equal amount of warranty.
Updated Secuon IV Bid.doc Page 54 of ] 32
1
i
'
LJ
�
�I,
'
,
LJ
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
�
,
OS/14/2012
�
,
' 26
Section IV — Technical Specifications
HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
' 26.1 INTENT
'
'
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
' The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequali�cation. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
, prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
' installer must be certi�ed by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
I 26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
' classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
, sha11 have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
'
Material ProPertY ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi
HDPE
Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner sha11 be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from iield
samples to the above requirements.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 55 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Liner sha11 be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials sha11 meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
tr�c, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
uregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, teazs, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particulaz, conf'ined spaces are to be met.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 56 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
,
�
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
1
�
,
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
1
'
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless speciiically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
' bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
' 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
'
'
I;
�.
'
'
,
'
,
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 57 of 132 OS/14/�012
Section N — Technical Specifications
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
This Article deleted.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition,
a11 the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30
30.1
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any d'uection. The
welded wire mesh sha11 be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requ�rements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 58 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
,
[_I
,
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
��I
L
,
,
'
'
,
�
'
'
'
�J
,
�
,
,
L_J
'
1
1
'
'
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per squaze foot for each item as measured above, which price
sha11 be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
speciiications and shall include a11 materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it sha11 cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
basis of each squaze foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to total 601b. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 59 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
When this work is given as a bid item, the item sha11 cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS. CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
confornung to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 60 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
'
�
L��
��
�
'
�
'
'
'
'
,
,
'
'
,
'
LJ
�
,
,
Section N — Technical Specificauons
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
' This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED.
�
'
C�
'
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND
SPECIFICATIONS.
36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
I 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
,
,
�
'
��
,
,
'
,
,
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings sha11 not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation.
37.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such
coverage shall be obtained by walking.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 61 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. T'his audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information sha11 contain the month, day and yeaz. The time
information sha11 contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be suff'iciently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to m�imize picture quality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be iumly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
37.8 LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 62 of 132 OS/14/2012
�
,
��
,
�
L!
,
�
,
'
'
��
,
'
,
'
'
,
�
u
,
�I
J
Section N — Technical Specifications
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
' All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
' the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
' 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
, construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
' within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern sha11 be the existence of any faults,
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at any one time.
'
,
,
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
�
38.1
EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
, No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, iilter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
, vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
, 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at a11 times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
, erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present_ In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
I 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
' sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
'
' Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 63 of 132 OS/14/2012
CJ
Section N — Technical Specifications
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment andJor prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction sha11 be minimized in both permanent and internuttent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channei alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporazy culverts sha11 be provided by the contractor and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 64 of 132
'
'
,II
'
,
,
,
'
'
'
'
I�I
�
L�
I
'
'
'
,
'
OS/14/2012
'
'
'
'
J
'
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
, 38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a ime and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a"Stop Work Order".
' City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods
that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
,
'
�
J
'
,
,
'
'
'
, Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 65 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of
soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The
procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence - Warning
2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee
3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee
4th occurrence - Stop Work Order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify
the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particulaz site, please contact
Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 66 of 132
'
'
r
'
,
'
�
,
'
'
'
'
�
I
'
,
'
'
,
OS/14/2012
'
! � � � � � i � � � � � � � � � � � �
Section IV —Technical Specifications
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF
EROSION VIOLATION
UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DNISION 7— EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF
ORDINANCES, TH1S SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION
CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE.
Warning
$32.00 Re-inspection Fee
$80.00 Re-inspection Fee
Stop Work Order
DATE POSTED:
Inspector's Name:
Inspector's Signature:
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741
&
ENGINEERING/CONSTRUCTION 727 562-4750
Received by:
(Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been
received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt
or concurrence with findings of the inspector.)
IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 67 of l32 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
LAVENDER RECLAIlVIED WATER
WHTTE PROPOSED EXCAVATION
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical
curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK
SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.
41
41.1
POTABLE WATERMAINS. RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES
SCOPE
The Contractor sha11 furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 68 of 132 OS/14/2012
,
'
�
'
Cl
,
'
'
'
,
,
'
�
,
C_J
'
,
,
�
I
�
,
'
L�.J
'
i
�
��
ii
'
,
�
LI
,
,
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standazds of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure
(In.) (PSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
' Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA
C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241
and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
'
'
'
,
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Updated Secuon IV Bid.doc Page 69 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length
(OD/Thick.) (PSI) (Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the
use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.Cz solid
strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece
of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum
above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the
adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass
plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M
brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and
elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSUAWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSUAWWA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors.
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 70 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
u
'
'
r1
i'
�
;�
i,
�
�
,
'
,
'
'
L�
,
'
,
,
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
i
�
�
��
'
,
'
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It sha11 be sealed by brick and mortaz, cement or any approved method
by the Engineer.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves sha11 be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
sha11 be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth sha11
be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted
with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all
valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service sha11 be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with
ANSUA.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the
following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage
at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing
body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring
bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body..
Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the
, service intended and sha11 be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in
conformance with ANSUAWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure.
' All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers,
bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass.
�
'
'
'
'
�
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3-
piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be
provided where shown. The valve box cover sha11 be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their
installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of
5& Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2& Sheet
2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail.
Updated Secuon N Bid.doc Page 71 of 132 O5/]4/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B-84-B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be ULJFM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traff'ic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two
sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a#7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut.
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into
upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with O-
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant sha11 have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open.
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper
nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
Specifications.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 72 of 132
'
�
�
lJ
,
�
�
�
LJ
,
CI
'
,
i
'
,
'
'
OS/14/2012
�
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard G502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Speciiication C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
' the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
�
'
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may
be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
' Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The lazgest service
connection allowable on 4-inch main sha11 be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2-
inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC
' 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless
steel straps.
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
1
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, iittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that
are instailed within their system. Therefore, any and ali devices must be
purchased from the City and installed by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest
revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is deternuned by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 73 of 132 OS/14/20]2
Section N — Technical Specifications
1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42-
inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and
obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress
of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer
shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or
arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the
obstructions.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 74 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
,
'
C��
,
'
tl
'
L
'
'
u
'
'
'
,
'
,
�
,
' Section N — Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2 I NSTALLATION
t Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
' ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
' If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
' All pipe and fittings sha11 be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
' or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
C'�
,
'
,
'
lJ
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
' workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
' Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
'
,
I�
��
'
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSUAWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
Updated Secuon N Bid.doc Page 75 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to
exceed 18-inches from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be d'uected. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5&
Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2& Sheet 2
of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located
10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants
shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and sha11 have their nozzles parallel with, ar at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as d'uected by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants sha11 be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the speciiications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 76 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
C�
'
��
�'
�
,
'
'
'
'
�
,
,
'
'
,
,
C�
1
'
'
u
�
'
'
'
ul
'
'
,
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All iittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed
before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed
under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
41.4 TESTS
41,4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision.
All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and
all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor
at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance
notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, a11 water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, sha11 be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AWWA C651.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
� shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are
not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
�
,
'
'
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and a11 other appurtenances sha11 be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never
more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized sha11 be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 77 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specificarions
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standazd DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forwazd the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
If inethods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Boazd of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all
respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form.
Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum
payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full
compensation for a11 labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
applicable pay items of work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
� Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joints materials
• Tests and sterilization
• Appurtenant work as requued for a complete and operable system.
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 78 of ] 32
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
C'
'
,
'
'
�
�
,
'
OS/14/2012
'
�
' 41.6.2
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
41.6.2.1
Section N — Technical Specifications
FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the iitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSUAWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the m�imum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron iittings.
41.6.4
'
41.6.4.1
'
'
,
'
'
,
�
�
LI'
FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of iue hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are
listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price sha11 be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 79 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technica] Specifications
anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Speciiications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RG250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course sha11 not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than 1/a" exists, the Engineer will deternune if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as speciiied in Section
331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas sha11 be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 80 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
�
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
�
'
,
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/a" exists, the Engineer will deternune if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
, deiiciency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
' In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
, require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
'
'
,
'
,
'
,
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
a11 other others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 81 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
degrees, Fahrenheit and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor sha11 notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
a11 base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five {5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform a11 work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor sha11 secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all pernut fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
Updated Secuon N Bid.doc Page 82 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
,
�
'
�
LJ
'
,
'
'
'
�
�LJ
,
�
'
'
,
��I
,
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
' The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided.
'
'
,
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awazding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to
Proceed."
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
, 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to detemune its suitability for installation of the courts.
' 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
' surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
, proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
' courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
'
'
'
'
�
,
'
'
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the iinal grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is
required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 83 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
T�vo layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that aze resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
sha11 be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick curb shall be installed azound the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material sha11 be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend
material sha11 be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from speciiied grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 84 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
,
CJ
,
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
,
'
w
' Section IV — Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
'
,
,
,
,
1
,
'
,
'
,
'
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristaz HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25
pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system.
43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
, width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
I43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
, Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
' Updated Section N Bid.doc � Page 85 of l32 OS/14/2012
�
LJ
Section IV — Technical Specifications
the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post sha11 hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be iirmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 — 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scari�er/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (1 each) — six-foot length aluminum.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 86 of 132
�
,
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
,
'
�
�
C�
'
,
'
'
'
'
OS/] 4/2012
,
r
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
' Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
, 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
, square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line sha11 have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
�
�
,
'
,
'
'
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch ma3cimum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting iixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing iixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of a11 existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and iixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
TY�e Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain pernuts for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new iixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 87 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Pole T1 existing 5 iixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole TS new pole w/existing sixteen iixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 iixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T8 existing 12 iixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cazds and operation and maintenance manuals for a11
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 88 of 132
u
'
'
'
'
li
�
,
�_ 1
'
'
'
C�
,
'
'
'
'
'
OS/14/2012
'
'
r
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
44
44.1
WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traff'ic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traff'ic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
' The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations.
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
'
�
��
,
I�
�
'
workers, pedestrians,
This general objective
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an exisring pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved temporary traff'ic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traff'ic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
' Updated Secrion IV Bid.doc
,
Page 89 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specificarions
102-5 T�affic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traff'ic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traff'ic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Tr�c staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traff'ic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
GV'iew Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Tr�c Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 90 of 132 OS/14/2012
�J
r
'
'
,
'
�J
'
'
�
��
,
'
'
�
'
,
,
�
'
'
'
IJ
'
'
J
'
'
'
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or
an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and tra�c
control devices of the Contractor. T'he City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traff'ic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-speciiic pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Speciiications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traff'ic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traff'ic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traff'ic Supervisor Certiiication from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certiiication will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
' The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic controL The
Worksite Traff'ic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
' traff'ic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Tr�c Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traff'ic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
' of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traff'ic arrangements.
LJ
,
'
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traff'ic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
, It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
' Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 9l of 132 OS/14/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequaliiied. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequaliiication approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certiiied
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester iiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength
Flexural Strength
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years)
ASTM D638 3,000 psi
ASTM D790 4,500 psi
ASTM D790 300,000 psi
ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. T'he criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
tr�c loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetune of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
speciiications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traff'ic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessazy precautions shall be taken to protect the public, a11 property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 92 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
�
'
,
�I
�
,
,
,
,
�
'
���
u
�
11
,
'
,
CJ
i
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
� After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The
' television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear
picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
i
�
'
'
�
,
�
'
i
�
i
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight iit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor sha11 immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak sha11 be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor wili be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify a11 local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor sha11 be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
� Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linea] foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
, manhole to center of manhole for the sanitazy systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
� Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 93 of 132 OS/14/2012
,
,,
46.1
46.1.1
Section IV — Technical Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
MATERIALS
PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specif'ication shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
33501atest edition. If iittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same speciiication from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certiiication that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability deternunations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certiiied lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of tlus
speciiication.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 94 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
,
�
,
i
i�
'�,
,
I�
�
�
r
�I
�
�J
�
i
Lj
'
'
�
�
'
�
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
' be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
'
'
,
'
�
'
1
�
1
'
'
'
'
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
211h-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 95 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maacimum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
ternunates.
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on iield conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 96 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
�
�
�
,
'
L�
,
'
C'
'
C
�J
,
u
u
,
'
'
,
�
'
'
�
t
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured witt� stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backf'illed using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections sha11 be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporazy construction right of way and/or storage
azeas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
1 of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
�
'
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as speciiied by the engineer.
, 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
'
1
�
�
�
'
'
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with speciiication for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 97 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specificarions
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell andlor spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one hal� cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1(one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement confornung to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifcations, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 98 of 132 OS/14/20] 2
'
'
�
�
'
�
,
�
,
�
'
'
I�
��
'
�
u
�
'
'
,
'
Section N — Technical SpeciScarions
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
� Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
, 48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement confornung to all of the requirements of the
' American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
'
�
'
'
1
L�
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate sha11 be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve
Passing No. 4 Sieve
Passing No. 8 Sieve
Passing No. 16 Sieve
Passing No. 30 Sieve
Passing No. SO Sieve
Passing No. 100 Sieve
48.6 WATER
100%
95% to 100%
80% to 100%
50% to 85%
25% to 60%
10% to 30%
2% to 10%
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
' acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
8.33 pounds per gallon.
,
,
'
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire confornung to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
' Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absoiption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will pemut easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
�
�'I�
'
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 99 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air/water blast to
remove all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix sha11 be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove alI
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture sha11 not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water sha11 be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be pernutted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Corners shall be filled %rst. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 100 of 132 OS/14/2012
�]
1
,
�
,
,
'
'
,
C_J
!
LJ
'
�
,
,
�
�
'
!
i
LJ
L1
'
n
�J
,
,
�
'
�
��
'
1
�
'
,
�I
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if:
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of inesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite sha11 be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman sha11 bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low azeas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3J.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings pernut.
Updated Secdon N Bid.doc Page 101 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheeL The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be pernussible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Comp. Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press.
(cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi)
365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of suff'icient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity deterxninations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 102 of 132 OS/14/2012
t
�
'
'
,
,
�
�
�
LJ
�
�
,
�
�
,
,
�
'
'
' 49
'
�
�
�
�
49.1
Section N — Technical Specifications
SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specif'ications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
, Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
, pay item per lineaz foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traff'ic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backf'ill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
� and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
'
,
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
' Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
� contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner sha11 meet all requirements of ASTM D
'
'
,
�
'
'
3753.
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 103 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole suff'iciently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour su� inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backf'ill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This speciiication shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish a11 labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 104 of 132
C�
�, �
��
'
�
�
'
L�'
,
,
CJ
,
�
LJ
�
�
�_
�
'
�
,
OS/14/2012
'
'
' Section N — Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
'
'
'
,
IJ
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
l. Compressive Strength (ASTM G109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM G596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
, Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water iniiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
, 1. Compressive strength (ASTM G109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
' 49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and �lling voids according
' to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
'
�
�J
'
'
'
,
'
'
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 sha11 be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0°Io at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 105 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe suliide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the %rst coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth iinish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with dischazge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem �le road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 106 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
�
�
�
'
,
'
'
,
1
'
'
I
�
�
,
,
,
'
�
CI
I
�
,
'
'
J
,
,
LJ
,
,
1
'
,
'
Secdon N — Technical Specifications
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
iniiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Mode135C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials sha11 be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids aze filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the %rst application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The iinal application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance wit� the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
� Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
, Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 107 of 132 OS/]4/2012
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs sha11 be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping iniiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterprooiing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wa11 of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterprooiing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
�
1
,
,
1
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The �
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
1-3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 108 of 132
,
1
,
�
OS/14/2012
'
1
r
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator sha11 pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength
' Elongation
Bonding Strength
380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
400% ASTM D 3574-86
250-300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
' seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
' Density
Tensile Strength
Elongation
' Shrinkage
Toxicity
�
,
�
J
�
�
'
'
LJ
,
'
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
8.75-9.171bs/gal ASTM D-3574
150 psi ASTM D- 412
250% ' ASTM D-3574
Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Non Toxic
A waterprooiing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
8.1 x10 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 cm/sec
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding iibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 109 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
Astrn C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000
Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 N.06 <0.08
Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi TensIle
Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4- 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert iibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterprooiing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume
Color (other colors available on request)
Pot Life, hrs
Tensile Strength, psi, min
Tensile Elongation, %
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., maac
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
l:l
Light Gray
1
2,000
10 —20
5
1,800
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 110 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
�
'
'
�
'
'
,
r
'
'
�
�
'
,
,
�
'
,
�
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
' (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
, 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate iniiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterprooiing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
,
,
�
I��J
'
'
,
,
,
,
r
r
�
�
�
�
�
'
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystallization.
49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Dri115/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
fornung process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there aze no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 111 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy �nish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury sha11 be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS.
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 112 of 132
LJ
'
'
'
�
�
�...
,
'
,
r
'
'
'
�
,
,
�
,
OS/] 4/2012
,
'
'
'
J
,
'
'
Section N — Technical Specificarions
site plans sha11 be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
• 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
• 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
• 2 Coats of Plexiflor
• Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
' cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
' 51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
1 FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
' other uregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
'
��
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
' l. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10_8 using the following mix:
,
'
,
'
,
Acrylic Resurfacer
Water (Clean and Potable)
Sand (60-80 mesh)
Liquid Yield
55 gallons
20-40 gallons
600-900 pounds
112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .OS -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Speciiication Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 113 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .OS-.07 gallons per squaze yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base
Plexichrome
Water
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
30 gallons
20 gallons
20 gallons
1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.OS gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
suff'icient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor sha11 remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with Califomia Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 114 of 132
,
,
u
�
'
�
�
�
�
,
�,
��
I
�
'
�
'
,
,
'
,
'
,
OS/14/2012
,
,
'
,
'
,
'
Section N — Tecluucal Specifications
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coeff'icient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60°Io relative
humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
i 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START
' OF CONSTRUCTION.
'
'
53
53.1
53.1.1
GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
MATERIAL
GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
, Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core sha11 have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
, 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion sha11 comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
' shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or
exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by AST'M A-239.
�
I
�.'
�
,
'
�
II �I
L_.J
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 41h inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI mu�), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 1/z), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners sha11 be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wirese Tiger-Tite
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 115 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than OA15 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
l. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; sha11 be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum conosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HC 1(hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
l. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a. According to AST'M D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Appazatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page I 16 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
LJ'
,
i
'
,
�
�
LJ
I�
I
i
�_
,
'
,
'
'
'
LJ
'
^�
�I
�
'
'
,
i
'
'
'
,
'
,
�
�I
�
'
,
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
l. Appearance:
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3
4.
Durometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The iiller stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum speciiic
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
• Absorption, m�imum 5%
• Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 1OT096), maximum loss 45%
• Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), ma�cimum loss 12%
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 1] 7 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table l. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they sha11 be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of inesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 118 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
�
�
'
,
�,
ii
'
'
,
'
,
I��
,
�
�
'
'
r
'
�
'
�
�'�
i'�
,�
'
�
�
`�
��
�
,
'
'
'
�
,
�
�I''
'
,
'
LJ
Section N — Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell sha11 then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backf'ill sha11 be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traff'ic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
• Traff'ic safety and Maintenance of Tr�c;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Mulch replacement;
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) sha11 accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 119 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as urigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
sha11 be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, according to the following speci�cations:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all para11e1 and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 120 of 132 OS/14/2012
�
'
�
L
,
�
L.J
i
�
'
�
,
u
�
lJ
'
'
�
J
'
�
,
'
�
�
'
�
�
'
L'
,�
�i
�
r-,
i,
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular tr�c areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traff'ic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the %rst two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they aze properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
' Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
' advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
� 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
� less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
�
r,
��
i
�
i
�
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February,
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 121 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering sha11 be removed the following afternoon or
remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor sha11 notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
sha11 contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 122 of 132
'
L�
�
,
'
Ll
�
�
,
�
,
'
,
,
�
�
'
�
OS/14/20] 2
�
'
'
'
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
3. All maintenance sha11 be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
' S. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor sha11 notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
' schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
' 55
55.1
1
'
'
�
MILLING OPERATIONS
EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Speciiications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
' 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas sha11 be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The
sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust.
' Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in
addition to the roadways before leaving the job site.
' 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
, and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
�J
'
'
'
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 123 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standazd Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. T'he cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 124 of 132
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
���
�
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
OS/14/2012
'
,
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
' Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
'
'
,
,
�
'
'
�_J
,
,
'
'
'
�
'
'
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and a11 incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
Tt�e work included in this specifcation includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement for riprap sha11 be the volume of sand used in cubic yazds for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 125 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backf'ill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
• An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
• Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
• The date of the training, and
• T'he means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traff'ic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: a11 necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 126 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
LJ
'
t
'
,
�
,
'
'
'
�
u
,
'
�
'
,
'
1
'
'
'
�J
'
Section N — Technical Specifications
pedestrian detectors, traff'ic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of
existing tr�c signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traff'ic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's
Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the state of Florida. All mast ann calculations, as well as the geotechnical report,
sha11 also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All
mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the
manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both
the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown
features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traff'ic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
' The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be speciiied in the contract documents andlor plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
CJ
'
'
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
T'his specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traff'ic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
� markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
payment will be made for these inconect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
' 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
, and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
,
'
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
' The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be speciiied in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include a11 equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
, Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 127 of 132 OS/14/2012
,
Section N — Technical Specifications
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to la�d
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging andlor lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Pa1ms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored i.n
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maa�imum distance of eight feet apatt.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber an�d
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity durin�g
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash c>r
debris shall be removed from the azea enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barri�;r
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within suc:h
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to an.y
protected tree or pa1m.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by th:is
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to redur.e
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior t:o
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can L�e
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipme�it
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 128 of 132
'
'
�
�
I�
'
'
�l
'
,
�
�
LJ
,
,
,
'
,
OS/14/20]2
'
'
�
'
l�
��
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects
for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction
inspector assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning sha11 only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identiiied on site (i.e. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
, feasible, but at a minimum sha11 be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
' E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
, from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
, done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than 18".
' H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
' I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
' J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
' K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill ar final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
' require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
, M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
C�
'
'
'
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standazds
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
Updated Section N Bid.doc
Page 129 of 132
OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree sha11 have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modiiies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http:Uwww.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT 19990505/
http://www. section508. gov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the pernussion of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications off'ice. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
Updated Section IV Bid.doc Page 130 of 132 OS/] 4/2012
LI
LJ
,
'
�]
'
'
'
,
,
�
L_J
�
'
L.1
'
'
�
'
,
, Section N — Technical Specifications
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
' Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
,
'
,
�
'
'
u
'
'
1
'
'
'
,
'
'
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conform.ity
issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE
64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS
When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the
following options:
Option 1- Having the power lines de-energized and visibly grounded.
Option 2- Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350
kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV.
Option 3- Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table
included in Section 64.2.
64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
VOLTAGE MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE
(nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet)
Up to 50 10
Over 50 to 200 15
Over 20 to 350 20
Over 350 to 500 25
Over 500 to 750 35
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 131 of 132 OS/14/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
Over 750 to 1,000 45
Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or
registered professional engineer who is a
qualiiied person with respect to electric power
transmission and distribution)
Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200
means up to and including 200kV.
Updated Section N Bid.doc Page 132 of 132 OS/14/2012
'
'
r
'
,
,
,
'
,
'
'
1
'
'
L_J
'
1
'
'
'
1
'
CJ
SECTION IVA
CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARED FOR:
�
O y�� � �� "
;� � �
� a�� z�
� ^ t ,.. ` • ; �. � ,,,
°,,,
F— �,,: � ;;
V
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE
CLEARWATER, FL 33756
PREPARED BY:
�
l�l
ENGINEERINGASSOCIATES, INC
KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY
ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300
TAMPA, FL 33634
BID DOCUMENTS
May 2012
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
'
'
'
'
�
,�
�
,
��
'
'
,
�
LJ
,
�
i
��
'
��I
LJ
'
,
'
'
�
'
'
,
,
'
,
'
'
,
'
1
1
'
�
Index of Technical Spec�cations
Sign and Seal Sheet
for
CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILTTATION
Marshall Street WRF Clarifier Rehabilitatioo
(PROJECT No.11-0053-UT)
SPECIFICATIONS
Thomas A. Traina, P.E.
DNISION O1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 — SITEWORK
DNISION 03 — CONCRETE
DIVISION OS — METALS
DIVISION 06 — WOOD AND PLASTICS
DNISION 09 — FINISHES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
DNISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DNISION 15 — MECHANICAL
Page i of ii
� �S
�.�Y 1 � ZQ1V
FL. P. E. N0. 42871
05/14/12
Sign and Seal Sheet
1
,
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
�
1
'
,
,
'
,
'
'
'
Index of Technical Specifications
Sign and Seal Sheet
for
CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
Marshall Street WRF Clarifier Rehabilitation
(PROJECT No.11-0053-UT)
����````,R�'�'���/
�� � .,��Na �
. .�
� � � � ��
��,;� � �
_� ��
'
�
�
��� .
. _
�
�
,��oP� �
.
. ��
i����
���`�`�
SPECIFICATIONS
Luis Rodrignez, P.E.
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Page ii ot ii
05/14/12
Sign and Seal Sheet
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
,
'
'
'
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL RE�UIREMENTS
01005
01014
01015
01030
01040
01050
01065
01090
01150
01152
01153
01200
01300
01310
01340
01410
01500
01505
01510
01600
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SUMMARY OF WORK
CONTROL OF WORK
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
COORDINATION
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
REFERENCE STANDARDS
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND
SAMPLES
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
MOBILIZATION
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
- i - 05/14/12
01625 START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01640 QUALITY CONTROL
01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01710 CLEANING
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01820 TRAINING
DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND
EQUIPMENT
02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02485 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
� • 1 • i _
03600 GROUT
03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 METALS
05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
- ii - 05/14/12
,
,
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
i
'
'
�
,
'
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 09 FINI HES
09865
09900
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
PAINTING
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11225
11280
11310
11317
CLARIFIERS
WATER CONTROL GATES (Not in this Contract)
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP (Not in this Contract)
WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMP (Not in this Contract)
pIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13567
13615
13630
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING (Not in this Contract)
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT (Not in this Contract)
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
(Not in this Contract)
pIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15010
15062
15064
15094
15100
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
�
05/14/12
� • . � !��
16010
16110
16120
16135
16142
16143
16170
16190
16195
16452
16460
16470
16481
16483
16620
16775
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
RACEWAYS
WIRE AND CABLES
ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, RACEWAYS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
WIRING DEVICES
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
SUPPORTING DEVICES
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
GROUNDING
TRANSFORMERS (Not in this Contract)
PANELBOARDS (Not in this Contract�
MOTORS
MOTOR STARTERS (Not in this Contract)
SURGE SUPPRESSORS (Not in this Contract)
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (Not in this Contract)
- iv - 05/14/12
!
�
�
'
�
�
�
'
'
'
��
'
�
i
�
�
�,
I
�
�
i
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Description
�
�
SECTION 01005
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and
equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract.
Work Included
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant,
power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other
means of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the
Work. He shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated
to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during
and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs
incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that
may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work.
The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for
which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the
general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the
various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and
equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in
a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract.
Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his
workmanship, materials and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer
notwithstanding.
Public Utility Installation and Structures
Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all
poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults,
manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether
owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or privately
owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with
transportation, traffic controf, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage,
GENERALREQUIREMENTS
� 01005-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work
shall be deemed included hereunder.
The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from
damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation,
or structure, shall be made only in such tocations and by means approved by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any
damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction
shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities
damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the Plans or have been
located in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his
expense, as directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made
for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures.
Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or
other governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed,
relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of
the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for
the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore.
Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the
Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the
Work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in
the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is
necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be
accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in
writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is
accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously
and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete
the removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is
accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and
Supplemental General Conditions.
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental
utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the locations of his
proposed construction operations, at least forty-eight hours in advance of
breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the work.
The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility
installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein
provided, shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer.
1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Drawings
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-2
�
�
�
'
i
�
�+
,__.
�
C
LJ
�
L�
�
�
�
�
'
�
'
05/14/12 �
'
,
1
t3
4
' 6
'
'
'
�
�
I��
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used
in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to
small scale drawings.
B. Copies Furnished to Contractor
7 The Engineer will incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed" drawings
$ and specifications, and provide one electronic copy of each to the Contractor.
9 The conformed drawings and specifications shall not supersede the Contract
10 Documents provided to the Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the
� 1 Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and specifications properly
12 include all revisions to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish
13 each of the subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the
14 Contract Documents as may be required for their work. Additional copies of
15 the Drawings and Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the
16 Contractor at cost of reproduction.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C
❑�
E.
Supplementary Drawings
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more
fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any
changes which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary
Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the
Engineer and copies thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner.
Contractor to Check Drawings and Data
The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the
Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data
received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions,
conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered, detailing
all conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall promptly provide a response to
all RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not be allowed to take
advantage of any conflicts and discrepancies, as full instructions will be
furnished by the Engineer, should such conflicts and discrepancies be
discovered.
Specifications
The Technical Specifications generally consist of three parts: General,
Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General
Requirements that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and
supplement these by detailed requirements for the work and shall always
govern whenever there appears to be a conflict.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' 01005-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
F. Intent
All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not
shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice verse, shall be of like
effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the
Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in
the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be
performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or
described.
The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent
omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done
and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best
general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the
best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be
made upon that basis.
18 The inclusion of the Related Requirements
19 the General part of the specifications is
20 Contractor, and shall not be interpreted
21 Specification Sections.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturer
(or work specified elsewhere) in
only for the convenience of the
as a complete list of related
The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to
furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. Such approval must be obtained
before shop drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for
any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good
reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of
the Engineer, be required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a
similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a
like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory
performance. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall
be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the
Engineer, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the
Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor
from his full responsibility under this Contract.
42 Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or
43 classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by
44 the same manufacturer.
45
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-4 05/14/12
'
,
'
,
,
�l
�
'
�
�
'
,
�
'
�
'
�
,
'
CI
'
'�J
'
I�
�
'
'
,
�JI
�
LJ
'
,
,
'
�
'
LJ
�I
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
C
�
Delivery
The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most
speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work
within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in
order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any
related Contractor.
Tools and Accessories
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably
marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to
adjust, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances
shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and
equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys.
Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified
to be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the
manufacturer", the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally
or commonly recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the
manufacturer's readily available literature.
Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate,
securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name,
year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data.
Installation of Equipment
The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery
of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally
encountered in work of this character.
Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the
foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be
correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be
installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily
between the various units.
The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and
attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the
devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as
approved by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the
purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation
shall be furnished.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-5 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for,
and shall properly bed in non-shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its
supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill
the space between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces
coming in contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy
equal to Kop-Coat 300M.
Service of Manufacturer's Representative
The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and
experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer
and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place
in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents.
Prior to placing the equipment in permanent operation, the manufacturer shall
furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a written Certificate of Proper
Installation stating that the equipment has been installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
After the equipment is placed in operation by the Contractor, such engineer or
superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer
to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory operating condition,
shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in the proper
operation and maintenance of such equipment.
1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. General
For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall
make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in
such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract
Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and the authorities'
certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the
acceptance of any material or equipment.
If in the making of any test of any material or equipment it is ascertained by
the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the
Contract, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to
refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly
from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without
cost to the Owner.
Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be
conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or
the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-6 05/14/12
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
LJ
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
C�
�I
�
,
CI
,
'
'
�
'
r�
ul
�
'
�
'
�
��
'
L��
'
�
'
,
,
'
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
C
C7
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment
during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim
for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner
formally takes over the operation thereof.
Costs
All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be
performed by the Owner or duly authorized inspections engineers or
inspection bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly
specified.
The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests
specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the
Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
price.
Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those
specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications.
The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in
making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non-
compliance.
Inspection of Materials
The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in
advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of
materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the
permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection,
the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the
manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the
Engineer will arrange to have a representative present at such times during
the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify
the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point
of manufacture, or he will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived.
The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any
material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor from its
responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Certificate of Manufacture
When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor
shall furnish authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture
that the materiats to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested
in conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be
notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-7 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
E
F.
G
H.
analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on
similar products of the manufacturer.
Shop Tests of Operating Equipment
Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency,
performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in
the shop of the maker in a manner that shall conclusively prove that its
characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the
Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable.
Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results
thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible
official of the manufacturing company, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for
approvaL
The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop
test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
Preliminary Field Tests
As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the
preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract
that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments
and replacement required. The Contractor shall assist in the preliminary field
tests as applicable.
Final Field Tests
Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and
systems installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests
as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials,
equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional
cost to the Owner. The equipment suppliers and subcontractors shall assist in
the finaJ field tests, as applicable.
Failure of Tests
Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests,
guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly
corrected by the Contractor by replacement or otherwise as directed by the
Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor
has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-8 05/14/i 2
�
�
u
�
'
'
,
�
'
�
,
'
'
�
�
'
�
'
�
Ll
'
'
II
u
'
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
,
�
�.,
�
'
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
�3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
the Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and
equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified
requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for work,
materials and equipment, may reject the work, materials and equipment and
may order the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense.
Final Inspection
During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In
no case will the final change order be prepared until the Contractor has
complied with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final
inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly
and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES
A.
:
C
Temporary Fences
If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence
or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the
Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until
the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for
the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the
type of temporary fence to be used.
Temporary Driveways
At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remove
all temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the
work and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to
allow construction of other projects in the area. The Contractor shall fully
cooperate with the Owner in providing this access.
Temporary Structures and Facilities
The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required
in order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during
construction.
1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. First Aid
The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in
progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access
thereto at all times when people are employed on the work.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-9 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
1.07 LINE AND GRADE
A. Line and Grade
5 All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines
6 and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full
7 responsibility for maintaining alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
:
C
The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established
bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place
excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the
reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him
contrary to this provision.
Surveys
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and
other such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades,
as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof.
All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050.
Safeguarding Marks
The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments
and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re-
establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work
improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without
authorization such established points, stakes and marks.
The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners,
monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required,
shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or destroyed.
1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING
A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or
injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private
property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the
progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original
locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent
public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not
shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract
Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public
and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not
shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the
work, payment therefore will be made as provided for in the General
Conditions.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-10 05/14/12
'
,
���
�
'
,
�
,
'
,
'
'.J
,
,
'
,
'
'
�
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
,
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
�
'
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
'L�-�
Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures,
tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of
his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional
inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project
which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be
performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the
interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and
record by noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be
aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of
all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of
the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude
conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of
surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer.
Prior to the beginning of any excavations, the Contractor shall advise the
Engineer of all buildings or structures on which he intends to perform work or
which performance of the project work will affect.
Protection of Trees
The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes
or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of
trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to injure such
trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the
Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar
size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the
Contractor.
32 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines
33 may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials,
34 except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully
35 supported and protected from damage.
36
37 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the
38 Owner, to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so
39 ordered, the Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C.
trees.
Lawn Areas
Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work.
Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced,
or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-11 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
D. Restoration of Fences
Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of
the work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as
good or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in
which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No additional payment will be
made for the replacement or repair of any fence.
1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC
A.
:
C
L�7
Barriers and Lights
During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain at
all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The
Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or
"street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes
obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the
public.
Smoke Prevention
The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment
generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the
production of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be
permitted.
Noise
The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all
times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the
exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with
mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be used to
avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly observe all local
regulations and ordinances covering noise control.
Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the
hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on Sundays. If the proper and efficient
prosecution of the work requires operations during the night, the written
permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting such items of the
wo rk.
Access to Public Services
Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the
construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire
hydrants, valves or manholes.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-12 05/14/12
'
�
�
L��
'
,
�
,
'
'
��
I
�
,
��
�
,
'
�
�
'
'
II
�
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
�
�l
'
�
'
'
'
�
,
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
E. Dust Prevention
The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic
by keeping the roads and/or construction areas sprinkled with water at all
times or when directed by the Owner and/or Engineer.
1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work
that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The work shall be performed by competent workmen skilled in
the trade required by the restoration.
1.11 CLEANING
A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site
of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as
is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a
nuisance or is objectionable.
The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and
temporary structures when no further need therefore develops.
B. Final Cleaning
At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures
and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and
he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other
foreign substances.
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by
him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright,
clean, polished and new operating condition.
1.12 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion
1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and
bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water
courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern.
2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits
and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that
results from his construction operations.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' 01005-13 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
C.
�
E
F.
3.
C'
1
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from '
the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas..
Protection of Wetland Areas
The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in
accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued
for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of
in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of
Engineers, etc.
Existing Facilities
The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation
insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for
maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as
described in these Specifications.
Use of Chemicals
All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project
operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of
other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all
such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with
manufacturers' instructions.
Tree Removal
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and any regulatory authorities forty-
eight (48) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project. No clearing
shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after
the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the
tree barricades and other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to
remain. Failure to notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the
in-kind replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner.
Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of
storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to
the approved Drawings. No roadway base or paving shall be constructed until
the Contractor has performed lamping of these lines to his and the Engineer's
satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary sewer invert grades are verified
in the field by the Owner. The lamping of lines and verification of elevations in
no way absolves the Contractor from any of contractual obligations.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-14 05/14/12
,
'
CJ
,
,
�
�
'
'
L�
I'�
�
,
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
��
LJ
'
,
'
'
,
'
J
,
'
'
--,
�
'
'
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
G. Related Permits
The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have
received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the
Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the
Contractor shall accept said assignments upon such request from #he Owner.
H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to
be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and their
conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings, are
the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that
additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls
shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction
process by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer.
It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any
information, data, etc. that is required as a condition of a permit. Required
information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by
the Contractor with copies to the permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor
will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation
of permit conditions.
1.13 DISPOSAL
A. The Contractor shall directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of
construction demolition debris. The Contractor shall include in its bid all costs
associated with disposal of construction debris including collection, storage,
hauling and tipping fees.
1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY
A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing
structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas,
fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not
specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the
Contractor unless otherwise specified.
B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at
least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following
construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting
the affected area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches
remain open over night within a street right-of-way unless the governing Traffic
Control Division grants specific approval.
C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or
replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of
construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs
shall be accomplished in a professional workmanship-like manner in
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-15 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
❑�
accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if
addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30-day time limit above
only by specific written agreement with the Engineer.
Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the
permanent repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with
its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or
replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work
will be deducted either from the next pay request or trom any other monies
owed the Contractor.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005-16
'
'
'
'
,
�
,
,
'
'
'
,
,
r
�
�
�
�
05/14/12 ,
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
CJ
'
,
'
LJ
�
�!
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 01014
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 LOCATION OF WORK
A. All Work of this Contract is located in rights-of-way, easements, or on
property owned by the City of Clearwater, Florida.
1.02 WORK TO BE DONE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services
and incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as
shown on the Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for
continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up,
replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused
during this construction.
C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools, and labor which is reasonably and
properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a
substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or
implied by these Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed
by the Contractor without additional compensation, whether specifically
indicated in the Contract Documents or not.
D. The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal, County, State, Federal, and
other codes applicable to the proposed construction work.
1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED
A. The work of this Contract comprises the general rehabilitation of the
following facilities, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified
herein.
1. Mobilization, demobilization, insurances, permits and bonds.
2. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and North RAS Pump House
Equipment at the Northeast WRF, which, in general, includes but is
not limited to:
a. Rehabilitating four (4) existing secondary clarifiers;
replacement of two (2) return activated sludge (RAS) pumps
and two (2) waste activated sludge (WAS) pumps, including
new pump bases and pipe supports; replacement of two (2)
SUMMARY OF WORK
� 01014-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
RAS pump suction valves, two (2) RAS pump discharge
vatves, and two (2) RAS pump check valves; replacement of
two (2) telescopic valve seals, replacement of one (1) WAS
plug valve, installing a new WAS flow meter, replacement of
RAS and WAS variable speed drives, replacement of the
Pump House MCC, and various other instrumentation and
SCADA upgrades.
3. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 thru 8 and South RAS Pump House
Equipment at the Northeast WRF includes rehabilitating four (4)
existing secondary clarifiers; replacement of two (2) return activated
sludge (RAS) pumps, including new pump bases and pipe supports;
replacement of two (2) RAS pump suction valves, two (2) RAS pump
discharge valves, and two (2) RAS pump check valves; replacement
of two (2) telescopic sludge valve seals, replacement of RAS and
WAS variable speed drives, replacement of the Pump House MCC,
and various other instrumentation and SCADA upgrades.
4. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall Street WRF
includes rehabilitating four (4) existing 100-foot diameter secondary
clarifiers; replacing four (4) return sludge telescopic valves and
operators; modifying the existing clarifier influent splitter box and
piping; installing four (4) new clarifier isolation valves, and designing,
permitting, furnishing, installing, operating, and maintaining a
temporary groundwater dewatering and disposal system required to
perform the work.
5. Rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at the East WRF, which
in general, includes but is not limited to rehabilitating two (2)
secondary clarifiers; replacement of a 24-inch effluent vatve,
replacement of a clarifier drain valve, replacement of a check valve
and two (2) discharge valves on the scum pump, and replacement of
telescopic valve seals.
1.04 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
A. General
Upon successful construction completion of each new component,
and pre-operational testing, Contractor shall conduct testing as
required by the Contract Documents.
2. Contractor shall ensure that, prior to start-up of any component, all
handrails, walkways, lighting and associated safety-related facilities
are in place.
3. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum of 14-calendar days
advance written notice of any requested change in operation to the
existing facility, bypass requirements or connections to existing
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014-2
LJ
'
,
'
'
�
,
,
t
'
,
'
,
'
�
�
I
�
��
�
J
05/14/12 '
r-,
J
'
'
�I
'
'
CJ
,
'
,
'
,
'
'
LJ
'
'
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
0
facilities, and shall obtain the Engineer`s written approval before
scheduling this work.
Restrictions
1. In planning its work, the Contractor shall consider the following
requirements.
a. As noted elsewhere in these Specifications, the Contractor will
be allowed to take only one clarifier at a time out of service.
The Contractor shall first rehabilitate the clarifier that is
currently out of service.
b. In order to remove/demo existing equipment in the splitter box,
the City will assist the Contractor in lowering the water level in
the splitter box for one brief (15-30 minute) period. The
Contractor shall assist the City by furnishing and operating a
750 gpm pump and piping system to dewater the splitter box.
This work may need to be performed at night.
c. The Contractor shall not take any existing facilities out of
service without obtaining the Engineer's prior written approval.
All new facilities shall be tested in accordance with
Specification 01625 to demonstrate to the Engineer and Owner
that the new facility and associated equipment properly
operates prior to taking any other existing facilities or
equipment out of service.
d. All manipulation ofi valves shall be performed by the Owner's
personnel. The Contractor shall not be allowed to manipulate
any valves except in emergencies. If there is an emergency,
the Owner shall be notified immediatety.
e. Groundwater quality samples taken in the vicinity of the work
indicate that the product water from dewatering may not be
discharged offsite or to surface waters but must be disposed of
onsite via percolation basins.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
' 01014-3 05/14/12
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUMMARY OF WORK .
01014-4
05/14/12
'
'
,
,
�I
'
'
�
�
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
,
,
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 01015
CONTROL OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK PROGRESS
A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe, appropriate
and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of
progress that will ensure the completion of the work within the Contract
Time(s). If, at any time, such facilities appear to the Engineer to be inefficient,
inappropriate, insufficient or unsafe for securing the quality of work required or
for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to
increase the facilities equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such
order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of
progress required to meet the Contract Time(s).
1.02 PRIVATE LAND
A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements,
except by permission of the Owner.
1.03 WORK LOCATIONS
A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the
Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be
found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other
reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the
Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing
different or additional items where required.
1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS
A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary
barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to
persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense,
provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating
travel by Owner's personnel, pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for
access to private property during construction shall be removed when no
longer required. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular
surrounding conditions and does not endanger existing facilities. If the
excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic, construction
procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking
excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain
open overnight.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to
open trenches. All
obstacles, which could
night.
� .05 TEST PITS
trenches, excavated material, equipment, of other
be dangerous to the public, shall be well lighted at
A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits (pot-hole) for locating underground
pipelines or structures in advance of construction to verify that the work can be
constructed as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by the
Contractor so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfifled
immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored
and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper
authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and
pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's
operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide
temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for
safety satisfactory to the Engineer.
B. Detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the Owner and
the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While
traffic is detoured the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and
those periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the
Owner.
C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to
open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist,
or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not
police protection has been provided.
1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and
private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage
thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property
by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution
of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by
the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing
before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other
manner acceptable to the Engineer.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-2 05/14/12
'
'
��
L
'
'
'
'
�
�
�_J
'
'
'
� _J
�i
�
u
,
i
'
,
'
,
�
,
'
,
LJ
LJ
,
,
'
'
�i
�
,
'
'
,
1
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
��%3
B. All sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be
restored to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable
materials. All curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original
construction and in accordance with the best modern practice.
C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery, and
other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly
workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor
shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as
conditions permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction that have
been damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original conditions.
D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury.
The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage because
of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without prior
notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs,
and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting in
accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools and materials.
E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall be
part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall
be included in the unit and/or lump sum prices established.
PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all
buildings, structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs,
services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants,
sewers, drains, and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are
shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support and protect all
such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting
from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired by him at his expense.
B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of
underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain
lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained and all costs or charges
resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the Contractor.
C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the
Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to
perform the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in the
Proposal, if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General
Conditions. If relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner will
notify the Utility to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The
Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner and Utility, and shall have no
claim for delay due to such relocation.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-3 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
D. Underground and above ground utilities/facilities are identified on the
Drawings based on best information available at the time for the preparation of
the plans. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities prior to
any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to
existing underground utilities and facilities, and shall coordinate the protection
of these utilities with the Owner.
1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES
A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or other
related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system as little
as possible, and shall notify the Engineer and public well in advance of any
requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a utility, so that
necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate agency.
B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the
Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines.
Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the existing
conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in
scheduling work.
1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT
A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or damage
in every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads shall be
allowed and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed by the
Contractor at his own expense.
28
29 1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water
required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all connections
and other provisions, including backflow prevention and metering provisions,
necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's potable and/or reclaimed
water system, as required. The Contractor shall pay the appropriate party for
all water used for construction purposes. Bid prices shall include the costs
incurred for water usage.
1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW
A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains,
and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall
immediately remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for maintaining
existing flows shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of the interruption
of any flow.
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-4 05/14/12
'
�
I
�
�
'
�
�
�
i
,
,
�
u
,
'
�
'
�
L�
'
'
LJ
'
,
1 1.13
'
,
I��
�
�
'
,
,
i
!i
.,
'
'
�
i
,
'
'
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
1.14
COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT
A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall
cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and
shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or
required.
B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by
the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated
herein or directed by the Engineer.
COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT
A. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As such,
the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and
accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work.
This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. As part of normal and/or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on-site on a
regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all equipment and
facilities, so as not to impede the operation and maintenance of said facility.
This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.15 CLEAN-UP
A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his
operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport and
properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber,
excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from the
construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner and/or
Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, he shall remove, transport and
properly dispose of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the
construction operation, and shall leave the entire site of his work in a neat and
orderly condition.
B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed from
the site.
1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY
A. If required, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power
company to have electrical service supplied to the site.
CONTROL OF WORK
' 01015-5 05/14/12
1 1.17 WORK SEQUENCE
2
3 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service/operations.
4 Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner
5 that assures that the facility maintains service throughout the duration of the
6 project. Prior to taking any service or operation off-line, Contractor shall
7 prepare a work sequence plan and coordinate all shut downs with the Owner
8 and/or Engineer. All temporary measures and materials required to meet this
9 condition during construction shall be provided, installed, maintained and
10 removed by the Contractor. All costs associated with this effort shall be borne
11 by the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to meet this operating
12 condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, shall be borne by the
13 Contractor.
14
15 PART 2— PRODUCTS (Not Used)
16
17 PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used)
18
19
20 END OF SECTION
CONTROL OF WORK
01015-6 05/14/12
�
I!
�
�
�
�
,
�
`
;
i
,
�
�
L�
�
'
�
�
,
'
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 01030
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be
understood by the Contractor that the Contractor's proposal includes those
products in its bid. Should the Contractor desire to incorporate products equal
to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the
General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the
Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all
respects, be equal to the products specified by name herein.
6. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles
for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products
of recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise.
C. Contractor shall properly dispose of all excess materials from the site.
1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and
prepare for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings.
All connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and/or
Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems
shall be attended by the Owner and/or Owner's Representative. The costs for
this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be
included in the various prices bid and shall not result in any additional cost to
the Owner.
1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that during excavation,
the possibility exists that the Contractor may encounter various water, gas,
telephone, electrical, and/or other utilities not shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate
and flag these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to
an existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the
Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out
in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be
borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles,
the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation,
are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable
advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor.
C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied
representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or
that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered.
Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on
the Drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner.
D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be
rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test
pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts.
Before any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the pipeline
or utility and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed.
E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing
piping and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with completed work shall
be carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any
way by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his
expense, as directed by the Engineer.
F. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone,
electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within
recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the
obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in
the opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may
direct the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify
utility crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer.
1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN
A. Bid prices for equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent field
service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to assist in the
installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the
Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved
manufacturer's operation and maintenance data, shall be delivered to the
Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be
divided into two or more time periods, as required by the installation program
or as directed by the Engineer.
B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is
presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the
manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust
the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where
applicable:
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-2 05/14/12
!
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
�,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
L_J
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Soundness (without damaged parts).
Completeness in all details, as specified and required.
Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various
parts.
Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants.
Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls.
Energize equipment.
Deficiency correction.
Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification.
C. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the
equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under
the conditions specified.
D. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall
submit to the Engineer in triplicate, a complete, signed report of the results of
his inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include
detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made,
quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for
precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance.
E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's
operating personnel. Training shall not be performed until the requirements of
Paragraphs B, C and D above have been fully satisfied and any specified
performance testing completed. Training shall be provided for the number of
days specified in each equipment section of these specifications. Training
shall be provided on an 8-hour per day basis. Partial days of less than eight
(8) full working hours shall not be credited toward the specified duration.
Training shall not be concurrent with on-going testing, debugging or
installation activities; but shall be on a separate activity devoted exclusively to
the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of
the manufacturer's equipment. Qualified representatives of each equipment
manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operations
personnel shall perform training. Training shall provide an overview of
operations and maintenance requirements and shall include as a minimum,
but not be limited to:
1.
2.
Description of unit and component parts.
Operating capabilities and performance criteria.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
' 01030-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Operating procedures.
Maintenance procedures.
Servicing and lubrication schedules.
Troubleshooting.
Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface.
The operating and maintenance data to be provided shall be used as a basis
for training.
F. A written "Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer
stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment
has been satisfactorily tested and ready for operation, and that the operating
personnel have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of the
equipment shall be submitted before start-up by the Owner. The Certificate
shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of operating
personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on a certification
form approved by the Engineer.
'
'
,
�
'
'
'
�I
lJ
G. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the ,
services of the manufacturer's field service technician.
H. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified,
shall furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the
manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over-heating makes
such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall
be delivered directly to the Engineer for approval within 60 days of shop
drawing approval. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or
stored on-site until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and
completeness of operating and maintenance data. Final approved copies of
operating and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the Engineer
prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner.
1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST
A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and
motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing
shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance
Data Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-4 05/14/12
'
'
�
,
'
C
'
,
'
,
�
J
�
'
'
��
,
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
�,I�
'
'
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts for certain equipment to be provided are specified in the pertinent
sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare
parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment
they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the
delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be
furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contractor
shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to facility start-
up.
B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible
markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged
storage.
C. No start-up activities shall take place until the specified spare parts have been
furnished.
1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with
particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric
drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified
millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the
anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened
against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been approved by
the manufacturer, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be
securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked
after securing to the foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the
sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and,
under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed.
B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary
to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the
Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so.
Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be
done at the expense of the Contractor.
1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES
A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall
provide a list including the equipment name, address and telephone number of
the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or
spare parts can be readily obtained.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-5 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS
A. Ali manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or
products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required
Shop Drawings.
B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where
identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period
of at least one (1) year.
1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install
anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to
complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by
subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and
patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the
following paragraph.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves,
inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the
execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective
cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc.
In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the
written approval of the Engineer.
1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION
A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run-
off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium
chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into
the supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be
adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased
more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by
the state or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish
unless timits have been established for the particular water. In surface water
used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless
otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of
construction equipment to prevent operations that promote erosion.
B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA-NPDES generic
permit for storm water discharges and the storm water pollution prevention
plan developed for the project.
1.13 VALVE INDICES
1
�
CJ
,
�
'
'
'
,
�
'
,
�
'
'
�
�
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required '
on the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-6 05/� 4/12 '
,
'
�
'
'
,
'
'
I,�
�
,
,
,
,
�
'
�
�
,
,
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.14
ground valves shall be non-corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19-
gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base
as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for approval, two (2)
samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart
and letter styles. Tags shall have stamped on them the information shown on
the Drawings and the data described herein. The Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for approval, not less than 120 days before start-up, a valve
schedule containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall
contain for each valve, the location, type, a number, words to identify the
valve's function, and the normal operating position. The information contained
in the valve schedules shall be coded on the tags in a system provided by the
Owner. Above ground valve tags shall be furnished with non-corrosive metal
wire for attachment thereof.
HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN
A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should
outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no
additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning.
B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the
Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or
material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the
Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials
shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
1.15 WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment
supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year
unless otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date that
the Work is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete.
B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship,
design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the
warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to
the Owner.
C. If, within the warranty period, repairs or changes are required in connection
with work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the
result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior, defec-
tive, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall
promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to the
Owner:
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-7 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and
correct all defects herein.
2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or
contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result oi
the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior,
defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract.
3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in
fulfilling any such guarantee.
D. If within ten (10) days after receiving notice, the Contractor fails to proceed to
comply with the terms of the warranty, the Owner may have the defects
corrected, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses
incurred, provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the
opinion of the Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be
started without notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall
pay the cost thereof.
E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as
may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of
this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special
guarantees and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the
Contractor and delivered to the Engineer, along with a summary list thereof,
before the acceptance of the Work.
F. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the
Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception #o this provision shall
be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment
warranties from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the
equipment specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract
Documents, or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner.
G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one-year warranty
commencing at the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall obtain
from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty starting at the time #hat the
manufacturer certified proper installation as specified elsewhere herein. This
three-year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year warranty
commencing upon Substantial Completion.
'
,
�
,
'
'
,
'
'
�
'
'
'
�
'
H. The Contractor's one-year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the ,
project's Performance Bond.
1.16 WATERTIGHTNESS
A. Special precautions shall be taken in the curing of concrete to reduce concrete
cracking as called for in Section 03300. All water-retaining structures (those
that are intended to hold a liquid) shall be filled and tested for leaks by the
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-8 05/14/12
'
�
'
,
'
1
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
�
,
�
,
�J
,
�
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Contractor, with water acceptable to the Engineer, prior to surface coating or
painting. Procedure and manner in which any leaks are repaired must meet
the approval of the Engineer. All costs associated with the testing and repair
of leaks shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the
governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever
there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these
Specifications, the more stringent shall apply.
1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE
A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to,
encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive
noise.
B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7
PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at
the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip-
ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at
any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have
the work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive
noise shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance
with the Contract Time(s), at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to wark stoppage resulting
from the creation of a public nuisance.
1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety
requirements.
1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER
A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior
by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of
the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue
such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During
suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and
protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if
the Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for documenting all inclement weather
conditions.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-9 Q5/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
1.21 RELOCATIONS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including
but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and
drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the
Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at
no additional cost to the Owner.
1.22 SALVAGE
A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves, pipes,
fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a resutt of
construction under this project may be designated y the Owner to be salvaged.
Any existing equipment or material to be salvaged shall remain onsite and the
Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the salvage equipment/materials
to the exact location onsite as directed by the Engineer.
1.23 PERMITS
A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable
permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate
governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all
applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer.
The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.24 PUMPING
A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to
prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations.
All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in
accordance with these specifications and/or regulatory requirements,
whichever is more stringent.
B. The Contractor shall, with his own equipment, pump out water that may seep
or leak into the excavations or structures. All water collected during pumping
operations shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these
specifications and/or regulatory requirements, whichever is more stringent.
Below grade galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times.
The extent of pumping required in tanks, channels and other non-operating
areas will be determined by the Owner/Engineer.
1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the
Contractor shall notify the Owner/Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar
days in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work.
1.26 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-10
'
'
n
LI
'
'
CJ
'
r,
L
'
�
�
�
'
�
,
'
u
'
05/14/12 '
'
,
'
�
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
,
'
,
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of
the entire work. Upon completion of construction of each individual facility,
including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the
individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion
and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership
and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one-year
guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of
not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work
as a whole when it is completed and tested.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030-11
05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
0� 030-12
05/14/12
,
�
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
1
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
SECTION 01040
COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of all construction
efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the
following:
1. The work of subcontractors
2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers
3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during testing and start-up
4. The interrelated work with public and private utifity companies
5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie-ins to or interfacing with
existing facilities or site operations are required
6. The effort of independent testing agencies
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
COORDINATION
01040-1 05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
COORDINATION
01040-2
05/14/12
,
,
�
'
,
,
��I
�
'
�J
,
'
'
,
1
,
1
�
,
'
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for ail field engineering and survey
services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing
and/or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundaries
and easements, project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines
and levels and all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also
included are such engineering services as are specified or required to execute
the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be
licensed professionals registered in the State of Florida.
B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and
marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has
established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for
the prosecution of the work.
1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those
designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control
points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference
points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or
reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any
such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed
due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them
referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor.
1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
41 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land
42 Surveyor to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to fully
43 construct the work in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 of the Florida
44 Administrative Code.
45
46 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline and
47 roadway right-of-way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50'
48 intervals on curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall place
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
lath and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be
permitted.
1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right-of-way maps,
plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with
existing monumentation to establish the existing right-of-way lines and
utility easement boundaries.
C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system
in accordance with Chapter 5J-17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written list to the
Contractor for his use.
D. The Contractor shall provide an as-built survey of all pipes and structures
constructed under the project that shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As-Built Survey shall
include:
1. Top of concrete elevations and northings and eastings for all basins
and structures,
2. Weir elevations for all basins and structures,
3. Pipe inverts for gravity pipelines and top of pipe elevations for pressure
pipelines for all yard piping, and northings and eastings of all changes
in pipe direction.
1.04 RECORDS
A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey
work as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information and
measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in
notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
�
Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer.
On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field
engineering work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050-2
r
�
�
1
��
LJ
'
'
'
�
.- �
�
,
,
'
LJ
'
,
i
1
05/14/12 ,
,
�J
,
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
,
'
,
��
i
�.
�
J
�
�
�
'
�
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01065
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall be responsibie to ensure that the construction of the
project adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards and regulations,
and to all permits and easements acquired for the project.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights-of-way with the agency
having jurisdiction, including all road/lane closures, road/lane narrowing and
detours.
C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements
that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders
at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address:
www.myclearwater.com/citvproiects. The Contractor shall conduct all
operations in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and
License Agreements.
D. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements
require that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a
representative of the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all
coordination and notification required to assure full compliance with the permit
conditions.
E. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds,
Easement Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of
the project. A listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or
License Agreements that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed
below. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other Permits,
Easement Agreements, or License Agreements necessary for the proper
execution of the Work not specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions and
requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the
Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement action
by any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in
the forms of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees or
consultant fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be
otherwise collectible from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally.
G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the
expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work.
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
H. Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil
tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of
Transportation design standards.
1.02 PERMITS
A. Permits obtained by, or applied for by, the Owner are as follows: None.
Permit Title Agency Permit/File Number
B. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions
that relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying
these permit conditions in developing a bid for the project.
C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain
the following permits, comply with their respective conditions, and submit
copies of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner:
1. City of Clearwater building permit(s)
2. Generic Permit for the Production of Groundwater.
3. Storm Water NPDES
D. The Contractor shall obtain all construction permits required including those
necessary for clearing, grubbing, and tree removal. No clearing shall occur
and no earth-moving equipment shall be placed on-site until after the permits
have been issued.
E. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with all local and state
permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use
permitting, if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water
Management District.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and complying with, all
required permits relating to discharges from dewatering shall obtain a State of
Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-2 05/14/12
'
,
'
,
'
LJ
III
�
,
'
C!
�
�
,
'
'
'
,
,
,
�
,
,
LJ
'
,
�
�
'
'
,
,
'
,
'
�
'
L1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
' 40
Discharge of Produced Ground Water From Any Non-Contaminated Site
Activity in accordance with 62-621.300(2) FAC. See specification Section
02140 Temporary Dewatering.
G. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with the requirements of a
Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction
Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62-621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor shall
submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of
Environmental Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall:
1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP or its
website, DEP Documents 62-621.300(4)(a) and 62-621.300(4)(b),
respectively.
�
3
�
Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water permitting
rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following:
a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobilized
by storm water.
b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff.
c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment controls
including Best Management Practices to reduce erosion,
sedimentation, and storm water pollution.
d. A maintenance and inspection schedule.
e. Plan and procedures for record keeping.
f. A map depicting storm water exit areas.
Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to
the local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee.
The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of Permit, along
with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer.
1.03 EASEMENTS
A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the various easements for
the following parcels:
Easement Number Owner County Parcel ID
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
� 01065-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065-4
05/14/12
'
'
,
�
1
L�
1
'
'
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
,
'
,
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify
reference standards.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with
requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when
requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes
establish stricter standards.
B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract
Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS
Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed
for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract
Documents.
AA Aluminum Association
900 19th Street NW
Washington, DC 20006
AASHTO American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
ACI
�
AISC
American Concrete Institute
38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331
Asphalt Institute
2696 Research Park Drive
Lexington KY 40511
American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive
Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60601-2001
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-1
05/14/12
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1140 Connecticut Avenue
Suite 705
Washington DC 20036
ANSI American National Standards Institute
1819 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20036
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
ASTM
AWWA
American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA, 19428
American Water Works Association
6666 W. Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
AWS American Welding Society
550 N.W. LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 N. Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
FS
NEMA
PCA
PCI
Federal Specification General Services
Administration Specifications and Consumer
Information Distribution Section (WFSIS)
470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100
Washington, DC 20407
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
1300 North 17th Street
Suite 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, IL 60077
Prestressed Concrete Institute
209 W. Jackson Blvd.
Chicago, IL 60606
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-2
[-�
1
1
,
'
II�
�
'
'
,
,
�
,
�
'
'
'
,
,
05/14/12 �
,
'
'
�
,
'
'
,
'
'
�
'
,
�
,
'
'
,
'
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SSPC
L�L
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Society for Protective Coatings
40 24th Street,. 6th floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
333 Pfingston Road
Northbrook, IL 60062
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-3
05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
'
'
,
�
'
L__!
�
'
LJ
'
�
i
1
��
1
1
�
►
1
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090-4 05/� 4/12 �
u
'
'
�
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
,
,
'
'
1
,
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01150
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Bid/Proposal
section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the
specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item
number.
B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall be full
compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and
incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and/or
as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid on
a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the
manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed
in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall constitute full compensation for all
work shown and/or specified to be performed under the Contract.
C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid prices
shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that
bid item. All existing structures and property including, but not limited to,
paving, stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, catch basins, head
walls, yard culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways,
sidewalks, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters, irrigation systems, buildings,
structures and equipment that are altered, removed or damaged during
construction shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior
to construction at no additional cost to the Owner. Cleanup is an integral part
of restoration process.
D. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve and protect existing facilities
during all periods for the construction phase. All existing structures,
equipment, and private property, including, but not limited to paving, stabilized
roads, drainage piping and ditches, latch basins, head walls, yard culverts,
lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, driveways, alleys,
curbs, gutters and irrigations systems that are altered, removed or damaged
during construction and are not included in the proposed alterations of the new
work shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to
construction.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements
necessitated by the construction/installati�n of those specific bid items
requiring traffic maintenance. . The cost for this work shall be included in the
specific unit price submitted for that particular bid item.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A.
I:�
C
Equipment for Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall Street WRF (Bid Item 1 A)
1. Owner Direct Purchase: The Owner will direct purchase the equipment
listed below from the Contractor-selected supplier/vendor in accordance
with the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents included in the
Appendix.
• Clarifier mechanical equipment included in Section 11225.
The price bid for Bid Item 1 A shall include all equipment, materials,
spare parts, special tools, O&M manuals, factory testing, field services,
warranty and other items normally provided by the manufacturer of the
equipment.
2. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Item 1A Equipment for Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall Street WRF
shall be made in accordance with the ODP Documents included in the
Appendix.
3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 1 A shall be made directly by the Owner
to the equipment vendor in accordance with the ODP Documents
included in the Appendix. The cost of the equipment will be deducted
from the Contract Price by Change Order in accordance with the ODP
Documents included in the Appendix.
ODP — Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City (Bid Item 1 B)
Measurement: Measurement of the lump sum price stipulated in the
Bid Form for Bid Item 1 B, ODP — Sales Tax Savings Retained, shall be
the actual amount of sales tax savings associated with the Owner's
Direct Purchase of the equipment furnished under Bid Item 1 A.
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 1 B shall not be made. The ODP -
Sales Tax Savings shall be deducted from the Contract by Change
Order in accordance with the ODP Documents included in the
Appendix.
Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and the North RAS Pump House at the
Northeast WRF Complete (Bid Item 1C)
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152-2
�
'
,
,
�
�
,
'
,
LJ
,
u
'
'
'
'J
'
,
05/14/12 '
�
'
'
'
'
�
'
1
,
,
L. J
�
'
�
,
�
,
'
�^
;�
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price
bid for Bid Item 1 C Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and the North
RAS Pump House at the Northeast WRF Complete shall not be made
and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid.
2. Pavment: Payment for Bid Item 1 C shall be made in accordance with
the Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing
of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to
perform the work as shown on the Drawings and Specifications as
indicated herein including, but not limited to, the design, installation,
operation, and maintenance of a groundwater removal system as
required to prevent each clarifier from becoming buoyant; the
disassembly, removal and disposal (unless otherwise indicated) of all
existing clarifier rotating components center columns, drives, weir
plates, scum baffles, scum baffle supports, scum beach plates and
supports, walkway bridges and handrails, scum pipe wall penetrations,
sludge blanket level detector probes and support brackets, chlorine
solution piping, reclaimed water piping to the limits shown on the
Drawings, and the flush water piping for the scum troughs; the
disassembly, removal and disposal of all existing WAS and RAS
pumps, motors, bases and electrical controls and associated valves as
shown on the Drawings; the installation of new clarifier components
including center columns, drives, bridges and walkways, rotating
mechanisms, scum baffles and supports, scum beaches with supports,
scum pipes and wall penetrations, reclaimed water piping on the
walkway bridges, scum beach plate flush water systems and weir
plates; modifications to the clarifier RAS piping, clarifier influent piping,
and to the clarifier concrete floor slabs as required for maintaining the
floor drains in service; the furnishing and installation of new WAS and
RAS pumps and associated valves, control panels and electrical work;
pipe supports; the removal furnishing and installation of a new WAS
plug valve and WAS flow meter; the removal and replacement of the
existing telescoping sludge valve seals with new telescoping sludge
valves seals; the furnishing and installation of pressure relief valves in
the floors of each clarifier; the removal and replacement of existing
concrete stair nosings with new stair nosings; the removal and
replacement of the existing motor control center and associated wiring
and controls with new electrical power and control conduit, wire and
equipment as shown on the Drawings; provisions for temporary
electrical power and controls as required to maintain service; removal
and replacement of the existing RAS wet well liquid level detector with a
new RAS well level detector, re-mounting of the sludge level detector
probes and brackets on new clarifier walkways; re-wiring and re-
connecting the sludge level detectors; incorporating new equipment
and process variables into the existing plant SCADA System; furnishing
and installing new instrumentation, control panels, input/output
modules, power supplies and SCADA communication cables; modifying
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152-3 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
E
existing control panels; providing the services of a Systems Integrator;
SCADA start-up, testing, and training; all pertinent Division 1
requirements; and, all other equipment, materials and services
necessary for the complete Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and
North RAS Pump House Equipment at the Northeast WRF as detailed
in the Contract Documents.
Under this Bid Item 1 C, the Contractor shall furnish and install all work
at the Northeast WRF excluding that equipment furnished under Bid
Items 1 A, 1 D, and 2 thru 7, including, but not limited to, all coordination,
ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the site,
transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions, and all other labor, materials, tools,
appliances, supervision and incidentals but necessary for the proper
completion of the work.
SCADA Software Implementation Services Allowance (Bid Item 1 D)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated for
Bid Item 1 D shall be made in accordance with the appropriate
Authorization by the Owner. The allowance is for the Owner's Systems
Integrator to perform the PLC programming and HMI programming as
described in Section 13630.
�
,
'
L_J
�
��
�
�
'
'
'
�
2. Pavment: Payment for Bid Item 1 D shall be made in accordance with '
the terms of the Authorization.
Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 thru 8 and South RAS Pump House Equipment at
the Northeast WRF. (Bid Item 2).
Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Item 2 Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 Thru 8 and South RAS Pump House
Equipment at the Northeast WRF shall not be made and all items shall
be included in the lump sum price bid.
2. Pavment: Payment for Bid Item 2 shall be made in accordance with the
Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to
perform the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein
including but not limited to disassembly, and removal of all clarifier
rotating components; removal of center columns, removal of drives,
removal of the weirs, scum baffles, scum baffle supports, scum
beaches, scum beach supports, walkway bridges, scum pipe wall
penetrations, sludge blanket level detector probes and probe mounting
brackets, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water piping on the
walkway bridges, and flush water piping for the scum beaches; furnish
and install all new clarifier components including new center columns,
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152-4 05/14/12
LJ
'
'
,
�
'
'
�
,
LJ
�
i
�
�
'
�
'
1
'
�,
�
LI
u
�
�
�
�
1 new drives, new walkways; new rotating mechanisms; new scum
2 baffles and supports; new scum beaches, new scum beach supports,
3 new scum pipe wall penetrations new chlorine solution piping, new
4 reclaimed water piping on the walkway bridges, new scum beach flush
5 waster system; modify the base concrete, RAS piping, influent piping,
6 and drain lines in each clarifier as required, disassembly and removal,
� of all RAS pumps, pump motors, pump bases, and electrical controls,
8 disassembly and removal of RAS pump suction valves, check valves,
9 and discharge valves, furnish and install new RAS pumps, motors, and
10 bases, new RAS pump suction valves, new RAS pump check valves,
1 � new RAS pump discharge valves, new RAS and WAS electrical and
12 control panels; new RAS pipe supports, remove existing telescoping
13 sludge valve seals; furnish and install new telescoping sludge valves
14 seals, disassemble and remove the existing MCC, furnish and install
15 new replacement electrical power and control wire, conduit, and
� 6 equipment, provide temporary electrical power and control wiring and
17 conduit as required, remove existing RAS well liquid level detector,
18 furnish and install new RAS well level detector, mount sludge level
19 detector probes and brackets on new clarifier walkways, reconnect
20 sludge level detectors, incorporate new equipment and process
21 variables into the existing plant SCADA system, provide inspection,
22 sandblasting, painting, startup, testing, and coordination services by the
23 manufacturer's authorized representative; all pertinent Division 1
24 requirements and all other services necessary for the complete
25 Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 Thru 8 and South RAS Pump House
26 Equipment at the Northeast WRF as detailed in the Contract
27 Documents.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F. Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall Street WRF (Bid Item 3)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Item 3 Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall Street WRF
shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price
bid.
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 3 shall be made in accordance with the
Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to
perform the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein
including, but not limited to, disassembly, removal and disposal of all
clarifier rotating components; disassembly, removal and disposal of
clarifier center columns, drives, weirs, scum baffles, scum baffle
supports, scum beaches, scum beach supports, walkway bridges, scum
pipe wall penetrations, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water piping
on the walkway bridges, and flush water piping for the scum beaches;
removal and reinstallation of sludge blanket level detector probes and
probe mounting brackets; furnishing and installing all new clarifier
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
' ' 01152-5 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
G.
components including center columns, drives, walkways; rotating
mechanisms; scum baffles and supports; scum beaches, scum beach
supports, and scum pipe wall penetrations; modifications to the clarifier
influent and/or RAS structural base concrete as required for the new
equipment, RAS piping, influent piping, and drain lines in each clarifier
as required; disassembly, removal and disposal of existing telescoping
sludge valves and associated manual valve operator bases and
supports; furnishing and installing new telescoping sludge valves,
manual operators, and supports; removal of the existing splitter box
gate hardware; modifications to the existing splitter box piping and
concrete, new stairs, installing new clarifier isolation valves; providing
temporary dewatering and product water disposal systems, providing
inspection, sandblasting, painting, startup, testing, and coordination
services by the manufacturer's authorized representative; all pertinent
Division 1 requirements and all other services necessary for the
complete Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall Street WRF
as detailed in the Contract Documents.
Rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at the East WRF (Bid Item 4)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Item 4 Rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at East WRF shall
not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid.
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 4 shall be made in accordance with the
Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to
perform the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein
including but not limited to disassembly and removal of the east clarifier
walkway; removal of drives, scum baffles, scum beaches, scum beach
supports, weirs, and chlorine solution piping on each clarifier; reclaimed
water piping on the east clarifier walkway bridge, scum trough flush
water system on the east clarifier; and corroded skimmer arm assembly
at the surface of both clarifiers; sandblast and paint the rotating
mechanisms and the center columns on each clarifier, the access
platform on the west clarifier walkway bridge; furnish and install new
scum baffles, scum baffle supports, scum beaches, scum beach
supports, skimmer assemblies, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water
piping on the walkway bridge, flush water piping system for the scum
trough, furnish and install a new walkway bridge on the east clarifier,
new drives for each clarifier, furnish and install new telescoping sludge
valve seals; replace the scum pump discharge valve and check valves
with new valves, excavate and replace the west clarifier effluent valve
and the east clarifier drain valve, inspection, startup, testing, and
coordination services by the manufacturer's authorized representative;
all pertinent Division 1 requirements; and, all other services necessary
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152-6 05/14/12
1
1
�
�
�
�
'
LJ
'
'
'
LJ
�
�
�
�
�
�
i1
'J
'
'
'
�
'
�.J
'
,�
'
'
1
�
'
,
1
'
�
�
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
�
I�
J.
for the complete rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at the
East WRF as detailed in the Contract Documents.
Mobilization (Bid Item 5)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
Mobilization shall be on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed
four percent (4%) of the proposed ProjecYs Base Bid Total.
2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 5 shall be full compensation for all
costs associated with initiating the project as limited by other sections of
the agreement including the Contractor's Performance and Payment
Bonds. Payment for these performances shall be based on the terms
of Section 01505 and in accordance with the Schedule of Values.
Indemnification (Bid Item 6)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated
under Bid Item 6 Indemnification shall not be made and all items shall
be included in the lump sum.
2. Pavment: Payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for Bid Item 6
shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the Owner and the
Owner's Engineer as specified in the General Conditions, and shall be
included in the first payment request.
Owner's Contingency Allowance (Bid Item 7)
1. Measurement: Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by
the Owner and Contractor.
2. Pavment: Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the
Contingency Request and, if applicable, in accordance with the
Schedule of Values.
END OF SECTION
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
' 01152-7 05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152-8
05/14/12
'
,
�
i
'
,
�
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 01152
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the
approved payment schedule and in the format established by the Owner.
B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application
for Payment form, prior to the first payment request.
1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
A. Submit applications typed on forms either provided in these Specifications,
furnished by the Owner, or as approved by the Owner, with itemized data
typed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14-inch white paper continuation
sheets.
B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet:
1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of
Values accepted by the Engineer.
1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT
A. Application Form:
1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed
prior to date of submittal of application.
2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated
on continuation sheets.
3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the
Contractor.
B. Continuation Sheets:
1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item
number and scheduled dollar value for each item.
2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when
work has been performed or products stored.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.
'
'
List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the �
end of the continuation sheets.
a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original �
component item of work.
4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site,
submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for Payment.
The application for payment must also include a table summarizing the
amount of each invoice and the schedule of values line item to which
the stored materials apply.
1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Provide substantiating data, containing suitable information for review of costs
requested with a cover letter identifying:
L�
1. Project.
2. Application number and date.
3. Detailed list of enc{osures.
4. For stored products:
a. Item number and identification as shown on application.
�
c.
Description of specific material.
Supplier invoices.
d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount
installed, and schedule of values item, which the material
applies.
Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.
C. The Contractor is to maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record
drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is
to exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the
Engineer.
D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance
with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the
applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the
required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-2
'
�
��
,
�
�
�
�_J
,
L_J
,
��
�
�
05/14/12 ,
�
�
,
'
�
,
��
U
'
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
'
'
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
withhold approval of progress payment estimates until such a time as the
Contractor submits the required updated schedule.
E. Contractor shall maintain an updated set of As-Built Drawings in accordance
with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
Contractor shall submit the updated As-Built Drawings with the applications for
progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the updated As-Built
Drawings, the Engineer may withhold approval of progress payment estimates
until such a time as the Contractor submits same.
1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
�
�
C.
Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.
Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as
specified in the Specification.
All appropriate information must be entered on the application form.
1. The line title, "Application Period", must indicate the dates between
which all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must
be consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and
they must not overlap.
2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project
Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any
Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section
must include that information.
�]
�
All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny.
The application must be signed and dated by an authorized
representative of the Contractor.
1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Prior to submitting a completed Application for Payment request, the
Contractor shall arrange a field meeting with the Owner and/or Engineer to
review and verify all installed quantities and/or stored materials. Only when
the Owner/Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and
percentages, should the Application for Payment be submitted.
�
Cf
Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times
stipulated in the General Conditions.
When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will
transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
, 01152-3 05/14/12
1
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3
4 PART 3 - EXECUTION
5
6
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152-4
05/14/12
'
�
'
�
�
�
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
�
'
,
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01153
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures.
1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes.
2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material/force
account basis.
3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.
B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization:
1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work.
2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of
the authorization of changes in the work.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Change Order: See General Conditions.
B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner
and Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described,
authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum
or the Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order.
C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or
interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not
involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the
Contractor, which is issued to interpreUclarify the Contract Documents, order
minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be
accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and/or
claims for other costs.
1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive
Change to the Contractor. Request will include:
CHANGE ORDERPROCEDURES
01153-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
:
1.
Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change
in the Project.
2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific
statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized.
'
�
L�
�
�
4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be �
considered valid.
Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer, '
containing:
1. Description of the proposed changes.
'
2. Statement of the reason for making the changes.
3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. �
4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors.
5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract
Time, as appropriate.
1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A. Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and
deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of
the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the
Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time.
B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as
authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes.
1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS
A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price,
which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data
to allow the Engineer to evaluate the quotation.
B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations:
1. Labor required.
2. Equipment required.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-2
05/14/12 �
,
,
�
�
�
�
,
�
'
'
�
,
'
�
'
�
�
,
,
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
3. Products required.
a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.
b. Quantities required.
4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.
6. Overhead and profit.
7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time-and-
material/force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum
proposal, plus additional information:
1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date
of the order.
2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom.
3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
4. Receipts and invoices for:
a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use.
b. Products used, listing of quantities.
c. Subcontracts.
1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS
A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order.
B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions,
with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the
change.
C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract
Sum and in the Contract Time.
CHANGEORDER PROCEDURES
01153-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract
Documents, order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade-off
agreements.
E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum,
Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs.
1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and
attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor,
or requests from Owner, or both.
B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent
to Contractor for approval. After approval by Contractor, all copies should be
sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed
copies.
1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either:
1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes.
2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer.
3. Survey of complete work.
B. The amounts of the unit prices to be:
1. Those stated in the Agreement.
2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be
determined prior to start of the work:
1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as
authorization for C�ntractor to proceed with the changes.
D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work:
1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the
Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and
the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-4 05/14/12
�
,
�
�
� _)
�
�
��
�
�
�
,
�
i
�
�
�
,
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of
such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor
shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each
item and any claims for a change in Contract Time.
3
..�
5
Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change
in Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their
agreement with the terms therein.
Owner will then sign the change order.
1.09 TIME AND MATERIAVFORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION
CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor
to proceed with the changes.
Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized
accounting and supporting data.
Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in
General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in
Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
Contractor wi�l sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement
therewith.
Owner will then sign the Change Order.
1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Application for
Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to
record the adjusted Contract Amount.
B. Not greater than monthly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect each change
in Contract Time. Revise sub-schedules to show changes for other items of
work affected by the Change Order.
C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in
Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
, 01153-5 05/14/12
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153-6
05/14/12
'
�
I
�
�
'
'
'
�
�
,
�
i
,
�
,
�
,
�
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01200
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of
Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time
and place.
B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel
and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be
discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda
shall include as a minimum:
1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule
2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings
3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Applications for
Payment
4. Maintaining As-Built Drawings
5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions
6. Field Decisions and Change Orders
7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security
8. Equipment and Material Deliveries
9. Safety Meetings and Program
10. Traffic Control Plan
11. Pre-construction Video
C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference, and shall arrange for
preparation and distribution of the minutes.
1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least
monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work.
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The
Contractor and/or Engineer may request attendance by representatives of
material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s).
B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping
the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose of
the meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the
Work, maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling
and resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future
scheduling.
PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200-2
05/14/12
��
,
'
�
�J
,
'
,
�
�
�
�
i
,
i
�
�
,
,
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Before Work is started, the Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a
schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction schedule
shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and completion of
each part, the installation date for each major item of equipment, and the time
for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities.
B. At least every 30 days the schedule shall be revised as necessary to reflect
changes in the progress of the Work.
C. Owner may require Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction forces,
as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any
time during the construction period.
1.02 PROGRESS REPORTS
A. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each Application for
Payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit additional
progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request.
B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and
anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule, and
proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not
readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory
evidence.
C. Each progress report shall also include three (3) prints of the accepted graphic
schedule marked to indicate actual progress.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a schedule of values
after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first
application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each
kind of work, shall be acceptable to Engineer before any application for
payment is prepared or approved.
B. The sum of the items listed in the schedule of values shall equal the Contract
Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be
listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be
SUBMITTALS
01300-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items.
C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, items that shall also be
included on the schedule of values include O& M manuals (including
electronic format), As-Builts, Start-Up and Training, and any individualized
component that the Contractor wishes to separately itemize for payment.
D. All Scheduled Values, except the mobilization item, shall be rounded to the
nearest whole dollar. The difference between the Contract amount and the
SOV shall be included in the Mobilization item.
E. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor
on items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The
Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to
Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the
schedule of values as a basis for preparation of Applications for Payments and
shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS
A. Within fifteen (15) days after Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall furnish to
Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall be
revised and resubmitted each time an Application for Payment varies more
than 10 percent from the latest Schedule of Payments.
1.05 SURVEY DATA
A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing
surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for
examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be
submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final
acceptance of the Work.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA
A. Within 15 days of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a
Schedule of Shop Drawings listing each shop drawing that the Contractor is
required to submit and the date on which the shop drawing will be submitted.
B. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will
become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for
review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in
sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of
component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and
supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for
installation and correlation with other materials and equipment.
SUBMITTALS
01300-2 05/14/12
'
�
,
'
,
,
�
�
�
L�
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
,
�
(i
�
,
�
,
'
,
L_J
'
,
'
�
,
,
,
,
�
�
,
�
�
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped with the approval of
Contractor and identified with the name and number of this Contract,
Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs and
Contract Drawings. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item
in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be
clearly identified. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be
indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data.
C. Contractor's stamp of approval is a representation to Owner and Engineer that
Contractor accepts full responsibility for determining and verifying all
quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers,
and similar data, and that he has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with
the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.
D. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each
submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such
submittals shall indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all
changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that
may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams.
E. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each
submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions
previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that
more than one resubmission is required because of failure of Contractor to
account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for
the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions.
F. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter
returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days
the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the
stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed
within that time.
G. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining
Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the
Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the
work authorized by a Change Order or by failure of Engineer to return any
submittal within 21 days after its receipt in Engineer's office.
H. Contractor's Istter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal
letter, the date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of
submission and return of any previous resubmittals. The Contractor shall
reimburse the Engineer for review of re-submittals as provided for in the
General Conditions.
Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover
only general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external
SUBMITTALS
01300-3 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
connections, and dimensions which affect the layout. Engineer's review does
not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the
material, equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals
shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or
deviations, or responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.
J. Five copies of each drawing and necessary data, plus the number of copies
that the Contractor wants returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer
will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be
consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal based on the 5 digit
Specification Section number and a sequential number (001, 002, etc.), and
without division by subcontract or trade. Resubmittals shall bear the number
of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.) to indicate the sequence of
the resubmittal. If applicable, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with an
electronic file of the submittal format to be followed.
K. When the drawings and data are returned marked AMEND — RESUBMIT or
REJECTED - RESUBMIT, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and
as instructed by Engineer and five corrected copies (or one corrected
reproducible copy) resubmitted.
L. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct
specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made
other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions.
r�
�
CJ
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�J
M. When the drawings and data are returned marked NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN, ,
no additional copies need be furnished.
1.07 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Operation and maintenance data shall include the following:
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking
instructions.
3.
4
5
Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
Guide to "troubleshooting".
Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
B. The operation and maintenance data shall be in addition to any instructions or
parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which
may be required by Contractor.
SUBMITTALS
01300-4 05/14/� 2
'
�
r
�
�
,
�
r i
'
�
�
'
,
�
,
'
�
,
'
,
'
r
�
�
�
�
,
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1.08 LAYOUT DATA
A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of ineasurements and
calculations made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of
such data shall be furnished to the Engineer for use in checking.
B. Contractor's layout data as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data
considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner by Engineer with
other records upon completion of the Work.
1.09 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION
A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color
selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of
all other items.
1. Paint for aboveground piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers,
etc.
2. Paint for above ground equipment.
3. Paint for ground storage tank.
PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
SUBMITTALS
01300-5 05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
r
�
�
,
L_�
�
�
�
��
1
�
u
,
'
,
r
�
�
�
r
SUBMITTALS
01300-6 05/14/12 '
�
J
,
,
,
'
�
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
,
r
'
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that construction
is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The
Contractor will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow
orderly and timely completion of all the work.
B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type,
and shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA P3, or equal.
1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice of Award, the
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction
progress schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such
that no single task has a value that exceeds 2.0% of the total Contract Price.
Partial payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress
schedule has been approved by the Engineer.
B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the approved baseline
schedule and the Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment
will be approved until the updated schedule is submitted and approved by the
Engineer.
C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only with
the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may be
revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate
equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at
night.
D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be
responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of progress
and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have direct
project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in
fulfilling the commitments of the Contractor's schedule.
1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK
A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent
any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-1 05/14/12
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
�0
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials
and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the
Contract.
B. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to
carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice
to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to
be made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the
Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The
Contractor shall light the different parts of the project as required to comply with
all applicable Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements
of the municipality in which the work is being done.
PART 2- PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical
path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into
considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
B. The critical path progress schedule requirement shall consist of a detailed
schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and
revisions to the schedules and anatyses as described. The planning,
scheduling, management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities
of the Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow the Engineer to review
Contractor's planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to
assist Engineer in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to
allow other contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of
the Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction
schedule" and "cumulative outlay schedule."
C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not retieve Contractor from the
responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor
has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific
deviations, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from
responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals.
D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or
the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General
and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable
time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected, exceed the total
float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown in the precedence
diagram and report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice to proceed with a
change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or (c) detection of a
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-2 05/14/12
r
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
,
L�
�
'
LJ
'
�
'
�
�
�
'
LJ
�
,
�
�
I
�
�
�
'
,
�_ J
'
'
�
'
�
,
'J �
i
,
1 subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d) occurrence of cause
2 for an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the schedule, or the
3 allocation of float time to activities by means of special logic restraints or
4 imposed dates, shall be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer, Contractor,
5 and his subcontractors and suppliers in proportion of their scope of
6 responsibilities. Excessive use of float time to the detriment of succeeding
7 activities may be cause for denying an extension of time if it can be
8 demonstrated that the float along the network paths affected at the instant of the
9 delaying condition would have been larger than the delay had it not been for the
10 excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation of the sharing concept
11 required by this Specification.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with
the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the
means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to
safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the
schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval
signed off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule
submittals shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that
Contractor, has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or
assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor and his
subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences
shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract
Documents.
2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time-scaled precedence network format.
The graphic network diagram shall include the following format:
1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the
scope of work described.
2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to
achieve Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion,
such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of
regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication
and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as
set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to
support pre-operational and start-up testing; time required for the
relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with
the work of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner.
3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be
considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve
Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, within the
Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
, 01310-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
�
concurred detailed schedule shall give rise only to non-prejudicial delays.
Attempts to impose after-the-fact logic constraints where none existed
previousty to justify time extensions will not be permitted.
4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days.
5. Graphic diagrams shall be time-scaled and sequenced by work areas.
The Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and
be shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible
and submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a
medium suitable for reproduction.
Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint
1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity
man-days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish
date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and
total float and free float.
�
r
�
►
�
,
L�
��
�
,
'
2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and '
restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows:
a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers.
b. Activity, sort by department.
c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values.
d. Successor/predecessor report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
A. Submittal shall include a time-scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract
activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial
Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the
Notice to Proceed, and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date". Upon
receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and
discuss an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary
revisions resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed
schedule resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re-
submittal, if agreed to by the Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the
concurrence of or at the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by
the Contractor for planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If
Contractor faits to provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be
deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated,
which will further constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-4 05/14/12
,
,
�
'
�
,
�
�
CJ
�i
,
,
,
'
�
,
'
,
'
�
,
'
'
'
,
�
�
,
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. The graphic diagram shall
above. The diagram shall
areas of work. The critica
paths for interim dates, if
graphics diagram.
be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02(A)
include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major
I path activities shall be identified, including critical
applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the
C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout
reports and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling
requirements.
D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's
determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints
plugged into the schedule, and provide a"what-if" analysis pertaining to potential
problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require
additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten
calendar days.
3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS
A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall
submit to Engineer, with each Application for Payment, a Monthly Status Report
(based on the Detailed Schedule) with data as of the last day of the pay period.
The monthly Status Report shall include a revised copy of the currently accepted
graphic diagram, computer printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report
will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall address the Engineer's
comments in the subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to
provide acceptable Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have
provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason
for refusing to recommend progress payments.
B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram,
percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and
remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the
currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual
dates will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised
diagram by the Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the
time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the
corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order
shall govern.
C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a
narrative form:
1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule)
including:
a. Activities completed this reporting period;
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
' 01310-5 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
b. Activities in progress this reporting period;
c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period.
2. Description of problem areas
3. Current and anticipated delays
a. Cause of the delay;
b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay;
c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on
completion dates.
4. Changes in construction sequence
5. Pending items and status thereof
a. Permits
b. Change Orders
c. Time extensions
d. Other
6. Contract completion date status
a. Ahead of schedule and number of days
b. Behind schedule and number of days
3.�03 REVISIONS
�
LQ
��
All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as
the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons
for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The
revision shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as-built
conditions. Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly
meetings. Changes to activities having adequate float shall be considered a
minor change.
A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when
required by Engineer, for one of the following reasons:
1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in
the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path.
2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a
critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents.
If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer
requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-6 05/14/12
,
'
' 1 progress, Contractor shall provid
2 change effect(s) incorporated as
3 documents will be incorporated
' 4 Report.
5
6 3.04 START-UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
'
�
,
,
'
i
C�
�
„
,
��
�
,
�
�
�
CJ
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
e an interim revised submittal for review with
directed. Approved interim revisions to the
during the first subsequent Monthly Status
A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, Contractor
shall submit a time-scaled (days after notice to proceed) graphic diagram
detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days prior to
Substantial Completion, together with a supporting narrative. Engineer shall
respond within 10 calendar days after receipt of the submittal. Upon receipt of
Engineer's comments, Contractor shall make the necessary revisions and
submit the revised schedule within ten calendar days. If Contractor fails to
provide acceptable Start-up Schedule Submittals, he will be deemed not to have
provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason
for refusing to recommend payment.
B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The
Start-up Schedule is intended to show much greater detail than the Detailed
Schedule for start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not
limited to, the timing of vendor representatives, pre-op testing, individual
equipment start-ups, Owner's training, and performance certification testing.
C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for
those activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to Substantial
Completion, and detailed a�tivities for the remaining 60-day period within the
time frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule.
D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as
outlined in Articles 3.03 and 3.04 above. In preparing these reports, Contractor
must assure that the Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in
the Start-up Schedule.
E. In addition, Contractor witl be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up
graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative. This revised
diagram shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates,
and remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the
accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that
contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of
these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with
the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity.
3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation
and updated schedule data that any milestone and/or Contract completion date
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-7 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
'
�
will not be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work `
back on schedule. Actions could include:
1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to �
substantially eliminate the backlog of work;
2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work
days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any
combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the
backlog of work; and
3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment.
B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours
or any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed
Schedule shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered
justification for a Change Order or treated as an acceleration order. If requested,
provide a written description of the actions that will be taken to bring the work
back on schedule.
END SECTION
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310-8
'
�
�
'
'
�
,
C�
'
�
�
��
�
,
'
05/14/12 �
�
,
'
L1
'
�
L�
�
'
'
,
'
,
r
'
,
�
r
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings,
shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter
in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section
called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but
not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples for
materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the
Contract Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in
other sections of these Specifications.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be
considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will
become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and
detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting
drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of
material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including
performance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work.
B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the
elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure
and/or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon
field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the
shop drawings before being submitted for review.
C. See Shop Drawing Schedule requirements
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY.
1.03 PRODUCT DATA
in Subparagraph 1.07
A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not
necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products
(sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product
specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns,
manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing-
in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring
diagrams, printed performance curves and operational-range diagrams,
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
production or quality contro
reports, product operating
spare-parts listing storage
applicable to the work.
�.04 WORKING DRAWINGS
I inspection and test reports and certifications, mill
and maintenance instructions and recommended
instructions, and printed product warranties, as
A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be
considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such
as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities,
ground water control systems, forming and falsework; for underpinning; and
for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become
an integral part of the Project.
B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional
Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be
accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely
explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner
of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been
reviewed, without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for
general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his
responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All
risks of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall
have no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by
the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be
delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes
as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted
unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges
on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not
be used in work until reviewed by the Engineer.
B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily
limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or
fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of
repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets,
specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work
to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing,
as applicable to the Work.
C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample,
shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of
this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the
SHOP DRAW INGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAW INGS AND SAMPLES
01340-2 05/14/12
�
'
'
'
'
�
.--,
�
i
�
�
,
'
'
�
�
r
'
�
l
r
'
�
��
�
'
'
�I
�
�
�
'
'
'
r
,
r-�
�
�
�
�
'
�
'
L
[��
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
characteristics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to
change or modify any Contract requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable
promptness and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract
Work or in the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop
drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the
Contract Documents.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of all shop
drawings, plus the number of copies he wants returned. The Engineer will
review the submittal and return to the Contractor marked-up copies of the
shop drawings with the appropriate review comments.
C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be
transmitted using a form provided by the Engineer and furnished with the
following information:
1. Number and title of the drawing.
2. Date of drawing or revision.
3. Name of project building, facility or system.
4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting
5
6.
7.
8.
9.
drawing.
Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet
numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings.
Contractor Certification Statement.
Submittal Identification Number.
Contract Drawing Number Reference.
Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents.
D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's
standard product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or
equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements
because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall
describe such variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings
along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable,
proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If
the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the
responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even
though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not
described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the
Contractor will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless
specifically noted and then approved as such in writing by the Engineer.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-3 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists
giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or
manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all
other pertinent data.
F. For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a
single list that includes the equipment name, address and telephone number
of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that service
and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance and
lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as
specified in Section 01730.
G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the shop
drawings. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking shop
drawings.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all
trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him
before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every
drawing or data sheet 11 "x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp
showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data
sheets 11 "x17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and
bear the Contractor's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully
describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers within the
package. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's
stamp will be returned to the Contractor, without review, at the Engineer's
option.
:3
C
The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to
submission to determine and verify the following:
1. Field measurements.
2. Field construction criteria.
3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data.
4. Conformance with Specifications.
Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. At a time decided upon at the pre-construction meeting, but not later than 15
days following the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer
a Shop Drawing Schedule fixing the respective dates for the initial submission
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-4 05/14/12
,
'
,
'
.-,
�i
�
i
'
.--,
��
LJ
,
L�
�
�
��
'
'
C�
�
�
,
'
'J �
�
,
�
'
�
'
'
,
'
�
�j
�,
��
,�
I
��
�
�
,
�
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
of shop and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and
installation of materials, supplies and equipment. This schedule shall be
provided as a separate entity and indicate those submittals that are critical to
the progress schedule. The Contractor shall prepare and transmit each
submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other
applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections
of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing
times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with
other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar
sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the
Contractor's failure to transmit complete and acceptable submittals sufficiently
in advance of the Work.
E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned,
"Rejected-Resubmit" or "Confirm". Before starting this work, all revisions must
be corrected or the additional information requested must be submitted by the
Contractor. After re-submittal, shop drawings will be reviewed and returned by
the Engineer. If returned marked, "No Exceptions Taken", "Exceptions as
Noted", or "Make Corrections Noted", Contractor may begin this work. Any
corrections made to the shop drawings are to be followed without exception.
F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data
sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide no less than
twenty-one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the
Engineer receives them.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost of damages that may
result from the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of
work prior to review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings.
H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by
subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking.
The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the
approved shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of
materials and project completion.
I. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor shop drawings, product data,
working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of inembers,
materials, and details to satisfy him that they are in conformance to the
Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in
error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission
to the Engineer.
1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING
DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-5 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and
Contract Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as
relieving the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for
details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work
and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly,
and for performing work in a safe manner.
'
1
'
,
,
B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. The review
shall not be construed as: �
1.
��
3
Permitting any departure from the Contract Documents;
Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including
details, dimensions, and materials; or,
Approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as
otherwise provided herein.
C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations per
subparagraph 1.06D show a departure from the Contract Documents that
Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to
involve a change in Contract Price or time for performance, the Engineer may
return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception.
D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following:
"NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or
comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor
may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture.
"MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments
have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as
compared with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not
necessary prior to release for manufacturing.
"CONFIRM" is assigned when a resubmittal is required by the Contractor. The
Contractor may release that portion of the equipment or material for
manufacture for which there were no corrections noted; however, all notations
and comments must be incorporated into the final submittal. This resubmittal
is to address the omissions and/or nonconforming items that were noted.
"REJECTED - RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittal is in
noncompliance with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and the
entire package resubmitted. This code generally means that the equipment or
material cannot be released for manufacture unless the Contractor takes full
'
� _J
u
,
,�
i�
�
t
�
�
,
,
�
u
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-6 05/14/12 �
'
�
�
�
'
�
r;
'
'
i
'
�
',�
�
�
i
�
�
�
j -�
�
�
�
�
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
responsibility for providing the submitted items in accordance with Contract
Documents.
"FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides
information of a general nature that may or may not require a response.
E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On
resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the
letter of transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision
triangles or other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections
requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that
are not clearly identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall make corrections to any work done because of this type
revision that is not in accordance to the Contract Documents as may be
required by the Engineer.
F. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to
constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give
written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to
release for manufacture.
G. The Engineer will review a submittal/resubmittal a maximum of two (2) times
after which cost of review will be borne by the Contractor. The cost of
engineering shall be as specified in Section 01300 or, if not specified therein,
shall be equal to the Engineer's charges to the Owner under the terms of the
Engineer's agreement with the Owner.
H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance
therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written
instruction from the Engineer.
I. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge
as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be
returned to the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or
mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01. SHOP DRAW INGS
Final approved shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-7 05/14/12
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340-8 05/14/12
'
t
,
u
�
'
'
'
I
J
,
'
�
��
'
1
'
'
�
'
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01410
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing
Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction)
specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the
Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and
equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents.
1.
2
Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution
of its required services.
Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's
obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.
B. Contractor shall pertorm and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.)
required in the specifications.
1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, atter or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
L�
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to
Manufacturer's operations.
Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational
samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for
concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing
laboratory.
D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract
are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication.
TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E.
Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the
Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide
statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the
materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in
full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship
indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing
statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor,
and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing
and certification.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
To provide access to work to be tested.
To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the
product to be tested.
To facilitate inspections and tests.
For storage and curing of test samples.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling all testing in conformance
with the appropriate specification and for notifying the laboratory sufficiently in
advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory assignment
of personnel and scheduling of tests.
1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice,
reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred
due to Contractor's negligence.
G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified
independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and
testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as approved by the
Engineer.
H. If the test results indicate the material or equipment complies with the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall pay for the cost of the testing laboratory. If the
tests and any subsequent retests indicate the materials and equipment fail to
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor may pay for
the laboratory costs directly to the testing firm or the total of such costs shall
be deducted from any payments due the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-2
'
'
1
'
�
1
,
r--
�
'
'
1
�
'
r
1
�
'
�
05/14/12 '
'
,
,
'
'
�
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
I!
�
,
'
'
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as
provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others
performing work or furnishing services on the Project.
B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained
throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the
greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at
least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. The Contractor shall
enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site.
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public
travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private,
Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or
other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private
travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before
interfering with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be
maintained at all times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required
when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private
property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved,
to obstruct traffic at the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall
perform the Work in accordance with the permits and easement agreements.
B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design
Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. All local Traffic
Regulations shall be followed.
C. In making open-cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than
one-half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the
shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing
shall be provided as necessary on shoulders.
1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to
traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed
acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest
TEMPORARY FACILITES
01500-1
05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs,
and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as
material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and
lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction
area.
C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from
sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside
public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and
inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other
protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with
applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway
rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof.
D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends
and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme
weather conditions.
1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground
pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or
otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing,
driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other
surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod
and shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original
condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be
made with new materials.
1.05 PARKING
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all
construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in
connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal
vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or
construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
1.06 DUST CONTROL
A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust.
Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by
application of a chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in
transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing.
TEMPORARY FACILITES
01500-2
,
O
'
'
�
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
05/14/12 '
'
'
'
�
�
,
'
'
�
,
�
�
,
'
,
�
i
�
'
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be
adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors,
instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust
screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens.
1.07 SWEEPING
A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of
each workday.
1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary
wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction
activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or
watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other
substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures
will be taken to prevent such materials form entering any drain or watercourse.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY FACILITES
01500-3
05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY FACILITES
01500-4
05/14/12
,
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
,
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01505
MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE
A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds;
moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants,
temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the
proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include,
but not be limited to, the following principal items:
1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's
operations.
2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
3. Establish fire protection plan and safety program.
4. Secure construction water supply.
5. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities.
6. Arrange fior and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and
employees' parking facilities.
7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds.
8. Obtain all required permits.
9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labor,
and all other required notices.
10. Have superintendent at the job site full time.
11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer.
12. If required, erect project construction sign(s).
13. Submit a finalized schedule of values and schedule of payments
acceptable to the Owner.
14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals.
15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads.
MOBILIZATION
01505-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
16. Provide a continuous color audio-videotape recording of existing
conditions.
PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
MOBILIZATION
01505-2 05/14/12
'
,
�
'
'
�Ji
'
,
,
'
,
L
�
�
,
�
,
,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 01510
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction,
remove on completion of Work.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility
company requirements.
C. Comply with Local City and County Health Department Regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the
required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power
and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the
construction, testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by
the Owner. All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent
power shall be at Contractor expense.
B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not
adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public.
2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Arrange with local telephone service-company to provide direct line telephone
service at the construction site for the use by personnel and employees.
B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges.
TEMPORARY UTILlTES
1 01510-1 05/14/12
1 C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site
2 superintendent(s).
3
4 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER
5
6 A. The Contractor shal! install at each connection to the local water supply
7 system a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements.
8
9 B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the
10 backflow preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during
11 construction.
12
13 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
14
15 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations.
16
17 B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
18
19 PART 3 - EXECUTION
20
21 3.01 GENERAL
22
23 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
24
25 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
26
27 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities.
28
29 3.02 REMOVAL
30
31 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
32 longer required as determined by the Engineer.
33
34 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of
35 temporary facilities.
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY UTILITES
01510-2 05/14/12
�
�
�
LJ
CJ
'
CJ
�
�
�
��
�
CJ
LJ
�
Il
�
�
L
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
i3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
I_�
:
C.
Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall:
1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically
approved in writing by the Engineer.
Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and
shop practices.
Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges,
to be interchangeable.
Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same
manufacturer.
Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall
be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is
designed or is specified.
1.02 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the
inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the
work without prior review of the Engineer.
B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment
shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to
beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit
samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demon-
strate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be
furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for
and pay for the tests.
C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit
consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation in
the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples
or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the Owner or
the Engineer.
D. The materials and
approved samples
review.
�
�_ l
L]
�
'
,
equipment used on the work shall correspond to the '
or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for
1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such
instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the
Engineer.
1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during
installation and until completion.
B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord
with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with
manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further
instructions.
2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any
preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or
exempted by Contract Documents and with the Engineer's written approval.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules,
coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original
containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
'
�
L. J
�J
I'
l_ �
�
�
2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with —
requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that �
Products are properly protected and undamaged.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-2
05/14/12 '
,
�
l_J
'
�
'
,
i
,
�
�
II
�
�
'
�
'
�
,
LJ
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
,�
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent
soiling or damage to Products or packaging.
1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather-protected storage structure
providing a clean, dry, non-corrosive environment for all mechanical
equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation
equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project.
Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for
storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of
heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor shall
furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer
prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or
deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the
project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a
payment estimate.
B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
1.
2
Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight
enclosures.
Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by
manufacturer's instructions.
3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids,
prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to
deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate
ventilation to avoid condensation.
4. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces
to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled
and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to
prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury,
theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment.
D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and
shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel, and
reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent
accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of
standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall be
handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry
products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage,
chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum.
E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as
to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from
the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the
damaged material or its removal.
F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make
periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained
under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.
G. Protection After Installation:
1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products
from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations.
Remove covering when no longer needed.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies
sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the
work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material,
equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final
inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without
additional cost to the Owner.
I. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of
equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice
to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies
noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated
with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be
comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical,
engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary
corrections.
1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Contractor's Options:
�
�
�
'
,
'
��
�
�
�
,
�
�
LJ
,
1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product �
meeting that standard.
2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, �
submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which
complies with the specifications.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-4
,
05/14/12 �
'
,
,
'
,
�
,
�
L�
�
,
II
�,
'
'
�
,
,
,
�
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3. For products specified by naming one or more products or
manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor shall submit a request as tor
substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named.
B. Substitutions:
1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider
written requests from Contractor for substitution of products.
2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete
data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that
specified.
b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the
substitution.
c. Effect on the construction schedule.
d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product
specified.
e. Any required license fees or royalties.
f. Availability of maintenance senrice, and source of replacement
materials.
3. The Engineer will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed
substitution.
C. Contractor's Representation:
1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor:
a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is
equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution
as for the product specified.
c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into
the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to
make the Work complete in all respects.
d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility,
which may subsequently become apparent.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-5 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools
(including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal
adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for #heir
use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and
instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty
period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's warranty.
1.09 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent
sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare
parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the
equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier,
and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item
shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost.
1.10 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL
A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished
with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's
supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type
recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and
intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the
equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of
operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-6
I�
�
LJ
,
�
'
�
'
�
�_�
��
,
�
,
LJ
�
'
�
�
05/14/12 �
'
1
C�
'
'
�
,
,
,
'
,
,
C�
1
'
�
I�
�
�
�
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 01625
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the
Contractor shall perform start-up testing services as specified herein.
B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all
structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing
systems. All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were
ready for use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall
provide a written startup plan, for approval by the Engineer, for individual
facilities and systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordance
with the construction phasing plan described in Section 01016, if provided.
C.
�
All equipment will be tested, approved, and accepted by the Engineer prior to
placement of the new facilities into operation.
All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and
tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of
equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory
certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these
Specifications. Such representatives shall assist the Engineer by instructing
the operating personnel of the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the
equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for producing the
most efficient results. These services shall be made during the initial
operation of the completed facilities and be in addition to services necessary
during erection or to correct defective materials or workmanship during the
guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and
qualified to provide installation services, adjustment, start-up, and testing work
and shall not be sales representatives only. The cost of such representation,
including subsistence and travel, shall be provided by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
A. General Requirements:
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
, 01625-1 05/14/12
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate
satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and
performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the
Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion.
2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least
thirty (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details
of all test procedures to the Engineer for review, comment, and
approval. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with Specification Section 01340. This notification shall be
shown on the Progress Schedule.
3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten
(10) working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests
and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of
Monday through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the
Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of
equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor
make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the
time when the Owner takes over the operation thereof.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing a!I
necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to
facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start-
up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner.
Preparation for Systems Start-Up:
Upon completion of the Work and all related systems, all pipes, tanks
and process systems shall be filled and flushed clean with water and
hydraulically checked for leaks, cracks, and defects. All sumps, tanks,
basins, chambers and wet wells that will contain water or process
liquids under normal operating conditions shall also be hydraulically
checked for leaks, cracks and defects.
2. AII mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that
each component is in good working order and properly installed and
connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks,
basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically
checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once
the water testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and
flushed shall be drained clean.
,
�
�
,
�
�
�
'
'
�
'
�
,
�
�
�
3. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full
operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for ,
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-2 D5/14/12 ,
'
r
�
LJ
�
�
LJ
�
�
'
,
�
r
L�
C!
r
,
,
,
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be
made and confirmed by the specific factory authorized service
representative.
4. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to
complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and
preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and/or system
operation.
5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is
in good working order.
6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved
equipment Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished
as specified.
7. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified
technician for that particular component has confirmed that all
lubricants, electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systems
have been provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.02 PRESSURE TESTS
A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All
tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the
presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent.
B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the
applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for
Installation of Cast Iron/Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C-600, Concrete
Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C-605, except as
herein modified.
C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for
review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall
remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after
completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the
Contractor.
D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and
leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-3 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall
be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be
tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor
shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in
order that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are
valves on the water supply system to be operated without the prior
authorization of the Engineer.
E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5
times the pipeline working pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The
duration of each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours.
F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges,
compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required
for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional
cost to the Owner.
G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow-offs and joints shall be
carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage
shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and
accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor
with new components at no additional cost to the Owner.
H.
�a
The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall
open up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks.
All visible leaks shall be correctsd regardless of the total leakage revealed by
the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to
meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test
requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at
the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner.
The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than
the allowable leakage as determined by the formula below:
L = S�(P)o.5
133,200
in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length
of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P"
is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square
inch, gauge.
43 K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized
44 agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for
45 performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants,
46 fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes
47 shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-4 05/14/12
'
�
'
�
,
�
'
�
�
L�
,
J
,
�
�
,
r
�
'
�
�
,
1
�
,
'
i
'
'
'
'
,
,
'
�
r
L�
,
C�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance
notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests.
3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES
A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and
cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed
and approved. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable
requirements of AWWA C651 and as described hereinafter.
B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipelines installed under this
Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AWWA
Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written
authorization from the Engineer.
Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas-water mixture shall be applied by
means of a solution-feed chlorination device. The device must provide
a means to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder.
2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent
calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be
prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line.
C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of
the pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the
newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine-bearing
water into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the
valve controlling the flow into the pipeline extension.
D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be
controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the
application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in
the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water.
E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after
which the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg/I. Should the
initial procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorination
procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the
Contractor's expense.
F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and
provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated
location as directed by the Engineer.
G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the
line, at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-5 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
testing, is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution
system.
H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping
systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines.
At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the
presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer.
I. After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall
be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to
the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If
repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the
disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of
contamination. Final approval of the bacterial samples shall be received prior
to placing the system into operation.
J. The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water
pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the
work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance.
3.04 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND LOW PRESSURE PIPELINES
A. All gravity sewers and low pressure pipelines (less than 3 psi normal operating
pressure) shall be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of the
work. All tests shall be conducted in a manner to minimize any interference
with the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer 72 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer
will witness such tests.
B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing,
and tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the
observation of the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring
devices shall be new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
furnish all other labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel,
meters and gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for
making leakage tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing,
and removing testing equipment and placing in service.
C. Air Leakage Test
41 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter
42 and smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on
43 pre-wetted pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with
44 clear water and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe
45 walls are pre-wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24
46 hours after filling the sewer section to be tested.
47
,
'
,
�
,
�J
,
�
,
�
,
r
,
LJ
�
r
r
�
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-6 05/14/12 �
'
,
C�
�
'
'
,
LJ
'
r
,
,
,
L_J
�
,
,
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air
pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this
pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system
reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an
approved rotometer.
3. The maximum rate of air loss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of
interior pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm
when the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When
the groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level
adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air loss shall be reduced
6 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert.
4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving,
gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. Air
testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to
prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig.
D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage
or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have
been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's
authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the
instalied materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test
in accordance with ASTM C1244-93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage,
it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to
the Owner.
E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount,
defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located
and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot
be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the
original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results.
3.05 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Contractor Responsibilities
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer ten (10) days notice in writing
of his intent to perform systems start-up.
2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment,
monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test
equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc.,
as directed by the Engineer.
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-7
05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the
work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any
temporary utilities or construction aids required.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other
separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that
any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in
proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Start-Up Tests
�
�
r
�
LJ
LJ
1. Start-Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the
following: '
a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing,
manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in
accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested.
b. The Contractor shall fill the pipelines with water, in an approved
manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air from all
high points.
'
LJ
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a water supply ,
during start-up and testing at no additional cost to the Owner.
d. The Contractor shall manually start-up and operate all equipment
through its full range and at various system operating modes,
and all other equipment as directed by the Engineer for a period
of not less than two (2) eight-hour days. Data records shall be
kept by the Contractor reflecting all operating conditions
described above. This information shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review at the end of the two (2) day test period.
e. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all the
flow, level and pressure sensors and all other sensors and
controllers. The Contractor shall be responsible for calibrating
and verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. The
Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all auto-
shutdown features and standby power systems or devices.
f. Following the successful completion of these tests, the
Contractor shall demonstrate automatic, controlled operation of
all facitities over a period of not less than 72 hours of continuous
successful operation.
L_ �
1
1
r
�
'
,
g. The Contractor shall also be responsible for performing all tests ,
outside of those previously described as may be required by the
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-8 05/14/12 '
,
,
�J
�
II
,
�
,
'
,
1
,
,
,
'
,
,
,
'
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
manufacturers for all pumps and control valves and other
equipment as specified elsewhere herein.
2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on
the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary
alterations, adjustments, repairs and replacements. When the facility is
again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall
be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until
the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
for the specified test duration.
3. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects of the
Control System, PLC's, Operator Interface Terminals, and all hardware
and software furnished. If applicable, the Contractor shall also
demonstrate the full integration of the SCADA System with the Owner's
existing network. The Contractor shall make all specified modifications
to the existing HMI screens as required for a fully functional system.
END OF SECTION
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
' 01625-9 05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
'
'
,
,
C�
I+
.�
,
�
l__J
��
�
�
I!
�
'
'
,
,
,
�
�
START-UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625-10 05/14/12 �
,
,
1
'
'
'
,
,
,
'
,
'
,
�
,
r
,
,
'
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01640
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
7.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance and control of installation.
6. References.
C. Field samples.
D. Mock-up.
E. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
F. Manufacturers' field services and reports.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and
Certificates.
C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except
when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate
higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified
quality.
F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
0
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids.
Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,
request clarification for Engineer before proceeding.
C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered
from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any
reference document.
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A.
B.
C.
Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections
for review.
Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear
area after field sample has been accepted by Engineer.
� .06 MOCK-UP
A
B
C
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section.
Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage
devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
after mock-up has been accepted by Engineer.
1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A.
�?
Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to
perform inspection and testing.
The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services
specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer.
C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in
duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating
compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
C�
1
1
,
,
,
�
'
il
��
jl
�
�
ii
�
,
LJ
,
,
r
'
D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, '
equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-2 05/14/12 ,
�
L_ 1
r
'
�
�
,
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
CJ
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
1
��
Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time
for operations requiring services.
Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional
samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements
shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the
Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by
deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Price.
1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required
observations. Observer shall be subject to approval of Engineer and Owner.
B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product
suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,
start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable,
and to initiate instructions when necessary.
C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'
written instructions.
D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
QUALITY CONTROL
' 01640-3 05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
QUALITY CONTROL
01640-4
05/14/12
,
�
��
�
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
,
'
,
'
'
,
,
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01670
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
and pertorming all work and services for furnishing, submission,
processing and handling of requests for substitution and product
options. See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any
substitution or option shall be in accord with provisions of Contract
Documents, and completely coordinated with work of other trades.
2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General
Conditions for additional information.
B. Procedure:
1. For equipment and materials that are to be listed in the proposal,
observe procedures outlined in Section 00300.
2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or
specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe
procedures outlined in these specifications.
C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and
samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and
transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or
Engineer.
1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL:
A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in
specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and/or
manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from
consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other
trade names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names, capable of
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C.
accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material specifically
indicated.
Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner
and Engineer.
D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not
specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed
upon by Owner.
E. Conditional bids will not be accepted.
1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION:
A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will
consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other
items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after
the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as
specified below.
�
C.
Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items
unless specifically approved otherwise.
Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request:
1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed
by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for
substitution is initiated.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
3. For Products:
a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including
manufacturer's name.
'
'
.--,
L�
�
'
'
,
'
�
�
,
�
'
�
b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, '
type, size, and options to be considered:
1) Product Description
2) Performance and test data
3) Reference standards
4) Difference in power demand
5) Dimensional differences for specified unit
c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-2 05/14/12
'
,
,
�
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
�
�
�
,
,
'
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C
to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for
comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of
samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible
for loss of or damage to samples.
d. Name and address of similar projects where product was used,
date of installation, and field performance data on installation.
4. For construction methods:
a. Detailed description of proposed method.
b. Drawings illustrating methods.
5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method
specified.
6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product
or method specified.
8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in
contract time or amount.
In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item,
Supplier/Manufacturer represents:
1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has
determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified,
and that it will perform function for which it is intended.
2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or
method specified.
3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include
but not be limited to the following:
a. Building and structure modifications as necessary;
b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change;
c. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation
changes, and
d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
L
4
to permit incorporation of substitution into project.
Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which
subsequently become apparent.
'
'
,
,
Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative
consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received. '
F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract
price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order
will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an
alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order
shall be issued.
G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons:
1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or
building spaces.
2. If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or
will not adequately perform function for which intended.
3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this
specification section.
1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY
A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy,
discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are
reasons for substitution after Contract award.
B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes
apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution
sufficiently in advance to avoid delays.
C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670-4 05/14/12
��
IL_.
r -�
J
'
�
�
'
�
,1
�
,
�
�
'
'
�
�
�
�
'
'
�
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A.
:
Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications
for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.
Electronic Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals
1. The Contractor shall furnish final approved Shop Drawings and
Operations and Maintenance Data in both hardcopy (2) and in
electronic ".pdf" format for all equipment furnished under all
Specification Sections in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16.
2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and
Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and section
number, and submit two (2) hardcopies and two (2) copies on compact
disk media (CDROM).
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Contractor considers the Work, or portion thereof, to be substantially
complete, he shall submit to the Engineer:
�
C
1.
2.
A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is
substantially complete.
A list of items to be completed or corrected.
Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make
an inspection to determine the status of completion.
Should the Engineer determine that the Work or portion thereof is not
substantially complete:
1
2.
3.
The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the
reasons therefore.
Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a
second written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer.
The Engineer will re-inspect the Work.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
� 01700-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. When the Engineer finds that the Work or portion thereof is substantially
complete, he will:
1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial
Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
before final payment for that portion of the work.
2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in
General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work
substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the
Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a
revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected.
1.03 FINAL INSPECTION
A. When Contractor considers all the Work to be complete, he shall submit
written certification that:
��
C
'�
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Contract Documents have been reviewed.
Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the
Owner's representative and are operational.
Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with
reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification.
Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:
f
1
i
u
�J
r-,
�
'
�
,
lJ
�
�
1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the !
incomplete or defective work.
2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated
deficiencies, and send a second written certification to the Engineer that
the Work is complete.
3. The Engineer will re-inspect the Work.
�
u
When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract '
Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals.
1.03 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-2
'
05/� 4/12 �
1
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
,
�
1
'
'
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the
warranty period for equipment, the Owner may accept portions of process
systems. Partial Substantial Completion shall be allowed for a complete
process system only, or combination of process systems working together,
and the Owner shall only consider for partial Substantial Completion those
systems as specified herein.
B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner
accepting partial Substantial Completion of a system. Owner shall accept
stand-alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantial
acceptance.
1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial
start-up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up
and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11.
2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the
operation of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications
outlined in Division 11 and Section 01820.
3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner
as required by Section 01730.
4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety
interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must
be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16.
5. All Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the
system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined
in Divisions 13 and 16.
6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each
system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in
compliance with Division 01.
7. Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare
parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests.
1.05 RE-INSPECTION FEES
A. Should the Engineer perform re-inspections, due to failure of the Work, to
comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor:
1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
, 01700-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final
payment to the Contractor.
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER
A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.
B. Project Record Documents.
C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel.
D. Warranties and Bonds.
E. Keys and Keying Schedule.
F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens.
H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
I. Contractor's Final Affidavit.
J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers.
K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company.
L. Contractor's Guarantee.
1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:
1. The original Contract Sum.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Unit Prices.
c. Deductions for uncorrected Work.
d. Penalties and Bonuses.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-4 05/14/12
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
�
'
,
'
,
'
'
�
,
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
e. Deductions for liquidated damages.
f. Deductions for re-inspection payments.
g. Other adjustments.
3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
4. Payments.
5. Sum remaining due.
C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to
the Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders.
1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with
procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-5 05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
'
'
�
'
�J
'
1
L_J
'
'
�
'
'
,
'
,
,
'
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-6 05/14/12 '
'
'
'
'
'
'
�J
'
'
,
,
'
,
'
t
�
,
'
L_J!
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
4�
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of Work and at
completion of the Work as required by the General Conditions.
1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with
all applicable Laws and Regulations.
B. Disposal of waste materials shall be in accordance with the Section III, 17.7
and local Ordinances.
PART II — MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials which do not create
hazards to health or property and which do not damage surfaces.
B. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials and methods
recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned.
C. The Contractor shall use cleaning materials only on surfaces so recommended
by cleaning material Manufacturer.
PART III — EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and
adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, water, eroded
material, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations.
I:�
C
The Contractor shall provide suitable on-site containers for the daily collection
of all waste materials, debris and rubbish.
The Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site
containers periodically and dispose of in accordance with Section 1.02.
D. The Contractor shall schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants
CLEANING
01710-1 05/14/12
1 resulting from the cleaning process do not fall on wet or newly-coated
2 surfaces.
3
4 E. The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary
5 structures when no further need therefore develops and as approved by
6 the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all spillage
7 and shall incur all associated costs including, but not limited to, costs related
8 to repair and maintenance resulting from any such damage.
9
10 3.02 FINAL CLEANING
11
12 A. The Contractor shall employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.
13
14 B. The Contractor shall remove all grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains,
15 fingerprints, labels and all other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior
16 and exterior surfaces.
17
18 C. Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight-
19 exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify that the
20 entire Work and the entire construction area of the Work are clean.
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
CLEANING
01710-2 05/14/12
'
'
'
'
'
�
,
,
'
,
,
,
,
,
'
'
,
'
,
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions
6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples
7. Field Test Records
8. Construction Photographs, if provided
9. Detailed progress schedule
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from
documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do
not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the
Engineer.
E. As a pre-requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor shall exhibit
the updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1.03 MARKING DEVICES
A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code
designated by #he Engineer.
1.04 RECORDING
I_1
0
C.
�
Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters,
Record information concurrentty with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:
1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor
datum.
2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes
to piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground
utilities and appurtenances, all referenced to permanent surface
improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc.
3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
6. Details not on original Contract Documents.
7. Equipment and piping relocations.
8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors,
windows, etc.
�
,
,
,
,
�
,
�_J
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and ,
shop drawings.
Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record:
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-2
L. J
�
05/14/12 '
'
,
'
'
,
'
,
�
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
E
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product
and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
Shop Drawings (after final review and approval):
1. Five (5) sets of record drawings for each piece of process equipment,
piping, electrical and instrumentation system.
1.05 SUBMITTAL
A. At contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the
Owner.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date,
2. Project title and number,
3. Contractor's name and address,
4. Title and number of each Record Document, and
5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-3
05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
'
�I
J
'
�i�
�
'
'
u
,
�
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-4 05/14/12 '
'
l�
'
�
j�
'
'
,
'
,
'
,
'
,
'
,
'
'
�
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of new equipment and processes furnished and or
installed by the Contractor.
1.
2.
3
Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section
and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications.
The information in the O&M Manual shall be specific and targeted for
the equipment and processes supplied for this project.
Incorporate operating and maintenance data furnished by the Owner, if
previously defined in the scope of work.
B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to supply
and deliver to the Engineer, O&M Manuals for the work, mechanical
equipment, instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process control
equipment, and software on a facility wide, system by system, and individual
equipment basis as pertinent to the project.
C. Five (5) draft O&M Manuals for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to
the Engineer upon delivery of the equipment. The draft O&M Manuals will
include the manufacturer's test results and specification and may be used as a
training aid.
D. Furnish the Owner five (5) approved complete hardcopy sets of operation and
maintenance data and two (2) approved complete set of operation and
maintenance data in electronic "pdf" format on a CD as specified herein for the
project.
1. Any modifications required after final O&M submission shall be made to
the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or
additional information included and clearly identified.
E. The operating and maintenance data shall meet the requirements of 62-
600.720 Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.).
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
' 01730-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
products.
2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate
essential data.
4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings.
1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Format:
1. Size: 8-1 /2 inches x 11-inches.
2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages.
3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
4. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text.
b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11-inches x 17-inches and fold to
size of text pages and printed only on one side.
5. Provide tabbed fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of
operating equipment.
a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major
component part of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
C. Binders:
1. Commercial quality three-post binders with durable and cleanable
plastic covers.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-2 05/14/12
�
'
�
'
'
,
'
1
'
'
,
'
'
,
,
�
'
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. Maximum post width: 2-inches. Each binder filled to not more than
75% capacity.
3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related
consistent groupings.
D. Refer to Specification Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements.
1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each
volume shall be included with all volumes.
B. The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and
the responsible principal shall be included.
C. A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume.
D. A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of:
a. Manufacturer
b. Subcontractor or installer.
c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
E. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set
forth in Contract Documents.
F. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
G. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly
illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-3 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F
c. Owner Tag Numbers.
d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified.
Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
H. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular
installation:
1. Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure.
3. Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate.
I. Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following
information:
a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
b. Circumstances and events that may affect validity of warranties
or bonds.
1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE-
PROTECTED, WEATHER-EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
�
1. Catalog number, size, and composition.
2. Applicable Standards
3. Chemical Composition
4. Details of Installation or Application
5. Color and texture designations.
6. Information required for re-ordering special-manufactured products.
7. Storage instructions and shelf life information.
Instructions for care and maintenance.
1. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and �
methods.
2. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to
product.
3. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-4 05/14/12
,
'
�
,
II
�
'
,
1
'
J
�J
,
CJ
'
,
Ii
�,
r
,
'
,
CJ
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
4. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication
system, as appropriate:
1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or
instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of
the controi or instrument.
2
3.
A description of the system and its component parts.
Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for
the system, the sub-system, and the component parts.
4. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
5. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts.
�
7
Assembly drawings.
The manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
diagrams, and exploded views required for operations and
maintenance.
8. Manufacturer's model and serial number.
9. List of all special tools required to service equipment and/or systems
including where the tools are stored.
10. Circuit directories of panel boards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
11. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
12. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or
instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes.
13. An electrical schematic for each item.
14. A chart listing the controls/instruments in a loop identifying the
equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-5 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
15.
16
17
:
19
�
criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and
serial number.
Operating procedures.
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
d. Start-up, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions.
e. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency
instructions.
f. Special operating instructions.
g. Control settings and ranges.
Maintenance procedures.
a. Routine maintenance.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting."
c. Disassembly, repair, and re-assembly.
d. Alignment, adjustment, tolerances, and checking.
e. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities
required for each piece of equipment.
f. List of lubricants required.
g. Period between lubrications.
h. Servicing and lubrication schedule.
The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
Abnormal and emergency operations.
a. Potential overloads.
b. Procedures for equipment breakdown.
c. Action to be taken in a power outage.
d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct.
e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards
Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of
standard programming.
Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
21. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's
current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage,
and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
'
'
l_J
'
'
,
CJ
'
l_J
L
�
��
'
'
�!
�i
,
r
'
22. The final approved manual shall include the startup report for each ,
piece of equipment and documentation that the Owner's designated
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-6
05/14/12 '
'
'
'
'
'
1
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
,
'
,
i
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
personnel attended a formal training session as applicable for each
piece of equipment.
23. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location,
function, sheet number, model number, serial number, and actuator
type identified.
1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Refer to Specification 01820 for Training and Instruction of Owner's personnel.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-7
05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730-8
05/14/12
,
'
'
,
,
'
�
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
�
� SECTION 01740
2
3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in the General Conditions.
10
11 B. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
12
13 C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
14
15 D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner.
16
17 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
18
19 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts,
20 executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and
21 subcontractors.
22
23 B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each.
24
25 C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete
26 information for each item.
27
28 1. Product or work item.
29
30 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
31
32 3. Scope.
33
34 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or senrice and maintenance contract.
35
36 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.
37
38 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
39
40 a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
41
42 b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
43
44 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone
45 number.
46
47
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-1 05/14/12
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent wifh
the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at
the time of substantial completion and/or final acceptance by the Owner,
whichever is later.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment
warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price
of more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties
for equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant
equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one-year warranty
period even though certificates of warranty may not be required.
C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide
a one-year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the
Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty
commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The two-year
warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year
warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment.
1.04 WARRANTY START DATE
,
�I
,
,
,
'
'
�
,
'
A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a"Notice of Substantial '
Completion".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 — EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-2
'
�
'
,
'
'
,
05/14/12 ,
,
'
'
'
LJ
�
'
�
'
'
'
,
'
�
��
'
'
,
'
�
L_..I''
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 01820
TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and/or coordinating the following work
relating to training the Owners designated personnel for this project:
A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of
the equipment and systems supplied and/or installed under this Contract.
B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished
by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment
manuals, and start-up, engineering, and training assistance.
C. Ensure that system suppliers provide qualified training instructors experienced
in the proper operation and maintenance of all applicable equipment and
systems.
�
J
E.
Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field,
classroom, and hands-on training.
Furnish training videos and training manuals during the training program. The
training manual shall be a separate document from the O&M Manual.
F. Include in the Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training
manuals in addition to O&M manuals; conducting classroom instructions;
performing field, factory, and hands-on training; and coordinating and
incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities
required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as
determined by the Owner.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. TRAINING PLAN
In conjunction with submittal of draft O&M Manuals, and at least 30 days
before equipment or systems startup, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a proposed training manual and detailed training plan with specific
information as identified in PART 2 of this specification.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be
TRAINING
01820-1 05/14/12
2
3
4
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
performed by personnel:
1.
2
Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment
and systems installed under this Contract.
Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the resumes and references for each instructor to
be used in the training program.
C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of
the resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve,
request additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training
program. If a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the
resume and references of another candidate within a reasonable time.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TRAINING PLAN
A. A detailed training plan specific to the project or equipment shall be prepared
with specific information as follows:
:
C.
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
Title and objectives.
Training schedule.
Prerequisite training and experience of attendees.
Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers,
operators, maintenance staff).
Course description and outline of course content.
Duration.
Location (e.g., training center or site).
Format (e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on).
Instruction materials and equipment requirements.
Training manual.
The factory training program shall be completed before start-up of the Owner's
system and shatl use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment.
The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the
approved schedule.
D. In conjunction with start-up of, the Contractor shall provide a competent and
experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for one 8-hour day to
instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation, maintenance, and
control of the equipment or systems.
,
�
i�
�
�i
,
i
'
'
�
'
'
'
C_�
'
C
,
'
E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the ,
TRAINING
01820-2 05/14/12 �
,
i
1
�
�
�
,
'
'
'
�
'
'
�
�
�
'
,
i
1 Engineer 30 days before the first training event.
2
3 2.02 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL
4
5 A. The Contractor shall produce or provide video training material subject to
6 approval of the Owner.
7
8 B. Provide four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title,
9 the Owner's name, and date on a label in a clear plastic sleeve.
10
11 C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs.
12
13 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
14
15
16 END OF SECTION
TRAINING
01820-3 05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
,
C
1
!
i
1
!
!
0
1
�
TRAINING
01820-4 05/14/12 �
'
'
'
,
'
t
�J
,
,
'
'
'
�
,
'
'
'
�
'
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 02062
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to
remove all existing structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, electrical,
instrumentation and controls, and all appurtenances as noted on the Contract
Drawings, as reasonably inferred and as required in order to perform the work
as described in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any removal without
specific approval of the Engineer. Any facilities removed without proper
authorization shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the
Contractor's expense.
B. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
supports not required to be reused and not designated as being turned over to
the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon
removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such
material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused.
C. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
supports designated as being turned over to the Owner, shall be identified,
cleaned, protected, crated or boxed and stored at the plant site.
D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 Ibs or more shall be provided with suitable
skids before storing.
E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe, and headers that
are to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported or
anchored in an approved manner.
G. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the
material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair
any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored
shall be given to the Resident Project Representative daily. A final typed
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062-1 05/14/12
___
1 itemized list shall be furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of
2 construction. The list shall include items, method of packaging, and place of
3 storage.
4
5 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED
6
7 A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless
8 designated otherwise by the Owner.
9
10 B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall
11 become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant
12 site at the Contractor's expense.
13
14 C. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service for
15 the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize that
16 service at no additional cost to the Owner.
17
18
19 END OF SECTION
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062-2 05/14/12
'
'
1
, 3
4
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
1
'
�
II
�
'
SECTION 02064
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify,
alter and/or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required
for the installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances.
Existing piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary
for the performance of structural alterations in accordance with the
requirements herein specified.
1.02 DEWATERING FOR STRUCTURES
A. The specific attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that all of the
clarifiers, except Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Northeast WRF, are equipped with
ground water pressure relief valves installed in the bottom of the clarifiers.
The operability, capacity and functionality of these valves are unknown. The
Contractor shall take any and all precautions necessary to assure that the
clarifiers, or any other structure, including the telescoping valves and splitter
box, do not become buoyant and are not damaged in any way when draining
the clarifier or structure.
B. The East Plant has a permanent underdrain type groundwater dewatering
system installed in the vicinity of the clarifiers that must be used at all times
while any clarifier is empty. The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and
maintain a pump and a backup pump for this system while it is in operation.
C. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a
temporary dewatering system, in accordance with Section 02140, as required
to lower and control the groundwater level, such that there is no danger of any
structure becoming buoyant. In no event shall ground water rise to such a
level to cause unbalanced pressure on structures. Flotation shall be
prevented by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the
dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all
damages to existing structures, piping or equipment that may result from
failure of the groundwater dewatering system.
D. Dewatering System
1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to lower the groundwater
levels to required levels to prevent flotation. The dewatering system
must maintain the lowered water table at all times until no longer
needed.
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
2. The Contractor shall provide and have ready on-site for immediate use
at all times standby pumping and/or power systems to serve the
dewatering system in case of failure of the primary pumping/power
systems.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a
dewatering plan and a groundwater disposal plan. The plans shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be approved prior to
initiating any dewatering activities. The Contractor shall also comply
with the requirements of the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection (FDEP) Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced
Groundwater from any Non-Contaminated Site Activity (rule 62-
621.300) for all discharges to surface waters or systems that flow into
surface waters. Note that groundwater quality samples taken in the
vicinity of the work indicate that the product water from dewatering may
not be discharged offsite or to surface waters but must be disposed of
onsite via percolation basins.
19
20 4. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the
21 dewatering system is no longer required.
22
23 5. Refer to Section 02140.
24
25 PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
26
27 PART 3 - EXECUTION
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise
remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the
Contract Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the
work under this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from
the above work in an approved manner. The work shall include all necessary
cutting and bending of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous
metal work found embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to
be removed shall be assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and
supports, unless as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and
other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for
or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of
making connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel
removed shall be cut off one inch below the concrete surface. Surface shall
be finished as specified in Specification 03740.
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-2 05/14/12
,
'
C�
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
C'�
'
�
,'�
'
'
'
'
'
��'�
,
l_J
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C.
At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional
new piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed.
D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut,
removed, or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the
extent approved by the Engineer.
E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautior�s and
use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage
the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to
damage the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise
permitted, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and
additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not
salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become the
property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at his own
place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughfy cleaned,
lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged storage.
G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such
manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible
before any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall
be assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without
delay.
H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations
shall conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as
such specifications are applicable.
I. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to
new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the
respective section of these Specifications covering the work. When not
covered, the work shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent directed
by the Engineer.
J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as
nearly as possible the adjacent surfaces.
K. Non-shrink grout shall
pump bases, doweling
shown.
be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling
anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as
L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the
Contractor shall cut existing pipelines/couplings in a manner to provide an
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-3 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
approved joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or
provide Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required.
M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to
divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the
flow of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the work
under this Contract.
N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care
shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or
outside structures.
3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall verify the exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc., of
existing piping and equipment prior to making the connections called out in the
Drawings. These verifications shall be performed with adequate time to
correct any alignment issues prior to the actual time of connection.
3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure,
channels, clarifier, conduit or other structures, the Contractor shall remove and
dispose of the grit and other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful
manner.
END SECTION
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
02064-4 05/14/12
'
'
,
,
�
'
'
'
t
'
'
'
'
�
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 02140
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Work to be performed includes the furnishing of ali equipment, materials
and labor necessary to design, furnish, install, operate, and maintain
temporary dewatering and infiltration systems to remove subsurface ground
waters and dispose of these waters on-site by infiltration/percolation as
dictated by local conditions and in accordance with the requirements set forth
and as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or as required for the
completion of the work.
B. The Contractor is directed to the investigations and reports concerning
groundwater quality, infiltration and permeability at the Marshall Street WRF
site included in Appendix A.
C. It is anticipated that ground water dewatering will be required when making the
excavations necessary to install the new valves between the splitter box and
the clarifiers, and at all times when any of the four clarifiers RAS (telescoping
valve) structures are susceptible to becoming buoyant when they are drained
to perform the rehabilitation work of this project.
D. Water quality tests have been conducted that indicate the ground water in the
vicinity of the work is unsuitable for discharge to surface waters, including
storm water conveyance and treatment systems that can discharge to surface
waters. As such, the Contractor shall be required to either dispose of the
product water from dewatering activities by infiltration/percolation onsite or by
disposing off-site in accordance with all laws applicable thereto.
E. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs associated with both
dewatering and with disposing of product water from dewatering activities. As
such, the Contractor shall employ means, methods, and techniques to limit the
quantity of product water generated through the use of sheeting, concrete
tremie seals, etc.
F. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sizing, design and
construction of all infiltration/percolation basins needed for the disposal of
product water from dewatering. The available areas on which to construct the
infiltration/percolation basins are identified on the Drawings. The Contractor
shall design the infiltration system using only these areas.
G. All soil disturbed in making the various excavations required under this project
shall be stockpiled in a single area, covered with an approved waterproof
membrane or tarp to prevent rainwater leaching and off-site discharge of
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
' 02140-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
leachate. When the dewatering and infiltration/percolation systems are no
longer required, the stockpiled soils shall be re-installed into the excavations
and properly compacted and the area shall be restored.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Groundwater dewatering and disposal of product water from dewatering shall
be in strict accordance with the latest revision of all Laws and Regulations;
with the local, State and Federal permits for the project; and, with the
Contractor's approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and
the Contractor's approved Dewatering Plan.
1.03 DEWATERING PLAN
A. Prior to commencing any excavations, the Contractor shall submit and obtain
the Engineer's approval of a written Dewatering Plan. In preparing its
Dewatering Plan, the Contractor shall make any and all field investigations
and tests necessary to properly design and construct a temporary dewatering
system and temporary infiltration/percolation system.
B. The Dewatering Plan shall include calculations based on field measured
geotechnical/hydrogeological data identifying the amount of water that will be
produced from dewatering. The Plan shall indicate the rate at which product
water from dewatering is produced as well as the length of time it will be
produced for each distinct construction phase applicable to each dewatering
activity identified below:
1. Those times when the bottom of any excavation is below the ground water
table.
2. Those times when any clarifier is prone to buoyancy, including those times
when the installation of new ground water relief valves and installation of
internal structural and rotating components.
3. During the time each telescoping valve (RAS) structure is prone to
buoyancy.
C. The Dewatering Plan shall include calculations, based on field measured
geotechnical, hydrogeological, and/or other data, identifying the estimated rate
of infiltration/percolation in order to determine the area required for
infiltration/percolation of the groundwater produced. These estimates shall
include an appropriate factor of safety.
D. In determining the area required for the infiltration/percolation basin(s), the
Contractor shall provide a minimum of 12-inches of freeboard above the high
water level in the basin but below the existing ground elevation to provide for
the accumulation of rainwater. The Contractor shall take whatever
precautions necessary to prevent the entrance of storm water runoff into the
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-2 05/14/12
���
u
�
�I
'
,
��
,
'
�
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
,
�
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
r-,
i
�
�
�
J
'
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
infiltration/percolation basin(s). The depth of the infiltration/percolation
basin(s) shall be selected by the Contractor, but the Contractor shall be
required to protect all existing utilities, whether or not shown on the Drawings.
E. The Dewatering Plan shall be in conformity with the overall construction plan
and shall itemize all pumping equipment, ground penetration equipment and
piping. The infiltration/percolation areas, the pumping and piping
arrangement, and the volume of any proposed on-site groundwater storage
vessels shall be identified in the Dewatering Plan.
F. The Dewatering Plan shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered
Professional Engineer.
1.04 UPLIFT AND FLOTATION
A. Uplift of a structure could occur if the groundwater elevation is higher than the
elevation of water inside the structure. The Contractor shall monitor the
groundwater elevation, by constructing piezometers where necessary, at all
times any of the clarifiers or the RAS structures are dewatered (drained),
under rehabilitation, or with water levels below their typical operating level.
B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that ground water levels
are controlled as required to prevent flotation and shall be fully responsible
and liable for all damages to structures and or pipes that may result from the
operation and/or failure of the dewatering system.
C. Should the infittration/percolation system fail to adequately dispose of product
water from dewatering, the Contractor shall take immediate measures to keep
the water on site and prevent the runoff of fhe product water into surface
waters or systems that discharge to surface waters. If necessary, this shall
include immediately stopping dewatering and taking whatever precautions
necessary to prevent flotation of any tanks or structures, including filling the
tank.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface or
subsurface waters that may accumulate in the excavation. The Contractor
shall prevent flotation and migration of fines by maintaining a positive and
continuous operation of the dewatering system.
B. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable
equipment to adequately dewater the excavation so that it will be dry to a
depth of 12-inches below the subgrade compaction level or over-excavation
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
' 02140-3 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
level, whichever is lower. A wellpoint system, trench drain, sump pump
operation, or other dewatering method selected by the Contractor shall be
utilized to maintain the excavation in a dry condition for preparation of the
bottom and until the fills, structures or pipes to be built thereon have been
completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by
allowing water levels to return to natural levels. No water shall be allowed to
contact masonry or concrete within 24 hours after being placed.
C. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve
the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed bottom
of excavations and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures and utilities.
Well or sump installations shall be constructed and operated continuously with
proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding
ground. Dewatering by trench pumping shall not be permitted if migration of
fine grained natural material from bottom, side walls, or bedding material may
occur.
D. In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to
subsurface conditions, or where dewatering could damage existing structures,
the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of wet trench construction
or procedure before commencing construction.
E. Engine-driven dewatering pumps shall be equipped with residential type
mufflers. Where practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric
motor-driven equipment shall be used in lieu of portable generators.
F. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any
structure during construction, including the installation of piezometers for water
level monitoring.
G. The Contractor shall take all precautions to preclude the accidental discharge
of fuel, oil, etc. to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality. All costs
associated with any such adverse effects shall be borne by the Contractor.
H. The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, be required to excavate
below grade and refill with approved fill material if the Engineer determines
that adequate drainage has not been provided.
3.02 DISPOSAL
A. All product water from dewatering shall be pumped from the trench or other
excavation and shall be disposed of in the temporary infiltration/percolation
basin(s).
B. Permission to use any storm sewers, or drains, for water disposal purposes
shall not be granted. The Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading
or blocking up the flow in the drainage facilities, and shall leave the facilities
unrestricted and as clean as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-4 05/14/12
'
'
'
'
�
,
,
'
�
�
'
'
,
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
1
�
,
'
�J
'
'
'
'
J
'
LJ
,
'
,
'
'
,
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
C
shall be repaired or restored as directed by the Engineer or the authority
having jurisdiction, at no cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all
permits required to dispose of the product water from dewatering and shall
protect adjacent waterways from product water run-off and turbidity while the
system is in operation.
D. In areas where adequate disposal sites are not available, partially backfilled
trenches may be used for water disposal. The Contractor's plan shall include
temporary culverts, barricades and other protective measures to prevent
damage to property or injury to any person or persons.
E. No flooding of streets, roadways, driveways or private property shall be
permitted.
3.03 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND INFILTRATION/PERCOLATION AREA
RESTORATION
A. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system is
no longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the system shall
be removed by the Contractor.
B. All sock drains shall be filled with flowable fill when no longer needed, and
abandoned in place.
C. All areas used for infiltration/percolation shall be restored in accordance with
Specification Section 02485.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
, 02140-5 05/14/12
1
2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140-6
05/14/12
,
'
�I
'
C
'
CJ
'
I�
�J
�
'
r-.
IJ
'
'
�
�
,
'
,
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 02221
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for pipelines
and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading, disposal of
surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces.
B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and
appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with pneumatic chisels along straight
lines before excavating.
C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports, and
shall remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may deem
unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry and in
all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be related closely to the
rate of installing pipe. All excavation shall be made in open trenches.
D. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of the
manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant and strength
designation, as applicable. All pipe shall be laid with a 2-inch metallic tape,
appropriately color-coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12-inches below
final grade, directly above the utility for identification and ease of location. The
appropriate tape color codes are as follows:
Grey, Gravity Sewer
Green - Sanitary force main
Blue - Potable water
Lavender - Reclaimed water
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material, the
Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the material at
least ten calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such
material.
2. Materials shall be furnished as required from off site sources and hauled
to the site.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-1 05/14/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1:3
C
�
3.
L
1
Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section. See '
Paragraph 3.10.
Common Fill
Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam,
wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be compressible
or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill shall not contain
stones larger than 10-in. in any dimension, broken concrete, masonry,
rubble, or other similar materials. It shall have physical properties such
that it can be readily spread and compacted during filling.
2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during the
excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All material
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for reuse shall be
spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials.
Crushed Stone
Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer
below structures with underdrains and at other locations indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Crushed stone for pipe bedding shall be size No. 67 with gradation as
defined in Table 1 of Section 901 of Florida Department of Transportation
Standard Specifications for Road & Bridge Construction.
Select Fill
Select fill shall be noncohesive, non-plastic material free of all debris,
lumps or clods. Fill material shall be clean earth fill composed of sand or
an approved mixture of clay and sand. Backfill material placed within one
foot of piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or rocks
larger than 2 inches in diameter, or 3/4-inch in diameter for PVC pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the trench
bank. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters shall be avoided as much as
possible. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling as
specified below.
B. Surplus excavated material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable for
use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled at a
satisfactory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-2
'
,
,
'
i -,
i
„
1
�
1
'
�J
'
�
�,
�
'
'
05/14/12
'
'
'
,
'
1
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
�
`J
,
'
'
'
,
'
,
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Unsatisfactory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck, stumps
and other material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed of by the
Contractor.
C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from the
site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by the
Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been approved by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material.
D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to
the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided by the
Contractor. When required, it shall be rehandled and used in backfilling the
trench. No extra compensation will be made for rehandling material.
3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING
A. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing
required to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of ground which
could damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures. If the Engineer
is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been
provided, he may order additional supports placed at the expense of the
Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall
be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they
shall be immediately filled ar�d rammed.
3.03 TEST PITS
p. The Contractar may be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of locating
underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise location of
new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired information has
been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a satisfactory
condition for travel until resurfaced as hereinafter specified.
B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and shall
be done at the Contractor's expense.
C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be properly
barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the Engineer, in
accordance with State and Local laws.
3.04 DRAINAGE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all
incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system he proposes
for handling ground water or surface water encountered. He shall assume all
responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and equipment
employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is assured that the
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-3 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
proposed method will be satisfactory. The requirements for a stable subgrade
are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his drainage methods, if, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the trench bottom is unsatisfactory.
B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly remove
and dispose of all water entering trench and excavation. The grade shall be
maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be constructed therein are
completed. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the trench,
pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities.
C. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after
being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after
placement.
D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until the
concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall prevent
flotation of the pipe promptly placing backfill.
E. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish
and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall furnish
and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water level
continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall be laid with open
joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of trench, and to a depth of
6-in. below the invert of underdrain.
F. The invert of underdrain shall be 12-in. below the normal subgrade. Pipe
underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the
completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall be
limited as conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete shall
be constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft. lengths of the underdrain
system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after construction is completed.
All excavation below normal grade for the purpose of installing underdrains, the
crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall be considered a part of the drainage
work to be done under the pipe items. The Contractor shall continuously guard
against the loss of earth through subbase or the underdrain. Should loss of
either take place, the Contractor shall alter the stone size to provide a
satisfactory barrier or filter.
G.
H.
Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor shall
furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities.
The Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer for submission to
the FDEP prior to commencement of work in accordance with Section 02140.
3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-4
,
�
�
'
'
,
n
�
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
li
�J
r
,
,
'
05/14/12
'
,
�
'
'
'
�
�J
�
'
'
'
'
J
,
�J
'
'
,
,
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches which are required for the installation of
pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures.
B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of soil,
and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the trench,
sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be 1 foot
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum recommended clear
width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the pipe outside diameter
plus 2 feet. If the maximum recommended trench width must be exceeded or if
the pipe is installed in a compacted embankment, then pipe embedment should
be compacted to a point of at least 2-1/2 pipe diameters from the pipe on both
sides of the pipe or to the trench walls, whichever is less.
C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below the designated
subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no
more than slightly disturbed.
D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8-in. clearance around the bottom and
sides of the pipe being laid.
E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and uniform
support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided at each joint
to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench bottom
excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and should be compacted
as required to provide firm pipe support. When an unstable subgrade condition
is encountered that could provide inadequate pipe support, additional trench
depth should be excavated and refilled with suitable foundation material. Ledge
rock, boulders, and large stones should be removed to provide 4-inches of soil
cushion of all sides of the pipe and accessories.
3.06 PIPE BEDDING
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown on the
Drawings or as specified by the Engineer but shall be Type 4 bedding at a
minimum. Regardless of the type of bedding used by the Contractor, holes in the
trench shall be provided to receive the pipe bell. The hole excavated shall be
sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all loads and yet provide support over the total
length of the pipe barrel.
B. Pipe shall be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal support
under the pipe. Backfill material shall be worked under the sides of the pipe to
provide satisfactory support under the haunches of the pipe. All bedding material
shall be select fill. Sharp stones and crushed rock (larger than 3/4-in.), which
could cause significant scratching or abrasion of the pipe, shall be excluded from
the embedment material. Proper compaction procedures shall be exercised.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-5 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
C. Where required to provide a firm bedding for the pipe, and with the approval of
the Engineer, a crushed stone bedding shall be provided from a depth of 12"
below the pipe up to the pipe haunches.
3.07 BACKFILLING
'
'
'
�
A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined and bedded,
backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously. '
B. Select backfill material, free from stones and other foreign material, shall be
placed to a depth of 12-inches over the top of the pipe. Backfill shall be
thoroughly compacted by hand-tamping as placed. The remainder of the trench
shall be backfilled in loose 12-inch lifts of common or structural fill as applicable.
C. Any space remaining between the pipe and side of the trench shall be packed full
by hand shovel with selected earth, free from stones having a diameter greater
than 2-inch, and thoroughly compacted with a tamper as fast as placed up to a
level of 12-inches above the top of the pipe.
�
,
C�
D. Backfilling shall be carried up evenly on both sides with at least one person ,
tamping for each person shoveling material into the trench.
E. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as just described shall
be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer may direct,
sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling.
F. Backfill around manholes shall be selected material and thoroughly compacted.
All backfill shall be compacted, especially under and over pipes connected to the
structures.
G. All fill shall be placed in a dry condition.
3.08 COMPACTION
A. Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to exceed
eight (8) inches in depth as measured before compaction. Each layer shall be
compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental compaction due to
traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward the required
minimum four (4) coverages.
B. Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12-inches and should be
compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density,
as established in accordance with ASTM D-1557. Density tests should be
performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is placed.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-6 05/14/12
,
�
L
CJ
'
,
,
,
I
�
'
�J
�
,
,
�
�
'
'J
J
'
'
,
'
C�
,
'
�
'
,
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller ortruck
shall be compacted with approved hand guided mechanical compaction
equipment.
D. Backfill and compaction for manholes and drainage structures shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Section 02220.
E. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in the
condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material that is too
wet shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by harrowing if
necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to allow for proper
compaction as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or organic materiai shall
not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be removed from the trench and
replaced with suitable fill material.
3.09 GRADING
A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, to
the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer and shall
be made in such a manner that the requirements for formation of embankments
can be followed. All unacceptable material encountered, or whatever nature
within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of as directed. During
the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained in such condition that it
will be well drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage
ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surtace water which may affect the
progress or condition of the work.
B. The right is reserved to make small adjustments or revisions in lines or grades if
found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the Drawings
of in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
C.
�
Stones or rock fragments larger than 4-in. in their greatest dimensions will not be
permitted in the top 6-inches of the subgrade.
All fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and alignment
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose or
otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall
be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and alignment shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL
A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become the
property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project
site.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-7 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
Specification for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated
material so approved may by neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by
the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere with the
operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. lf
space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be
required to make arrangements for off-site stockpiling. Transport of such
material from and to the immediate site including any stockpiling agreements
shall by entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for
additional payment.
C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes as
the Engineer may direct.
15 3.11 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not
suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away to
spoil areas is to be replaced and approved surplus excavation obtained
elsewhere on the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill
material shall be made up with acceptable material from outside sources.
B. Rock may be used in fill only with the approval of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221-8
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
,
I�
'
,
,
'
,
,
,
'
�
05/14/12
'
'
'
,
'
�
�
�.
lJ
'
'
�
I�
,
'
�
�
'
'
,
,
,
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 02485
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
�
�
,�
Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return all
construction areas to their original conditions or better.
Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete,
asphalt, planting, watering and maintenance until acceptance by the Owner.
The restoration of grassed areas under this project shall be by sodding.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall provide a satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If
necessary, the Contractor shall repeat any or all of the work, including grading,
fertilizing, watering, and seeding or sodding at no additional cost to the Owner
until a satisfactory stand is obtained.
B. A satisfactory stand of grass is defined herein as a full lawn cover over areas to
be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive and growing, leaving no
bare spots larger than 3/4 sq. yd. within a radius of 10 ft.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or
installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with
Section 01300 and 01340.
B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to
determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived from
organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with State and
Federal fertilizer laws.
1. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on
laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B and approved by the
Engineer. For purpose of bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-1 05/14/12
2
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
and 6% potash by weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain
no less than 3% water-insoluble nitrogen.
2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original
unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed
statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance
covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a
weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its
effectiveness will not be impaired.
3. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as
commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than 20%
available phosphoric acid.
B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction or as approved by
the Engineer and shall be 99 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum
germination and 1 percent maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with U.S.
Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act in
effect. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or
storage shall not be acceptable.
C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall received vegetative
treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping plans.
Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover shall be
vegetated as follows:
Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine
Bahia or seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. The
blanket shall be the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North America
Gree or approved equal.
2. Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched.
D. Sodding
Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth
and good root development.
2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board Specifications,
absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other objectionable
vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind.
3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with
the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform
dimensions.
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-2 05/14/12
,
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
,
'
,
'
�
il
i
�
'
�
�
,
C
,
'
,
�
'
�
�
J
�
'
'
'
'
�
'
,
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
E. Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall correspond to
depth not less than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according to texture and
moisture content of mulch material.
F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during seeding
and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and until the work is
accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever arrangements may be necessary
to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs for his work. The
Contractor shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment, attachments and
accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted areas as may be
required.
G. Asphaltic concrete surface shall consist of either Type S-1 or Type S-3 asphaltic
concrete meeting the specified criteria outlined by the Florida Department of
Transportation Specifications, and Placement & Compaction Procedures.
H. Base material shall consist of either limerock or shell material complying with
FDOT specifications and meeting a minimum LBR of 100.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work on
lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free from soft
spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 Ibs. of 12-3-6 fertilizer per 1,000 sq. ft.
B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected from traffic or other use by placing
warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas damaged prior to
actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the Contractor as directed
by the Engineer.
3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION
n
i3
Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris and
the ground brought to an even grade as approved.
The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8-inch depth.
C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square foot
and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 1000
square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross-disked into a
depth of 4-6 inches.
D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or other
foreign matter over 1-inch in diameter of dimension. The surface shall conform
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-3 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water-retaining depressions, the
soil friable and of uniformly fill texture.
3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
A. A one-foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except
fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement.
B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the
sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary
exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction and
planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and moisture.
C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be laid
tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and other
slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the slope.
Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a lawn roller
customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered.
D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub
areas. Top dressing with approved, clean, weed free, sand may be required at
no additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer.
3.07 CLEANUP
A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be removed
promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times. Upon completion
of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones, and debris remaining
shall be removed from the construction areas.
3.08 MAINTENANCE
3.09
LJ
'
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the !
Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer.
B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding,
cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection from
insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to ensure
normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Sodded areas shall
receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week.
REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS
A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the
Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation, fertilizing, and
reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications.
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-4 05/14/12
�
�
��
�
�
'
,
J
,
�
1
� 3
4
�
'
'
'
,
'
�
'
'
'
,
�
�
,
'
'
END SECTION
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485-5 05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
'
�
�
'
'
'
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS '
02485-6 05/14/12
�
,
u
�
�
,
,
�
,
1
�
'
'
,
�J
�
,
,
�
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
i4
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
�
�
C
I��
Submit to the Engineer shop drawings and product data showing materials of
construction and details of installation for:
1. Commercially manufactured non-shrink cementitious grout. The
submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage
requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature
considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material
Safety Data Sheet.
2. Commercially manufactured non-shrink epoxy grout. The submittal
shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product
life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity
to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet.
3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the
cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any
proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout.
4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent
quantities per cubic yard, the water/cement ratio, and fiber
reinforcement.
Laboratory Test Reports
1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer.
Certifications
1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout
products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact
with potable water after 30 days curing.
Qualifications
GROUT
03600-1
05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least
10 years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts
to be supplied.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A
�
�
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars,
Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes
2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surtacings and
Polymer Concretes
3
4.
ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early
Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD)
1. CRD C-621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout
'
'
�
�
,
'
�
,
�
'
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect �
at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
:
C.
1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the
production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work.
Pre-installation Conference
1. Where specifically required, and well in advance of grouting, conduct a
pre-installation meeting to review the requirements for surface
preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product
proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of
the meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date.
Services of Manufacturer's Representative
1. A qualified field technician of the non-shrink grout manufacturer,
GROUT
03600-2 05/14/12
�
LJ
�
�
'
'
�
'
�
�
l .J
�
�
'
1
'
�
�
C�
'
�
�
'
'�J
'
i
,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the
pre-installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation
of each type of non-shrink grout. Additional services shall also be
provided, as required, to correct installation problems.
Field Testing
1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by
the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and
shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The
methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM
Standards.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled
with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and
printed instructions.
B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be
limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time,
whichever is less.
C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately
removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional
cost to the Owner.
D. Non-shrink, cement-based grouts shall be delivered as pre-blended,
prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water.
E. Non-shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre-measured, prepackaged,
three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the
manufacturer.
1.06 DEFtNITIONS
A. Non-shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink
in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened
state and bonds to a clean base plate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the
purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired.
GROUT
03600-3 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
0
,
'
Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to r
provide standardization of appearance.
2.02 MATERIALS
I_1
:
C
Non-shrink Cementitious Grout
Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements
of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C-621. Grouts shall be
Portland cement based, contain a pre-proportioned blend of selected
aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only
the addition of water. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain
expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no
shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827.
2. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set
Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill
& Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S.
Grout Corp. or equal.
3. Flowable (Precision) non-shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master
Builders, Inc.; Hi-Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212
by Sika Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by
U. S. Grout Corp. or equal.
Non-shrink Epoxy Grout
Non-shrink epoxy-based grout shall be a pre-proportioned, three
component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin,
hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength
of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and
have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10�6 when tested in
conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by
Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.;
Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the
Euclid Chemical Co. or equal.
Cement Grout
Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part portland cement
conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand
conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The
water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not
to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow.
GROUT
03600-4 05/14/12
�
rl
�__�
'
,
LJ
�
�
�
C�
,
'
�
�
�
�
'
LJ
,
�
,
'
,
,
'
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
��
,
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
'�
E.
Concrete Grout
1. Concrete grout shall proportioned with cement, [pozzalan,] coarse and
fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to
produce a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or
2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be [3/8] [1/2]-in
maximum. Slump should not exceed 5-in and should be as tow as
practical yet still retain sufficient workability.
2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at
the rate of 1.5 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be
added from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the
manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete
dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the
concrete grout.
Water
1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic
matter, or other deleterious substances.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design
strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost,
dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints and free of all loose
material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the
grout.
C. Roughen concrete surtaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical
means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken
concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed
if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent
concrete.
1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be
the oil-less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil
from being blown onto the surface.
D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal
embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout.
GROUT
03600-5 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24
hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may
be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a
soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer.
Upon completion of the 24 hour period, visible water shall be removed from
the surface prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of
surface saturation shall only be used when approved by the Engineer for each
specific location of grout installation.
t
�
�
,
F. Epoxy-based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate.
Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. �
G. Construct grout forms or other leak-proof containment as required. Forms
shall be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout
manufacturer. Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in
place and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement.
1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a
hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms.
H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with
the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer.
Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by
shims, wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and
blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate
bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
'
�
�
�
u
�
�
A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's ��
recommendations and this Section.
B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous
mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at
hand.
C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout
between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours
thereafter or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer.
Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and
grout during the curing period.
D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as
recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the
GROUT
03600-6 05/14/12
,
�
�
1
�
�
�
[�
,
�
'
'
,
'
�
�
,
�
,
,
,
�
II
�
�
1
,
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.03
temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and
90 degrees F range.
E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements
on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion
or control joint.
F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints
through the grout.
INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS
GROUTS
A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement,
sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer.
B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is
recommended. Pre-wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add
premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with
the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then
add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not
exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content.
C. Placements greater than 3-in in depth shall include the addition of clean,
washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer.
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of
aggregate to be added.
D Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation
or entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the
material. Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of
all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces.
Provide grout holes as necessary.
E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement
grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial
stiffening.
F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at
a 45 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish.
G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep
grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at
least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer.
Saturate the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or
other approved means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds
GROUT
03600-7 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind
breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished.
3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS
A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency
of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper
proportions of resin, hardener and aggregate.
B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for
special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above
90 degrees F.
C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping
air. Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full
contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as
necessary.
D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate).
In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout
thickness.
E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish.
Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water.
Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature
range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT
A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the
surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface
clean until placement of concrete grout.
B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all
dirt and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of
water. Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted.
C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the
concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or
soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove
excess water just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement
slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when
G ROUT
03600-8 05/14/12
�
,
,
�
,
,
'
�
�
,
LJ
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
,
�
'
,
LJ
'
�_�
�
,
,
�
�
'�J
�
II
L;
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is
coated with approximately 1/16 to 1/8-in thick cement paste. A bonding grout
composed of 1 part portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, an approved bonding
admixture and water, mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be
substituted for the cement slurry.
D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide
for surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless
specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper
mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed.
E.
F
Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings.
Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast-in-place concrete.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used:
1. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations
where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates
greater in area than 3-ft wide by 3-ft long and except for the setting of
anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete.
2. Flowable non-shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates
greater in area than 3-ft by 3-ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive
flowable non-shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her
option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non-shrink grout
for general purpose non-shrink cementitious grout.
3. Non-shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor
bolts and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically
indicated to receive epoxy grout.
4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental
base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base
plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used
when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for
grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and
girders.
5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper
mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface
grade.
END OF SECTION
GROUT
03600-9 05/14/12
,
,
1 THIST PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK �
GROUT
03600-10
�
,
�
�
,
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
05/14/12
�
�
t
�
�
�
�
��
,
,
�
,
I�
,
�
'
1
�
,
�
1
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 03740
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut,
remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or
appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work
under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing
concrete.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of
demolition to be used at each location.
B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for
use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's
installation and/or application instructions.
C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are
proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions
to the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding
Systems for Concrete.
ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin
Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer.
ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of
Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete.
ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of
Rigid Plastics.
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-1 05/14/12
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
�
r�
�
�
ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by �
Punch Tool.
8. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials.
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
,
�
A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise
altered until authorization is given by the Engineer. �
B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all
necessary barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be
erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for
the new work, protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the
structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted,
shown or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall
have a minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture of such products
and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically
supporting the Contractor's personnel.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
:
Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the
manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers.
Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local
regulations.
B. Epoxy Bonding Agent
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-2
i
u
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
05/14/12
�
,
'
�
'
'
,
'
��
�
�
,
�
�
,
,
�
�
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C.
1. General
a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two-component,
solvent-free, asbestos-free moisture insensitive epoxy resin
material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete
complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the
additional requirements specified herein.
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material:
1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum
at 28 days.
2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14
days.
3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
6,300 psi minimum at 14 days.
4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14
days.
5)
6)
7)
8)
Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One
percent maximum at 14 days.
Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500
psi minimum at 14 days moist cure.
Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test.
Color: Gray.
3. Approved manufacturer's include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ -
Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive
Liquid (LPL) or equal.
Epoxy Paste
1. General
a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two-component, solvent-free, asbestos
free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond
dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts,
dowels, anchor bolts and all-threads into hardened concrete and
shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I,
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-3 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Grade 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may
also be used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is
1/8-in or less..
2. Material
3
a. Properties of the cured material:
1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695)
minimum at 28 days.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
�
�
LJ
,
10,000 si �
P
Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14
days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum.
Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
3,700 psi minimum at 14 days.
Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14
days.
Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at
7 days.
Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist
cure.
7) Color: Concrete grey.
Approved manufacturer's include:
a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ -
Sikadur Hi-mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH -
Concresive 1438 or equal.
,
LJ
�
�
�
,
�
,
b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi-mod LV 32; �
Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal.
D. Non-Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Cement Grout, Non-Shrink
Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600
GROUT.
E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive
Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall
consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a
polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained
in a separate vial within the capsule.
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-4 05/14/12
��
�
�
�
,
`J
`J
'
'
�]
�
1
�J
,
�
,
�
,
LI
,
�
�
u
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent
G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive
1. General
a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two-component,
solvent-free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable
for crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be
formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being
i njected.
b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be
treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive
injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy
coating approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable
water.
2. Material
3
a. Properties of the cured material
1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi
minimum at 28 days.
2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14
days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent.
3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi
minimum at 14 days (injection)
4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14
days.
5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent
maximum at 7 days.
6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry;
2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist.
7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test.
Approved manufacturer's include:
a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ -
Sikadur Hi-Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH -
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-5 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Concressive 1380 or equal.
b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ -
Sikadur Hi-Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH -
Concressive 1468 or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing
structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein,
or necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints,
reinforcements, sealants, etc, are specified in respective Sections. All work
shall comply with other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the
Drawings.
B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and
applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or
control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between
components on either side of the joint.
D. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall
stop if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location
shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval
by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to
drilling using "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to
avoid rebar interference.
3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL
A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific timits as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by line drilling at limits
followed by chipping or jack-hammering as appropriate in areas where
concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that
surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in
place equipment is not damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be
removed shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings, or after obtaining
written approval from the Engineer.
B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting/core drilling and no
new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface
treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a
thickness of 1/4-in.
C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-6 05/14/12
,
u
�
,
C
,
�
L�
,
,
�
LJ
�
�
�
L
�
II
�
L�
�
�
�
,
'
�
r
�
,
,
,
LJ
�
,
'
�
�
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
I��
concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or
specified, the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1-in deep saw cut on each
exposed surface of the existing concrete.
Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired by
approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional
repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by
such other methods as may be appropriate.
3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas
requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings,
specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond
inhibiting materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. -
sandblasting, grinding, etc, as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas
are not less than 1/2-in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be
removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent
concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection.
C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all
contaminants, rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of
the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance
chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1/2-in. Reinforcing to be
saved shall not be damaged during the demolition operation.
D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be
incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to
remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the
repair. It shall be cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the
Drawings and provided with 1-in minimum cover all around.
E. The following are
where called for
Engineer.
2
specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used
on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the
Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been
roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with
water. Brush on a 1/16-in layer of cement and water mixed to the
consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement
paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings.
Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-7 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field
preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply
strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete
or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints
recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond.
3. Method C: Drill a hole 1/4-in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The
hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to
installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with [epoxy paste],
then dowels/bolts shall be buttered with paste then inserted by tapping.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be
drilled and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be
drilled and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the
Drawings, the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and
spacing of dowels.
4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C.
5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by
drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear
strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system
shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized
as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall
be tipped with a double 45 degree chamfered point, securely fastened
into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the
capsule filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical
and overhead positions.
3.04 GROUTING
A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600.
3.05 CRACK REPAIR
A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack
sealant into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. !f cracks are less
than 1/16-in in thickness they shall be pressure injected.
B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack
sealant through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per
manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740-8
'
�
�
�
CJ
�
LJ
,
�
l_J
,
�
��
u
,
'
1
,
05/14/12
�
,
'
r
�
,
�
,
�
�
'
�
,
�
�
,
�
,
�
�
� SECTION 05500
2
3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
10 miscellaneous metals as shown on the Construction Drawings and as
11 specified herein. The miscellaneous metal items include but are not limited
12 to the following:
13
14 1. All metal frames, ladders, stair rails, floor opening frames including
15 gratings and supports.
16
17 2. Prefabricated access hatches and frames.
18
19 3. Anchors and anchor bolts except those specified to be furnished with
20 all equipment.
21
22 4. Railings, posts and supports both interior and exterior.
23
24 5. Cast iron frames, covers, grates, drain leaders and drains.
25
26 6. Stair nosings, steel plates, overhead steel door frames, angle frames,
27 plates and channels.
28
29 7. Guardrails
30
31 1.02 COORDINATION
32
33 A. The work in this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of
34 other Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other
35 trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and
36 installation of items herein specified.
37
38 B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are
39 to be built into the work of all other Sections.
40
41 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
42
43 A. Detail Drawings, as provided for in the General Conditions, showing sizes of
44 members, method of assembly, anchorage, and connection to other
45 members shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication.
46
47
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Q
C.
❑�
For each fabricated item include drawings, elevations, and details. Show the
following:
1. Details of Sections
2. Jointing and Connections
3. tndicate welded connections using standard AWS symbols; indicate
net weld length.
4. Reinforcing
5. Fasteners and Anchors
6. Accessories
7. Location of each finish
Manufacturer's specifications, details and installation instructions. Submit
for:
1. All manufactured products used in fabrications.
Samples shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer for concurrent
review with shop drawings.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
,
�
�
,
,
'
L
�
�
A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement ,
indicated dimensions and to insure proper fitting of all items.
B. Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete
and masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation,
together with all coordination Drawings and instaflation instructions required.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork where required for
installation in new concrete or other adjacent work.
1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the materials herein
specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed
organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is
made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the
standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
Gray Iron Castings
Galvanizing, general
Galvanizing, hardware
Galvanizing, assemblies
Stainless Steel Bolts, Fasteners
Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet Wire
Welding Rods for Steel
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-2
ASTM A53
ASTM A48 (Class 30)
ASTM A123
ASTM A153
ASTM A386
AISI, Type 316
AISI, Type 316
AWS Spec. for Arc
Welding
05/14/12
�
,
�
�
,
�
,
�
�
i
!
'
'
ll
�_J
'
,
�
u
�
�
,
u
�
�
,
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
ANSI/AWS D1.1-88 -- Structural Welding Code -- Steel; 1988.
ANSI/AWS D1.3-81 -- Structural Weiding Code -- Sheet Steel; 1981
ASTM A 36/A 36M-88d -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel;
1988.
ASTM A 307-88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and
Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1988.
ASTM A 501-88 -- Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded
and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1988.
ASTM A 563-88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts; 1988.
ASTM B 221-85a -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Alumi-
num-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes; 1985.
FS FF-S-92B -- Screw, Machine: Slotted, Cross-Recessed or
Hexagon Head; 1974 (Amended 1975).
FS FF-W-84A -- Washers, Lock (Spring); 1967 (Amended 1980).
FS FF-W-92B -- Washer, Flat (Plain); 1974.
SSPC-PA 1-- Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting; Steel
Structures Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-Paint 12 -- Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film);
Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-Paint 13 -- Red or Brown One-Coat Shop Paint; Steel
Structures Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-SP 1-- Solvent Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council;
1982.
SSPC-SP 3-- Power Tool Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1982.
SSPC-SP 5-- White Metal Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
SSPC-SP 6-- Commercial Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
SSPC-SP 8-- Pickling; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
SSPC-SP 10 -- Near-White Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1985.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES
A. Anchors, bolts, etc., shall be furnished as necessary for installation of the
work of this Section.
B. Compound masonry anchors shall be of the type shown or required and shall
be equal to Star Slug in compounded masonry anchors manufactured by
Star Expansion Industries, equal by Phillips Drill Co., Rahlplug, or equal.
Anchors shall be minimum "two unit" type.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-3
05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C. The bolts used to attach the various members to the anchors shall be the
sizes shown or required. Stainless steel shall be attached to concrete or
masonry by means of stainless steel machine bolts and iron or steel shall be
attached with steel machine bolts unless otherwise specifically noted.
D. For structural purposes, unless otherwise noted, expansion bolts shall be
Wej-it "Ankr-Tite", Phillips Drill Co. "Wedge Anchors", or Hilti "Kwik-Bolt".
When length of bolt is not called for on the Construction Drawings, the length
of bolt provided shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a
minimum of 1-inch behind the reinforcing steel within the concrete. Material
shall be as noted on the Construction Drawings. If not listed, all materials
shall be stainless steel.
2.02 ALUMINUM ITEMS
A. Aluminum gratings shall be of serrated I-Bar Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6, and
shall be Thompson Fabricating Company, Aluminum I-Bar Grating; or equal.
Bearing bars shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum. Grating to be of sufficient
strength to carry a uniformly distributed live load of not less than 200 pounds
per square foot with maximum deflection of 1/4" of the span length. Provide
bearing angles, anchors, and bolts constructed of aluminum or stainless
steel and as detailed. Grating shall be removable type with standard
removable fasteners. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete surfaces
shall be protected with a special protective lacquer or bituminous coating or
other approved coating in orderto keep stains to a minimum. Top surface of
all bars shall be flush; ends of gratings shall be provided with binding strips
of same depth and thickness as the main bars welded thereto. All openings
2 inches and greater in diameter shall be banded with a bar of the same
depth and thickness as the main bearing bars of the grating, or furnished
with continuous cross bridges. Each cut bar shall be welded to the band if
banding is utilized. The ends of all grating sections shall be likewise banded.
Clamps and bolts used for attaching grating to supporting members shall be
stainless steel. All grating shall be clamped unless noted otherwise. Clamps
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
�
�
'
,
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
L'
�
�
B. Stair treads shall be as specified above for grating and shall have abrasive ,
nonslip nosing.
C. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be an extrusion of 4-inch minimum
width with abrasive filled and shall be Wooster Products, Inc., Alumogrit
Treads, Type 116; equal by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco; or equal.
Embedded anchors shall be furnished with a minimum of three anchors per
tread.
r
�
D. Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated to the dimensions and details and '
installed as shown on the Construction Drawings.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL �
05500-4 05/14/12
�
'
LI
,
'
,
�
,
�
,
'
�
'
LJ
'
'
�
'
'
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
E. Aluminum Handrails, Mechanically Fastened Type:
1. All aluminum mechanically fastened type pipe handrails and
guardrails shall be clear anodized aluminum finish and installed as
specified herein and indicated on the Construction Drawings.
Handrails shall be made of nominal 1-1 /2 inches inside diameter pipe
(schedule 40 for rails, schedule 80 for posts) fabricated of seamless
6105-T5 or 6061-T6 alloy, ASTM B-429 or ASTM B-221. The supplier
of the handrail system shall supply all necessary fittings, rackets,
transition, corner and connector pieces, toeboards, protective
gaskets, etc., for a complete job at the locations indicated on the
Construction Drawings. All mounting hardware including bolts, studs,
nuts, etc., shall be stainless steel Type 316. Bends shall be smooth
and accurate to the details shown. The handrail systems shall comply
with all OSHA codes and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building
Code. Railing systems incorporating pop-rivets or glued fittings shall
no be allowed.
2. Handrailings and components shall be as manufactured by Thompson
Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama, or approved equal.
3. Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 Ib
concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail.
Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a load of
50 Ib/ft. applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200 Ib load will not be
applied simultaneously with the 501b/ft. load. In addition, the handrails
shall be designed to withstand a load of 1001b/ft. applied vertically
downward to the top rail and simultaneously with the 501b/ft. horizontal
load. The 1001b/ft. vertical load does not apply to stair rails.
4. Spacing of posts where posts are required shall be as noted on shop
drawings, but in all cases shall be uniform and shall not exceed the
requirements of OSHA and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building
Code. Shorter spacing may be used where required to maintain the
maximum spacing. The fabricator of the aluminum handrail and
guardrail system shall be responsible for the design and preparation
of shop drawings and design calculations (signed and sealed by
Florida Registered Engineer) to meet OSHA requirements and
Section 1208.2 of Standard Building Code.
5. All railings shall be erected in line and plumb. Field splicing and
expansion compensation shall be accomplished using internal splice
sleeves. Make provisions for removable railing sections, as detailed
and where shown on the Construction Drawings.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-5 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
F
�
H
6. Where handrail or guardrail posts are set in concrete, as per the
manufacturer's requirements, the posts shall be set into aluminum
sleeves cast in the concrete and firmly cemented with 1651 epoxy
resin by E-Bond Epoxies, Oakland Park, Florida, or Moulded
Reinforced Plastics, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, Florida or equal. Collars
shall be placed on the posts and fastened in place, as shown and as
detailed on approved shop drawings.
7. Where handrail is supported from structural members, it shall be done
by the use of approved sockets, flanges, brackets, or other approved
means, which will provide neat and substantial support for the pipe
railing.
8. All railing shall be properly protected by paper, plastic or by an
approved coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar,
paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and
until adjacent work by other trades has been completed.
Toeboards:
Contractor shall furnish and install aluminum toeboards conforming to
latest OSHA requirements on all railings and other locations.
2. Toeboards shall consist of an extruded 6063-T6 aluminum shape
bolted by means of a pipe clamp to the railing posts without requiring
any drilling or welding of the toeboard to the railing posts as
manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, or approved
equal. Toeboards shall have pitched top and tear drop bottom to
prevent accumulation of dirt, or other material.
'
'
'
'
r
,
,
�J
�
�
'
�
3. Toeboards shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6. All fastening hardware
shall be Type 316 stainless steel. ,
Kickplates, if required, shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the
Drawings.
Aluminum safety gate shall be fabricated of extruded aluminum.
I. Prefabricated checkerplate aluminum floor hatches shall be Type "JD", or
"KD" as manufactured by Bilco Co., equal by Babcock-Davis Associates,
Inc.; Type "AM" Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Co., Milcor Division;
or equal, sized as shown. Hatches with either dimension over 3 feet-6
inches shall be double leaf type. Hatches shall be designed for a live load of
300 pounds per square foot. Hatches shall be watertight.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-6
'
r
'
L
05/14/12 ,
�
�J
'
J
LJ
�
'
'
�
�
'
'
,
�
,
'
C�
,
,
,
'
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
J. Ship ladders shall be of all aluminum construction as detailed. Treads shall
have abrasive nosing as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company,
Birmingham, Alabama.
K. Checkplate aluminum cover plates shall be fabricated to the details shown
and installed at the locations shown.
L. Structural aluminum angle and channel door frames shall be provided as
shown on the Construction Drawings and shall be anodized. Frames shall
be fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb.
M. Miscellaneous aluminum shapes and plates shall be fabricated as shown.
Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc., shall be furnished complete
with welded strap anchors attached. Furnish all miscellaneous aluminum
shown but not otherwise detailed. Structural shapes and extruded items
shall conform to the detail dimensions or the Shop Drawings within the
tolerances published by the American Aluminum Association.
2.03 STEEL ITEMS
A. Sleeves shall be steel or cast iron pipe in walls and floors with end joints as
shown on the Drawings. All pipe sleeves shall have center anchor around
circumference as shown.
B. Miscellaneous steel pipe for sleeves and lifting attachments and other uses
as required shall be Schedule 40 pipe fabricated according ta the details as
shown on the Drawings.
C. Miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the
Construction Drawings and shall include: beams, angles, support brackets,
closure angles in roof at edge of T-beam; base plates to support ends of
T-beams; door frames; splice plates, anchor bolts (except for Equipment
furnished in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15); lintels and any other miscellaneous
steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified.
D. Guardrails shall be of a standard FDOT W-Beam design with reflectors. All
mounting hardware including bolts, washers, nuts shall be galvanized.
2.04 CAST IRON ITEMS
A. Outside pipe clean-out frames and covers, when and where shown on the
Construction Drawings, shall be heavy duty, R-6013-R-6099 series as
manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. All outside pipe clean-outs
shall be 6-inch diameter.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-7 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
B. Frames, covers and grates for manholes, catch basins and inlets shall be of
a good quality, strong, tough even grained cast iron and capable of
supporting an H-20 loading. Castings shall be as manufactured by the U.S.
Foundry, Neenah Foundry, Mechanics Iron Foundry or equal. Sizes shall be
as shown on the Drawings. Covers to have letters "WATER", "SEWER" or
"DRAIN", as applicable, embossed on top.
C. Electric and telephone manhole frames and covers, when and where shown
on the Construction Drawings, shall be ductile iron castings conforming to all
requirements of ASTM A536. The covers shall be watertight and shall have
the letters "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL," "TELEPHONE,"
as applicable, embossed on top in letters 2 inches high. The clear opening
shall be 36-inches.
2.05 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS
LJ
,
'
,
L
'
'
A. Stainless steel items, where shown on the Drawings, shall be manufactured '
using 316 S.S., unless otherwise noted.
2.06 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS
�
A. Use fasteners of suitable size and length for the materials being fastened
and for the type of connection required. '
1. For concealed interior and e�erior use or built into exterior walls:
Nonferrous stainless steel and zinc coated. �
2. For embedded anchor that will be protected from the elements, use
fasteners of the same material as the miscellaneous stem being
fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean,
straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform co�or and
texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability.
B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely
withstand stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Steel
accessories and connections to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless
otherwise specified. Threaded connections shall be made so that the
threads are concealed by fitting.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-8 05/14/12
�
,
'
'
'
,
,
'
�
�
,
'
�
'
�
,
�
1
�
C�
�
�
�
L_
,
,
,
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C. Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded or spot welded as
specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth.
Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous.
D. Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc and
Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and shall only be done
where shown, specified, or permitted by the Engineer. All welding shall be
done only by welders certified as to their ability to perform welding in
accordance with the requirements of the AWS Code. Component parts of
built-up members to be welded shall be adequately supported and clamped
or held by other adequate means to hold the parts in proper relation for
welding.
E. Welding of aluminum work shall be on the unexposed side as much as
possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration.
F. All aluminum finish exposed surfaces, except as specified below, shall have
manufacturer's standard mill finish. Aluminum handrails shall be given an
anodic oxide treatment in accordance with the Aluminum Association
Specification AA-C22-A41. A coating of inethacrylate lacquer shall be
applied to all aluminum before shipment from the factory.
G. Castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even-grained, smooth, free
from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of any kind which render
them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be
thoroughly cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field
by the Engineer. All finished surfaces shown on the Drawings and/or
specified shall be machined to a true plane surface and shall be true and
seat at all points without rocking. Allowances shall be made in the patterns
so that the thickness specified or shown shall not be reduced in obtaining
finished surfaces. Castings will not be acceptable if the actual weight is less
than 95 percent of the theoretical weight computed from the dimensions
shown. The Contractor, if requested by the Owner or Engineer, shall provide
facilities for weighing castings in the presence of the Owner or Engineer
showing true weights, certified by the supplier.
H. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose
mill scale, rust, and foreign matter before shipment and shall be given one shop
coat of primer compatible with finish coats specified in Painting Section after
fabrication but before shipping. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall
be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open
spaces. Abrasions in the field shall be touched up with primer immediately after
erection. Final painting is specified in Painting Section 09900.
Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot-dip zinc process after fabrication.
Following all manufacturing operations, all items to be galvanized shall be
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-9
05/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
J.
K.
thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely immersed in a bath of molten
zinc. The resulting coating shall be adherent and shall be the normal coating to
be obtained by immersing the items in a bath of molten zinc and allowing them to
remain in the bath until their temperature becomes the same as the bath.
Coating shall be not less than 2 oz. per sq. ft. of surface.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; use anchors of same material and finish
as item except where specifically indicated otherwise.
Fabricate to prevent water intrusion or migration.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install all items furnished except items to be imbedded in concrete or other
masonry which shall be installed under Division 03. Items to be attached to
concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in
accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not
be permitted. All dimensions shall be verified at the site before fabrication is
started.
B. All steel surfaces to come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall
receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic
applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.
C. Where aluminum is embedded in concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved
bitumastic troweling mastic in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions
prior to installation.
,
,
,
L'
J
,
,
�
,
�J
'
C�
D. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, provide a 1/32-inch neoprene ,
gasket between the aluminum and the concrete or masonry.
E. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of '
zinc-chromate primer and provide a 1/32-inch neoprene gasket between the
aluminum and the dissimilar metal.
F.
G.
H.
Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and
masonry paint to the wood.
Anchor metal fabrications to substrata indicated; set all fasteners required
Cut, drill and fit items as required for installation.
1.
2.
Fit exposed connection together accurately to form tight hairline joints.
Weld joints as indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-10
�
'
'
'
,
05/14/12
,
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
,
,
�
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
'
1 a. Comply with AWS code for welding procedures, for appearance
2 and quality of welds, and for corrective methods.
3 b. Grind exposed joints smooth.
4
5 I. Set items accurately in location, alignment and elevation; level, true and free of
6 rack, measured from established lines and levels.
7
8 J. Provide temporary bracing as required.
9
10 3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
11
12 A. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection.
13
14 1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded surfaces.
15
16 2. Paint with same material used for shop painting, minimum 2 mils dry film
17 thickness.
18
19
20
21 END OF SECTION
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-11 05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500-12
05/14/12
,
,
,
'
'
,
�
CJ
,
'
'
�J
,
�
,
r
,
C�
LJ
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 06600
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
:
This section includes all Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Products and
Fabrications, including but not limited to:
1. FRP Weir Plates
2. FRP Scum Baffles
3. FRP Splice Plates
4. FRP Scum Baffle Supports
5. FRP Accessories
The Contractor shall clean the existing clarifier walls where the new FRP scum
baffles and weir plates are to be installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as
required for the provision and proper installation of all of the FRP Products as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All anchor bolts, gaskets, sealants,
and other accessories and appurtenances, required for a complete and operating
installations shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NSF 61 — Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects.
B. ANSI/AWWA F101 — Contact-Molded, Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Wash
Troughs and Launders
C. ASTM D 638 — Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
D. ASTM D 695 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
E. ASTM D 790 — Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All FRP products and fabrications shall be supplied by an experienced firm who
has continually engaged in the manufacture and/or fabrication of fiberglass
reinforced plastics. Firms not listed in this specification must clearly document a
minimum of five years experience with similar projects of equal scope or design.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B. The Contractor shall assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and
communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect a
proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations are followed.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for all FRP materials and fabrications as
required by this scope of work.
B. Product Data:
C.
1. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications,
and identification of materials of construction, including resins and glass
fiber content and layout for FRP constructions.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufacturers catalog data with load and deflection charts for all FRP
gratings.
Manufacturers catalog data for all FRP Structural Shapes.
Manufacturer's 6-inch square samples of FRP laminate of the same
construction, thickness, and color as the structural item.
Test results of FRP laminate.
6. Installation instructions and manufacturer certification that materials
comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the intended
application.
Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings shall show all FRP materials as required and include all
dimensions, connections, fasteners, structural supports, adjustments,
openings, anchors, tolerances, assembly, and installation details as
required and shall be based on field measurements by the Contractor to
ensure proper installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant the weirs, scum baffles and bracket supports to
be free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with Specification
Section 01740.
1.08 COORDINATION
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600-2
,
'
'
�I
�
�
�i
�
L
�J
'
�
�,
�
,
�J
�--.
i
„
�
��
�
r
'
�
�
,
05/14/12
,
'
'
1
, 3
4
' 6
'
�
,
CJ
,
�J
LJ
,
,
'
�
'
,
lJ
,
A. The Contractor and the manufacturer shall coordinate the weir and scum baffle
design and installation requirements with the clarifier mechanism, scum box,
scum beach, and effluent launder channel configurations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
7 2.01 GENERAL
8
9 A. All FRP materials shall be manufactured with vinylester, with chemical
10 formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other
11 physical properties compatible with domestic wastewater as required.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. All structural shapes shall be constructed of continuous strand roving, continuous
transverse mat, and synthetic surface veil, and shall include ultraviolet (UV)
inhibitors.
C. After fabrication of FRP, all cuts, holes, and abrasion shall be sealed according
to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion.
2.02 FRP WEIRS, SCUM BAFFLES, SPLICE PLATES, AND SUPPORTS
A. Except for bolts and hardware specified herein, weirs, splice places, baffles, and
supports shall be polyester plastic resin, reinforced with glass fiber and molded to
produce uniform smooth surfaces.
B. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% and not
more than 32% using Type E silane glass with chrome or silane finish. Final
laminate thickness shall be within 10% of nominal specified thickness.
C. The surface shall be resin rich, free of voids and porosity, without dry spots,
crazes or unreinforced areas and shall provide for increased corrosion resistance
and UV protection. All machines or cut edges shall be sealed with resin. The
weirs, splice places, baffles, and supports shall all be the same color and shall be
green, white, or grey.
D. Ultraviolet resistance is required in all laminates. Surfacing veil is required on all
surfaces to increase chemical resistance and provide additional UV protection.
E. The weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be a minimum of
1/4" thick plastic laminate. Oversized mounting holes shall be provided for
vertical and horizontal alignment of at least 2" with 5" diameter FRP washers to
cover the holes.
F. Weirs and splice plates shall be mounted with 1/2" x 4-1/4 inch stainless steel
anchors on 24-inch centers. The weirs shall not exceed 12-feet in length unless
otherwise noted. Cut ends of non-standard lengths shall be sealed with resin.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600-3 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
G. The scum baffle panels shall be 12-inches high and shall not exceed 12-feet in
length unless otherwise noted. Splice plates shall be minimum 6-inch x 12-inch.
The scum baffle brackets shall be 7-inch x 10-inch x�/a-inch FRP with gussets on
both sides and slotted holes to provide horizontal, vertical and radial adjustment
of the baffle. The brackets shall be installed a maximum of 4-feet on center or as
shown on the Drawings. Fastening holes in the scum baffle panel shall be
countersunk to accommodate 3/8-inch flat head fasteners. Cut ends of non-
standard lengths shall be sealed with resin.
G
H
I.
J.
K.
L.
Anchors, nuts, bolts, washers and all other hardware shall be Type 316 stainless
steel.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Laminate Physical Properties:
Method
ASTM D-638
ASTM D-790
ASTM D-790
ASTM D-2583
ASTM D-570
Test
Tensile Strength
Flexural Strength
Flexural Modulus
Barcol Hardness
Water Absorption
Min: Value
24,000 psi
25,0006psi
1.4 x 10 psi
40
0.2%
Construction shall comply with all requirements of ANSI/AWWA/NSF standards
listed above, and manufacturer shall provide proof of such certification.
Straight weirs shall be cut from a flat sheet. Curvilinear weirs (clarifier) cut from a
flat sheet will not be acceptable.
Weir notch configuration and dimensions shall match the existing weirs.
Weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be as manufactured by
Nefco Inc., Warminster Fiberglass, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Upon receipt of material at job site, the Contractor shall inspect all materials for
shipping damage. Any damage is to be noted on the shipping receipt / packing
list and reported promptly to the shipper.
3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A.
:
Handle all FRP materials with reasonable care to prevent damage. Use shipping
pallets to move material. Do not drag FRP materials.
If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent
twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600-4 05/14/12
'
,
,
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
�
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
,
'
L. J
'
'
�
'
�l
'
,
,
1
�
L
,
�
'
,
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and verify that other construction trades and
materials have been installed per the Drawings, and, that they are accurate in
location, alignment, elevation, and are plumb and level.
�
C.
�
Install FRP materials in accordance with the installation drawings and instructions
supplied by the FRP Manufacturer.
Install materials accurately in location and elevation, level, and plumb. Field
fabricate as necessary for accurate fit.
All field cuts, holes or abrasions must be sealed with Manufacturer's sealing resin
according to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion.
E. If the Work requires the Contractor to perform additional tasks that may damage
the installed FRP materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for covering the
FRP materials with plywood, or other suitable protective material.
F. Prior to installation of the weirs and scum baffle supports, the Contractor shall
pressure wash and grind smooth the concrete surface where those items will be
mounted to the existing structure.
3.04 CLARIFIERS WEIR INSTALLATION
A. V-notch weirs on all clarifiers shall be installed level around the entire perimeter
of the clarifier. The weirs shall be checked for level with a surveying instrument
at 12 locations around the circumference of each clarifier representing the face of
a clock. The weirs shall be adjusted to a tolerance of ± 1/32-inch at each of the
12 locations.
END OF SECTION
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600-5 05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
�
,
'
,
�
,
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
'
'
�
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS �
06600-6 05/14/12
�
�
'
'
'
LJ
'
��
'
Ll
�
'
�
'
1
CJ
i
CI
,
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 09865
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface
preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete this
Contract in its entirety.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's
specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface
preparation, application procedures and dry mil thickness.
B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by
the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Submerged Services:
1. Shop primer for ferrous metals that will be submerged or that are
subject to splash action or that are specified to be considered
submerged service shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66
at 3.0-5.0 mils (D.F.T.), PPG Pitt-Guard Epoxy Coating 97-145 at 4.0-
6.0 mils (D.F.T.), or approved equal.
2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces must be filled with Tnemec
Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) or Tnemec Series 219 (1 /4" to 1�/2" deep)
or approved equal recommended by manufacturer of approved paint
system.
;�3
C
Non-submerged Services:
1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by Paragraph
2.01 A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy Fast
Dry Primer 94-109 (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.) or approved equal.
Non-primed Surfaces:
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
�
1. Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be
painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable
rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to
prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be
satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test.
Compatibility of Coating Systems:
1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the
manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and
finish coats specified in Section 09900 for use in the field and which are
recommended for use together.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation and Priming:
1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above,
shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, Commercial
Grade, immediately prior to priming. Submerged components
scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in
accordance with SSPC-SP-10. Near White, immediately prior to
priming.
2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill
scale, and other foreign material before priming. Concrete surfaces
shall be prepared in accordance with ICRI CSP 4-6.
ij
4.
�i
Shop prime in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's
recommendations.
Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion has
occurred and within 24 hours.
Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for
moisture by plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263).
END OF SECTION
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865-2
�
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
i
'
'
05/14/12
'
'
'
�
�
'
'
'
,
�
�
�
'
�
�
,
�
'
�
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment
and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete
this Contract in its entirety.
B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled,
exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and
all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified.
Minor items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of
this Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as
stated herein.
C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted:
1. Portions of inetal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This
does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or
masonry surfaces that shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to
be embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated
to prevent electrolysis.
2. Stainless steel.
3. Fencing
4. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces.
5. Acoustical ceilings.
6. Tile.
7. Fiberglass other than piping.
8. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of
mechanical equipment.
9. Electrical switchgear, motor control centers, lighting and power panels,
and control panels.
10. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks.
PAINTING
09900-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
1. SSPC-SP-1 through SSPC-SP-10 Surface Preparation Specifications
B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI)
A.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
ICRI CSP — 3 through ICRI CSP — 6 Concrete Surface Preparation
Standards.
A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
shop drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's
specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface
preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness.
�
,
�
,
'
'
��
B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections. �
C. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer for review and
approval a complete Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and
properly notify and coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting
operations with these Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each
surface to be painted, the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the
coverage and the number of coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to
achieve the specified dry film thickness, and color charts. When the Schedule
has been approved, apply all material in strict accordance with the approved
Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gages
shall be made available to the Engineer to verify the proper application while
work is in progress.
1.04 SPARE MATERIAL
�
'
CJ
�
A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used. `
1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall submit a list of projects successfully completed during the
past 3 years of similar projects. Contractor shall also supply record of
Certificates of Approval from Manufacturers to show they have completed
technical product and application training. Contractors shall submit a list of
surface preparation and application equipment sufficient to mix and apply the
products specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PAINTING
09900-2
�
�
'� 1
�
05/14/12
'
�
'
�
��
'
�
'
�
,
'
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the
Tnemec Company Inc., Carboline, PPG/Porter Coatings, and Sherwin
Williams. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of these
products and recommendations for applications. No brand other than those
named will be considered for approval, unless the brand and type of paint
proposed for each item in the following schedule, together with sufficient data
substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to
demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named, is submitted in writing to the
Engineer for approval within 30 days after the issuance of the Notice to
Proceed. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval.
B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken
containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch
number, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed,
thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the
applicable materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before
using.
C.
�
Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the
manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used.
No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil.
E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all
painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements
of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the
buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing
fixture shall be used for this purpose.
F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and
safety of workmen shall be followed.
2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS
A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for
structural steel shall match that of existing connected structural steel.
B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied
at the dry film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting
systems listed below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require
an additional coat beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color
coverage.
PAINTING
09900-3 05/14/12
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
�
,
1. Non-submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings: �
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) �
b. Carboline
1 st Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.) '
2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
c
�
PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
2. Submerged Concrete
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 — 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
d. Sherwin WilGams
1St Coat : Cor Cote FRE (80-100 mils D.F.T
3. Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions)
a. Tnemec
1 St Coat: Tnemec Series 54-660- (80-100 sq. ft. per gal.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
3`d Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Sanitile 600/600TG (60-80 sq. ft. per gal.)
2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
PAINTING
09900-4
05/14/12
�
�
�
LJ
'
�
,
l�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
C�
��
0
1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97-685/686 (40
to 80 sq. ft. per gal � 12.0-24.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi-Gloss Polyamide Epoxy
Coating
97-130 Series. (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
d. Sherwin Williams
1 st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
Interior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted)
a. Tnemec
Regular CMU
2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75-100 SF/gallon/coat
Split face CMU
2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65-80 SF/gallon/coat
b. Carboline
CMU
1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB � 60-80 SF/gallon
Split Face CMU
2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1 st coat � 40-60 SF/gallon &
2nd coat � 80-120 SF/gallon
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: PPG/HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF
per gallon.
Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls
a. Tnemec
1St Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2"d Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 —6.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0-12.0 mits D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils DFT)
3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils
D. F.T. )
2nd Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110 (5.5-7.3 mils
D. F.T. )
Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing
a. Tnemec
PAINTING
09900-5 05/14/12
1
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
7
�
�
1 St Coat: Tnemec Series 104-1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy
Coating (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 104-Color High Solids Catatyzed Epoxy
Coating (8.0 — 10.0 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-946/949
Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Cor-Cote HB 6.0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Cor-Cote HB 6.0-9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
Exterior non-submerged ferrous metals:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0
mils D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0-4.0 mils (D.F.T.)
Interior non-submerged ferrous metals:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
PAINTING
09900-6
w
�
�
'
�
'
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
05/14/12
�
�
'
�
`
�
'
t
,
�
�
�
LJ
'
'
,
L�
�
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
0
1 st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D. F.T.)
Exterior galvanized and non-ferrous metal:
a. Tnemec
1 st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline:
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800 (2.0-6.0
mils D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: H-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mills D.F.T.)
10. Interior galvanized and non-ferrous metals:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline:
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
11. Galvanized and non-ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing:
a. Tnemec
PAINTING
09900-7
05/14/12
1
3
4
s
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
12.
13
0
1 St Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2"d Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 — 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
Carboline
1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0-14.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
2nd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
3rd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D-T-R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0-7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250°F:
a. Tnemec
15' Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0.7 — 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2"d Coat: Tnemec Series 39-1261(0.7 — 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450°F (8.0-10.0 mils D.F.T.)
or
1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400-1000°F (2.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: Speedhide InUExt Aluminum Paint 6-230. (1.0 -1.3 mils
D.F.T. per coat)
Insulated Pipe:
a. Tnemec
1 S' Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
2"d Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
2 Coats: PITT-TECH Interior/Exterior Satin DTM Industrial
Enamels 90-474 Series.(2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
14. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-8
05/14/12
�
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
15
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94-109 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0-6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
Plastic Piping - Interior:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130
(4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130
(4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
16. Plastic Piping - E�erior
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0-4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130
(4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130
(4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi-Gloss Urethane 95-8800
(2.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Williams
ist Coat: Hi-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Hi-Solids Polyurethane (2.5-3.5 mils D.F.T)
PAINTING
09900-9
05/14/7 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
17. Interior Drywall and Plaster-Industrial Areas
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils DFT)
3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0-5.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130
(4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi-Gloss Epoxy 97-130
(4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T.)
18. Interior Drywall and Plaster-Office Areas
a. Tnemec
1 st Coat: Tnemec Series 51-792 (1.0 — 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
3`d Coat: Tnemec Series 6(2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG/HPC
1 St Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer/Sealer 6-2
(1 mil DFT)
2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6-411
(2 mils D.F.T. per coat)
19. Interior Concrete Floors
a. Tnemec
1S' Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T>)
2"a Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 —10.0 mils D.F.T.)
Note: Apply 50 — 70 mesh silica sand at 5 Ibs. per 150 sq. ft.
between 1st and 2"d coat to provide non-slip surface.
b. Carboline
1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0-2.0 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900-10 05/14/12
,
�
L�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
LJ
�
�
,
�
��
�
�
LJ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
20
2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0-6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
Note: Utilize 40-60 mesh silica sand to provide non-slip surface.
Consult with Carboline for application details.
c. PPG/HPC
1 st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99-6639
(5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Megaseal Self-Leveling Epoxy 99-6680
(10.0-12.0 mils D.F.T.)
Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating
a. Tnemec
1 st Coat: Tnemec Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S
(125 mils D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze
(12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 st Coat: Plasite 5371 (125 mils)
2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0-15.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Concrete Headworks)
1 st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
(100 mils)
3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
(100 mils)
�
e
PPG/HPC/Polyspec (Manholes/Lift Stations-Force & Gravity
Mains)
1 st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
(100 mils)
3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
(100 mils)
PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Concrete Headworks)
1 st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT)
2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac
(20-40 mils DFT)
3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac
(20-40 mils DFT)
PAINTING
09900-11
05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
21.
22.
23
f. PPG/HPC/Enviroline (Manholes/Lift Stations-Force & Gravity
Mains)
1 st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3-5 mils DFT)
2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac
(20-40 mils DFT)
3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20-40 mils
D FT)
g. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: CorCote FRE (80-100 mils D.F.T)
Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive
Environment Special Coating
a. Tnemec
1 st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Shield H2S (30 mils
D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0-40.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG/HPC/Polyspec
1 st Coat:
`Lnd (�i0at:
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0-9.0 mils D.F.T)
Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite
a. Tnemec
1 st Coat: Tnemec Series 61-5002 Tenemeliner (8.0-10.0 mils
D.F.T.)
2"a Coat: Tnemec Series 61-5001 Tenemeliner (8.0-10.0 mils
D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 st Coat: Semstone 800 primer
Finish Coats: Semstone 870
(reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details)
c. PPG/HPC/Polyspec
1 st Coat:
Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating)
a. Tnemec
PAINTING
09900-12 05/14/12
��
�
�
�
L� J
�
'
�
,
�
,
�
LJ
i
,
,
�
C�
�
2
4
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D.F.T)
D.F.T)
0
1St Coat Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar (14.0-20.0
2"d Coat Tnemec Series 46H-413 Tneme-Tar (14.0-20.0
Carboline
1St Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
2"d Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0-20.0 mils D.F.T)
c. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Tar-Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Tar-Guard (16-20 mils D.F.T)
mils
mils
C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically
excepted shall be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with
materials consistent with these Specifications. The Engineer shall select
which of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or
not, shall be used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be
made for this painting.
2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all
exposed conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases,
liquid and semi-liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe
coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating
accessories that are integral to be whole functional mechanical pipe and
electrical conduit system. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color
Coding Schedules attached at the end of this Section.
B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and
with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to,
but not including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the
flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe
system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the
same color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the
Paint and Color Coding Schedule.
C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from
the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted
between and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the
equipment.
2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES
A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each
pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids.
PAINTING
09900-13 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Titles shall be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be
located more than twenty (20) linear feet apart and shall also appear directly
adjacent to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side
of the valve regulator, flowcheck, strainer clean-out, and all pieces of
equipment.
B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title
locations shall be determined by the Engineer but, in generat, they shall be
placed where the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe
or covering where they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from
operating positions especially those adjacent to control valves.
C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible,
or at the uppermost broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more
than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be
numbered consecutively, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as
directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles
shall be composed and justified on the left hand side as follows: Pump No. 1.
D. Application of titles.
1. The color of the titles shall be black or white, as approved, to best
contrast with the color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil
applied.
2. Stencil te� is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the
Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line.
3. Letter sizes.
Outside Diameter
of Pipe or
Covering (inches)
3/4 to 1-1/4
1-1/2to2
2-1/2 to 6
8 to 10
More than 10
Size of Legend
Letters (inches)
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
2-1/2
3-1 /2
Equipment titles are to be two inches high.
4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or
covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2"a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow
head shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a." Maximum
"a" dimension shall be 6 inches.
PAINTING
09900-14
�
t
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
LJ
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
05/14/12
�
r
�
�
,
�
�
i
,
,
L�
�
�
�
'
�
'
�
�
I
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers
and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a
double-headed directional flow.
2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and
shop or field finished.
B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material
prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall
have been improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications
shall have been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white
metal and re-primed in accordance with these Specifications.
C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in
accordance with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in
accordance with these Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified
prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots
retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint
coats in the field.
E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect
the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other
cause.
F. A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a
field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat
does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar
nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed
by the Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality.
Submit to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is
compatible with the specified finish coat.
G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all
motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment
found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Section
09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given
PAINTING
09900-15 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
to thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks
before application of finish.
B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in
accordance with SSPC-SP-3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by
hand cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP-2. All pits and dents shall be
filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth
surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed
by use of approved solvents, wire brushing or sanding.
C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Report
unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of
dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall
have any laitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings
using captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface
tensile strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D-4541 standard. Testing is
required to confirm this strength using ASTM D-4541 standard and methods.
Surface profile shall be CSP-3 to CSP-6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete
Repair Institute) standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing
an anchor profile equal to 60-grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete
surfaces by mechanical (captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired
profile. Moisture Vapor Transmission should be 3 pounds or less per 1,000
square feet over 24 hour timeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride
test as per ASTM E-1907. Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM
F-2170, should confirm concrete RH results < 75%. Application of coatings
and linings should be made when out gassing of concrete is declining during
periods when surface temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface
thermometer to determine when surface temperatures are falling is required.
When in doubt, double priming may be required. All surface irregularities,
cracks, expansion joints and control joints should be properly addressed prior
to application of coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and
contaminated surface layers prior to application of coatings and linings.
�
E
Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence,
chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter.
All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting.
��J
�
L�
,
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
F. Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surface. All i
encrustations shall be removed.
G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed
locations. Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in
accordance with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is
inadvertently installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before
priming and painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall
PAINTING
09900-16 05/14/12
u
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
�
,
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
�J
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
have the gap between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component
polysulfide sealant to prevent rust stains.
H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated
surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All
nonferrous metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be
done in accordance with SSPC-SP-1, Solvent Cleaning.
I. Shop-Finished Surfaces: All shop-coated surfaces shall be protected from
damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas
immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop-coated
surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same
materials as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded,
discolored, or which require more than minor touch-up, in the opinion of the
Engineer, shall receive new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut
edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized
piping, electrical conduit and metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished
painted, shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with zinc dust-zinc oxide metal
primer.
J. Galvanized and Zinc-Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted
shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such
surfaces not to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per
SSPC-SP7 galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion.
K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one
shop coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum
pigmented asphalt paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC-SP7 of galvanized
surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General:
Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be
as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint
manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition
will be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted
areas on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility.
Finished repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee
specified for remainder of work.
42
43 2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in
44 strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all
45 painting shall be equal in quality to the approved samples. Finished
46 areas shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of
47 workmanship. Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the
PAINTING
09900-17 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not
satisfactory.
3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings
and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations.
Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from
contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion.
Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting,
protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates
and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or
spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas
where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other
work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is
accepted.
4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the
manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If
material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun,
the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with
undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the
manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun
than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness
shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On
masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture,
however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be
exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to
achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the
coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint.
5.
6.
Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All
paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred
while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added
to any paint.
Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be
employed where required.
B. Field Priming:
Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment
and other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not
require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be
painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the
weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the
painting schedule.
PAINTING
09900-18 05/14/12
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
C�
�
�
'
�
,
�
u
1
�
�
,
�
�
'
�
,
'J �
,
'
�
,
'
�
�
r
�
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C.
2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked-on enamel finish
or with a standard factory finish sh�l normally be field painted unless
the prefinished equipment is specifically cotor selected and unless the
finish has not been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces
that have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the
shop coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly
cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them
in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the
original finish.
Field Painting:
All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting.
2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting
shall be done when the temperature is below 50°F, in dust-laden air,
when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have
completely disappeared from the surface to be painted.
3. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily
distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the
approximate shade of the finished coat.
4. Finish surtaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities.
Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00
sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even
surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all
exterior trim shall be back-primed before installation.
5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly
manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry
paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by
structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as
quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be
inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.
6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
damage caused by overspray or drifting.
7. All surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting
is to be done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if
necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint
shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's
directions.
PAINTING
09900-19 05/14/12
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
E:�
'
�
Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surtaces of paint shall �
be cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer.
9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar
or asphalt-compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG/HPC
PITT-GUARDC� Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95-2328 or equal before
successive coats are applied per the schedule. Tnemec recommends
using 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline over tar, but a test patch must be run
initially to test the paint's compatibility with the tar. Carboline does not
recommend application of their coatings over tar. Instead, Carboline
recommends removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable
coatings based on the substrate and intended service application.
3.03 CLEANUP
A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste
material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the
painting remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from
and about the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly
specified.
B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed or
splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc.,
leaving the work ready for inspection.
C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in
closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon
completion of the work, the entire job left clean and acceptable to the
Engineer.
3.04 INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES
A. Inspection
Q
�
�
�
�
,
L�
�
,
'
1. All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to ,
assure proper performance and compliance with the specifications.
2. The Engineer shall be advised of the proper time to inspect surface
preparation, prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor
shall apply additional coats only after the previous coat has been
approved by the Engineer or Owner's representative.
Testing
The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing
equipment. Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order.
PAINTING
09900-20 05/14/12
r
�
�
�
�
C
1
,
'
�
,
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
�
�
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
3.05 PAINT
A.
Equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers'
instructions or as directed by the Engineer.
a. Sling Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings
shall be taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings
shall be taken at the start of the mornings work, mid day and
afternoon. Should environmental conditions change, additional
reading shall be taken to assure that coatings are being applied
under the conditions as outlined by the coatings manufacturer.
b. Surface Temperature Thermometer: Surface temperatures shall
be taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface
temperature shall be that as specified by the coatings
manufacturer.
c. Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X-Course Replica Tape
shall be employed to determine the surface profile of blasted
surfaces. Surface profile shall be as specified.
d. Dry Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading
shall be taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's
instructions) Type 1(magnetic) or Type 2(electromagnetic)
instrument. Dry film thickness reading will be taken and
recorded in the in a frequency and manner as dictated by the
Engineer.
e. Holidav Detection: After completion of immersion coating
systems on steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected
in accordance with ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection.
Holiday detector shall be a Tinker & Rasor Model M-1 or equal.
Areas found to have holidays shall be marked and repaired in
accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions. The
Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he might be
present to witness testing. The Contractor shall provide ladders,
rigging, etc. as necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check
paint thickness of each coat.
General Notes & Guidelines:
All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors
of specified equal manufacturers may be substituted with approval of
the Engineer.
2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be
assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral
part of the Contract.
PAINTING
09900-21
05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall
consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits,
through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids or
semi-liquids, including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe
coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any
operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional
mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems.
4
5.
�
The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows:
COLORS TNEMEC # COLORS TNEMEC #
White 11WH Tank Blue 25BL
Ivory 01 BR Blue 11 SF
Red 06SF D. Blue 78BL
L. Green 52GN L. Blue 26BL
Green 09SF Aqua 10GN
D. Green 08SF
COLORS TNEMEC # COLORS TNEMEC #
L. Brown 06BR Inter. Orange 05SF
Brown 84BR Orange 04SF
Bronze 86BR Tan 04BR
L. Gray 31 GR Yellow 03SF
M. Gray 33GR Safety Yellow 02SF
D. G ray 34G R
All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which
are potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF.
All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA
standards.
7. All in-line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color
shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system
shall be painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges
attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color.
Tanks shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve,
unless the tank is fiberglass or polyethylene.
Q
E
10
All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface.
Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish
Schedule, or as selected by the Engineer.
Control panels shall be factory finished.
3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION
PAINTING
09900-22
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
`J
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
05/14/12
�
'
�
�
,
,
�
r
1
'
�
,
'
�
,
r
�
C
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of
the project.
6. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary
date and shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating
system shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Should a failure occur to 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior,
the entire surface shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with these
specifications.
3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE
Piqinq and Legend
Backwash Waste
Blower Air
Coagulant
Compressed Air
Drains
Fuel
Potable Water
Process Sample
Reclaimed Effluent
Return Activated Sludge
Sodium Hypochlorite
Sprinkler
Thickened Sludge
Wastewater
Waste Activated Sludge
Color Bands
Light Brown
Green Orange
Aqua
Dark Green Red
Black
Red White
Dark Blue
Light Grey Red
Pantone Purple 522C
Brown
Yellow
Red
Dark Brown Orange
Dark Gray
W hite
Eauipment and Buildina Color
Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans Match System
Interior Equipment and Pumps (including factory finished) Match System
Structural Steel (Interior) White
Ceiling White
Cranes and Hoists Yellow
Ductwork Match Surface Mounted
Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment Match Surface Mounted
Valve and Gate Operators Match System
Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes Match Surface Mounted
Submerged Concrete Black
3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Items to be painted are as noted on the Drawings and/or called for in the
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09900-23
05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PAINTING
09900-24
�
�
,
�
�
�
r
�
�
r
�
r
�
�
r
�
�
r�
05/14/12
�
'
�
�
,
�-1
4j
'
'
,
'
r
'
,
LJ
�
'`J
,
�
�
�
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 11225
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install
replacement parts, perform repairs, and rehabilitate the existing clarifiers at
the locations shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
• Northeast Plant
� Northeast Plant
• Marshall Street Plant
• East Plant
Clarifiers 1 thru 4
Clarifiers 5 thru 8
Clarifiers 1 thru 4
East Clarifier and West Clarifier
B. Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4
The Work at the Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 consists of the
removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new
equipment including but not limited to:
• Center Column (Assumed to be 30-inch diameter)
• Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (75-foot diameter except #2)
• Drive Assembly
• Access Bridge Assembly
• Energy Dissipating Baffle System
• Dual Skimmer Assemblies
� A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly
• Scum Trough Piping
• All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware
• Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.60 - 2.25
• Assumed Design MLSS Avg Flow (MGD) = 2.25
Clarifiers No. 1 and No. 2 shall be rehabilitated first. Clarifiers No. 3 and No.
4 shall remain in service while No. 1 and No. 2 are being rehabilitated.
Clarifiers No. 1 and No. 2 shall remain in service while No. 3 and No. 4 are
being rehabilitated. At least one Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pump and
one Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) pump shall remain in service at all times.
The Contractor will be allowed to take all four Clarifiers Nos.1 through 4 out
of service for not more than 72 consecutive hours for replacement of the
telescoping valve seals in the RAS Wet Well and the RAS and WAS pump
suction valves.
CLARIFIERS
11225-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
;�
��
Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 5 through 8
The Work at the Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 5 through 8 consists of the
removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new
equipment including but not limited to:
� Center Column (30-inch diameter)
• Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (75-foot diameter)
• Drive Assembly
• Access Bridge Assembly
� Energy Dissipating Baffle System
• Dual Skimmer Assemblies
� A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly
• Scum Trough Piping
• All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware
• Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.60 - 2.25
• Assumed Design MLSS Avg Flow (MGD) = 2.25
At least two clarifiers, one Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pump and one
Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) pump shall remain in service at all times. The
Contractor will be allowed to take all four Clarifiers Nos.S through 8 out of
service for not more than 72 consecutive hours for replacement of the
telescoping valve seals in the RAS Wet Well and the RAS and WAS pump
suction valves.
Marshall Street Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4
The Work at the Marshall Street Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 consists of
the removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new
equipment including but not limited to:
� Center Column (30-inch diameter)
• Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (100-foot diameter)
� Drive Assembly
� Access Bridge Assembly
• Energy Dissipating Baffle System
• Dual Skimmer Assemblies
� A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly
• Scum Trough Piping
• All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware
� Single Sludge Section Header
• Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.5 - 3.75
• Design RAS Flow Avg (MGD) = 1.25
• Design MLSS Flow Range (MGD) = 1.5 - 10
• Design MLSS Flow Avg (MGD) = 3.75
CLARIFIERS
11225-2
'
�
,
'
�
,
�
,
�
r
'
'
,
�
r
'
�
�
05/14/12
�
u
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
`
�_
LJ
,
'
�
�i
�J
LJ
'
CJ
LJ
�
'
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
E
No. 2 Clarifier shall be rehabilitated first. A minimum of three clarifiers shall
remain in service at all times.
East Plant, East and West Clarifiers
The Work at the East Plant, East and West Clarifiers consists of the removal
of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new equipment
including but not limited to:
• Center Column (Sandblast and Repaint) (30-inch diameter)
• Single Skimmer Arm and Blade Assembly (Replace) (100-foot
diameter)
• Remainder of Rotating Mechanism (Sandblast and Repaint)
• Drive (Replace)
• West Clarifier Access Bridge Assembly (Replace)
• East Access Bridge Assembly (Sandblast and Repaint Center Platform
� Influent Baffle Well (Sandblast and Repaint)
• Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly (Replace)
• All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors, and Hardware (Replace)
• Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.5 - 2.5
• Design RAS Flow Avg (MGD) = 1.9
• Design MLSS Flow Range (MGD) - 1.5 - 8.75
• Design MLSS Flow Avg (MGD) = 2.5
The East Clarifier shall be rehabilitated first. A minimum of one clarifier shall
remain in service at all times.
F. Existing equipment shall be removed and dismantled or demolished and
disposed of as necessary for the repairs and replacements in accordance with
the requirements specified herein.
G. The Contractor shall field verify all existing clarifier dimensions including basin
floor, and all relative elevations.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment for
use with the activated sludge waste treatment process and shall be designed
for use in center feed type circular clarifiers with peripheral weirs and troughs.
All clarifiers furnished under this project shall be of the same design in all
aspects.
B. Clarifiers with suction header type sludge collection and removal mechanisms
are approved for this project as described in Section 2.09. Clarifiers that use
scraper type mechanisms for sludge collection and removal are not
CLARIFIERS
11225-3 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C
acceptable and will not be approved, nor will clarifiers that use multiple,
individual suction riser pipes or stepped-type mechanisms.
Control of sludge withdrawal will be via telescoping valves, one dedicated to
each clarifier, located external of the basin.
D. Clarifier drives shall be of cast iron construction and shall be equipped with
horizontal or vertical speed reduction units with cast iron housings as
described in Sections 2.04 and 2.05. Clarifier drives using hydraulic pressure
to produce rotational force or hydraulic drives are not acceptable. Clarifier
drives constructed of fabricated steel are not acceptable.
E
E
F.
Existing Clarifier Floor, Influent Piping, RAS Piping and Drain Piping
The existing clarifiers are equipped with drain piping connected to
sumps located in the floor near the center column (except the clarifiers
at the Marshall Street plant).
,
'
,
'
�
,
,
�
2. According to plant staff, there are no drains in the Marshall Street
clarifiers. '
3. All of the existing drains must remain functional, and the equipment
furnished shall provide for continued operation of the drains after the
project has been completed.
4. The Contractor shall modify the floor, the existing drain sump, the
existing drain piping, the existing RAS pipe, and the existing influent
pipe in all clarifiers as necessary to accommodate the equipment
furnished.
Clarifier 2 at the Northeast Plant
Clarifier 2 at the Northeast Plant has a side wall feature not found in
any of the other clarifiers. The interior of the perimeter circular clarifier
wall has been thickened. This thickened wall extends upwards from
the floor approximately 5 feet and inwards from the original wall
approximately 6-8 inches. The thickened wall appears to have been
added after the clarifier was originally constructed and no drawings of
the thickened wall have been located. Due to this feature, the radius of
Clarifier #2 rotating mechanism below the water surface will be 6"-8"
(nominal) less than the other 75-foot diameter clarifiers. The
Contractor shall field verify all existing clarifier dimensions including
basin diameter at the floor, center of tank to center of the outer bridge
supports, and all relative elevations.
Clarifier Equipment
CLARIFIERS
11225-4
r
'
LJ
�
'
�J
,
,
�
05/14/12
,
'
'
,
!J
'
�J
'
,
CJ
,
,
�
,
�
,
i
! _J
�
LJ
1
3
4
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2,
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Except as noted on the Drawings, new clarifier equipment shall include:
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
Drive mechanism complete with reducer, motor, and overload trip
device;
Sludge removal equipment including supports, center cage, truss arm,
and sludge collection device;
Influent energy dissipating system and supports;
Influent flocculating well and supports;
Center support column, adapter if required, anchor bolt template, and
grout shield;
Access bridge and platform including hand railings, kick plates, and
walkway surface as shown on the Drawings;
Dual rotating surface skimmer assemblies with pivoted skimmers
except at the East Plant which shall have a single skimmer arm.
One scum trough and submerged shelf (Beach);
All bolts, drill-in anchors, and hardware of Type 316 stainless steel;
and,
All other appurtenances shown on the Drawings or as required for a
completely operational system.
G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for field verifying all existing clarifier
tank and equipment dimensions and elevations.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All clarifier equipment described herein shall be furnished by a Manufacturer
regularly engaged in the design, manufacture and production of the type of
equipment specified herein. At the time of bidding, the Manufacturer's
experience shall include not less than 10 (ten) ditferent installation locations
(facilities) where clarifiers that incorporate sludge removal mechanisms and
influent baffle systems as specified herein in tanks of the same or larger
diameter as those required for this project, have been in satisfactory
operation for not less than five (5) years. The following manufacturers are
approved for this project: Siemens, Ovivo, WesTech, Walker and Hi-Tech.
The specific attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that this
approval does not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and installing
equipment and performing all work in strict compliance with the requirements
of this specification Section 11225.
B. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, delivered and installed in
accordance with the best practices and methods. Each component and
ancillary equipment item furnished under this specification shall be new and
unused.
C. All clarifier equipment shall be designed and the drawings sealed by a
registered professional engineer who is experienced with the manufacturer's
CLARIFIERS
11225-5 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
clarifier design. The equipment shall be designed, fabricated and installed in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Six (6) copies of all materials required to establish compliance with these
Specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the
General Conditions and the General Requirements. Submittals shall include
at least the following:
�
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Certified shop drawings showing all important details of construction,
dimensions, minimum required spacing, and anchor bolt locations.
Complete installation instructions including anchor bolt layout, piping
details and mechanical connections.
Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment.
Information required by Section 01340.
The total weight of the equipment, including the weight of the single
largest item or component.
A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts.
Electrical power and control data covering the following details:
a. Approximate enclosure dimensions including height, width, and
depth, maximum wire size (main terminal block or disconnect
device.)
b. A control schematic diagram shall be provided that shows power
and control circuits in sufficient detail to evaluate the control
system design. Control schematic shall be color coded.
8. Performance data covering all internal mechanical components. The
submittal shall contain any additional information necessary for the
Engineer to determine that the proposed equipment meets the
specified requirements.
Descriptive Information:
1. Performance data demonstrating how the proposed design removes
sludge from the entire tank bottom. Data shall be from an existing
clarifier operating under the following field conditions:
a. Actual plant operation;
CLARIFIERS
11225-6
'
,
�
,
�►
�
,
'
,
r
,
'
�
�'
�
�
�
�
i
�
'
,
05/14/12
,
'
,
'
'
L�
LJ
'
,
,
�1
�
LJ
i�
�
�
�
'
,
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
b. Similar diameter, side water depth, and floor slope;
c. Return sludge concentrations not less than 5,000 mg/I;
d. Return sludge flow range from 50% to 150% of the influent flow
for each clarifier;
e. Maximum velocity in the suction header shall not exceed 3.0 to
4.5 fps; and,
f. Maximum head loss shall not exceed 12-inches in the suction
header.
2. In lieu of performance data from actual operating clarifiers, complete
design, input, and output information from an industry specific clarifier
computer modeling program may be submitted for approval by the
Engineer.
3. Complete test procedure for field testing the sludge collector
mechanism for the AGMA-rated torques specified.
4. Details of construction showing:
a. Type of material used for each component;
b. Dimensions, thicknesses, and weights of each component;
c. Size, shape, and cross-section of header if so equipped;
d. Size, shape, and location of inlet openings; and,
e. All manifold seals.
5. Complete assembly drawing of collector components giving type of
material, dimensions and thicknesses of each element.
6. General arrangement of drive unit verifying AGMA ratings, overload
protection, construction, housing material and horsepower. Provide the
design parameters used per AGMA 6034-B92 and the resulting values
per AGMA 2001-D04.
7. Weight of each complete collector, verified by the Contractor with
substantiating copy to the Engineer as the material is received on the
job site.
1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE AND TRAINING MANUALS
A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Training Manuals shall be prepared
for each set of clarifiers as follows:
1. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall have dedicated Manuals
2. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 5 thru 8 shall have dedicated Manuals
3. Marshall Street Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall have dedicated Manuals
4. No new Manuals are required for the East Plant clarifiers
CLARIFIERS
11225-7
05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Copies of the operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the
Engineer in accordance with Section 01730 and 01820. The instructions shall
be prepared specifically for each set of clarifiers as identified above and shall
include all required drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, and other
materials required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar
with such equipment.
,
'
,
,
C. Each Operating and Maintenance Manual shall contain a complete set of the ,
approved shop drawings for each piece of equipment provided.
D. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of the proper
equipment operation and maintenance shall be provided for a minimum of (1)
day to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper
operation and maintenance of the equipment. This work may be conducted
in conjunction with the inspection of installation and the test run as provided
under PART 3 of this Specification. If there are difficulties in operation of the
equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service
shall be provided at no cost to the Owner.
1.07 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
A. The Manufacturer's recommended spare parts shall be furnished as required
for scheduled maintenance for a period of one (1) year following Substantial
Completion.
B. At minimum, the following shall be provided as spare parts:
• Twelve (12) shear pins of the same rating as installed in the clarifier drive.
• Two (2) secondary gear-motor assemblies or gearbox/motor combinations,
as applicable.
• One set of main gear bearings and replaceable bearing races for each
drive.
� Four (4) chain and sprocket assemblies as applicable.
• Four scum doctor blades and or wiper blades
• Four complete sets of underwater gaskets, seals, squeegees, and
neoprene blades and including all mounting hardware.
C. All tools and spare parts shall be properly packed and protected for long
storage and placed in containers clearly identified in indelible markings as to
contents.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide minimum one (1) year equipment warranty in accordance with Section
01740 of these Specifications or as required for individual pieces of equipment
as noted.
CLARIFIERS
11225-8 05/14/12
,
,
�
CJ
�
CJ
,
��
J
�
lJ
'
�
i
'
'
�
'
,
'
1
,
'
,
'
'
�
,
'
�
,
,
i
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. These Specifications call attention to certain features, but do not purport to
cover all details of construction of the equipment. They are, however,
intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation and field testing of all
materials, equipment and apparatus, as required. Any additional auxiliary
equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not
mentioned in these Specifications, nor shown on the Drawings, shall be
furnished and installed.
B. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard
equipment of proven ability and as manufactured by reputable concerns
having experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment
furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with
best practice and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as
shown on the Drawings.
C. All the rotating sludge collection equipment, including the sludge collection
suction header, trusses, sludge manifold, influent flocculation well and center
cage but excluding the skimmer A-frame, and center column, bridge and drive
unit, shall be fabricated using fixtures or jigs, assembled in the Manufacturer's
shop to insure proper fitting of parts, then match-marked for erection, and
disassembled for shipment. The assembled components shall be available
for inspection by the Engineer prior to disassembly. The Manufacturer shall
provide 21 days notification to the Engineer to schedule the inspection.
D. All components supplied shall conform to the size requirements as set forth on
the Drawings, to the requirements included in this Specification, and to the
overall design parameters.
2.02 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
I_1
�
C.
Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36.
Atl steel parts shall have a minimum thickness of'/a-inch.
Structural support members shall be shop welded or a field bolted assembly.
Field welding will not be permitted on structural members.
D. All steel structural components shall be designed so that stresses developed
do not exceed allowable stresses, as defined by current AISC standards when
designed for 200% of the specified AGMA-rated torque.
CLARIFIERS
11225-9 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
,
�
E. Panel lengths and member sizes shall be selected, such that slenderness
ratios do not exceed 200 for compression and 240 for tension. For strength, ,
the controlling member force shall be used to determine member size.
F. Maximum deflection in a span under combined live and dead loads shall not ,
exceed V360.
2.03 DRIVE MECHANISM
A. The drive mechanisms shall be assemblies consisting of a primary gear
reduction unit, an intermediate gear reduction unit, and final reduction unit
with a pinion and internal spur gear mounted in a cast iron or ductile iron
turntable base, completely factory assembled and finish painted. Fabricated
steel housings and exposed gearing are unacceptable and will not be
considered. The primary and secondary reduction units shall have horizontal
shafts as defined in Section 2.04 or vertical shafts as defined in Section 2.05
herein. Drive design criteria shall be as listed below.
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Minimum internal gear pitch diameter:
Minimum ball race diameter:
Motor horsepower:
AGMA rated torque:
Speed:
Overturning Moment (Vertical Drives)
2.04 HORIZONTAL SHAFT DRIVES
A. Horizontal Shaft Reduction Units
1.
2
�
38 - inches
42 - inches
1/2 - HP
21,900 ft-Ibs
0.04 RPM
305,700 ft-Ibs
The drive unit shall be designed and manufactured by the clarifier
equipment Manufacturer.
All gearing shall be enclosed in gray cast iron ASTM A-48 Class 40B
housings.
The internal primary gear shall be either a one piece or split design
4. All gearing shall be designed in accordance with the latest AGMA
standards for both strength and durability, based on 24-hour
continuous, uniform load duty and 20-year design life at the specified
output speed. Spur gearing shall be designed in accordance with
AGMA Standard 2001-D04 "Fundamental Rating Factors and
Calculation Methods for involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth". Worm
gearing shall be designed in accordance with AGMA Standard 6034-
B92 (February 1992) "Practice for Enclosed Cylindrical Worm Gear
Speed Reducers and Gearmotors" with a minimum 1.25 service factor.
The rated torque of the drive shall be the lowest value computed for the
CLARIFIERS
11225-10 05/14/12
u
'
�J
,
,
�
'
,
��
,
r
,
,
'
�
��
�
'
'
,
,
,
'
'
'
,
'
�J
��
�
�
C�
�
L
'
,
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
L�
worm gear set, spur gear and pinion for strength and durability.
Planetary and cycloidal gearing not covered by AGMA standards shall
not be used in Horizontal shaft drives.
5. All bearings shall be designed for a minimum B-10 life of 200,000 hours
of continuous duty at the output speed specified. Design and rating of
all other bearings, including pinion and thrust bearings, shall be based
on a B-10 life of not less than 100,000 hours of continuous duty.
6. The turntable base shall have an annular raceway to contain ball
bearings upon which the internal gear rotates. The ball race shall
ensure a low unit ball load, long life and stability, without the necessity
of guide shoes or steady bearings. The balls shall be alloy steel and
shall bear vertically and horizontally on four (4) renewable, specially
hardened (38-42 Rockwell C) steel liner strips force fitted (pins or cap
screws not permitted) into the turntable base and internal gear. The
liner strips shall be 3/8-inch thick x 3/4-inch wide. Drives with bearing
races smaller and or thinner than those noted will require that the entire
final drive assembly be warranted for (5) five years. The internal gear,
pinion and ball race shall run in an oil bath and be protected by a felt
seal and steel dust shield. .
7. The turntable base shall be bolted to the center column and be
designed to support the internal gear along with the rotating
mechanism and the access bridge. An oil filling and level pipe, along
with a drain plug and sight gauge, shall be furnished as part of this unit.
A pipe shall be attached to the bottom of the turntable for condensate
removal. The oil piping shall terminate within the center of the base for
easy access.
8. For one-piece solid gear designs, the turntable assembly shall be so
designed that the one-piece internai gear, bearings, and bearing races
are removable when the access bridge is removed.
Primary Reduction Unit
1.
2.
Provide a commercially available gear reducer or gear motor in a cast
housing.
All bearings shall be anti-friction type running in oil.
3. The motor shall
for starting and
overloading.
be totally enclosed, ball bearing type, of ample power
continuously operating the drive mechanism without
4. The motor shall conform to NEMA standards and be suitable for
operation on 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz current.
CLARIFIERS
11225-11 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
C.
U
5. A Primary reduction unit shall drive the intermediate reduction unit by a
close coupled drive or through a chain and sprocket arrangement with
#80L self-lubricating chain and stainless steel OSHA approved
removable chain guard.
6. Provide proper chain tension by an adjustable steel base mounted on
the intermediate reduction unit. The tension shall be adjusted
according to the Manufacturer's recommendations.
Intermediate Reduction Unit
1. Provide worm gear type intermediate reduction units with grease and
oil lubricated anti-friction type bearings in a cast or ductile iron housing
securely bolted on the machined top face of the final reduction casting.
Worm and shaft shall be a two-piece assembly for ease of
maintenance. Drives with one-piece worm and shaft assemblies will
require that the intermediate and final drive assemblies be warranted
for (5) five years.
2. The unit shall be mounted on a machined face on the top of the final
reduction unit. Align and maintain accurate centers with the final
reduction gearing. Swivel base mounting of the intermediate unit are
not acceptable.
3. Mount an electro-mechanical overload device on the thrust end of the
intermediate worm pinion shaft. The overload device shall be totally
enclosed in an epoxy coated cast aluminum, cast iron, or ductile iron
housing with a NEMA 4X rating. The overload device shall be
adjustable and sense end thrust or torque, be integrated into the drive
motor control circuit, and interrupt power to the motor.
�
L
'
'
,
'
,
,
�
�
�
�
4. A visual dial-type torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so it �
may be read from the walkway.
5. Microswitches shall be factory set to: (1) sound an alarm when the
load on the mechanism reaches 100% of the AGMA rated torque
rating; and (2) deactivate the motor when the load reaches 120% of the
AGMA rated torque.
u
,
6. Provide a shear pin device, set for 130% of the AGMA rated torque �
mounted on the drive unit.
Final Reduction Unit
CLARIFIERS
11225-12
,
,
05/14/12
i
i
���
�
'
'
�
�
'
'
�
'
'
'
,
i
�
'
,
'
'
,
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. Provide internal, full depth involute tooth design, ductile iron spur gear
driven by a heat treated steel pinion from the slow speed shaft of the
intermediate reduction unit.
2. Provide bearings at top and bottom of pinion to ensure complete tooth
contact between mating surfaces. Pinion and pinion shaft shall be
furnished as a one-piece or two-piece assembly.
3. Provide cast or ductile iron turntable base with annular raceway to
contain balls upon which the internal gear rotates. The ball race shall
ensure low unit ball load, long life and stability without the use of
submerged guide shoes, bumpers or steady bearings.
4. Provide an internal gear of either a one-piece or split design such that
the gear is replaceable when the access bridge is removed. For two-
piece (split) gear designs the bearings and bearing races shall be
replaceable without removing the bridge.
5.
0
7.
Internal gear, pinion and balls to run in an oil bath and be protected by
a felt seal and vertical steel dust shield.
Provide oil filling and level pipe along with a drain plug and sight gauge.
Turntable base shall be bolted to the center column and be designed to
support the bridge, internal gear and rotating mechanism.
8. The internal final gear shall be driven by a heat-treated steel pinion
from the slow speed shaft of the intermediate gear reduction unit. The
internal gear shall be of ductile iron and shall be designed to support
the center cage and collector.
2.05 VERTICAL SHAFT DRIVES
A. Vertical Shaft Reduction Units
1. The drive unit shall be designed and manufactured by the clarifier
equipment Manufacturer to ensure unit responsibility. The drive unit
shall be designed for the torque value and shall turn the mechanism at
the speed specified in Section 2.03.
2. The main bearing shall be designed for the total rotating mechanism
loads with a minimum L-10 life of 876,000 hours. The drive unit shall
be capable of producing and withstanding the peak momentary torque
while starting.
3. The drive main gear shall be designed to a minimum AGMA 6 rating
when rated in accordance with the latest AGMA standard. Gear teeth
CLARIFIERS
11225-13 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
C.
shall be designed for proper load distribution and sharing. The main
bearing shall be capable of withstanding the overturning moment
without the aid of any underwater guides or bearings to ensure correct
tooth contact for AGMA rating of the main gear.
4. All spur gearing shall be designed to the latest AGMA spur gear
standard for strength and surface durability, based on a life of B-10
200,000 hours, continuous duty at the specified output speed. The
design running torque rating of the drive gearing shall be based on the
smaller of the strength and durability values determined from the above
AGMA standard.
5. All components of the drive shall be direct coupled.
Physical Characteristics
1. The drive unit shall consist of a solid internal main spur gear, bearing
turntable, pinion, secondary speed reducer, support base, and drive
unit bearing.
2. The drive shall be mounted on the center column and support the
entire rotating load of the mechanism.
3. The main internal gear shall be forged of alloy hardened steel. The
pinion shall be heat treated alloy steel. All speed reducers shall be fully
enclosed and running in grease.
i
0
�
'
r-,
'I
�
�
�
'
�
'
�--,
�I�
„
4. The drive housing shall be cast iron or ductile iron. Lubricant and dust
shields shall be provided. '
5. The drive bearing shall include a forged steel precision gear/bearing
set, with fully contoured raceways hardened to a minimum 58-60 Rc '
and protected by a neoprene seal.
6. The drive shall be designed so that the balls and nylon spacers can be '
replaced without removing the access walkway.
7. The main gear to pinion gear mesh shall be grease lubricated.
Lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible. Continuous condensate
drains shall be provided in the main gear housing.
Overload Protection
1. An overload device shall be provided in a stainless steel, weatherproof
enclosure. The device shall be actuated by torque generated from the
main drive, which shall operate two independently adjustable, factory
CLARIFIERS
11225-14 05/14/12
�
'
�
�
,
�
�i
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
i
�
,
'
�
�
�
ll
,
'
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
E.
calibrated overload switches. The alarm switch shall be set at 100
percent of running torque and the motor cutout switch shall be set at
120 percent of the running torque.
2. A visual torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so that it can be
read from the walkway. It shall be calibrated from 0 to 160 percent of
design AGMA torque rating.
Turntable
1. The turntable base shall be cast iron or ductile iron and have an
annular bearing raceway upon which the rotating assembly rests. It
shall have a maximum allowable deflection in accordance with the
bearing specifications. The allowable modulus of elasticity shall be a
minimum of 29 x 106 psi.
2. The center cage shall be fastened to and supported from the gear
casing.
3. Ball bearings shall be of high carbon chrome alloy 52100 steel running
in fully contoured races, as part of a precision gear/bearing set. The
balls shall be grease lubricated and protected by elastomer seals.
Speed Reducing Unit:
1. The speed reducing unit shall consist of cycloidal, helical, or planetary
speed reducers directfy connected to a motor without the use of chains
or v-belts, and shall be keyed to the pinion.
2. The main ring gear of cycloidal drives shall be made of high carbon
chromium bearing steel and be fixed to the drive casing. An eccentric
bearing on the high speed shaft shall roll cycloidal discs of the same
material around the internal circumference of this main ring gear. The
lobes of the cycloid disc shall engage successively with pins in the fixed
ring gear. The movement of the cycloid discs shall be transmitted then
by pins to the low speed shaft.
3. The speed reducer efficiency shall be a minimum of 90% per reduction
stage.
4. The speed reducer helical or planetary gearing shall be manufactured
to AGMA standards and shall provide at least 95% power transmission
efficiency per stage. The speed reducer shall have a minimum service
factor of 1.25 based on the output torque rating of the drive.
5. The reducers shall be fitted with radial and thrust bearings of proper
size for all mechanism loads and be grease lubricated.
CLARIFIERS
11225-15 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
�
�
L�
The speed reducer shall be reversible to release any stored energy as '
the result of an over torque condition.
2.06 CENTER COLUMN
A. The center column shall be a cylindrical steel pipe and shall support the drive,
one end of the access bridge, and all rotating components. The center
column shall also provide a pathway for flow to enter the clarifier.
B. The top of the center column shall accept the drive unit. The center column
shall be set plumb, and shall be at the center of the diameter of the clarifier
structu re.
C. The center column shall be fabricated of 1/4-inch thick (minimum) steel plate
and shall be anchored to the concrete base with a minimum of eight (8) 1-inch
diameter anchor bolts. The center pier base plate will be double punched to
allow the use of existing anchors if practical, or if not, will allow the installation
of new drill-in anchors. The center column shall be hot dip galvanized after
fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel.
'
�
,
'
r-,
��'�
�
LJ
D. The Manufacturer shall provide a steel template to accurately locate the
anchor bolts. �
E. The center column shall serve as an influent pipe and shall have a minimum
of three (3) overtlow areas at its upper end to diffuse flow into the influent well.
The combined total of the three areas shall be a minimum of 175% of the
center column cross sectional area. The diameter of the new center column
shall be 30 inches.
2.07 INFLUENT FLOCCULATION WELL
A. The influent flocculation well shall be fabricated of 3/16-inch thick (minimum)
steel plate sections with bolted connections and 1/4-inch thick (minimum)
structural steel trim angles top and bottom for shape and rigidity. The influent
well shall be supported from the drive cage.
B. The new influent flocculation well shall be sized by the manufacturer for the
design flow rates.. However, the flocculation well shall be a minimum of 14'-9"
diameter by 6' deep for all the 75-foot diameter clarifiers and a minimum of
19'-9" diameter by 6' deep for all the 100-foot diameter clarifiers.
C.
U7
The influent flocculation well and all supports shall be hot dip galvanized after
fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel.
The influent flocculation wells shall be of adequate size to diffuse the flow into
the tank at a uniform flow through velocity. Ports shall be cut into the influent
CLARIFIERS
11225-16 05/14/12
'
'
'
�
'
'
L__1
,
'
'
'
�
ul
'
�
'
'
C
�_J
1
,
'
'
'
'
C
�
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2.08
well to permit the escape of entrapped scum. The ports shall have adjustable
sized openings and contain baffles to prevent short circuiting to the effluent
weir.
INFLUENT ENERGY DISSIPATION SYSTEM
A. An energy dispersion system shall be located between the center column and
the influent flocculation well. The energy dispersion system shall be designed
to dissipate energy from the incoming flow by discharging the flow through
nozzles or ports in a counter clockwise, tangential direction or by decreasing
the velocity of the stream and forcing the influent to change direction multiple
times between the center column and the influent feed well.
B. The energy dissipation system shall promote effective mixing and tapered
flocculation within the influent well.
C. The energy dissipation system shall be fabricated from a minimum 3/16-inch
thick steel plate. The system shall be supported from the drive cage and
influent well support beams.
❑�
E.
The energy dissipation system and supports shall be hot dip galvanized after
fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel.
The Manufacturer shall provide hydraulic calculations showing dimensional
characteristics, port area, velocity, headloss, and mixing intensity.
2.09 SLUDGE COLLECTION SUCTION HEADER
A. The sludge collector mechanism shall utilize a center drive mounted on a
stationary center support pier. A welded structural steel cage attached to the
drive shall support and rotate a single sludge suction header device.
B. The sludge suction header shall be located parallel to the tank bottom and
shall have a series of inlet orifices arranged such that in a single revolution of
the header the entire tank bottom is swept clean. The header shall
continuously remove settled sludge proportionally, resulting in a uniform
withdrawal over the entire radius of the tank. The header shall be
hydraulically designed to remove larger volumes of sludge at greater
distances from the tank center.
C. The mechanism shall collect the sludge from the tank bottom and carry it
through the suction header to the center outlet, the removal being
accomplished by hydrostatic pressure. Design movement through the header
shall be at a near-constant velocity.
D. The sludge suction header shall be fabricated of 1/4-inch thick steel plate and
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Header cross section shall be rectangular
CLARIFIERS
11225-17 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
in shape and shall taper in size from a maximum near the tank center to a
minimum at the outer end, to provide uniform sludge draw-off velocities
throughout.
E. The longitudinal cross-sectional axis of the headers shall be mounted at an
angle of 45° with the tank bottom to physically trap sludge for maximum solids
concentration.
F. A 2-inch flexible neoprene squeegee fluidizing blade shall be installed as an
integral part of the header to direct the sludge into the area of influence of the
orifices with minimum sludge agitation. The squeegee shall have slotted
holes providing 1-inch vertical adjustment.
G. At the inner end of each header, a flange shall be provided for bolting to the
center manifold. The header shall have a center scraper of'/a-inch steel plate
with a neoprene blade to clean the tank bottom around the manifold directing
the sludge to the first orifice.
H. At regular intervals, not to exceed 30-inches, the Manufacturer shall size and
space inlet orifices varying in size from a minimum diameter near the tank
center to a maximum at the outer end.
I. The design of each orifice shall be proportionate to the volume of sludge
withdrawn and the design of the orifices and header shall be such as to insure
hydraulic balance in the tank and uniform sludge withdrawal from the entire
tank bottom at all flows.
J. The suction header shall be fitted with a flange and bolted to a mating flange
on the center manifold. The suction header shall be supported from the
center cage and by one of the truss arms. The entire suction header
assembly shall be vertically adjustable using jack-bolts, steel tie-bars, or
turnbuckles.
K. The center manifold shall be located at the base of the center column and
rotate around the stationary center column. The center manifold shall be
supported by the steel cage, connected to the suction header, form a ring
around the center column, receive sludge from the suction header and deliver
sludge to the sludge outlet pipe located in the floor of the clarifier.
L. The center manifold shall be fitted with two sealing rings and two seals
designed to ensure only sludge from the suction header enters the center
manifold. A bottom plate shall be securely anchored to the concrete floor and
grouted in place after proper aligning
M. Two rotating truss arms located 180 degrees apart shall be provided and fitted
to support the two rotating skimmer assemblies. One of the truss arms shall
also support the suction header.
CLARIFIERS
11225-18 05/14/12
i�
'
'
'
u
'
t
'
��
'
,
,
C
'
,
,
'
'�
'
'
'
1
,
�
u
'
�
'
'
'
1
,
,
,
,
'
'
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
N. The truss arms shall be constructed of '/a-inch minimum thickness members
pinned at the base and connected to the center cage through adjustable steel
tie-bars or turnbuckles.
O. Steel plate counterweights, not exceeding 50-pounds each, shall be installed
as necessary on the truss arm providing balance for the entire rotating
assembly.
P. For the Northeast WRF, Clarifiers 1 thru 4, the existing concrete floor, the
influent piping, the drain piping, and the drain sump shall be modified as
necessary by the Contractor to accommodate the equipment provided. No
modifications are required to those items for any other Clarifiers.
Q. If so equipped, the existing clarifier drain piping and drain sump shall be
modified or relocated as necessary and shall remain fully functional.
R. No field welding will be permitted on equipment supplied by the Manufacturer
except for spot welds to lock in the skimmer supports or as approved by the
Engineer. Field welding may be required to modify the sludge and influent
pipes below the level of the existing floor.
2.10 CENTER CAGE
A. Each new center cage shall be of an all-welded construction made up of
structural steel members having a minimum thickness of '/a-inch. The center
cage shall be hung under the drive, rotate continuously, and support all
rotating equipment.
:
C
All center cages shall be welded structural angle steel construction and shall
be provided by the clarifier manufacturer.
The entire center cage assembly shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel.
2.11 ACCESS BRIDGES and PLATFORMS
A. All bridges shall be welded structural steel access bridges of wide flange
beam construction and shall be provided by the Manufacturer.
B. The access bridge shall extend from the tank wall to the center column with a
platform extension provided for 360 degree access around the drive.
Aluminum grating and dielectric gaskets shall be used on the access bridge(s)
and platform.
C. All ferrous components of the bridge shall be hot dip galvanized after
fabrication. All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
CLARIFIERS
11225-19 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D. The bridge shall be designed to support, in addition to
load of 50 pounds per square foot (psf), with a deflection
of the span.
�
,
the dead load, a live ,
not exceeding 1/360
E. The platform shall be a minimum 9-foot x 8-foot rectangular extension from
the access bridge to provide working clearance around the drive.
F. A two-rail handrail systems consisting of not less than 1-1/2-inch diameter,
Schedule 40 aluminum pipe for the rails and vertical posts, and a 3/16-inch
thick x 4-inch high aluminum toe plate, shall be furnished for both sides of the
access bridge(s), platform. Handrails shall meet the requirements of Section
05500.
G. At the Northeast Plant and at Marshall Street, the Contractor shall remove the
existing sludge blanket level detector equipment from each of the bridges.
After the new clarifier equipment has been installed and tested, the Contractor
shall re-install the existing sludge blanket level detector equipment on each
bridge using new conduit, wire and hardware. The existing sludge blanket
detection probe equipment shall be re-connected to the actual instrument to
provide a complete and operational system.
H. At the East Plant the Contractor shall furnish and install a new sludge blanket
level detection system on each clarifier. The existing probe mounting
brackets, probes, cable, and instrument are to be removed and replaced with
new mounting brackets, new probes, new cable, a new instrument and new
conduit and hardware as specified. The new system shall be re-connected to
the existing plant SCADA system in the same fashion as the existing system
is connected.
2.12 SCUM REMOVAL EQUIPMENT
A. A"full radius" surface skimmer, consisting of a scum blade, hinged skimmer,
scum trough, and scum beach shall be provided. All scum removal equipment
shall be fabricated of 304 stainless steel. The scum beach and trough
supports shall also be 304 stainless steel. All springs, pivot points, threaded
fasteners, and anchors shall be 316 stainless steel.
'
'
I��
'
�
'
'
,
'
,
�
B. Scum removal equipment shall be installed on each clarifier as generally '
described below:
2.
Northeast Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall be equipped with
skimmers and a single 4-foot scum beach, submerged
trough assembly similar to the existing configuration.
Northeast Plant Clarifiers 5 thru 8 shatl be equipped with
skimmers and a single 4-foot scum beach, submerged
trough assembly similar to the existing configuration.
CLARIFIERS
11225-20
dual scum '
shetf, and
dual scum '
shelf, and
'
05/14/12
'
'
�
,
'
'
'
�
'
,
,
L�
'
'
,
,
�
�
'
'
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
�
n
3. Marshall Street Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall be equipped with dual
skimmers and a single 4-foot scum beach, submerged shell
trough assembly similar to the existing configuration.
4. The East Plant shall be equipped with a single scum skimmer
single 6-foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and trough assembl
single skimmer is similar to the existing configuration while the
beach and trough assembly is an upsize from the existing.
Scum Blade, Skimmer, And Hinged Wiper Assembly
scu m
, and
and a
y. The
6-foot
The scum blade shall extend from the influent feed baffle to the scum
baffle and shall be supported from below by a rotating sludge scraper
or sludge suction header arm.
2. The skimmer assembly shall be mounted on the outer end of the scum
blade to form a pocket for trapping the scum. The skimmer assembly
shall insure continual contact and proper alignment between the hinged
wiper, the scum baffle, and the scum beach plate and trough assembly.
3. The hinged wiper shall have a wearing strip on its outer end, which
contacts the scum baffle and a neoprene strip on its lower and inner
edge. The scum shall be trapped as the wiper meets the scum beach
plate ramp and is raised up the ramp and discharged into the scum
trough.
4. Skimmers that rely on support from the scum baffle are not acceptable.
Scum Beach Plate and Scum Trough
The scum beach plate and trough assembly shall be supported with
304 stainless steel structural elements attached to the wall.
2. The scum trough and beach plate shall be fabricated of �/a-inch thick
304 stainless steel plate, adequately supported from the tank wall. The
scum trough width shall be as specified in 2.13 B. All scum beach
plate and trough assemblies shall be designed to integrate with the
scum baffle and consist of a beach plate, inner radius baffle, 6-inch
discharge pipe and flushing device.
3. The inner edge of the scum trough shall be furnished with a 4-foot long
x 16-inch deep stainless steel baffle plate extension to entrap additional
scum.
4. The beach plate shall slope at a nominal incline of 1-3/4-inch per foot
to a point typically 5-inch below the maximum water elevation. The
submerged trough shall continue on a horizontal run for an additional 4-
feet along the scum baffle. An inner radius baffle extending 9-inches
CLARIFIERS
11225-21 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
5.
below and 3-inches above maximum water level shall run from the
trough to the end of the submerged shelf.
A 6-inch standard pipe flange shall be provided for connection to the
scum discharge piping.
E. Scum Pipes and Wall Penetrations
1. New scum pipes shall be installed to convey scum out of the scum
trough and out of the clarifier through the existing opening as shown on
the Drawings. New scum pipes shall be installed on all clarifiers except
at the East Plant. At the East Plant the existing scum pipes shall be
modified as required and be connected to the new scum troughs on
both clarifiers.
2. All new scum pipes shall be schedule 80 PVC of the same size as the
existing scum pipes but not smaller than 6-inch. A flanged connection
shall be made at the scum troughs.
3. The new scum pipes shall extend through the wall and connect to the
existing scum pipes at the first pipe joint outside the clarifier wall using
the correct adapters and fittings.
4. New gaskets, new Link-Seals, and new hardware associated with the
actual wall penetrations shall be furnished and installed on all clarifiers
except at the East Plant.
2.13 HARDWARE
A. All equipment bolts, drill-in anchors, and associated hardware shall be 316
stainless steel, furnished by the Contractor in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations, and of ample size and strength for the
purpose intended.
B. All equipment drill-in anchors and attachment bolts shall be set by the
Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and shall be of
316 stainless steel construction.
2.14 COATINGS
A. All carbon steel components shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.15 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND POWER
A. Electrical control and power for each clarifier shall be installed as shown on
the electrical drawings and specified in Division 16.
CLARIFIERS
11225-22
05/14/12
�
�I''
�
�
,
,
'
'
'�J
'
�,
'
,
'
�
�
�
J
�
,
II
,�
,
�
'
1
'
�
'
LJ
�
'
'
'
�
I
,
,
'
,
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
2.16 MOTORS
A. Motors shall meet the requirements of the electrical specifications and shall be
suitable for the type of service specified herein with a 1.15 service factor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
31 3.02
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. In accordance with Specification 01820, the Contractor shall provide the
services o# the Manufacturer's field service representative for a period of not
less one (1) eight-hour day to provide Owner training.
B. The Contractor shall provide the services of the Manufacturer's field service
representative to ensure proper assembly and in accordance with
Specification 01625 as needed in order to inspect the installed equipment,
supervise testing, and supervise unit start up. The Manufacturer's services
shall be provided to verify proper mechanical installation, adjust alarm and
shut off switch settings, and to perform torque tests.
C. A written report of the Manufacturer's field service representative's findings
and installation approval shall be submitted to the Engineer covering all
inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies nated. This report upon
approval by the Engineer shall be included in the O&M Manual.
D. The field service representative shall provide a written certification to the
Engineer that all equipment has been installed in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and is ready to be placed in
service.
DEWATERING, DEMOLITION, AND MODIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for designing, permitting,
furnishing, installing and operating a dewatering system as needed to protect
the existing clarifiers against flotation. The Northeast Plant clarifiers Nos. 1-4
are not equipped with dewatering/hydrostatic pressure relief valves in the floor
or wall of the clarifier. Ali other clarifiers are equipped with hydrostatic
pressure relief valves, which may or may not be functional or capable of
adequately dewatering and protecting the clarifiers against hydrostatic uplift
and floating. Although the Work of this project includes the installation of new
hydrostatic pressure relief valves in all of the clarifiers, the Contractor shall be
responsible for installing piezometers, monitoring groundwater levels and
providing and operating such dewatering equipment as needed to protect the
clarifiers from flotation. The Contractor shall repair any damage to any
clarifier and piping caused by flotation, to the Engineer's satisfaction and at no
cost to the Owner.
CLARIFIERS
11225-23 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B. Equipment and hardware shall be designed and manufactured to replace or
upgrade the existing equipment being removed/demolished. Installation shall
require no modifications to the existing concrete structure with the exception
of influent piping and sludge piping floor penetrations area and the drain line
sump area in the floor of the Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 thru 4. Otherwise all
equipment shall be "bolt in". Unless otherwise stated, all equipment supplied
in this section shall be stainless steel or galvanized steel and all fasteners and
associated hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions
and accurately aligned in orientation with related equipment in order to insure
proper operation.
B. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial
operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Drill-in anchor bolts shall be furnished by the Manufacturer and installed by
the Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's templates and
recommendations.
D. Each component shall be prefabricated in the factory of the manufacturer and
shall be shipped in assemblies complete and operable as detailed on the
Drawings and specified herein. Each component assembly shall be erected in
the field in accordance with the Manufacturer's installation drawings.
E. The Contractor shall install all equipment and supply all necessary temporary
construction equipment, power and labor in accordance with General
Mechanical Requirements and in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a complete and satisfactory installation.
F. The Contractor shall plumb, adjust for true plane of rotation, grout beneath the
center column, grout beneath the center sludge collection assembly, grout
beneath the manifold seal plate, and grout beneath the drive unit as required
by the manufacturer.
G. Any field welding shall have weld spatter and burrs removed by chipping and
grinding to prevent operator injury and shall be coated in accordance with
Specifications 09865 and 09900. Any accessories mounted on or attached to
the exterior of the tank and supplied by the Manufacturer will be considered
part of the Manufacturer's erection responsibility.
3.04 PAINTING
CLARIFIERS
11225-24
�
�
,
�
'
'
,
�
�J
'
�
,
�
'
,
'
i
,
05/14/12
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
�
I
�
�
I_ J
'
�
�
�
I�
�
,
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
A. All areas where the factory applied galvanizing has been compromised shall
be coated with bituminous epoxy as specified in Section 09865 and Section
09900.
3.05 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The rotating mechanism of each unit shall be field tested, after erection, and
in the presence of the Engineer to confirm and verify the structural,
mechanical, and electrical integrity of the equipment. Each unit shall be
loaded to 100% and 120% of the design torque specified. This field test shall
include checking the operation of all alarm and drive shutdown electrical and
electro-mechanical equipment, as well as the SCADA functionality of all new
and reconnected equipment.
B. Testing shall be accomplished with the mechanism in operation and under its
own power. Loads shall be applied to the arms by tensioning cables attached
to the arms and the floor or wall.
1.
2.
3.
Test by anchoring each of the lower arms of each rotating mechanism
to the floor or wall.
Demonstrate proper operation of high torque alarm, power cut-off, and
shear pin break points for each drive.
Repeat test to verify results
C. All labor, materials and test apparatus necessary for conducting the above
tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
CLARIFIERS
11225-25 05/14/12
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CLARIFIERS
11225-26
05/14/12
,
'
1
, 2
3
4
� 5
6
7
' 9
10
'11
12
13
'14
15
16
,17
18
19
'20
21
22
'23
24
25
'26
27
28
'29
30
31
'32
33
34
'35
36
37
'38
39
40
41
1 42
43
44
,45
46
'
�
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specification
sections apply to the work.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and
includes requirements common to more than one section of these
specifications.
1.03 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access for
service and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the
final location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all
parts that may be replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an
accessible location.
1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building
components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify final
locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of
the actual equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases, slots, and
openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are
constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of inechanical
materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention
to large equipment requiring positioning.
C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical
services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom
possible. Coordinate the installation of inechanical materials and equipment
above ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.
D. Coordinate connection of inechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing
BASIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS
15010-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provi
required connection for each service.
1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item ofi po
operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product na
model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristi
labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates
an accessible location.
1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION
A. Afl packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as
system for its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laborat
(NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 a
NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (NEC), Article 90-7.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS-NOT USED
PART 3— EXECUTION- NOT USED
END OF SECTION
BASIC MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS
15010-2
,
�
de ,
wer �
me, 'cs,
in
'
a ,
ory
nd
,
,
'
,
,
�
'
'
�
�
'
05/14/12
'
'
'
1
' 2
3
4
' 5
6
7
, 9
10
,11
12
13
,14
15
16
'17
18
19
,20
21
22
'23
24
25
�26
27
28
'29
30
31
'32
33
34
,35
36
37
38
, 39
40
41
,42
43
44
'45
46
47
,
'
SECTION 15062
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and
appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in
continuous satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the locations
and to the elevations indicated, specified or required for the proper completion
of all work.
B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already
completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in every
detail. All such replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the
Engineer and the Owner.
C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or
detailed on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only, and
indicate pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's responsibility
to furnish all materials, pipe and fittings required.
D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation, complete
in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction Drawings, or
specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all
details, devices, accessories, and special construction necessary to properly
furnish, install, adjust, test, place into continuous satisfactory service, and
complete the Work in an acceptable manner.
E. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron pipe
and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating
compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest with the
Contractor, and through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the Material
Supplier. The Engineer's approval of 1) the manufacture and installation of
the ductile iron pipe and fittings 2) the use of materials included in this
Specification, and 3) alternative materials offered by the Contractor, shall not
relieve the Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility for meeting all
performance requirements and guarantees.
F. The requirements of this specification 15062 supersede relevant articles in
Section IV.
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-1 05/14/12
1
3
4
5
6 1.03
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
specified herein.
B. All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for potable water piping
shall be NSF-61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the
below listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where
reference is made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the
version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. 61.1 - Standard Specification for Unified Inch Screw Threads.
2. B16.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
and other special Alloys.
C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1.
2.
3.
4.
A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
psi Tensile Strength.
C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of
Fine Aggregate.
C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar.
5. C150 - Portland Cement.
6. D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
7. E8 - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials.
8. E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
9. G95 - Cathodic Disbondment Test.
D. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1. C104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water.
2. C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping
for Water and Other Liquids.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-2 05/14/12
�I
�
'
`J
.i
I
�_�
'
�_�
,
'
'
;__1
'
f]
'
�
�
'
�
'
�
,
'
L
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
,
L1
'
C�
,
��
'
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
2$
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with
Threaded Flanges.
C150 - Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe.
C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water or
Other Liquids.
C153 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3-inch through
16-inch for Water and Other Liquids.
C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances.
C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
E. NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company
1.
2
No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects.
No. 61 -Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings
and all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and
Sections 01300 and 01340. The requirements of AWWA C110, C150, C151
and the following supplemental requirements are applicable:
1. Certified dimensional drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings.
2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type
and thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; performance
history; and all other pertinent information required for the manufacture
of the product.
3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets,
connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials
where shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and
position of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly
reinforced to withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and
longitudinal, and the e�ernal loading conditions as indicated in the
Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-3 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
castings indicating all pertinent dimensions.
B. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and
other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications,
as specified in ANSI/AWWA C105, C110, C150, and C151; respectively, and
certified copies of the following supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and
specials:
1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn statement
that the inspection and all specified tests have been made and all
results thereof comply with the requirements of these Specifications.
�,
�
r
,
'
'
,
C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the
preparation of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor. '
D. Approval of the Shop Drawings shall
responsibility to ensure that the pipe
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
not relieve the Contractor of the
is designed and installed in strict '
A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused
and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their
respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service
intended, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect,
and have the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in
such work. A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall be
required.
C
�
The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and
regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements.
The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with
AWWA C151 except as it may be modified herein.
E. Welders and welding methods shall be certified to a nationally recognized
welding specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the pipe
and fittings.
F. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated
and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise specified or
required.
G. All pipe shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No manner of repair will
be accepted, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-4 05/14/12
1
1
1
'
'
,
CJ
'
'
'
�
'
,
,
,
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
'
r
'
'
'
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9 1.06
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.07
1.08
H. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the testing
and recording that is required in these Specifications unless otherwise
specified.
The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be
rejected as defined in AWWA C151 Section 5.7.1 "Determining Rejection."
SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar-lined or
epoxy-lined by a single qualified Manufacturer. Fittings may be fabricated and
the lining for force main pipe and fittings may be applied at a site other than
where the pipe is manufactured. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years
experience in work similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on
this project. The Manufacturer shall be required to show experience in
supplying pipe in environments similar to those expected to exist on this
project and that the pipe supplied in those environments has functioned
satisfactorily.
SHOP TESTS
A. All pipes shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104,
C110, C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this
Specification. Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and/or
Owner, and/or the Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be
submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor for approval. No lot of pipe shall
be shipped to the site of the Work until acceptable shop tests are completed
and approved.
INSPECTION
A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design
testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials, shall
be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and/or the Engineer in
the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this
plant inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and/or the Engineer.
B. The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Engineer's
opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to the
Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All ductile iron pipes, including flanged, mechanical joint, push-on joint,
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-5 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 2.02
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
restrained joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactured in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings,
above ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be
mechanical joint, restrained joint or push-on joint, as required.
C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C
110/A 21.10 Section 10-9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall be
marked in accordance with Section 51-10, "Marking Pipe" of ANSI/AWWA
Specification C 151/A 21.51.
D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided as
required by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as
allowed by AWWA C151.
,
L
�,
�
�
'
'
'
E. Shop cement-mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and ,
shall be free from fracture, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness.
F. Pipe joints shall not be bonded for electrical conductivity in accordance with
these Specifications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings
and the following schedule:
All blow-offs, air valve assemblies, and lateral connections to or from
the pipe shall not be fitted with dielectric gaskets and/or couplings.
G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings,
gaskets, lubricants, grout, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with
and approved by the appropriate NSF Standard 60 or 61.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, cement mortar
or epoxy lined and asphalt coated, with EPDM gasket joints. The pipe shall
consist of a cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Portland cement mortar
(potable water and reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main) and an
exterior coating of asphalt.
B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked
according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified,
shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C104, C150, C151.
C. Pipe supplied for this project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH
(approximately 7.0) meeting FDEP Part IV water quality standards (reclaimed
water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or chloraminated drinking water
(potable water).
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-6 05/14/12
'
�
,
'
'
JI
lJ
'
,
L�
�
LJ
'
'
C�
'
'
�
�
�
�
,
'
'
I
�
�
'
,
CJ
�
'
,
1 2.03
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 2.04
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PIPE DESIGN
A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall thicknesscorresponding to
Class 150, as calculated according to AWWA C150.
B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pipe, the minimum thickness
of the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not be less than
the minimum calculated thickness of the pipe including net thickness, casting
tolerance and service allowance.
C. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations
showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to the
design loads.
MATERIALS
A. All ductile-iron pipes shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C
151/A21.51. The interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the
Hazen-Williams friction factor will not be less than 130. Each length of pipe
shall be hydrostatically tested to at least 500 psi by the manufacturer in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 151/A21.51. Additionally, 30-inch and larger
pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 75% of the yield strength of the metal,
based on the nominal thickness of the pipe.
B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell
and flange, flange and flange, flange and spigot, and flange and flare, shall
meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces may
be fabricated.
C. The exterior of exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be
field coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.0 mils minimum dry
film thickness, a second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils
per coat minimum dry film thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to 4.5
mils per coat minimum dry film thickness. Field coatings shall be applied in
strict conformance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and
Section 09900.
D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic outside coating
specified in ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.
E. The weight and class designation shall be painted conspicuously in a
contrasting color on the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting after
the shop coat has cured.
F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy containing at least
20% ceramic quartz pigment by volume. The standard of quality is Proteco
401 Ceramic Epoxy or approved equal.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-7 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2.05 JOINTS
A. Flanges and flanged joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the
dimensions and requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where threaded
flanges are used, they shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15. All flanged ductile iron pipe and
fittings shall be rated for 250 pound working pressure and shall be faced and
drilled to match ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges unless special drilling is called
for or required. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be drilled
and tapped accordingly.
B. All pipe flanges shall be coated with a rust preventive coating, as specified in
ANSI/AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately after they have been
faced and drilled.
C. Flanged bolt holes on each end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately
straddle the same horizontal and vertical centerlines unless special drilling is
called for, or required.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe
are compatible with the flanges of the various components and/or
appurtenances.
E. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches or less in length, shall have
flanges cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12)
inches in length may be of the threaded type. Pipe threads shall be of such
length that, with flanges screwed home, the end of the pipe shall project
beyond the face line of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be faced to give
a flush finish to the flange and the flange surface shall be normal to the axis of
the pipe. Flanges shall be of such design that the flanged neck completely
covers the threaded portion of the pipe to protect it against damage and
corrosion.
F. Push-on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to
push-on joints.
G. Mechanical joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 111/A 21.11. Where stud bolts
are required, bells shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The Contractor
shall tighten joint bolts by the use of approved wrenches, to a tension
recommended by the pipe Supplier.
H. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the Contractor
shall paint all bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats of coal tar pitch and
where joints are buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall be
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-8 05/14/12
�
L
1
'
,
,
'
J
L�
�
J
I
�
i
�J
'
'
'
�
'
�
J
�
'
C
�
'
�I
�
�
'J
r-,
�
L�
�
�J
,
,
,
'
,
C!
�
,
'
'
�
�
I
,
,
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37 2.06
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
l�
wrapped with two laps of 8 mil polyethylene film and sealed to the pipe with
polyethylene adhesive tape.
Restrained Joints:
1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping
system shall be restrained based on the pressures shown on the
drawings or specified elsewhere herein. Pipes subject to gravity flow
shall be restrained based on 30 psi of working pressure. Restrained
joint length indicated in the Tables included on the Drawings represents
the length on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must
be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall
be restrained.
2. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line
pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure, but not less
than 200 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push-on joints or
restrained mechanical joints.
3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type
utilizing cast lugs, shop welded retainer lugs or retainer rings bearing
against pipe shoufders. Field installed joint restraint systems, such as
Megalugs, as manufacturered by EBAA Iron, or approved equal, are
required for restraining mechanical joint fittings. Field welding or
grooving of the restrained joint or components shall not be acceptable.
Restrained joints shall be capable of withstanding full bulkhead thrust
that can be developed within the pipeline due to the sum of the working
and surge pressures.
Q
��
FITTINGS
Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically identified on the
Drawings.
Joints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined
previously.
A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push-on joint shall be ductile
iron and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet the
requirements of ANSI/AWWA Specification C 110/A 21.10 or C153.
B. Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI/AWWA Specification
C110/A 21.10 shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1,
Class 125. Fittings shall be short radius (compact) type were possible.
C. All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-9
05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
shown in the current Edition of the "Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe" of the
Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association.
D. All fittings furnished under ANSI/AWWA Specification C110/A 21.10 or C153
shall be ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating as the
pipe to which it is connected.
E. Special fittings, where required, shall be of an approved design and have the
same diameters and thickness as standard fittings, unless otherwise required,
but their laying lengths and other functional dimensions shall be determined by
their positions in the pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which
they connect.
2.07 INTERIOR LINING
A.
:
Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping:
1. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with standard single
thickness cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at
the point of manufacture, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Specification
C 104/A 21.4. Portland cement for cement mortar lining shall be in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C150, Type II cement.
Shop cement-mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior
surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface
crazing, disbondment, and roughness.
2. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the interior
lining and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3
C�
Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review and
approval.
The use and type of any admixtures must be approved by the Engineer
prior to their use. All material batching shall be by weight.
5. The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be one with
which the manufacturer has experience and can demonstrate a
successful history. The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable to
the Engineer so that it will provide a hard and durable lining with a
minimum of cracks, surface crazing and disbonded areas.
Epoxy Lining for Wastewater Service
1. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the protective
compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil,
grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be
solvent cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-10 05/14/12
,
'
'
'
C�
'
'
l�
,
'
'
,
'
iJ
'
�J
�
'
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
�
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36 2.08
37
38
39
40
41
42 2.09
43
44
45
46
47
been made free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive
the protective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit
abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the
blast media so that all rust, loose oxides, etc., are removed from the
surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the
surface. Any area where rust reappears before lining must be re-
blasted.
2. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation,
the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of
Protecto 401. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient
temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be
dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project,
the lining shall not be used on the face of the flange.
3. Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6
inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils
nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The Joint
Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should
be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in
the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and
spigot ends shall be done after the application of the lining.
4. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by the
lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied
above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining
manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time
between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material
manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material
shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself
without roughening of the surface.
5. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch-up or repair in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
EXTERIOR COATINGS
A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for
underground installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of
manufacture, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
PIPE APPURTENANCES
A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs for flanged pipe shall be
screwed on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the flange
and the end of the pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no leakage
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-11
05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44 2.10
45
46
47
through the pipe threads, and the flanges shall be designed to prevent
corrosion of the threads from outside. Flanges shall meet the requirements of
ANSI B16.1, and shall be faced and drilled to that standard, unless special
drilling is called for or required. The Contractor shall be responsible for
assuring that the flanges of the pipe are compatible with the flanges of the
various components and/or appurtenances. They shall be faced accurately at
right angles to the pipe axis, drilled smooth and true, and the machined faces
covered with zinc dust and tallow or equivalent material. The back of the
flanges and bolt holes shall be coated with asphaltic coating meeting the
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151 /A21.51, Section 51-8.1. Coating material
shall be applied immediately after facing and drilling. Where tap or stud bolts
are required, flanges shall be tapped. All flanged joints shall be thoroughly
bolted through, stud or tap bolts of required size. All flanged joints buried
underground shall also be protected as specified under Section 2.08. Only
flanges made in USA shall be supplied to the Project.
B. All bolts and nuts used in the finished work for flanges shall be of carbon steel
and shall conform to the ASTM A 307 Grade B. The ends of all bolts shall be
finished to the standard radius in an acceptable manner. All screw threads
shall be "American Standard, Coarse Thread (N.C.). Stud bolts shall be
hexagonal, cold pressed semi-finished and made of inedium open-hearth
steel. All dimensions shall be in accordance with "American Standard,
Heavy." Bolts and nuts shall be cadmium or zinc plated at the point of
manufacture by an approved process with a plating thickness of 0.0003 to
0.0005 inches. All bolts and nuts furnished shall be delivered to the field free
from grease, rust, and dirt.
C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried
shall be painted with two (2) heavy coats of an approved coat tar pitch, in
accordance with Section 09900.
D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced type EPDM gaskets one-eighth
(1/8) inch thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a
Durometer of 75 to 85 or neoprene having a Durometer of 55 to 65. As an
alternate, the Contractor may supply the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's)
gasket such as American Cast Iron Pipe Company's "Toruseal" gasket or U.S.
Pipe's "Flange Tyte" gasket. Gaskets for bell and spigot joints shall be
fabricated and tested in accordance with AWWA C111.
E. Subject to the Engineer's approval, welded outlets shall be allowed; however,
the welded-on outlet diameter shall not be greater than one quarter the
diameter of the main line.
COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on the
Drawings, manufactured compression couplings equal to Style 38 or Style 39
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-12 05/14/12
,
'
'
,
,
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
'
r
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
1
, 2
3
4
, 6
7
' 9
10
'11
12
13
'14
15
16
17
'18
19
20
,21
22
23
,24
25
26
'27
28
29
,30
31
32
,33
34
35
'36
37
38
,39
40
41
'42
43
44
,45
46
47
' 48
�
[Q
C
�
where isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured by the
Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or an approved equal.
The compression couplings shall consist of two (2) steel follower flanges, one
(1) steel middle ring with pipe stops removed, and sufficient rolled thread,
track-head bolts to properly compress the gaskets. After fabrication, the
middle and follower rings shall be cold expanded to size and dimension.
Thickness of the middle ring shall be suitable for the pressures specified, and
the application, and in no case be less than one-half (1/2) inch thick. All parts
of the compression coupling shall be galvanized or heavily cadmium plated at
the point of manufacture and shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA
C210 or AWWA C203.
The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working
pressure plus surge pressure as a minimum.
The Contractor shall provide field coating for buried couplings in accordance
with AWWA C203 and these Contract Documents.
Small deflections in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type
coupling joints, but such deflections shall not exceed three (3) degrees
between any two (2) adjacent pipe sections. Where changes in line and/or
grade in excess of three (3) degrees
made by deflecting multiple joints o
Engineer.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
are required the deflections shall be
by using fittings approved by the
A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the work,
the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accordance
with the provisions of applicable permits and easements.
B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be
provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie-down straps or padded
banding. In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be
taken to prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections. Such
work shall be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and under
no condition shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe shall not
be allowed, except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be protected during
shipping by covering or some other means acceptable to the Engineer to
prevent contamination of the pipe and to protect the lining from drying during
transport.
C. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage
to the lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free
fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe
handling equipment shall consist of wide belt slings, padded cradles, or other
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-13 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe or coatings.
The use of forks, chains, hooks, or other equipment that may damage the pipe
or its lining or coating shall not be allowed.
D. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as
possible to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction.
Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a
manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench
site or elsewhere. Coated pipe shall be stored on padded skids, sand or dirt
berm, sand bags, or other suitable means so that coating will not be damaged.
Coated pipe shall be handled with wide belt slings. Pipe fittings and specials
which are placed in storage, streets or drives must be so arranged as not to
cause undue inconvenience to traffic and must be protected sufficiently to
prevent any damage including but not limited to the interior lining and exterior
coatings. Chains, cables or other equipment likely to cause damage to the
pipe, fitting or special coating or lining shall not be used. Pipe which has been
improperly distributed and which must be moved longitudinally along the
trench shall be reloaded on a suitable car or truck or lifted and swung by a
derrick or moved by such means as may be satisfactory to the Engineer.
E. If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any ductile iron
pipe, fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or
connections, such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
F. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery all
pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings
or specials exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior cement
mortar linings, joint ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at the
Contractor's expense immediately remove the same from the job site, or repair
to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials deemed not
suitable for installation shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at the
Contractor's own expense.
G. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no
damaged portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having
been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a
satisfactory manner, by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.
H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign
substance that may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being
placed in the trench. The openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall
be closed during any interruption of the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the
Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall
completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and
any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints and any
necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-14 05/14/12
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
'
�
'
'
lJ
'
L _J
,
,
�-1
��
'
,
�
�
�
',i
�
�
�
i
�
'
�
�
'
,
�
�1
,
�
�
'
�J
�
'
�
�
1
2
3 3.02
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
pipeline.
INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. Ductile iron piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions. Pipe shall be laid only after the trench has been
excavated as described Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench
shall be laid to a firm and even bearing for its full length. Precautions shall be
taken against flotation. The pipe shall be backfilled with selected fine
excavated material as shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted to
one foot above the top of the pipe and thereafter backfilled as specified in
Section 02221.
B. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the
bedding material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding forms a
continuous and uniform support for the full length of the pipe except that the
grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackle. Bell holes shall be
formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or
couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench
section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field
connection operations.
C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying
schedule. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within plus or
minus one inch.
D. The maximum obtainable separation between raw water, potable water,
reclaimed water ad sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal
separation of 3 feet, outside to outside, shall be maintained between raw water
lines, potable water mains and reclaimed water mains or a minimum of 6 feet
separation between sewage lines and either water or potable water lines. In
instances where water lines cross a potable water main or a sewage collection
line, a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches shall be maintained between
the invert of the upper pipe and the crown of the lower pipe. In instances
where a vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw water line and a
potable water main or a sewage collection line cannot be achieved, then the
raw water line shall be placed in a cast iron sleeve or encased in concrete
centered at the point of crossing.
E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or
other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades.
Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of
additional fittings.
F. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engineer, pipe shall not be
laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill
grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-15 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
the following pipe to prevent movement.
G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of 36
inches of cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise
indicated on the plans. At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical
separation between pipes shall be maintained while also maintaining 36-inch
minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02221 of these
Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings.
Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between the trench bottom and
the pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be deposited on top of the
pipe, but alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on both sides.
J. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommended procedures. In general the procedure shall be as described
herein. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be
thoroughly cleaned, and a clean gasket shall be placed in the bell groove.
The spigot shall be carefully cleaned and the bell containing the gasket and
the spigot lubricated with a vegetable-based lubricant. The spigot of the pipe
section shall then be atigned with the bell end and inserted into the bell of the
previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe
to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted.
K. Restrained joints shall be assembled in a similar manner as described above
except that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommended procedures.
L. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the field horizontal and field vertical
centerlines of the pipe. The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing
before installing flanged fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and
nuts by wire brushing.
M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and
progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange
to the proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when tightening
joints to prevent any strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. After
tightening all bolts any stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it
is not to be buried.
N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts,
reset or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest
the joints. Flanged joints shall be watertight.
O. Pipe stulls, if recommended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until bedding
and backfilling operations have been completed. After the backfill has been
DUCTILE 1RON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-16 05/14/12
'
�
�
�
�
,,;
i
�
,
'
i
�
'
,
�
,
�
'
i
�
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
'
'
�
'
'
'
�
1_ 1
u
'
�
'
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
placed, the stulls shall be removed and shall remain the property of the
Contractor.
P. After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of the
pipe to verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent. The
frequency of checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no case shall
be less than the frequency of soil density testing.
Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2-inch metallic tape, appropriately color coded
and imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and directly
above the utility, for identification and ease of location. The appropriate tape
color codes are as follows:
1. Sanitary Force Main: Green
2. Potable Water: Blue
3. Reclaimed Water: Purple
R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the
opposite end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or fitting or
prevent pressure from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the gasket.
The pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while bolting. Bolts
shall be gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate of gasket
compression around the entire flange.
S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or
at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost
at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be
established that the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and
frost occurs.
T. Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have a 6-
inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller (except
pipes 3 inches and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8-inch minimum
concrete encasement for pipes larger than 24 inches up to and including 36
inches and 9 inches minimum concrete encasement for pipes larger than 36
inches. Concrete encasement shall extend a minimum of 12 inches past edge
of structure or slab.
U. All pipe and fitting joints occurring within restrained joint limits as required on
the Construction Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to prevent
thrust forces from pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints shall be
harnessed by using the pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained joint
arrangements conforming to these Specifications. Where approved by the
Engineer, joints may be restrained by the use of rods and clamps. The rods
and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be installed utilizing lugged fittings
and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear against the pipe bells. Saddle
clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend on friction or set screws to
prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The pipe clamps, tie rods and
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-17 05/14/12
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39 3.03
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47 3.04
48
49
their assembly shail meet th
Association Bulletin No. 24.
clamps, bolts, heads, tie rods
the Supplier.
'
�
e requirements of the National Fire Protection '
After each tied joint is connected up, all pipe
and nuts shall be coated as recommended by
V. Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth continuous
interior surface. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe
and remove any obstructions that may reduce the pipe's carrying capacity.
Following completion of pipeline progressively or in sections, including
completion of inside inspections, insofar as might be possible or practicable,
the line shall be kept partially filled with water.
W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a
crack exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining
failures that exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater than
12-inches shall be cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not be more
than one patch on the lining of any one joint of pipe, fitting or special.
X. Wherever necessary and approved by the Engineer, patches shall be made by
the Contractor with a mortar of one part Portland cement and two parts clean,
sharp sand; all measurements to be by weight. No pipe requiring the lining to
be patched shall be installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus patched shall
not be installed until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and
approved for laying by the Engineer.
Y. All buried process piping (excluding drainage and stormwater piping) shall be
restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table provided in the
Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall
be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject to gravity
flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure. Restrained joint
length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all sides of fittings and
valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at
all fittings and valves shall be restrained. Restrained joints shall be capable of
holding against withdrawal for line pressures 50 percent above the normal
working pressure but not less than 150 psi on pipe subject to pressure and 30
psi on pipe subject to gravity flow. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained
mechanical joints.
CUTTING PIPE
A. Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a
satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis of
the pipe. Pipe cutting shall only be done by saws specifically designed for that
purpose. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled to the dimensions
of the Manufacturer`s specifications.
COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will be
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-18 05/14/12
'
�
�
,
'
CI
�
�
,
'
'
�
1
,
,
'
'
'
1
' 3
4
' 6
7
' 9
10
'11
12
13
'14
15
16
,17
18
19
'20
21
22
,23
24
25
'26
27
28
�29
30
31
32
' 33
34
35
'36
37
38
'39
40
41
'42
43
44
'45
46
47
,
'
3.05
in contact with the gaskets.
B. The follower rings shall be placed over the pipe ends, then the Contractor shall
slip the gaskets that have been lubricated with an approved vegetable based
lubricant over the pipe ends. The Contractor shall place the middle ring over
the previously laid pipe then insert the end of the joining pipe into the middle
ring, and position both gaskets evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The
Contractor shall insert bolts in bolt holes ot follower rings and tighten nuts in
the sequence and with the torque requirements of the coupling manufacturer.
After tightening all bolts the stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe
if it is not to be buried.
DRILLING AND TAPPING
A. Where shown on the Construction Drawings or where required, ductile iron
pipe, fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage outlets,
air relief outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and/or chlorination.
Holes shall be drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or
fitting.
B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as to require bosses or
reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall furnish
such outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled and
tapped as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as approved by the
Engineer.
3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign
material by the use of soap and water or other solvent as may be required.
B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all steel bolts and
nuts a chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of primer
especially prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After this
pretreatment, the Contractor shall coat all bolts and nuts as follows:
C.
D.
E.
Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) coat of primer.
Paint all bolts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these
Contract Documents.
All piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as specified
in Sections 09865 and 09900.
3.07 SUPPLIER'S FIELD SERVICE
A. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-19 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
8 3.08
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Manufacturer's field representative to be on-site and provide instruction to
each crew working during the installation of a minimum of four push-on joints
and four restrained joints The Manufacturer's field representative shall certify
that the installations observed were satisfactorily completed and all pipe
installation crews were familiar with the proper methods and procedures for
the pipeline installations.
FLUSHING AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matter from the pipeline as
work progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed, in a manner
approved by the Engineer, at each break or pause in pipe laying, and at the
end of each work day, so as to minimize the amount of materials that can
enter the pipe.
B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24-inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to
remove all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water
shall not be less than 2 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the
direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water
without causing property damage or violation of environmental regulations or
permits.
C. Prior to pressure testing, all 30-inch and larger mains shall be televised. All
dirt and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be cleaned in a
manner approved by the Engineer. After cleaning, the mains shall be re-
televised. Pre-and post-cleaning videotapes shall be furnished to the Owner.
D. Testing of lines shall be as specified in Section III.
END OF SECTION
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062-20
'
'
'
LI
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
,
'
'
'
05/14/12
,
�
'
CJ
,
'
'
'
El
,�
'
'
;�
,
'
�
ul
�
�
,
'
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 15064
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install in
the locations as shown on the Drawings, the PVC piping, fittings and
appurtenances as specified herein.
B. The requirements of this specification 15064 supersede relevant articles in
Section IV.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A
:
Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings.
All pipe, fittings, valves, solvents and glue used for potable water piping shall
be NSF-61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All PVC pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single
manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the
manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods
and shall comply with these Specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance
with the General Conditions and shall include dimensioning and technical
specification for all piping to be furnished.
B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein.
1.05 TOOLS
A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for
normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:
1. Class-rated PVC pipe and accessories four to twelve inches (4"-12") in
diameter, where shown or as specified on the Drawings, shall meet the
requirements of AWWA Specification C900 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pressure Pipe." Pipe shall be Class 235, meeting requirements of
Dimension Ratio (DR) 18 with cast iron outside diameters. Each length
of pipe shall be hydrotested to four (4) times its class pressure by the
manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C900. W3 RCW piping shall
be pipe Class 200 meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 14.
2. Class-rated fourteen inch (14") or larger PVC pipe and accessories for
force main use only shall meet the requirements of AWWA Speci-
fication C905, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe". Pipe shall
be Class 235, meeting the requirements of DR 18 with cast iron outside
diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydrotested by the
manufacturer to two (2) times its class pressure in accordance with
AWWA C905.
3. Pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" shall be 200 psi SDR-21
conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2241. Potable water main
pipe shall have EPDM gasket push-on joints conforming to ASTM F
477. Force main pipe shall have SBR gasket push-on joints conforming
to ASTM F-477.
'
'
,
�
L�''
'
1
�
��
'
�
4. PVC pipe less than 4" in diameter which is exposed to view shall be
ASTM D-1785 Schedule 80 pipe with UV inhibitors. ,
5. All PVC pipe shall be new, unused and manufactured for this project.
Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034, F794,
and D-1784 (PVC compound). The PVC pipe shall be manufactured by
Johns-Manville Corporation, Certain-Teed Corporation, or equal. All
PVC sewer pipe shall be green and conspicuously labeled with the
manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, applicable material code or
PVC cell classification, standard dimension ratio number, product type,
standard specification designation, and production record code.
6. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provisions shall be
made for expansion and contraction at each joint with an elastomeric
ring, and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint.
PVC Class pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Uni-Bell
Plastic Pipe Association Guide Specification UNI-B-3-76, and as
recommended by the manufacturer.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-2
'
,
'
�
�
'
05/14/12
'
'
'
,
'
'
�
C�
�
�
'
�
'
�
'
lJ
,
�
�
,
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
:
7. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of approximately 20 feet,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe for potable water
supply and accessories shall bear the NSF inark indicating pipe size,
manufacturer's name, and AWWA and/or ASTM Specification number,
working pressure and production code. Pipe and couplings shall be
made from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compound, as
designed in ASTM D1784.
8. PVC pipe shall be color coded as follows: sanitary mains - green;
potable water mains - blue; reclaimed water mains — lavender, process
piping — brown. Specific colors shall match county standard colors as
applicable.
Joints:
Joints for PVC sewer shall be of the bell and spigot type conforming to
ASTM D-3212 using factory installed flexible elastomeric seals
(gaskets). These gaskets shall be SBR and shall conform to ASTM F-
477. Joints for PVC water pipe shall be of the bell and spigot type
using factory installed, flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These
gaskets shall be EPDM and shall conform to ASTM F-477.
2. The PVC joints for buried pipe shall be of the push-on type unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer so that the pipe and fittings may be
connected on the job without the use of solvent cement or any special
equipment. The push-on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint
designed to be assembled by the positioning of a continuous, molded
rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe or fitting socket and the
forcing of the plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, thereby
compressing the gasket radially to the pipe to form a positive seal. The
gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped so that the
gasket is locked in place against displacement as the joint is
assembled. The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal
expansion or contraction with a total temperature change of at least 75
degrees F in each joint per length of pipe. The bell shall consist of an
integral wall section with a solid cross-section elastomeric ring which
shall meet requirements of ASTM D1869. The thickened bell section
shall be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. Lubricant
furnished for lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not support the
growth of bacteria, shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or
pipe material, and shall not impart color, taste, or odor to the water.
3. PVC joints for exposed pipe shall be threaded or solvent welded joints
where called for on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Teflon thread tape or liquid Teflon thread lubricant shall be
used on all threaded joints to serve as both a sealer and lubricant.
Threaded joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-3 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
�
hand tight a strap wrench should be used to make up one to two (1-2)
additional full turns past the hand tight point. Do not use pipe wrenches
or pump pliers on plastic pipe or fittings.
Fittings:
Fittings for pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" in diameter shall be
solvent weld Schedule 80 PVC and shall conform to ASTM
Specification D2464-69.
2. The manufacturer of the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride
accessories as well as any adaptors and/or specials required to perform
the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Standard
double bell couplings will not be accepted where the pipe will slip
completely through the coupling.
2.02 RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. All buried piping shall be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint
table provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a
pumping system shall be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure.
Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working
pressure. Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length
on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As
a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained.
B. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line
pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure but not less than
150 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push-on joints or restrained
mechanical joints.
C. PVC push-on pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni-Flange
Corp. Series 1390 Restrainer or approved equal. The restraining device and
Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting
ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufac-
tured of corrosion resistance high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting
the requirements of ASTM A-242.
D. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained
with the Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBAA Iron, Inc., Series
2000PV Mechanical Joint Restraint Gland, or approved equal. The restraining
device and Tee head botts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron
meeting ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be
manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel
meeting the requirements of ASTM A-242.
E. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically shown on the
Drawings.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-4 05/14/12
,
'
'
LI
,
�
�'I
U
,
�
'
�
'
�
J
'
�
�
�
'
'
�I
�.
'
1
'
'
'
'
,
�
,
�
�
'
,
�
,
'
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to
the pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damaged pipe or fittings
shall be replaced.
B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being
laid or installed, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective.
C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid or installed, it shall be
removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no
additional expense to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and
when installed or laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required.
3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported
thrust anchors shall be provided where required. Each length of pipe shall be
cleaned out before erection.
B. Sleeves shall be installed of proper size for all pipes passing through floors or
walls as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or
required for liquid or gas-tightness the pipe be sealed with a mechanical seal
equal to Link-Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan.
C. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in
the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall in accordance with the
requirements of the piping layout and jointing method and their locations shall
be verified from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings.
Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 15094 of these
specifications.
D. All valves, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances needed upon the pipelines
shall be set and jointed as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Valves
and appurtenances are included in Section 15100 of these specifications. All
pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a
manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When
manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be
transmitted to their equipment, a certification shall be submitted stating that
such requirements have been complied with.
3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-5 05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and
other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2
feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance
or property damage.
B. Complete PVC piping systems shall be field pressure tested after installation
and including all components to 150 psi for 2 hours. Any leaks discovered
during testing shall be repaired. The repaired component or portion must be
retested until the entire system passes the pressure testing.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
A. All piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surface prepared and be
painted as specified in Sections 09865 and 09900 of these specifications.
Surface preparation and shop priming is a part of the work of this Section.
Pipe marking is included in Section 09900, but it shall be part of the work of
this Section to assist as required by the Engineering in identifying pipe
contents, direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe.
END OF SECTION
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064-6
'
'
'
'
1
,
i
C�
'
'
'
�
�
'
'
�
'
'
05/14/12
�
�
�
�
'
'
'
I�
�
�
CJ
,
'
'
I�
I�
�
�
,
LJ
'
'
1
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 15094
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. It is the intent of the project to remove existing pipe supports, hangers, and
straps and furnish and install new pipe supports, hangers, and straps as
shown on the Drawings.
B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers,
supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, including metallic hanging and
supporting devices for supporting exposed piping.
C. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and anchors
shall be 304 stainless steel and shall match the number, type, location, and
capacity of the existing supports.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design and shall be
adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating
conditions. The minimum working factor for pipe supports shall be five (5)
times the ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe
being supported.
B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in
such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment.
When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not
be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification
stating that such requirements have been complied with.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the General Conditions, shop
drawings of all items to be furnished under this section.
Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant
stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to support and
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-1 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be
designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to
thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable
external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. All pipe
supports shall be approved prior to installation.
B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of
meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests
and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP-58.
C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 that
the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet otherwise specified
herein.
D. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be
manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. or equal. Any reference
to a specific figure or number is for the purpose of establishing a type and
quality of and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item in type, style,
quality, design and performance will be for approval.
2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE
A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 304 SS hangers suspended by
steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling mounting as
follows:
1. Hangers:
�
�
�
'
'
C�
,
l�
,
'
'
Pi�e Size, Inches Piping Technologv & Products Fig. No. '
1 /2" to 3" 50
3" to 30" 83
Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
Paragraph 2.04
2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 304 stainless steel machine threaded with
load ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the
rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the
following minimum diameters:
Pipe Size, Inches
Less than 2-1/2
2-1 /2 though 4
4
6
8-12
Min. Rod Diameter, In.
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-2
,
,
'
�
'
'
05/14/12
�
'
'
'
'
J
,
'
'
'
I
'
'
,
'
,
,
,
,
LJ
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
14-16
20-30
Above 30
1-1/2
See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
Paragraph 2.04
3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. Beam
clamps, for rod sizes 1/2-inch through 3/4-inch shall be equal to Grinnell
Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8-inch through 1-1/4 inches shall be
equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 228 or equal.
4. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be designed to be used in
ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers or
ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers, and shall be as
manufactured by Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as follows:
a. 304 SS Multi Set II
applicable and shall
7/8-inch diameter.
drop in style anchors shall be used where
be used for hanger rods up to and including
b. Ceiling mounting plates shall be used, where applicable, and be
for hanger rod sizes 1-inch through and including 1-1/4 inches,
shall be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by Grinnell
or approved equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical
adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as
required and where applied, shall 304 SS be equal to Grinnell
Fig. No. 230. Wall or column supported pipes shall be
supported by welded steel brackets equal to Grinnell Fig. 194,
195, and 199, as required, for pipe sizes up to and including
20-inch diameter. Additional wall bearing plates shall be
provided where required.
5. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be set on a
0.5-inch neoprene pad and U-bolt assembly supported by the bracket
for pipes 4-inches and larger or by a U-bolt for pipes smaller than
4-inches. U-bolts shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 120 and 137.
6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be
supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket.
Hangers and steel rods shall be as specified above.
7. Wall or column supported pipes 8-inches and smaller may be supported
by hangers equal to Grinnell Figures 103, as required.
C. Floor supported pipes 3-inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by
either cast-in-place concrete supports or adjust-able pipe saddle supports as
directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when
lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-3
05/14/12
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C
E
provided), and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where
lateral displacement of the pipes is not probable.
1. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the
Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with
temporary supports. Top edges and vertical corners of each concrete
support shall have 1-inch bevels. Each pipe shall be secured on each
concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor strap anchored to
the concrete with cast-in-place bolts or with expansion bolts. Where
directed by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars sha11 be grouted
into drilled holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral
displacement of the concrete support. Unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer, maximum height shall be five (5) feet.
2. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to
that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular.
3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the
corresponding size 150 Ib. companion flanges or slip-on welding
flanges respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel
pipe construction of the size recommended by the pipe support
manufacturer. Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a
minimum of two (2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle
supports shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 259. Where used under
base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle. Floor
supported pipes less than 3-inches shall be supported by fabricated
steel supports.
Vertical piping shall be supported as follows:
1. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be
supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction
by pipe supports as previously specified herein.
2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pipes and greater than eight-inches
in diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support as shown
in the drawings.
3. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe shall
be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the
pipe sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 262. Anchor
bolts shall be equal to Kwik-Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock
Industries, Minneapolis, Minnesota or Wej-it manufactured by Wej-it
Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado.
All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be 304 Stainless
Steel.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-4
�
'
,
'
C_ J
'
'
C�
�I
'
'
,
'
,
i
'
,
'
05/14/12
,
�
'
r
'
'
I�
ll
'
,
,
'
,
CJ
�
�
'
'
'
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE
A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously
specified herein.
B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber
hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray
Ladder by Husky-Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of
United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction.
Rung spacing shall be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches
for rubber nose. Tray width shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs of
rubber hose and 12 inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable
trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete
inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete support system. Individual
plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps
fasteners equal to Globe Model M-CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or equal.
Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide
continuous support along the length of the pipe.
C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall provide
firm support, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due ta thermal
expansion and contraction.
2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS
A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown on
the drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework anchored
into the floor or curbing. The vertical piping shall be suitably secured to
horizontal support members connected at each end vertical support members
and spaced as required to provide a rigid installation.
1. The complete supporting system shall be as manufactured by the
Unistrut Corporation, Globe-Strut as manufactured by the Metal
Products Division of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. Vertical and horizontal
supporting members shall be U-shaped channels similar to Unistrut
Series P1000.
2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe
clamps or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Series
P2558. All components shall be of 304 stainless steel.
3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and
fittings required for a complete assembly.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-5
05/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
�!�i�.i
4. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall show all
details of the installation including dimensions and types of supports.
B. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section are
not applicable, including pipe supports for above 30-inch diameter pipe; high
temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be fabricated or
constructed from standard aluminum shapes in accordance with
Specifications, concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously
specified herein and shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1
�
Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and all
related Sections of this Specification.
Complete design details of the entire pipe support systems shall be
provided, for approval by the Engineer.
3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting
structures, in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is
designed.
4. Hanger rods for above 30-inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1-1/2-inch
diameter and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum
recommended safe load.
PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING
A. Pipe hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with ANSI 631.1.1.0
and MSS SP-69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supports exceed
the following:
Maximum unsupported pipe span
(FEET)
Nominal Pipe Size - Ductile Iron Steel PVC-1 and PVC-2
Inches Sch. 80
1 /2 N/A 5 3.5
3/4 N/A 6 3.5
1 N/A 7 3.8
1-1/4 N/A 7 4.0
1-1 /2 - 3 N/A 9 4.0
4 7 10 5.5
5-10 10 10 10
12-48 10 per manufacturer 10
or as shown on
drawin s
�
J
I
i
u
,
,
'
'
�
�
,
�J
�
�
�
i�
,
�.J
`J
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ,
15094-6 05/14/12
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
'
'
,
I
�
'
'
'
,
'
r
!I
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building
structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in
direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No
piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and
walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or
authorized by the Engineer.
B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to
support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading
conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure
forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable
externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be
approved by the Engineer.
C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both
sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all
pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support
connecting pipes.
�
E
F.
Pipe supports shall be provided as follows:
1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support
spacing of 10 feet-0-inches with a minimum of one support per pipe
section at the joints.
2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever possible.
Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended
by the manufacturer except that support spacing shall not exceed five
(5) feet.
3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall not
exceed five (5) feet.
4. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at
least 15 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests,
and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction.
Pipe supports shall not result in point loadings, but shall distribute pipe loads
evenly along the pipe circumference.
Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for
in pipe support selection and installation.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-7 05/14/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be instailed on forms before
concrete is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall
be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility
for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section.
H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface.
3.02 PRIME COATING
A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean,
dry, and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign
substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy
Primer or equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rust-
Inhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc.,
Pittsburgh, Pa. or equal.
t
�
,
'
'
,
,
CJ
C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be '
applied, as specified in Section 09900.
3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS
A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable
insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct
contact and any resulting electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous
impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or
washers, or upon approval by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094-8
,
'
,
'
'
,
r
�
�
05/14/12
'
1
�I
�.
'
J
'
'
'
'
'
'
CJ
'
,
r
C
�_ I
��
,
r
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 15100
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish and install for
complete and ready operation all valves and appurtenances shown on the
Construction Drawings and as specified herein.
:3
�
❑�
All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the drawings.
All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in
raised letters on some appropriate part of the body.
The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Eccentric Plug Valves
Slanting Disk Check Valve
Swing Check Valve
Telescopic Valves
Resilient Wedge Gate Valves
Butterfly Valves
Pressure Relief Valves
Ball Valves
Air Release Valves
Combination Air and Vacuum Release Valves
Valve Actuators
Valve Boxes
Gauges
Flange Adapter Couplings
Flexible Couplings
Quick Connect Couplings
Flexible Type Expansion Joints
Unions
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard
for use in controlling the flow of wastewater, waste activated sludge, return
activated sludge, scum, etc., depending on the application.
B. Unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings all resilient seats, seals,
and other sealing components of valves and flexible fittings shall be of EPDM
construction.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-1
05/14/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C.
'
,
All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuator to match the type of r
the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fashion as the existing actuator.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well-established
reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the
particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and
shall comply with these Specifications, as applicable.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to
the Engineer for review.
1.05 TOOLS
,
'
,
��
�
'
A. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied ,
with the equipment.
1.06 VALVE INDICES
A. The Contractor shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for
the work. The schedule shall the location, type, a number, words to identify the
valve's function, and the normal operating position for each valve.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
A. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with standard
ANSI/AWWA C517 Table 1, Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves, of
the latest revision unless otherwise specified. MANUFACTURER shall provide
affidavit of compliance with AWWA Standard. Valves shall be as manufactured
by DeZurik, Val-Matic, Homestead or approved equal.
B. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504, latest edition. Each
valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 of the above
reference and shall be given a leakage test and hydrostatic test as described in
Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage test shall be
applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The manufacturer
shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of design testing as
described in Section 5.2.4 of the above reference.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-2 05/14/12
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
�
�
'
'
�
'
'
,
,
'
J
CJ
'
,
,
'
�
'
1
,
'
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and
shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged valves
shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI B16.1 125/150 Ib. standard. Mechanical
joint ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Screwed
ends shall be to the NPT standard.
D. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron.
E. Port areas for valves 20 inches and smaller shall be a minimum of 80 percent of
full pipe area. Valves 24-inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of 100
percent of full nominal pipe area.
F. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium plated.
Valve plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A-48, Class 40 cast iron or ASTM A-
536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene.
G.
'�
Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel,
oil-impregnated bronze or non-metallic upper and lower plug stem bearings.
Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not
acceptable.
Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual gear
actuators unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
J. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type with a packing gland follower.
Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the
actuator or bonnet from the valve.
K. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable
requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90
entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants".
2.02 SLANTING DISK CHECK VALVE
A. Valve body shall be heavy two-piece ASTM A126 Grade B cast iron. The two (2)
body halves and body seat shall be O-ring sealed and bolted together in a
manner to sandwich the body seat on a 55° angle. Each body half shall have a
covered access hole for internal inspection and each body half and disc shall be
fully machined to accept the attachment of a bottom buffer oil dashpot.
B. The seat ring and disc ring shall permit replacement in the field without need for
special tools or machining. Disc and seat ring shall be bronze. The area
throughout the valve body must be equal to full pipe area.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-3 05/14/12
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
,
'
C. The pivot pins in the body and the bushings in the disc lugs shall be stainless '
steel of different hardness to prevent galling. The bushings shall be press fit to
prevent wear.
D. An indicator shall be provided to show position of the disc.
E. The valve shall have a bottom mounted buffer for free open and positive non-
slam closing. The buffer shall be designed to contact the disc during the last
10% of closure and thereafter control the disc closure until the valve is shut in a
manner to minimize or prevent water hammer. The rate of hydraulic control and
the initial point of buffer contact to the disc closure shall be externally adjustable
and variable to suit the water column reversal time. The bottom buffer hydraulic
system must be self contained and independent from pipeline media to prevent
contamination of the media and protect the cylinder against corrosion. The buffer
rod, oil reservoir and buffer pneumatic tank shall be stainless steel.
�!
'
��
�
'
F. Valve shall be Apco Series 800B slanting disc check valve with bottom mounted ,
buffer or approved equal.
2.03 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Swing check valves shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body
with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, and a noncorrosive shaft for attachment
of weight and lever. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard B.16.1, 125 Ib.
Class. Check valves shall absolutely prevent the return of water or wastewater
back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below the delivery
pressure.
B. The valves must be tight seating and must operate without hammer or shock.
The seat ring must be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a
threaded joint.
C. Check valves shall be the lever and weight type with an adjustable position
weight and lever arm attached to the disc assembly to allow adjustment of the
closure force.
D. The valves shall be as manufactured by the Mueller, Kennedy or approved equal,
and shall be suitable for horizontal installation.
E. The Contractor is responsible for all labor and material costs associated with all
work made necessary by the use of replacement check valves with lay lengths
different than the existing check valves.
2.04 TELESCOPING VALVES
l_J
�J
'
'
,
'
�
'
A. New telescopic valve assemblies shall be installed at existing locations as shown ,
on the Drawings. The valves shall be sized and manufactured to be in-kind
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES '
15100-4 05/14/12
LJ
'
,
r
�
1
,
'
,
,
'
,
'
,
�
'
,
'
,
'
3
4
6
7
8
�
replacements for the existing valves that are to be removed, except that the new
valves shall require a manual actuator (electrically operated actuator not
required). The new valves shatl be mounted and function properly without
requiring modifications to the existing structure or the existing piping.
Each valve assembly shall be complete and include but not be limited to the
following components:
9 • Cast or ductile iron floor mounting pedestal.
10 • Manual, rising stem, rack and pinion lifting mechanism with handwheel and
11 gear reducer.
12 • Stem Rod (316 stainless steel)
13 � Stem Cover and graduated position indicator
14 • Stem Guide (bronze or UHMW polyethylene)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
• Bail (stainless steel)
• Slip Tube with v-notch (minimum 1/8 thick, 304 Stainless Steel or Brass)
• Gasket Retainer and Flange (stainless steel) Neoprene Split Gasket
D. The slip tube shall be of 304 stainless steel and manufactured from seamless
tube or pipe with a minimum wall thickness of 1/8-inch. The finish O.D. of the
tube shall be within ± 0.04 inches runout, cylindrical within 0.100 TIR and have a
smooth 125 micro-inch or better surface. The slip tube shall penetrate the riser
pipe a minimum of 9-inches in the up position and have a 48-inch maximum
travel.
E. The bail shall be of the same material as the slip tube and shall be rigidly welded
to the slip tube and shall be connected to the stem with a flanged type
connection and multiple fasteners.
F. A stainless steel companion flange and double '/a-inch thick neoprene wiper
gasket shall be installed and attached to the top of the existing riser pipe. The
I.D. of the gasket shall be 1/8-inch smaller than the O.D. of the tube. The
gaskets shall be of split design, sandwiched between the riser pipe flange and
the companion flange, and replaceable without removing the slip tube from the
riser pipe. The drilled hole pattern and dimensions of the companion flange shall
match the drilled hole pattern of the existing riser pipe flange.
G. Lifts shall be handwheel type, mounted to a gearbox. The gearbox output shaft
shall rotate the pinion gear on the rack and pinion arrangement. The rack shall
be type 304 stainless steel with an integral self-locking device to secure the stem
in any infinite position through out the travel range. The lifting device and
gearbox shall comply with the Section 2.04 Valve Actuators of this specification.
The rising stem lift shall use a stainless steel square tube with torque nut design
or a vee keyed shaft, with torque plate, to prevent valve tube rotation.
Handwheels shall be a minimum of 16-inches in diameter of cast aluminum, cast
iron, or stainless steel and control the pinion shaft via a gear reducer mounted on
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-5 05/14/12
1 a cast iron pedestal. The valves shall include a clear plastic Butyrate stem cover
2 with a mylar strip type position indicator, calibrated in �/a inch increments to
3 illustrate valve position. The mylar strip, provided by the manufacturer, will be
4 affixed by the Contractor after installation to provide a true and accurate
5 indication of the tube elevation by comparing it to the top of the rising stem.
6 Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be provided for all pedestals. Pedestals shall
7 be mounted to new supporting structural steel mounted to the existing concrete
8 structure. Cleaning, shop prime coating, and finish painting of all new equipment
9 and mounting supports shall be as specified in Section 09865 and Section
10 09900.
11
12
13
14
15
16
H. The telescoping valve assemblies shall be manufactured by Waterman or
approved equal.
2.05 RESILIENT SEATED AND RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES
17 A. All gate valves shall be resilient seated or resilient wedge, manufactured to meet
18 or exceed the requirements of AWWA C515 of latest revision and in accordance
19 with the following Specifications. Valves shall have an unobstructed waterway
20 equal to or greater than the full nominal diameter of the valve.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B. The 30-inch valves shall be non-rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged or
rolled bronze as shown in AWWA C515. The 30-inch valves shall be rated for
250 psi.
C. All gaskets shall be pressure energized O-ring type seals. The stem shall be
sealed with three O-rings. The top two O-rings shall be replaceable with the
valve fully open and exposed to full working pressure. Thrust washers shall be
installed on each side of the thrust collar.
C. The gate shall be ductile iron with an EPDM coating. The resilient sealing
mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the valve design pressure when
installed with the line flow in either direction.
D. All cast ferrous components shall be ductile iron ASTM A536. All internal and
external surfaces of the valve body and valve bonnet shall have an epo�ry coating
complying with AWWA C550. All valves are to be tested in strict accordance with
AWWA C515.
E. Each 30-inch valve shall be equipped with a spur gear operator with a 2-inch
square nut and a removable hand wheel that fits over the nut. The hand wheel
shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open the valves. Handwheels shall be
of ample size and shall have an arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to
indicate the direction of opening.
F. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-6 05/14/12
,
'
r
,
;�
,
'
'
'
l_J
,
'
'
�
,
�
'
'
LJ
�
iJ
,
1 resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable
' 2 requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550-90
3 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants".
'
�
'
,
�
'
'
LJ
,
CJ
L
'
,
'
,
�
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
G. Valves shall be equal to those as manufactured by American Flow Control, M&H,
MueHer, Kennedy, Clow, or equal.
2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE
A. Replacement butterfly valves for the RAS pumps shall be supplied with end
connections identical to those valves they are replacing.
B. Butterfly valves shall meet, exceed, or otherwise conform to the AWWA Standard
Specifications for Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves, Designation C504, except as
hereinafter specified. Valves, except as specified hereinafter, shall be Class
150A or B, and equal to those manufactured by Bray, Henry Pratt Company,
DeZurik, American, Kennedy, Mueller, Homestead, or equal. The valve discs
shall be constructed of cast iron conforming to ASTM A-48, Class 40, ASTM
A-126, Class B or ductile iron conforming ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 for Class
150 or less. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 shall be
provided for all Class 250 valves.
D. All butterfly valves shall be in accordance with Table 1 and Table 2 of above-
mentioned AWWA Specification for short-body valves. Adequate two-way thrust
bearings shall be provided. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI
B16.1.
E. Valve seats for flanged valves shall be EPDM synthetic rubber compound. Valve
seats 24 inches and larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable without
dismounting operator disc or shaft and without removing the valve from the line.
All retaining segments and adjusting devices shall be of corrosion resistant
material with stainless steel screws and be capable of a 1/8-inch adjustment.
Valves 20 inches and smaller shall have bonded or mechanically restrained seats
as outlined in AWWA C504 except for the wafer type valves. Where elastomer
seat is mounted on the valve body, the mating edge of the valve disc shall be 18-
8 stainless steel or Nickel-Chrome, 80-20%. Where elastomer seat is mounted
on the valve disc, the valve body shall be fitted with an 18-8 stainless steel seat
offset from the shaft, mechanically restrained and covering 360 degrees of the
peripheral opening or seating surface.
F. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron or close grain cast iron per
ASTM A-126, Class B with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of the
through boss-type.
G. The valve shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished constructed of 18-8, ASTM
A-276, Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and shearing
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-7 05/14/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
H
J.
stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque.
Shaft shall be of either a one-piece unit extending full size through the valve disc
and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. Shaft bearings shall be
Teflon or nylon, self-lubricated type.
All valves shall be subject to hydrostatic and leakage tests at the point of
manufacture. The valves shall be tested in conformance with AWWA C-504.
The manufacturer shall certify that the required tests on the various materials and
on the completed valves have been satisfactory and that the valves conform to all
requirements of the Specification and the AWWA standard.
Where indicated on the Drawings, extension stems, floor stands, couplings, stem
guides and floor boxes, as required, shall be furnished and installed.
K. Valves shall have a factory-applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable
requirements of the AWWA C550.
2.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Floor type hydrostatic pressure relief valve shall be designed for installing in the
floor of concrete tanks and shall be type F-1493 as manufactured by Clow Valve
Company or equal. The valves shall be designed to open at a hydrostatic head
of 9-inches of water.
B. The assembly shall consist of three parts: cover, body, and grate. All three parts
shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM specifications A-126 Class B. They
shall be designed so that neither the cover nor grate can become separated from
the body of the valve, due to ground water pressure around the tank. However,
when necessary, both may be easily removed by turning them to right or left to
free them from locking lugs cast integrally on the inside of the body.
'
'
I
�
Ii
��
�
�
�
�I
�
'
��
'
�
,
'
,
C. The seats shall be of Buna-N rubber, bonded to the cover, mating with a
machined bronze seat in the body. ,
2.08 BALL VALVES
A. PVC ball valves shall be of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with union, socket, threaded or
flanged ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic
construction, 150 psi rated with Teflon seat seals and T-handles. PVC ball
valves shall be as manufactured by Spears, Plastiline, Hayward, or equal.
B. True union, vented, PVC ball valves shall be used on the chemical clean system
and shall be manufactured to ASTM F 1970 specifications and constructed from
PVC Type I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 1245. All O-rings shall be
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-8 05/14/12
'
'
��
r,
I
�
'
,
,
,
,
�
�
'
'
'
�
L'
'
,
'
�
�
,
'
,
lJ
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Latharge Viton. All valves shall have stem with double O-ring seals. All valve
handles shall be polypropylene with built-in lockout mechanism. All valve union
nuts shall have Buttress threads. All seal carriers shall be Safe-T-Blocked. All
valve components shall be replaceable. All valves shall be certified by NSF
International for use in potable water service. All 1/2" through 2" valves shall be
pressure rated to 235 psi, all 2-1/2" through 8" and all flanged valves shall be
pressure rated to 150 psi for water at 73 ° F. Valves shall have a vent hole in the
ball to equalize internal fluid pressures. Install valve with ball vent on the
pressure (upstream) side when in closed position. Vented ball valves shall be
True Union 2000 Industrial Ball Valves as manufactured by Spears, True Union
Z-Ball Valves by Hayward, or Engineer approved equal.
C. Bronze, brass or stainless steel ball valves shall be of 2-piece (1" and smaller) or
3-piece (1-1/2" and larger) construction. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi
saturated steam pressure and 400 psi WOG pressure. Valves shall have
stainless steel, bronze or brass body, stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball,
replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem and vinyl covered
steel handle. All end connections shall be threaded.
D. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve position indicators are
plainly visible when standing on the floor.
2.09 AIR RELEASE VALVES
A. The air release valves shall be installed as shown on the Construction Drawings.
The valves shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float,
EPDM seat and stainless steel trim. The fittings shall be threaded. Air release
valves shall be equipped with a vacuum ball or check feature in order to prevent
air from entering the valve during vacuum conditions. The valves for wastewater
and sludge applications shall be Model D-025 as manufactured by A.R.I. or
equal. Air release valves for reclaimed and potable water service shall be A. R.I.
Model D-040-C-VAC or equal.
B. A stainless steel or brass ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air release
valves. Stainless steel or brass piping shall be provided for air release valves on
pumps.
2.10 COMBINATION AIR AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVES
A. The air and vacuum valves for the transfer pump discharge lines shall be
installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. The valves shall have a cast
iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, and an EPDM seat. The valves
shall be 2" threaded connection. Air and vacuum valves shall be equipped with a
baffle to protect the float from direct contact with the rushing air and water and to
prevent the float from closing prematurely in the valve. The valves shall be
Model D-040-C as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-9 05/14/12
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Q
'
�
il
�
A stainless steel ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air and vacuum ,
valves.
2.11 VALVE ACTUATORS
A. General
All valve actuators shall conform to the latest version of the AWWA
Standard Specifications for the respective type of valves and shall be
either manual, motor-operated, or air operated and shall match the
existing valve operator.
2. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the
full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry
system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve.
Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body.
3. The actuator manufacturer shall be responsible for properly sizing the
actuator for the installed pressure conditions.
4. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing the valve and
actuator in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The
Contractor shall replace any damaged actuator without cost to the Owner.
5. Valves located seven (7) feet or more above the floor level shall be
equipped with an actuator that allows operation of the valve less than five
(5) feet from floor level. Manual operators shall have a chainwheel and
electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel.
B. Manual Actuators
Manual actuators shall have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed
gearing with handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of required
opening and closing torque values. Actuators shall be equipped with
handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop-limiting locking
devices to prevent over travel in the open and closed positions. They
shall turn counter-clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall be of
the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve
in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without
creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and designed to
produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the
handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall withstand an input
of 450-foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300-foot pounds for larger
than 30" size valves at extreme actuator positions without damage.
Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or chain wheel and
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-10 05/14/12
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
:_J
,
,
�
�
'
�
��
'J
'
u
'
�
�
,
„
�
�;
ii
,,
�
,--,
�
�
'
,
�
�
'
�
,
'
�
i
�
�
1
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
position indicator, and valves located below grade shall be equipped with
a 2-inch square AWWA operating nut located at ground level and cast
iron extension type valve box. Valve actuators shall conform to AWWA
C504, latest revision.
2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to
open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an
arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of
opening.
3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or more above the
operator walkway. Process air piping valves in the aeration basins shall
have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a
minimum of 24 inches above the operator walkway.
2.12 VALVE BOXES
A. All buried valves shall have cast-iron three-piece valve boxes. Valve boxes shall
be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and to extend to such elevation at or
slightly above the finished grade surface, as directed by the Engineer. The barrel
shall be two-piece, sliding type, having 5-1 /4-inch shaft. The upper section shall
have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling and
shall be complete with cast iron covers.
B. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended within 12 inches of the top of the
valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be provided with concrete base and valve
nameplate engraved with lettering 1/8-inch deep as shown on the Construction
Drawings.
2.13 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES
A. All pumps furnished under this contract shall have pressure/ vacuum gauges
installed on their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on their
discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished underthis Contract
shall be mounted per manufacturer requirements.
B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless
steel case with a 4-1 /2-inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass crystal
window, 1/4-inch shut-off valve, and a bronze pressure snubber. Provide
stainless steel diaphragm seals between shut-off valve and pressure gauge on all
lines with unclear matter in suspension of solution. All gauges shall be
weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with jet black
graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both pounds per
square inch and feet of head.
C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of inercury vacuum to 50 feet of head.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-11 05/14/12
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
❑�
Discharge gauges shall read from zero feet of head to the expected shutoff head
of the respective pump.
Gauges shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltown
Instruments, Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcroft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal
2.14 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS
A
�
Flange adapter couplings shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings.
Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating.
C. All couplings shall
studs to meet or
minimum.
'
,
�
�I
'J
�
�
�
,,
,!
be restrained and shall have a sufficient number of anchor
exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi �
D. Couplings shall be JCM Model 301 R or equal.
2.15 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
'
A. Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on ,
the Drawings.
B. Split type coupling shall be used with all interior piping and with exterior piping as
noted on the Drawings. The couplings shall be mechanical type for radius
groove piping. The couplings shall mechanically engage and lock grooved pipe
ends in a positive couple and allow for angular deflection and contraction and
expansion.
C. Couplings shall consist of malleable iron, ASTM Specification A47, Grade 32510
housing clamps in two or more parts, a single chlorinated butyl composition
sealing gasket with a"C" shaped cross-section and internal sealing lips projecting
diagonally inward, and two or more oval track head type bolts with hexagonal
heavy nuts conforming to ASTM Specification A183 and A194 to assemble the
housing clamps. Bolts and nuts shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.
D. Victaulic type couplings and fittings may be used in lieu of flanged joints. Pipes
shall be radius grooved as specified for use with the Victaulic couplings. Flanged
adapter connections at fittings, valves, and equipment shall be Victaulic Vic
Flange Style 741, equal by Gustin-Bacon Group, Division of Certain-Teed
Products, Kansas City, Kansas or equal.
E. Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall be
of steel and shall be Dresser Style 38 or 40, as shown on the Drawings, or equal.
The coupling shall be provided with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts and nuts
unless indicated otherwise.
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-12 05/14/12
�
��
�
�
'
�
'
'
i
�
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
'
,
'
�
�
�
1
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
F.
G
H
All couplings shall be furnished with the pipe stop removed.
Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure
to the liquid within the pipe.
If the Contractor decides to use victaulic couplings in lieu of flanged joints, he
shall be responsible for supplying supports for the joints.
2.16 QUICK CONNECT COUPLINGS
A. Quick connect couplings shall be Model 633-E hose shank adapter and Model
633-C hose shank coupler as manufactured by Dover Corporation OPW Division,
Cincinnati, Ohio, Ever-tite Coupling Co., Inc., New York, New York, or equal.
2.17 FLEXIBLE TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joints shall be manufactured of molded EPDM rubber with filled
arches and wire reinforcement. Joints shall be reinforced with baked enamel
ductile iron or split galvanized steel retaining rings placed directly against the
inside of the flange to prevent damage to the rubber surface when the bolts are
tightened. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 150#. Rated working pressure shall
be 150 psi. Retaining rings, control rods, bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
coated according to Section 09900 or shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel.
B. Joints shall be rated for a minimum operating temperature of 180°F.
C. Tapered expansion joints shall be eccentric, single arch, and shall be capable of
a 1/2" maximum lateral deflection. Double arch expansion joints shall be
required where called out on the drawings.
D. Joints shall be provided and installed with the manufacturer's standard control
rods. Total joint deflection shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended
maximum. Joints shall be installed in neutral position.
E. Expansion joints shall be Mercer Series FER, Proco, Red Valve Redflex, or
equal.
2.18 UNIONS
A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds
malleable iron, zinc-coated. Unions on water piping 2-1/2 inches in diameter and
larger shall be flange pattern, 125-pound class, zinc-coated. Gaskets for flanged
unions shall be of the best quality EPDM. Unions shall not be concealed in walls,
ceilings, or partitions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-13
05/14/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to
alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed.
B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours at
the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test
pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of
operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry
floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as
forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, the
Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing on their
location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of these valves and
appurtenances during the construction of the structures.
D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the
respective pipe sections in Division 15.
E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts and
washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy steel
bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the pipe. All
buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats (14-20 mils DFT)
of bituminous paint comparable to Carboline Bitumastic 300M, Tnemec Series
46H-413 Tneme-Tar, or approved equal.
F. Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as other parts, shall be
thoroughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall be
moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite paste,
and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end. After the other pipe has been
brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly over the
pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then shall be
placed. After the bolts have been inserted, the nuts shall be tightened until the
housing sections are firmly in contact, metal-to-metal, without excessive bolt
tension.
G. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned
thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket
lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to
a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on
the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner.
H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the Construction
Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard manner. Valve stems
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-14 05/14/12
'
'
'
'
�
�
'�
�_�'
�
C�
'
`,
�'
'
u
'
J
'
'
�
,
'
�
�
'
�
�
�
,
,
�
�
'
'
�
�
'
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
shall be vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over each stem with base
bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade. Boxes shall have
sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. Knobs on cover shall
be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill from valve box.
3.02 SHOP PAINTING
A. Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted shall
receive a coating of rust-inhibitive primer compatible to paint system specified in
Section 09900. All pipe connection openings shall be capped to prevent the
entry of foreign matter prior to installation.
3.03 FIELD PAINTING
A. All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view, except
ball valves, shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09900.
3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure and leakage in
accordance with Section 01625. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested.
Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to
prevent movement during tests.
END OF SECTION
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100-15
05/14/12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
'
l�
�
�
�J
�
�'
�
�
'
�
C
1
�
�
1
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES '
15100-16 05/14/12
'
#
!
�
�
'
,
�
��
'
1
�
�
�
�
�'
�
�
'
,
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this Section.
1.02 CODES:
A. The work shall be in conformance with the latest adopted version of the
following:
NFPA National Fire Protection Association Codes
NFPA 70 National Electric Code
FBC Florida Building Code
B. The installation shall also comply with all applicable rules and regulations of
local and state laws and ordinances. Include in the work, without extra cost,
any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply
with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. Inform the
engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable
codes, standards, laws, and regulations before submitting their bid.
1.03 ROUGH-IN:
�
[Q
Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the
requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 15 for rough-in
requirements.
1.04 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:
A. Existing services shall not be interrupted without prior consent of the owner's
authorized representative and may be interrupted only at, and for, the
specific time designated by the owner's authorized representative.
B. Make a thorough examination of the site and the contract documents. No
claim for extra compensation will be recognized if difficulties are encountered
which an examination of site conditions and contract documents prior to
executing contract would have revealed.
C. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building
components.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 1 5/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
0
E
Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to
allow for electrical installations.
F. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be
set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are
constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical
materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular
attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the
building.
�
�
I'��
�
'
�
G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate
the installation of electrical equipment and materials. '
H. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect
equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interFerence with other
installations.
Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above
ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and
structural components.
J. Temporary electrical service and construction lighting shall be provided under
this section. Provide for all electrical service for construction period, making
all connections and removal of same at job conclusion. Furnish and install
temporary lighting for construction period. At job completion, all temporary
lamps shall be removed and replaced with new lamps.
�
�
'
�
�
K. All existing and new conduit/raceways within the project area shall be
properly supported. Add support to existing conduit as required to comply �
with the NEC.
L. All existing electrical equipment, conduit and wiring made un-necessary by
new installation shall be disconnected, removed and disposed in manner
complying with state and federal laws and regulations.
1.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
/_�
0
Refer to the Division 1 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general
requirements for cutting and patching.
Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and
processes of cutting and patching.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 2 5/11/12
�
�
�
'
�
'
L_ J
,
�
'
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C.
D.
E.
Arrange for repairs required to restore other work because of damage
caused as a result of electrical installations.
No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work
that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials
required to:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
Remove and replace defective work.
Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the
contract documents.
Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
Upon written instructions from the engineer, uncover and restore work
to provide for engineer observation of concealed work.
F. Cut, remove and legally dispose of, selected electrical equipment,
components, and materials as indicated; including, but not limited to, removal
of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the
new work.
G.
0
Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not
indicated or scheduled to be removed.
Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to
prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
I. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through remodeling or
demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained
operational. When transit services must be interrupted, provide temporary
services for the affected areas and notify the owner prior to changeover.
1.06 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS:
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and
Division 1 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures.
B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 3 5/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
when submitted by the contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and
material suppliers directly to the engineer will not be processed.
1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Refer to the Insirucfions to Bidders and the Division 1 Section: PRODUCTS
AND SUBSTITUTION for requirements in selecting products and requesting
substitutions.
1.08 PRODUCT LISTING:
Q
�
Prepare listing of major electrical equipment and materials for the project.
Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the
Division 1 Section: PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
C. When finro or more items of the same material or equipment are required,
they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity
does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet
metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar
equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as otherwise
indicated.
�
E
F
Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected
items.
No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted
to the engineer at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids.
If the engineer approves any proposed substitutions, such approval will be
set forth in an addendum.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers,
types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct
identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during
shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is
authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.
C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize
construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and
equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient
flow of installation.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 4 5/11 /12
�
�
�
�
'
LJ
�
�
�
,
�
[__�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
,
l�
,
,
�
,
�
�
�
'
`J
�
,
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS:
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or PROJECT
RECORD DOCUMENTS for requirements. The following paragraphs
supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location, both exterior
and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines;
concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch
electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support
and hanger details; change orders; concealed control system devices.
C
L�7
Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; change orders; actual
equipment and materials used.
Contractor shall provide engineer with record drawings (AutoCAD compatible
file format) and one set of blueprints.
1.11 WARRANTIES:
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: SPECIFIC WARRANTIES for procedures
and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment
specifications for warranty requirements.
B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16 into a
separated set of vinyl- covered, three-ring binders, tabulated and indexed for
easy reference.
C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or
equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or
bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for
filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
1.12 CLEANING:
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL
CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning.
END OF SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 5
5/11/12
,
�
2 ,
3 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
4 ,
,
�
�
�
LJ
�
,
'
,
�
�
�
�
�
,
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 6 5/11 /12 �
'
,
'
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
I�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
electrical raceways specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following:
Heavy Wall Aluminum
Rigid nonmetallic PVC Schedule 80 conduit
Liquid-tight flexible PVC coated metal conduit
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway
systems of types and sizes require, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience on projects with electrical raceway work similar to
that required for this project.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. UL Compliance Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of
UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems.
Provide raceway products and components which have been UL
listed and labeled.
RACEWAYS
16110 - 1
05/11/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. General: Provide aluminum conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades,
sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated.
B. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection
determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with
applicable portions of NEC for raceways.
C�?
�
Rigid aluminum Conduit: Provide rigid aluminum, heavy wall, threaded
type.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Non-metallic Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible
non-metallic conduit for all motor connections.
E. Conduit Fittings: Couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 2" and
smaller shall be aluminum hex-nut, expansion-gland type. Aluminum set
screw type fittings may be used for conduit sizes 2�/z" and larger.
2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS
A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes
and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not
indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring
requirements which comply with provisions for NEC for raceways.
B. Electrical Plastic Conduit:
1. Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 80, 90°C, UL-rated, constructed of
Schedule 80, 90 polyvinyl chloride. For direct burial, UL listed and
in conformity with NEC Article 347.
C. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct
accessories of types, sizes and materials, complying with manufacturer's
published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing.
D. Conduii Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of types,
shapes and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC
requirements. Construct conduit bodies with threaded conduit-entrance
ends, removable covers, either cast or galvanized steel and corrosion-
resistant screws.
RACEWAYS
16110 - 2 05/11/12
,
�
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
LJ
,
L'
,
'
'
�
�I
�
�
,
i
�
f�
L_J
'
'
�
�
r-�
L,!
�
lJ
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 OBSERVATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed
and substrate which will support raceways. Notify contractor in wiring of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
A. General: Raceways run below grade, under floors on grade or in concrete
shall be PVC heavy wall type (Schedule 80) conduit, provided rigid
aluminum conduit is used on elbows and risers to boxes, cabinets, etc.
B. Sizes of raceways shall be not less than NEC requirements and shall not
in any case be less than indicated on drawings. Larger size raceways
and/or pull boxes shall be installed if there is excessive length unbroken
run or excessive number of bends. Combining of circuits other than those
indicated on the drawings will not be permitted.
C. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, boxes and panel work
as necessary to interFace installation of electrical raceways and
components with other work.
1. Avoid use of similar
possibility of electrolysis
coast surfaces with
assembling.
metals throughout system to eliminate
. Where dissimilar metals are in contact,
corrosion inhibiting compound before
2. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished
by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only
after receiving review of dimensions and after checking location
with other trades.
3. Provide nylon pull cord in empty conduits where indicated. Test all
empty conduits with ball mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects
ball mandrel. Pay costs involved for restoration of conduit and
surrounding surfaces to original condition.
4. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of
the following conditions:
a. Exterior location.
b. Moist or humid atmosphere
expected to accumulate.
RACEWAYS
16110 - 3
where condensate can be
05/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
J.
K.
c. Corrosive atmosphere.
d. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
Cut conduits straight, ream properly and cut threads for heavy wall conduit
deep and clean.
Field-bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort
nor vary internal diameter.
Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by two (2) locknuts
and terminate with bushing. Install lock nuts inside and outside enclosure.
Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings.
Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues, hot
water pipes or other sources of heat. Do not install horizontal raceway
runs below water and steam piping.
Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited.
Where required, use 3-piece union or split couplings.
Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of
cables/wires within raceways.
L. Concealed Conduits:
1
2.
Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or
outside are to have conduit threads painted with corrosion-inhibiting
compound before couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and
conduit sufficiently tight to ensure water tightness.
For floors-on-grade, install conduits under concrete slab.
3. Install underground conduits a minimum of 24" below finished
grade.
4. All conduits installed below grade or under concrete slab to be
minimum of 1 inch.
M. Conduits in Concrete Slab:
1. Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing
steel. Place conduits either parallel or at 90° to main reinforcing
steel.
RACEWAYS
16110 - 4 05/11/12
'
,
r
�
�
�
LJ
�
�
�
,
�
�. J
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
,
�
,
�
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
L�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
N
O
2. Separate conduits by not less than diameter of largest conduit to
ensure proper concrete bond.
3. Conduits crossing in slab must be reviewed for proper cover by
engineer.
4. Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceed one-third (1/3) of slab
thickness.
Install conduits as not to damage or run through structural members.
Avoid horizontal or cross runs in building partitions or side walls.
Exposed Conduits:
1
2.
3
4
�
Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit
systems neatly, parallel with or at right angles to walls of building.
Install exposed conduit work as not to interFere with ceiling inserts,
lights or ventilation ducts or outlets.
Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps or clips.
Support conduits minimum of 18" on each side of bends and outlet
boxes and on spacing not to exceed 8'-0".
Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors
for supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement.
Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits
installed in space above hung ceilings and in crawl spaces.
P. Non-Metallic Conduits:
1
2
Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations
of manufacturer.
Install PVC conduits in accordance with NEC and in compliance
with local utility practices.
Q. Conduit Fittings:
1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with
sharp edge for digging into metal and ridged outside circumference
for proper fastening.
RACEWAYS
16110 - 5 05/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
2. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1" and are to have
flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent
injury to cable insulation.
3. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1" and
larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides.
Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing.
4. Bushing of standard or insulated type to have screw type grounding
terminal.
5. Miscellaneous fittings such
unions, split couplings and
their particular application.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece
plugs to be specifically designed for
A. General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways for
conductors to form continuous electrical conductor and connect to
electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical
continuity and rigid mechanical assembly.
B. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of
electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with
corrosion-inhibiting compound before assembling.
�
,
LJ
�
�
�
�
�
��
C. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion ,
joints are crossed.
D. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings supplied by
raceway manufacturer. No field bends of raceway sections will be
permitted.
E. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural
materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported.
F. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull,
or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall
not be permitted for use with surface raceway installations.
G. Raceway penetrations of fire-rated walls and/or floors shall be sealed to
maintain integrity of construction. All products, materials and methods of
installation shall be UL approved and meet NFPA requirements.
H. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, notified by engineer and/or
authorities having jurisdiction, the following materials may be used for
sealing fire-rated penetrations:
RACEWAYS
16110 - 6
�
�
i
1
�
�
�
05/11/12 �
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
i
�
�
�
�
t
�
t
i
�
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1. Rock Wool: Minimum four pound cubit foot density; flame spread
15, smoke developed 0, fuel contribution 0 by ASTM 384; minimum
melting point 2000°F.
2. Concrete and masonry are also approved firestop materials by
NFPA 90A.
3. UL approved products such as Nelson Type CLK Silicon Sealant.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed.
Submit complete data on fire-stopping materials and construction methods
for review by engineer before proceeding with work.
END OF SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
16110 - 7
05/11/12
,
�
1
2 �
3 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
RACEWAYS
16110 - 8
�
�
��
LJ
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
f]
�
��
�
05/11/12 �
�
�
L�
�
,
L�
�
�J
�J
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
i
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires
and cables specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Q
L:3
C.
Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and
schedules. All conductors shall be copper.
Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this Section
include the following:
Copper conductors
Power conductors
Split-bolt connectors
Wirenut connectors
Instrumentation cables
Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project
are as follows:
1. For power distribution circuits
2. For motor-branch circuits
3. For instruments
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire
and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful
installation experience with projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling
work similar to that required for this project.
WIRES AND CABLES
16120 - 1 05/11/12
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.04
C
�
��
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to �
construction, installation, and color-coding of electrical wires and cables.
D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds. 82,
"Test Procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors",
and Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems
in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems.
E. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, B2,
B3, B8 and D-753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not
less than 98% at 20°C (68°F).
F. The following systems of color-coding shall be strictly adhered to:
Grounded Leads Green
Grounded Neutral Leads White
277/480 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Brown, Orange and Yellow
120/208 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Red, Blue, Black
�1,,
J
L�
�
��
�
G. The color code assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed
throughout. ,
H. Where existing base building color-coding differs from color-coding
assigned herein. Contractor shall use existing color coding as required to
maintain consistency. Advise engineer in writing of color-coding to be
used.
I. UL Compliance: Comply with all applicable requiremetns of UL Standard
13 and 225D. Provide PLTC and ITC for indoor or outdoor installation,
suitable for NEC Class 1, Division 2 Hazardous Locations.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
I1
�
Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory-fabricated type
containers, or wound on NEMA specified type wire and cable reels.
Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect
products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic.
C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing
wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance
integrity of wires/cables is maintained.
WIRES AND CABLES
16120 - 2 05/11/12
�
�
�
�
C�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
,
�
�
�
,
'
�
�
�
�
I,
�
�
�
�
�
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Wires and Cables:
A. Provide factory-fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials
for applications and services indicated.
B. Power conductor insulation shall be dual type THHN/THWN 75°C (167°F)
for dry, damp, and wet locations. Conductor insulation with single type
marking THHN 90°C (194°F) may be used for dry locations only.
C. Instrumentation cables shall be 300V UL Type PLTFC & ITC, 105°C
copper conductors, 7 strands soft bare annealed copper with PVC flame
retardant insulation, sunlight resistant PVC jacket and overal aluminum
shield and copper drain wire. Choose multiple paris for intended
application.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES:
A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as
indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL,
and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized
industry practices.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all branch circuit conductors shall be No. 12
AWG. Branch circuits over 75 feet in length shall be No. 10 AWG unless
noted otherwise.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Install all wiring in metallic or PVC conduit.
Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in
same raceway.
Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. Compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave
wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
Keep conductor splices to minimum.
H. Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent-or-better mechanical
strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use splices
and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
WIRES AND CABLES
16120 - 3 05/11/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed feeder wires and cables
with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure
requirements are fulfilled. A list of feeders tested shall be submitted to the
engineer indicating the insulation resistance level for each cable.
B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for
short-circuits.
C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and
demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where
necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance.
END OF SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
16120 - 4
05/11/12
,
�
�
r
�
'
�
�
CJ
,
,
�
�
r
�
�
�
i
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 16135
ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section,
and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical wiring
boxes and fittings specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
�
3
Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings
and schedules.
Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this Section include the
following:
Control Panel
Outlet boxes
Junction boxes
Pull boxes
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical
boxes and fittings of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3)
years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience on projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar
to those required for this project.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and
installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514-
Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide
electrical boxes and fittings which are UL listed and labeled.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
16135 - 1 05/11 /12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2�
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS:
A. Outlet Boxes: Provide aluminum ou#let wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch
capacities, and sizes (including box depths as indicated), suitable for
installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting
holes and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and
sides.
Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for
each iristallation; including box supports, mounting ears and brackets,
wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps
and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible
with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for
individual wiring situations.
B. Device Boxes: Provide aluminum, non-gangable device boxes, of shapes,
cubic inch capacities, and sizes (including box depths as indicated), suitable
for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush or
surface mounting as indicated with mounting holes, and with cable-size
knockout openings in bottom and ends and with threaded screw holes in end
plates for fastening devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion-resistant
screws for fastening cable clamps and for equipment type grounding.
1. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required
for each installation; including mounting brackets, device box
extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board
expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes
being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring
situations.
2. Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4" square boxes or gang boxes,
not less than 1'/z' deep. Boxes shall be provided with extension rings
and/or covers with sufficient depth to bring the covers flush with the
finished wall.
3. Boxes for flush mounting in concrete block work with one or two
devices shall have covers with square corners on the raised portion of
the cover. The covers shall have a sufficient amount of depth to be
flush with the face of the block. The bottom side of the covers or
boxes shall be installed at the masonry course nearest to the
dimension specified or noted.
4. Outlet boxes for exposed wall mounting and outdoor installation shall
be cast metal type "FS" or "FD" boxes with suitable cast aluminum
covers. Weatherproof receptacle covers shall have spring hinged lids.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
16135 - 2 05/11 /12
'
�
�
u
,
�
,
,
r
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
C
,
'
'
�
�
��
i
LJ
�
,
,
I _;
�
�
,
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2�
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C. Rain-Tight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant, cast-metal, rain-tight
outlet wiring boxes; of types, shapes and sizes (including depth of boxes),
with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast-metal face
plates with spring-hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each
application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion- resistant plugs and
fasteners.
D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide aluminum junction and pull boxes, with
screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location
and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts,
bolts, screws and washers.
E. Control Panels:
1
2
The control panel shall contain, as a minimum, control devices as
shown on drawings.
The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4x stainless steel,
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 50 type 4 listed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS:
A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
�
C
❑�
Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring
devices, and raceway installation work.
Provide weather-tight boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to
weather or moisture.
Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have
been removed.
E. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to
enclosed electrical wiring. All existing and new junction boxes within the
project area shall be made accessible. Relocate existing junction boxes as
required to comply with the NEC.
F
G
Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish
thickness.
Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces
to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
16135 - 3 05/11 /12
1
3
4
5
H. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris
and damage.
END OF SECTION 16135
�
�
�
,
'
'
,
�
�
�
t
�
I
!
1
�1
!
1
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
16135 - 4 05/11 /12 ,
'
'
C�
r
CJ
,
,
,
,
�
�
r
,
,
,
�
,
�
L_J
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16142
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
electrical connections for equipment specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and
schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include
connections used for providing electrical power to equipment.
B. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of
equipment, are specified in other Division 16 sections, and are work of this
Section.
C. Motor starters and controllers not furnished as integral part of equipment
are specified in applicable Division 16 sections and are work of this
Section.
D. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors
and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division
16 sections, and are work of this Section.
E. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Division 16
section, "Electrical Identification", and is work of this Section.
F. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other
electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 16
sections, and are work of this Section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical
connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary
connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes,
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16142 - 1 05/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
and cable ties; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least two (2) years of successful
installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for
equipment similar to that required for this project.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type
products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals
and splices) for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and
Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited
to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide
electrical connection products and materials which are UL listed and
labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete
assembly of materials; including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure
connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, cable ties,
solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to
complete splices and terminations of types indicated. Metal shall not be
used for outdoor applications. The contractor shall use aluminum for
outdoor installations.
B. Metal Conduit and Fittings, General: Provide metal conduit and fittings of
types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type
service. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and
comply with NEC requirements for raceways. Provide products complying
with Division 16 Basic Electrical and in accordance with the following
listing of inetal conduit and fittings:
Rigid aluminum conduit.
Rigid metal conduit fittings.
Flexible metal conduit.
Flexible metal conduit fittings.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings.
C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors:
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16142-2
,
�
,
�
,
'
,
�
'
�
�
r
�
�
�
��
�
,
�
05/11/12 �
'
,
,
'
�
'
LJ
,
J
'
,
,
CJ
1
,
�
L;
i
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with
Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods section "Wires
and Cables".
2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables
(conductors) for electrical connections which match (including sizes
and ratings) wires/cables which are supplying electrical power.
Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at
20°C (68°F).
D. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals
which mate and match (including sizes and ratings) with equipment
terminals, and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended
applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OBSERVATION:
A. Observe area and conditions under which electrical connections for
equipment are to be installed and notify contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:
A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions, with recognized industry practices, and
complying with applicable requirements of UL and NEC to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, racevvay, and
equipment installation as necessary to properly interface installation of
electrical connections for equipment with other work.
C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring
diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper
interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
D. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and
operational facilities unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized
otherwise in writing by owner or engineer. Provide temporary service
during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary, schedule
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16142 - 3 05/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring
systems. When that "cutting-over" has been successfully accomplished,
remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.
E. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater
insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those
conductors being spliced.
F. Prepare cables and wires by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket,
and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where
cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through
tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper
conductors while skinning wire.
G
H
Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to
facilitate inspection, testing, and maintenance.
Provide flexible conduit for motor connections and other electrical
equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration.
Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other
electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration; and also
where connections are subjected to one or more of the following
conditions:
1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to
accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Water spray.
5. Dripping oil, grease, or water.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry
has been energized with rated power source, test connections to
demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that
direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION 16142
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16142 - 4
,
'
,
,
�
u
,
,
,
��
,
�
'
'
,
r
u
�
05/11 /12 �
'
�
r
�
'
�
,
u
�
'
,
�
���
,
�
'
1
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 16143
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and generai provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wiring
devices specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution
systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.
B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:
Receptacles
Ground-fault circuit interrupters
Switches
Wall Cover Plates
1.03 QUAUTY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical
wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least two (2) years of successful
installation experience on projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those
required for this project.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and
wiring of electrical wiring devices.
D. UL Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are UL listed and labeled.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices and
wall plates.
WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 1 05/11l12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
providing wiring devices which may be incorporated in the work include;
but are not limited to, the following (for each type and rating of wiring
device):
Bryant Electric, Inc.
Harvey Hubbell Inc.
Pass and Seymour Inc.
2.02 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES:
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and
electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA
Stds. Pub/No. WD1. Provide grey color devices except as otherwise
indicated.
�
C
Receptacles:
1. All receptacles shall be the grounding type with ground connection
made through an extra pole that shall be permanently connected to
the green grounding conductor.
2. Duplex receptacles for 20 ampere, 120 volt service shall be two-
pole, three-wire receptacles, rated 20 amperes at 125 volts.
Receptacles shall be Harvey Hubbell, Inc., Catalog No. 5362-G.
3. Single receptacles for 20 amps, 120 volts service shall be finro-pole,
three-wire rated 20 amperes at 125 volts. Receptacles shall be
Harvey Hubbell Inc., Catalog No. 5361-G.
Switches:
1. Snap: Provide toggle switches, rated 20 amperes at 120/277 volts,
quiet type, and shall be UL approved without derating for tungsten
lamp loads or inductive loads. All switches shall have a grounding
terminal which shall be connected to the green grounding
conductor. The following catalog numbers are Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
Tvpe Cataloa No.
Single Pole HBL 1221-G
WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 2
'
'
�
�
LJ
,
,
,
,
,
,
��
�
'
,
!J
,
�
05/11 /12 �
�
�
�
�
'
'
'
'
�
��
„
,
,
��
�
'
,
�J
,
'
'
,
LJ
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2.03 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:
Q
�
`In Use' covers for receptacles.
Weatherproof caps for switches.
C. All wall plates shall be stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES:
A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of
Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill
project requirements.
B. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from
excess building materials, dirt, and debris.
C. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
D. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
3.02 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES:
A. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise contractor
regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of
substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged,
including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
3.03 GROUNDING:
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for all wiring devices, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.04 TESTING:
A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity and for
short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained.
Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 16143
WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 3
05/11/12
�
�
1
2 '
3 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
'
r
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
t
�
�
WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 4 05/11/12 '
II
�
'
�
,
'
'
�
�I
�
,
,
,
�
,
'
�
,
,
r
�
lJ
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16170
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to circuit
and motor disconnects specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated on
drawings and schedules. All enclosures shall be NEMA Type 4X stainless
steel.
B. Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this Section include the
following:
Equipment disconnects.
Motor-circuit disconnects.
C. Wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in
connection with circuit and motor disconnect work are specified in other
Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit and
motor disconnect switches of types and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
three (3) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience with projects utilizing circuit and motor disconnect
work similar to that required for this project.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to
construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect
devices.
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
16170 - 1 05/11/12
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
D. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and
Dead-Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches
which have been UL listed and labeled.
E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds.
Pub No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches" and 250, "Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)."
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
�
,
�
�
�
,
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit and motor disconnect �
switches.
B. Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each circuit
and motor disconnect with proposed switch and accessories clearly
identified on each sheet. Identify each device with corresponding names,
abbreviations (numbers and lettering) to match terminology of contract
documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject
manufacturers offering circuit and
incorporated in the work are limited to:
Square D Company.
Cutler-Hammer
General Electric Co.
2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES:
to compliance with requirements,
motor disconnects which may be
A. Heavy-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type,
NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and
electrical characteristics indicated; incorporating quick-make, quick-break
type switches. Construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position
with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of
enclosure base and whose operating position is easily recognizable, and
is padlockable in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high-
conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts and positive
pressure type reinforced fuse clips.
1. All fuses for safety switches shall be dual element, cartridge type.
Fuses shall be Bussman "Fusetron" or Chase-Shawmut "Trionic."
The contractor shall furnish and install proper size fuses where
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
16170-2
�
��
�
'
�
'
,
�
,
�
,
�
05/11/12
'
�I
1
L�
'
�
'
'
'J L
��
J
LJ
�
LJ
�
r-,
�i
�
C�
'
,
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
required for all fusible equipment and shall furnish to the owner one
spare fuse for each fuse installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
NEMA, NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with
recognized industry practices.
B. Install disconnect switches for use with motor-driven appliances and
motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top
of cabinet or enclosure 6'-6" above finished floor; shall be properly aligned;
and shall be adequately supported independently of the connecting
raceways and other equipment. All steel shapes, etc., necessary for the
support of the equipment shall be furnished and installed where the
building structure is not suitable for mounting the equipment directly
thereon. Unless otherwise indicated, all branch circuit protective devices
enclosures shall be NEMA type 4, general purpose type. Branch circuit
protective devices installed outdoors or exposed to the weather shall have
weatherproof enclosures, NEMA Type 4X stainless steel.
3.02 GROUNDING:
A. Provide equipment grounding connections sufficiently tight to assure a
permanent and effective ground for electrical disconnect switches where
indicated.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches,
energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site,
then retest to demonstrate compliance. Otherwise remove and replace
with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16170
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
16170 - 3
05/11/12
'
,
2 �
3 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
4
'
�
�
,
�
'
il
„�
'
lJ
�
'
,
'
r--,
J
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS ,
16170 - 4 05/11/12
�
'
�J
�
��
�
'
'
'
'
1
,
'
,
,
,
,
�
�
'
'
�
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to
electrical supporting devices specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
�
0
Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals is indicated by drawings
and schedules and/or specified in other Division 16 sections.
Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this Section
include the following:
Clevis hangers.
One-hole conduit straps.
Two-hole conduit straps.
Round steel rods.
Expansion anchors.
Toggle bolts.
Wall and floor seals.
Corn Clamps.
C. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory
fabricated equipment are specified as part of that equipment assembly in
other Division 16 sections.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting
devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience with projects utilizing electrical supporting device
work similar to that required for this project.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 1 05/11/12
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
i�
� �
u
'
C. NECA Compliance: Compiy with National Electrical Contractors '
Association's "Standard of Installation", pertaining to anchors, fasteners,
hangers, supports, and equipment mounting.
D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL listed and '
labeled.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on supporting devices,
including catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions for each
type of support, anchor, sleeve, and seal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES:
A. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's
standard materials, design and construction, in accordance with published
product information and as required for complete installation and as herein
specified. Where more than one type of supporting device meets
indicated requirements, selection is installer's option.
�
C
Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials
indicated and having the following construction features:
1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting conduit; aluminum with '/2"
diameter hole for round steel rod, approximately 54 pounds per 100
units.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Reducing Couplings: Aluminum rod reducing coupling, '/Z' by 5/8",
approximately 16 pounds per hundred 100 units.
One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; aluminum.
Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; aluminum.
Hexagon Nuts: For'/2" rod size, aluminum.
Round Aluminum Rod: '/2' diameter.
��
j��
„
'
,
'
�
�
��
�
l�
,
'
'
�
Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; ,
aluminum.
Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated with the
following construction features: (all aluminum)
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 2 05/11/12
'
i
�
'
'
1
�
�,
'�I
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1.
��
Expansion Anchors: '/Z".
Toggle Bolts: Springhead, 3/16" by 4".
D. Sieeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and
materials indicated, with the following construction features:
1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall
and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated, suitable for sealing
around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and
walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body,
neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings,
pressure clamps, and cap screws. Seals shall be fire-rated where
required.
E. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting
electrical equipment; aluminum of types and sizes indicated. Construct
with 3/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, and with the following
fittings which mate and match with U-channel:
Fixture hangers
Channel hangers
End caps
Beam clamps
�ring studs
Thinwall conduit clamps
Rigid conduit clamps
Conduit hangers
2.02 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES:
A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate from
schedule 40 galvanized aluminum pipe. Remove burrs.
B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrate foundation walls
below grade or exterior walls. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with
nontoxic, UL classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal. Seals
shall be fire-rated where required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES:
A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as indicated, in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry
practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply
with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 3 05/11/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
I:�
C.
Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work,
as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other
work.
Install hangers, supports and attachments to support piping properly from
building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where
possible. Install supports with spacing indicated and in compliance with
NEC requirements.
END OF SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 4
05/11/12
�
,
'
�
,
�
�
'
���
�;
._;
�
'
,
'
'
�
C
,
�
'
1
�
1
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
electrical identification specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
r_i
:
Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and
schedules.
Types of electrical identification work specified in this Section include the
following:
Equipment/system identification signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
A. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs:
1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in
sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard
letter style of sizes and wording indicated; black face and white
core plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for
mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is
necessary because of substrate.
2. Signs shall be black face with white core plies (letter color).
a. Thickness: '/�s', except as otherwise indicated.
b. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except
contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot, or
should not, penetrate substrate.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 1 05/11/12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
s
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
c.
Nameplates for essentiai electrical systems shall be red with
white letters.
2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS:
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used
in electrical identification work with corresponding designations shown,
specified, or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturer
or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of
electrical systems and equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION:
A. General Installation Requirements:
,
'
�
,
�,
L
'
�
�
1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance '
with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.
2. Coordination:
which require
painting.
Where identification is to be applied to surfaces '
finish, install identification after completion of
3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of '
governing authorities for identification of electrical work.
B. Equipment/System Identification:
1. General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit
of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit
of each electrical system including communication/ control/signal
systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory
identification or signal system. Provide text matching terminology
and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings.
Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical
work:
a. Panelboards, control panels, electrical cabinets and
enclosures.
b. Access panels/doors to electrical facilities.
c. Transformers.
d. Junction and pull boxes, including box designation, voltage
class of wiring.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 2
'
�
,
'
'
'
,
05/11 /12 �
J
�
�
'
1
,
'
'
'
1
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
,
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
2
e. Disconnect switches, motor starters, contactors, including
current origination.
Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise
indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure
to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners
should not, or cannot, penetrate substrate.
END OF SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 3
05/11/12
1
2
3
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 4
05/11/12
,
'
�
�
'
,
'
'
'
�J
'
'
'
,
'
,
�
,
'
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
SECTION 16452
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is
part of each Division 16 Section making reference to grounding specified
herein.
1.02 SUMMARY:
n
�
The extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by
drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding
work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment.
The type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this Section
includes the following:
Solidly grounded
C. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this Section
includes the following:
Electrical power systems
Grounding electrodes
Separately derived systems
Raceways
Service equipment
Enclosures
Equipment
D. Refer to other Division 16 sections for wires/cables, electrical raceways,
boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction
with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section.
1.03 SU BM ITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding
products and associated accessories.
GROUNDING
16452 - 1 05/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the
manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types and ratings
required, and ancillary grounding materials; including stranded cable,
copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrfldes, and
bonding jumpers; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications:
installation experience on
that required for project.
C. Codes and Standards:
'
'
,
'
'
Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
projects with electrical grounding work similar to '
Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical
code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as
applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to
systems, circuits, and equipment.
2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL
Standards No.'s 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding
Equipment", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment", pertaining to
grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. In
addition, comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and
Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide
grounding and bonding products that are UL listed and labeled for
their intended usage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING:
A. Materials and Components, General: Except as otherwise indicated,
provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with
assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires,
connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate
electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional
accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type
component product meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's
option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide
products that comply with NEC and UL, requirements, and with
established industry standards for those applications indicated.
B. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding
copper conductors for grounding system connections that match power
supply wiring materials and are sized according to NEC.
GROUNDING
16452 - 2 05/11/12
'
,
'
'
�
,
1
'
'
�
�
'
I�
�
�J
�
'
'
�
�
'
'
'
,
'
,
�
�I
,
'
'
'
,
�
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical
bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs, and clamps as recommended
by bonding plate, connector, terminal, and clamp manufacturers for
indicated applications.
D. Ground Electrodes: Solid copper, 5 Ohms, three-quarter inch (3/")
diameter by twenty feet (20').
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and
bonding connections are to be made, and notify contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS:
A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions; applicable portions of NEC,
NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized
industry practices, to ensure that products comply with requirements.
B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation
of electrical grounding and bonding system work with other work.
C. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance to the
building cold water line and to three (3) three-fourths inch (3/a") diameter,
twenty feet (20') long ground rods spaced ten feet (10') apart.
D. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to separate grounding
electrode.
E. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed
noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway
systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground
connectors, and plumbing systems.
F. All raceways with No. 10 or 12 AWG phase conductors for receptacles,
lighting fixtures, and similar circuits shall be provided with a parity-sized
green equipment ground conductor. Ground conductor shall be installed
in entire raceway system, including wall switches and flexible conduit to
light fixtures. Equipment ground conductor sizes for circuits with phase
conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are indicated on drawings. Ground
conductors shall be connected to ground buss in panelboards.
GROUNDING
16452 - 3 05/11/12
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
3.03
G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment-grounding
conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Conductors looped under
screw or bolt heads will not be permitted.
H. Connect grounding electrode conductors to one inch (1 ") diameter or
grea#er metallic cold water pipe, using a suitably sized ground clamp.
Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange.
'
'
�
,
I. Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces to ensure �
electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.
J. Provide a grounding bushing and a continuous copper bonding jumper
from the bushing to the equipment ground bus in all feeders. The bonding
jumper shall be the same size as the equipment ground conductor.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding
systems, test ground resistance with g�ound resistance tester. Where
tests show resistance-to-ground is over twenty-five (25) ohms, take
appropriate action to reduce resistance to twenty-five (25)ohms or less by
driving additional ground rods then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Furnish report to Engineer of Record; include testing method used, testing
equipment description (mfg and catalog number), testing equipment
certificate of calibration, ohmic readings at 10 seconds, 30 seconds and at
60 seconds duration, location of readings (as a minimum tests shall be
recorded at service entrance and at Motor Control Center).
END OF SECTION 16452
GROUNDING
16452 - 4
,
'
LJ
LJ
'
'
'
,
�
'
'
�i
�
'
05/11/12 �
'
, 1
2
' 4
5
, 6
8
'9
10
11
'12
13
14
'15
16
17
,18
19
20
,21
22
23
,24
25
26
27
' 28
29
30
' 31
32
33
�34
35
36
1 37
38
39
'40
41
42
'43
44
45
�46
47
48
'
�
SECTION 16481
MOTORS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Furnish and install the motors as hereinafter specified and as called for in other
sections of these Specifications.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
Motor shall be sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed
their full-rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The motor manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer certified dimension
prints showing nameplate data and outline dimensions within three weeks
of the date they receive the order.
B. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual and parts lists as specified in
Division 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
C. Guarantee: All equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall
be guaranteed against defects of workmanship, materials and improper
installation for a period of eighteen month from date of acceptance. All
such equipment or parts proven defective, due to the above noted causes,
shall be replaced in the machines by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to
the Owner.
D. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Division 1 SPECIFIC
WARRANTIES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RATING
A. Unless otherwise noted, all motors shall be of the low voltage type. All
motors 2 through 100 horsepower shall be rated 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60
Hertz A.C.; motors 125 horsepower through 300 horsepower shall be rated
460 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, and motors below 2 horsepower shall be rated
115/230 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hertz A.C.
MOTORS
16481-1 05/11 /12
1
2
4
5
6
8
10
11
2.02 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
A. Motors 25 HP and larger shall have a 120-volt space heater for moisture
controi.
B. Unless specifically noted in other sections of these Specifications, a11
motors shall have an efficiency as indicated in the table below. Motors
shall be "qremium efficiency" type.
TABLE 1
Motor Min. Max. Motor Min. Max.
HP Eff. dba HP Eff. dba
1-2 84.0% 74 25-30 92.0% 92
3-5 86.5% 79 40-50 93.0% 97
7.5-10 90.2% 84 60-75 94.0% 100
15-20 91.0% 89 100 94.1 % 102
12
13 C. Motors operating with variable frequency drives shall indicate on the
14 nameplate that they are suitable for their intended applications (Inverter
15 duty Rated) and they shall be provided with an integral temperature switch
16 that opens on high temperature. Motors operating with Variable Frequency
17 Drives (VFD's) shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1 Part 31.
18
19 2.03 CONSTRUCTION
20
21 A. General:
22
23 1. All dripproof and weather protected Type I motors shall have epoxy
24 encapsulated windings. Totally enclosed motors shall not be
25 encapsulated. Motors not readily available with encapsulated
26 windings may be standard type. Motors exposed to the outside
27 atmosphere shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) unless
28 otherwise specified.
29
30 2. Squirrel-cage rotors shall be made from high-grade steel
31 laminations adequately fastened together and to the shaft, or shall
32 be cast aluminum or bar-type construction with brazed end rings.
33
34
35
36
37 B. Low Voltage, Three Phase Motors:
MOTORS
16481-2 05/11 /12
,
'
'
,
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
�
�
'
��
'
�
,
,
�
,
rl
�
�
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1. Motors shall be of the squirrel-cage induction type, NEMA design B.
Horizontal, vertical solid shaft, vertical hollow shaft, normal thrust
and high thrust types shall be furnished as specified herein. All
motors shall be built in accordance with current NEMA, IEEE, ANSI
and AFBMA standards where applicable. Motors shall be of the
type and quality described by these Specifications, fully capable of
performing in accordance with manufacturer's nameplate rating, and
free from defective material and workmanship.
2. Motors shall have normal or high starting torque (as required), low
starting current (not to exceed 600 percent full load current), and low
slip.
3. Outdoor motors shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled construction
with 1.15 service factor unless otherwise noted. Indoor motors shall
be ODP unless otherwise noted.
4
�
Outdoor motors shall be mill and chemical duty suitable for
operation in moist air with hydrogen sutphide gas present.
The output shaft shall be suitable for direct connection or belt drive
as required.
6. Motors shall have
Class F insulation
temperature rise.
a Class B nonhygroscopic insulation system.
may be used but shall be limited to Class B
7. All motors shall have a final coating of chemical resistant corrosion
and fungus protective epoxy fortified enamel finish sprayed over red
primer over all interior and exterior surFaces. Stator bore and rotor
of all motors shall be epoxy coated.
0
0
10
11
12
All fittings, bolts, nuts, and screws shall be 316 stainless steel. Bolts
and nuts shall have hex heads.
All machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor for easy
disassembly.
Conduit boxes shall be gasketed. Lead wires between motor frame
and conduit box shall be gasketed.
Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with condensate drain
hole and epoxy coated motor windings to protect against moisture.
Nameplates shall be stainless steel. Lifting lugs or "O" type bolts
shall be supplied on all frames 254T and larger. Enclosures will
MOTORS
16481-3 05/11 /12
13.
14
15
have stainless steel screen and motors shall be protected for
corrosion, fungus and insects.
Low voltage, three phase motors shall be manufactured by General
Electric, U.S. Motors, Westinghouse or approved equal.
Fractional Horsepower:
a. Fractional horsepower motors shall be rigid, welded-steel,
designed to maintain accurate alignment of motor
components and provide adequate protection. End shields
shall be reinforced, lightweight die-cast aluminum. Windings
shall be of varnish-insulated wire with slot insulation of
polyester film, baked-on bonding treatment to make the stator
winding strongly resistant to heat, aging, moisture, electrical
stresses and other hazards.
b. Motor shaft shall be made from high-grade, cold-rolled shaft
steel with drive-shaft extensions carefully machined to
standard NEMA dimensions for the particular drive
connection.
c. For light to moderate loading, bearings shall be quiet
all-angle sleeve type with large oil reservoir that prevents
leakage and permits motor operation in any position.
d. For heavy loading, bearings shall be carefully selected
precision ball bearings with extra quality, long-life grease, and
large reservoir providing 10 years' normal operation without
relubrication.
Integral Horsepower:
a. Motor frames and end shields shall be cast iron or heavy
fabricated steel of such design and proportions as to hold all
motor components rigidly in proper position and provide
adequate protection for the type of enclosure employed.
1
1
,
�
,
'
'
'
��
'
�
,
�
,
b. Windings shall be adequately insulated and securely braced
to resist failure due to electrical stresses and vibrations. '
c. The shaft shall be made of high-grade machine steel or steel
forging of size and design adequate to withstand the load
stresses normally encountered in motors of the particular
rating. Bearing journals shall be gound and polished.
d. Rotors shall be made from high-grade steel laminations
adequately fastened together, and to the shaft. Rotor
MOTORS
16481-4 05/11 /12
�
'
,
�
!J
�
,
�J
'
'
�I
�J�
'
LJ
�
�
,
,
'
i�
I�
'
LJ
�
'
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
squirrel-cage windings may be copper or bar-type
construction with brazed end rings.
e. Motors shall be equipped with vacuum-degassed antifriction
bearings made to AFBMA Standards, and be of ample
capacity for the motor rating. The bearing housing shall be
large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimize the need
for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be provided for
adding new lubricant and draining out old lubricant without
motor disassembly. The bearing housing shall have long,
tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect against the
entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or leakage of
lubricant out of the bearing cavity.
f. Bearings of high thrust motors will be locked for momentary
upthrust of 30% downthrust. All bearings shall have a
minimum 610 life rating of 100,000 hours in accordance with
AFBMA life and thrust values.
g. Vertical hollow-shaft motors will have nonreverse ratchets to
prevent backspin.
C. Low Voltage, Single Phase Motors:
1. Single phase motors shall be split-phase and capacitor-start
induction types rated for continuous horsepower at the rpm called
for on the Drawings. Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, 60 Hertz,
single phase, open dripproof, or totally enclosed fan cooled as
called for on the Drawings, with temperature rise in accordance with
NEMA Standards for Class B insulation.
2. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall be designed for
severe-d uty.
3. Motors shall have corrosion and fungus protective finish on internal
and external surfaces. All fittings shall have a corrosion protective
plating.
4. Mechanical characteristics shall be the same as specified for
polyphase fractional horsepower motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Motor Connections: All motors shall be connected to the conduit system
by means of a short section of flexible conduit, 18 inch minimum and 60
inches maximum, unless otherwise indicated. For all motor connections,
MOTORS
16481-5
05/11/12
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
�:
the CONTRACTOR shall install a grounding conductor in the conduit and
terminate at the motor control center with an approved grounding clamp.
Connection to motor leads shall be compression type with 3M brand heat
shrink boot.
3.02 TESTS AND CHECKS
�
�
,
,
A. The following tests shall be performed on all motors after installation but '
before putting motors into service.
1. The CONTRACTOR shall megger each motor winding before
energizing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found to be low,
shall notify the Engineer and shall not energize the motor. The
CONTRACTOR shall check direction of rotation of all motors and
reverse connections if necessary. The following table gives
minimum acceptable insulation resistance in megohms at various
temperatures and for various voltages with readings being taken
after one minute of inegger test run.
TABLE 2
Degree
Winding Voltage
Tem erature
°F °C 115V 230V 460V
37 3.9 60 108 210
50 10 32 60 120
68 20 13 26 50
86 30 5.6 11 21
104 45 2.4 4.5 8.8
122 50 1 2 3.7
140 60 .5 .85 1.6
2. The CONTRACTOR shall check each motor for correct clearances
and alignment and for correct lubrication, and shall lubricate if
required in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 16481
MOTORS
16481-6
,
r-,
��
,
,
C'
�
'
���
�
�I
,
�
�
05/11/12 '
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
CONTRACTBOND .....................................................................................................................1
CONTRACT.................................................................................................................................. 3
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6
PROPOSALBOND ...................................................................................................................... 7
AFFIDAVIT.................................................................................................................................. 8
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9
PROPOSAL................................................................................................................................. 10
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................. 13
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ............................................................................................................. 14
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS .....................15
Updated Section V.doc
Page i
OS/18/12
,
�
�
`
�
�
,
�
,
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
GUIGNARD
July 18, 2012
City of Clearwater, Florida
100 South Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756-5520
Re: Authority to Date Bonds and Powers of Attorney
Principal: Wharton-Smith, Inc.
Bond No.: 929551823
Project: Marshall Street WRF C/arifier Rehabilitation Project 11-
0053-UT,1605 Harbor Drive, C/earwater, FL 33755
Dear Sir or Madam:
Please be advised that as Surety on the above referenced bond, executed
on your behalf for this project, we hereby authorize you to date the bonds
and the powers of attorney concurrent with the date of the contract
agreement.
Once dated, please send a copy of the dated bonds to our office.
Attorney In Fact and Florida Lic�nsed Resident Agent
1904 BOOTHE CIRCLE • LONGWOOD, FL 32750
�PH (407) 834-0022 (888) 220-3780 FAX (407) 260-1767 (888) 220-3228 WWW GUIGNARDCOMPANY.COM
�x„�����t�� i�k,��s,���,..:�, e . :z ��..,>���.�' ��� �. _
, � �
�,
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
� Public Work
F.S. Chapter 255.05 Cl)�a)
Cover Page
BOND NO.:
CONTRACTOR NAME:
CONTRACTOR ADDRESS:
CONTRACTOR PHONE NO.:
SURETY COMPANY:
SURETY COMPANY PHONE NO.:
OWNER NAME:
OWNER ADDRESS:
OWNER PHONE NO.:
OBLIGEE NAME: (If contracting
entity is different &om the owner,
the contracting public endty)
OBLIGEE ADDRESS:
OBLIGEE PHONE NO.:
BoND AMOUNT:
CONTRACT NO.: (If applicable)
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
PROJECT LOCATION:
LEGAL DESCRIPTION:
(If applicable)
929551823
Wharton-Smith, Inc.
750 Monroe Road
Sanford, FL 32771
(407) 321-8410
Western Surety Company
P.O. Box 5077
Sioux Falls, SD 57117-5077
(800) 331-6053
City of Clearwater, Florida
100 South Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756-5520
(727) 562-4750
$1,789,887.00/$1,789,887.00
Marshall Street WRF Clarifier Rehabilitation Project 11-0053-UT
1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, FL 33755
FRONT PAGE
All other bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any page number(s) that may be printed thereon.
�l
1
'
�
'
Public Work F.S. Chapter 255.05 (1) (a) Cover page forms and becomes a part of this bond.
sT�r� vF �LOru���
C4t1NTY UF SEMINOLE
BC?ND NUMBER• 929551823
Executed in 2 Counterparts
carr�rttAC~r Bolvv
KNOW ALL M�N BY THESE PRESENTS: That we WHAEtTON-SMITH, INC. as Contractc�r
' and WESTFRN SURF.TY COMPANY (5urety) whose homc address is P, Q. BUX 5077, SIOUX
FALLS, SC}UTH DAKdTA 57117-50'i7
'
'
�l
'
�
�
G
'
'
'
'
n
'
HEItEINAFTER CALLED T�IE "Surety", arc hcld and firmly bound into the City of Glearwater,
Elorida {hcreinafter called the "Uwner") in the �enal sum of t3NE MILLIQN SEVEN HUNDR�D
EYGHTY-NIN� THdUSAND F.IGHT FTUNDRED EIGHTY SEVEN D4LLARS AND NU
CENTS ($I,'789,887.0t1) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successars, and assig►s for the faithful performance of a certain written contract,
��t� �� aay of , 201� entcreci into between the Ganiractar and
the City of Cic.arwater far:
MARSHALG �TREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJFCT I1-005�-UT
a copy of wh'rch said cantract is incorporated herein by r�ference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFCIRE, THE C(}NDITtONS OF THIS OBLiCAT10N ARE SUCH, that if the
C:ontractor sh�il in all respects comply with th� t�rms and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of materia.l and l�bar, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which ineIude the Advertisement for Bids, Form r�f Proposal, Farm of Contract, Farm af
�ur�ty Bond, Instructions ta Bidders, Get�e�al Conditions and Techrfical Spe�iiicatit�ns) and the
Ptans and Specificatians th�rein refencd to and made a part therevf, and �uch alteratians as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as thercin provided for, and shall indernnify and save harmless
the said t�wner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury ar conduct, want of carc or
skill, nc�li�enee or def�ult, includin� patent infringements on the part af the said Contracte�r a�;ents
or employees, in the execution or perfi�rmance of $aid contract, including errars in the plans
fumished by the Contractor, and further, if such "t"ontractor" or "Contractt�rs" shaIl promptly rnake
payment� to all �ersons supplying him, them or it, labor, materzal, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Cantractor, Contractors, Sut�-Contraetor, or Sub-Gc�ntractc�rs, in the prosecution of
the wark provided for in said Contract, this obIi�;ation shall be v�id, otherwise, the Cc�ntractar and
S�urecy jointiy and severally agree to pay tu the 4wner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contract�r would 6c entitled c�n the completic�n of the Contract, and that which the Uwner may
t>e Qbli�ed to pay �or the com�letian of said work by contract or otherwise, & any ciama�es, direct ar
indirect, Qr cc�nsequential, which said thvner may sustain on account of such wark, or on accau�zt of
thc failurc of t�e said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said eontracL
��ntr�ct for Signazuce.dacx Pagr I�>f 16 9/27/2UFD
'
'
�
�
J
This bond is given to comply with Section 255.05 Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a
claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation
provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes.
CQNTRACT BUND
{L)
And the said Contractar and SureEy hereby further bind themselves, their successars, exeeutors,
' administratars, and assz�ns, jointly and severatly, that they rvitl amply artd iully protect the said
C}�ti��cr a�=r�ir�t, anci will pay any and aII �ctiuunts, dan�a�es, �ust� and juc3�rrrents whic6 may be
rccavered against ar whieh the (?wr7er may be called Upon to pay to any person or carporatian by
' reason of any dama�es arisin� from the performance of said work, or af the repair ar maint�nance
thereof, or the manner of doin� the same ar the ne�lect of the �aid C.antractor or his agents ar
scrvants or the improp�r perfarmance af the said work by the Contractor ar his a�;ents ar servants, or
' the inftingements af any patent ri�hts by reasan of the use af any material iurnishcd or work donc;
as aforesaid, or atherwise.
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
'
t
'
And the said Contractar and Surety hcreby further bind ihemselves, their successors, heirs,
cxecutors, admanistrat�rs, and assigns, jointly and severalty, to rcpay the own�r any sum which the
Owner may be com�tled to pay because of any licn far iabor material fumished far the wark,
embraced by said Contraet.
And the said Surety, for thc value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that na change, extension of
time, alteratian t�r addition to the terms of the contraet or io the wark to be performed thereunder �r
the specif�ations accnmpanyin� the sam� shall in any way aCfect its obti�;ations on t1�is bonci* and it
dt�es hereby waive natice of any such change, extension of time, altcratian or �cidition ta the terms
of the cc�ntract or ta the wark ar to the specifications.
IN T�STiMONY WHERE4F, witness the hands and seals of #he parties her�ta this
ciay of , 2412.
A'TTEST:
(itJ , l, `
William C. Robinson, Jr., Corp ate Secretary
WITNESS:
��� �
K thy Clawson
eovx�rExs�cx�n:
N/A
N/A
Cc+ntract far Signature.dac� Pag� 2 of' 16
'
:
rn Surety
��-rn�- , T ,
& nda Licensed Resident Agent
April L. Lively
Inquiries: (407) 834-0022
9/Z?/2010
,
[�
'
��
C
'
'
'
1
'
'
'
'
C
'
�
'
'
LJ
Western Sure�ty Company
POWER OF ATTORI�IEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORI�IEY-IN-FACT
Know All Men By These Presents, That WESTERN SURETY COMPANY, a South Dakota corporation, is a duly organized and existing corporation
having its principal office in the City of Sioux Falls, and State of South Dakota, and that it does by virtue of the signature and seal herein affixed hereby
make, constitute and appoint
J W Guignard, Bryce R Guignard, M Gary Francis, April L Lively, Paul J Ciambriello,
Jennifer L McCarta, Margie L Morris, Peggy Snow, Allyson Foss, Individually
of Longwood, FL, its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on its behalf
bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similaz nature
- In Unlimited Amounts -
and to bind it thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the corporation and all the acts of said
Attomey, pursuant to the authority hereby given, aze hereby ratified and confirmed.
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by
the shareholders of the corporation.
In Witness Whereof, WESTERN SURETY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Senior Vice President and its corporate seal to
be hereto affixed on this 23rd day of August, 2010.
,�+'".�pETy
p� r
_�.
�+ �'4o PONqr�o;$
�
Wi ;_
S '�
�J1�hl p p;P:
State of South Dakota 1
� ss
County of Minnehaha �
WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
Paul . Bruflat, Senior Vice President
On this 23rd day of August, 2010, before me personally came Paul T. Bruflat, to me known, who, being by me duly swom, did depose and say: that he
resides in the Ciry of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota; that he is the Senior Vice President of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY described in and which
executed the above instnunent; that he knows the sea( of said corporation; that the sea( affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so
affixed pursuant to authority given by the Boazd of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and
acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation.
My commission expires }4~4�~~44~~~Oj~~~y�ti�`�'tititih �
' D. KRELL f
November 30, 2012 f EA� NOTARY PUBLIC s� i
d SOUTH DAKOTA a
*4ti44hbhtiV4titi44tibhVtihhtiti +
D. Krell, No Public
CERTIFICATE
I, L. Nelson, Assistant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the Power of Attomey hereinabove set forth is still in
force, and further certify that the By-Law of the corporation printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed
my name and affixed the sea► of the said corporation this
Form F4280-09-06
,,,±":, jaEry �
�F �
�'�Q'�POAq j�+L
�Wi4 �^i°a
x
���:SeAbfp r
�rll DPµ�
day of
WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
, G. Nelson, Assistant Secretary
Authorizing By-Law
ADOPTED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS OF WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-Law duly adopted by the shareholders
of the Company.
Section 7. All bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney, or other obligations of the corporation shall be executed in the
corporate name of the Company by the President, Secretary, and Assistant Secretary, Treasurer, or any Vice President, or by such other
officers as the Boazd of Directors may authorize. The President, any Vice President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer
may appoint Attorneys in Fact or agents who shall have authority to issue bonds, policies, or undertakings in the name of the Company.
The corporate seal is not necessary for the validity of any bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the
corporation. The signature of any such officer and the corporate seal may be printed by facsimile.
'
'
CONTRACT
, This CONTRACT made and entered into this � day of �, �- , 2012 by and between the
City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereina er designated as the "City", and
_�}ha�-��,_�,n,�.�,�� . , of the City of �n-�c,� County of
�U .r; ,,�o�,� and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
' �
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements
' on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
t The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
' following:
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT 11-0053-UT FOR
THE SUM OF ONE MILLION SEVEN HUNDRED EIGHTY-NINE THOUSAND EIGHT
' HUNDRED EIGHTY SEVEN DOLLARS AND NO CENTS ($1,789,887.00)
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
' provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any
advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
' contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors
and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the
City. This contract is contingent upon federal funding from the US Environmental Protection
' Agency State and Tribal Assistance Program, and if this federal funding is not approved or
available, then this contract is void.
' If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations
as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
' and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
' THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
' ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES
TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR
, DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY
CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE
CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS
' OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
'
3of16
�
[�
i
'
CONTRACT
�2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
' In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision sha11 include, but not be limited to, the following:
' employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
, or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
' The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
'
'
'
'
�J
u
�
'
'
t
'
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 ner dav for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 ner
d� shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the
Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to
be conshued as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor
to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithfixl performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor sha11, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
Contract for Signature.docx Page 4 of 16 9/27/2010
'
'
'
�
'
,
'
'
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
,
By: � % � ��-�
William B. Horne, II
City Manager
' Countersigned:
'
ll
'
'
�
L1
'
'
'
�
gy; —��?io !� e/� Cr�\ t�o i
George N. Cretekos,
Mayor
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
Contract for Signature.docx Page 5 of 16
'
Attest:
Assistant City Attorney
WHARTON-SMITH, INC.
� �� ��- m� �.
(Con ot
By: � S
�ana��. �. �c�voi; ��R.�ic�en�iC��
�ti�`"'�t ��,�f.
�'• '• ;
.,�t �,. .. ..<.
� (! U �' � ^ s � ' w
�1 � � Q }-_� . `, "
,
_ � e > „ �. r ��� v� �. n
� L,G� ���
i"' `'- � F� "�
�
� � �� � ^` �
a ` � i
�.
� . i��������'�.
.„
9/27/2010
�
�
'
'
'
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORNn
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn,
deposes and says:
That he is the (TITLE)
, of WHARTON-SMITH. INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at
(herein, the "Contractor").
' That the Contxactor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of
, 20 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal
corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of:
'
'
'
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT 11-0053-UT
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors,
laborers and material men in connection with said work and there aze no liens outstanding of any nature
nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work
against the described property.
That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
' and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
'
'
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this aff'idavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me
' This day of , 20
�J
,
�
�_J
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
Contract for Signature.docx Page 6 of 14
'
:
AFFIANT
PRESIDENT
9/27/2010
'
'
'
u
'
,
,
'
'
I_�
PROPOSAL BOND
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned,
Wharton-Smith, Inc. as Principal, and Western Surety Company
as Surety, who's address is P•O. Box 5077, Sioux Falls, SD
57117-5077 , are held and firmly bound unto
the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of the Amount Bid
Dollars ($ � �% )(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of
which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Wharton-Smith, Inc.
as Principal, and Western Surety Company as
Surety, for work specified as: Marshall Street WRF Clarifier Rehabilitation Project #11-0053-UT
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and
specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the
above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a
contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved
by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue
by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated
damages.
' Signed this 26th day of June
(Principal must indicate whether
' corporation, partnership, company
or individual)
'
The person signing shall, in his own
' handwriting, sign the Principal's
name, his own name and his title;
the person signing for a corporation
' must, by affidavit, show his authority
to bind the corporation.
'
'
�
2012
Updated Section V.doc Page 7 of 16
'
Corporation
Wharton-Smith, Inc.
Principal
&
Florida Licensed Resident Agent
Inquiries: (407) 834-0022
.� .
OS/18/12
'
[J
,
'
�
'
'
'
'
,
�
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
Western Surety Company
POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
Know All Men By These Presents, That WESTERN SURETY COMPANY, a South Dakota corporation, is a duly organized and existing corporation
having its principal office in the City of Sioux Falls, and State of South Dakota, and that it does by virtue of the signature and sea( herein affixed hereby
make, constitute and appoint
J W Guignard, Bryce R Guignard, M Gary Francis, April L Lively, Paul J Ciambriello,
Jennifer L McCarta, Margie L Morris, Peggy Snow, Allyson Foss, Individually
of Longwood, FL, its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on its behalf
bonds, undeRakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature
- In Unlimited Amounts -
and to bind it thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the corporation and all the acts of said
Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given, aze hereby ratified and confirmed.
This Power of Attomey is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by
the shazeholders of the corporation.
[n Wimess Whereof, WESTERN SURETY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by iu Senior Vice President and its corporate seal to
be hereto affixed on this 23rd day of August, 2010.
.,a+i'"S jRETy
��wQ'f0 POA,q'r�`�'se
�Wj� ��i�
��.`4f Av �a�
J` �... P
�►h 0��
State of South Dakota �
ss
County of Minnehaha
WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
Paul . Bruflat, Senior Vice President
On this 23rd day of August, 2010, before me personally came Paul T. Bruflat, to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he
resides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota; that he is the Senior Vice President of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY described in and which
executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so
affixed pursuant to authority given by the Boazd of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authoriry, and
acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation.
My commission expires �4tih4h4444h4<etititiYtiti4titititi�f +
+ D. KRELL s
November 30, 2012 f�� NOTARY PUBLIC s�� f
r SOUTH DAKOTA .r
�4ti444hti444titiNtiStitiYhti4titi *
D. Krell, No Pub(ic
CERTIFICATE
[, L. Nelson, Assistant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the Power of Attomey hereinabove set forth is still in
force, and further certify that the By-Law of the corporation printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed
my name and affixed the seal of the said corporation this 26th day of June, 2012.
, Form F4280-09-06
N
�suaEry�
��P�avoqq't,°;
�W,VO l�tiy
_
_�S�SEAy p
�>ll Dp�'�
WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
• L. Nelson, Assistant Secretary
Authorizing By-Law
ADOPTED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS OF WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-Law duly adopted by the shareholders
of the Company.
Section 7. All bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney, or other obligations of the corporation shall be executed in the
corporate name of the Company by the President, Secretary, and Assistant Secretary, Treasurer, or any Vice President, or by such other
officers as the Board of Directors may authorize. The President, any Vice President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer
may appoint Attorneys in Fact or agents who shall have authority to issue bonds, policies, or undertakings in the name of the Company.
The corporate seal is not necessary for the validity of any bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the
corporation. The signature of any such officer and the corporate seal may be printed by facsimile.
,
'
�
,
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corpora.tion)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF Seminole �
wlliam C. Robinson, Jr. being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is
' Secretary of Wharton-Smith, Inc.
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having
its principal office at:
, 750 Monrce Road, Sanford, FL 32771, Seminole County, Florida
Street & Number City County State
'
'
'
,
t
�
�
'
LJ
LJ
'
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
Wharton-Smith, Inc.
. (Name of Corporation)
Affiant further says that John French is Vice President
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for Wharton-Smith, Inc.
for said corporation by virtue of Board of Directors on August 25, 2010
(state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of the Boazd of
Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption).
Sworn to before me this 26th day of June
, Updated Section V.doc
,
ta� ►�, gpENDA M. FOLSOM
'� '����' * MY COMI� t EE 172?99
* EXPIRES: Apr� 20, 2016
���FOr��� 8onddThuBu�� SarbM
Page 8 of 16
�C� �
Affiant
William C. Ronbinson, Jr., Corporate Secretary
,2012 .
,
��.. , r•
�. � .
Brenda M. Folsom
Type/print/stamp name of Notary
EE 172299
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
OS/18/2012
�
�
'
�J
'
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA
COIJNTY OF Seminole )
John French
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
Vice President of Wharton-Smith, Inc. ,
, the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise af6liated in a business way with any other bidder
on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or
' indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from
bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or
communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to
' fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any
advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed
contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder
' has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged i.nformation or data
relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof.
!_�
'
�
Sworn to and subscribed before me this 26th day of June
,
'
'
�
'
' Updated Section V.doc
�
,�trA;,,►�°�, BFiFJrpAM. Fd�01l1
MY COMM� # ff 172299
' * EXP�iES: ApiA 20, 2016
�'�eorn� BadedThuBu�tMd�Y�
Page 9 of 16
Affiant
John Fre President
2012 .
,: N . � � v►� .-��.�
Notary Public
OS/18/2012
'
'
�
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
, MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
PROJECT #11-0053-UT
' and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
' MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILTTATION
PROJECT #11-0053-UT
� Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the docu.ments
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of
the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract
' without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to
be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all
the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is
� hereby charged with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
� interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the
Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications,
General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such
t investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and
agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form
of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or
� apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General
Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and
hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
,
'
�
�
�
' Updated Section V.doc Page 10 of 16 OS/18/2012
r
�i
�
'
�
�
�
ll
'
'
�
LI
�
�
�
'
�
'
PROPOSAL
�2)
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may,
at its option deternune that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal
shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to
become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be
retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the
City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this
Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is on r certified check on Westem Surery Company
Bank, for the sum of ten percent of amount bid
($10% of Amount Bid
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If fum or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the
name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's
improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman,
agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES: ADDRESSES:
Ronald F. Davoli, President/CEO 750 Monrce Road, Sanford, FL 32771
William C. Robinson, Jr., Corporate Secretary 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771
Please see attached Corporate Officers
Signature of
(The bidder must indicate whethe Corporatio Partnership,
' Updated Section V.doc
,
Page 11 of 16
���
, Vice
OS/18/12
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
'
PROPOSAL
(3)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal: �Af�artpr�iith, Inc.
By: Title: John French, Vce President
Bus� s Ad es Bi er: 750 Monrce Road
City and State: Sanford, FL Zip Code 32771
Dated at 8:00 am this 26th
Wha�ton-Smith, Inc.
A Florida Corporation
750 Monroe Road
Sanford, FL 32771
Updated Section V.doc
day of ,lune , A.D., 2012 .
Page 12 of 16
os/18/12
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
PROJECT #11-0053-UT
Aclrnowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
Addendum No. 1 Date: June 21, 2012
Addendum No. 2 Date: June 22, 2012
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Wharton-Smith, Inc.
(1��� Bidder)
' a" of Officer)
nch, Vice President
(Title of Officer)
June 26, 2012
(Date)
Updated Section V.doc Page 13 of 16 OS/18/2012
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT: CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION — MARSHALL ST. WRF 1- 4
PROJECT #11-0053-UT
BASE BID ITEM EST. �I.I. UNIT PRICE TOTAL
DESCRIPTION QTY.
Equipment for Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Marshall
St. WRF in accordance with Section 01150,
1 a 3.01 A. (ODP amount paid directly to vendors by 1 LS $c(. � �� p�� ,�$ y � �� o�� ,��
the Ci
ODP - Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City, in
lb accordance with Section 01150, 3.OlB and equals 1 LS $ 25, o�o. oo $�,5, o� o, o0
6% of 1 a Unit Price lus $50.00
Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 and the North
lc RAS Pump House at the Northeast WRF in 1 LS NOT IN NOT IN
accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1C. Co1�rI'RACT Co1�'TRACT
SCADA Software Implementation Services
ld Allowance in accordance with Sechon 01150, 1 LS NOT IN NOT IN
3.O1D. CONTRACT coN'rRACT
Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 thru 8 at the South
2 RAS Pump House Equipment at the Northeast 1 LS NOT IN NOT IN
CONTRACT CONTRACT
WRF in accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1B.
Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the
3 Marshall St. WRF in accardance with Section 1 LS $1 � � 35 � pap. �$ i� 135, o0 0. o�
01150 3.O1C.
Rehabilitation of the East and West Clarifiers at
4 the East WRF in accordance with Section 01150, 1 LS NOT IN NOT IN
3.O1D. CONTRACT CONTRACT
Mobilization in accordance with Section 01150,
5 3.OlE 1 LS $�o,000. oo $ S'o 000 . o0
6 Indemnification in accordance with Section 1 LS $ 100.00 $ loo.00
01150 3.O1F. • o0
Sub-Total Items 1-6
10% Owner's Contingency in accordance with �bZ, ���. 1 t��. �-J�-, pp
7 Section 01150, 3.OlG. (10% of Subtotal, Items 1- 1 LS $ ��, � $1 �o
6
BASE BID TOTAL (ITEMS 1-'n $ 1
CONTRACTOR: WhaRon-Smith, �nc. �� �$9����
� � .
BIDDER'S BASE BID TOTAL (ITEMS 1-'n: $ �,��q��(�p (Numbers)
BIDDER'S BASE BID TOTAL (ITEM$1-'n: O�r..Q w:, L\�
ElL-�F{j"�/#� �l t�T � 1 2. e r,3 Ce_K -�
� lrtk � e. 1� re - s��e;� do I�avS �ords)
Updated Section V.doc Page 14 of 16 OS/18/2012
THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS iJNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES
AND 1'HE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQiTIItED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR
INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIl17E OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WII,L MAI� THE TABULATION
FROM THE UNTT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE
BIDDER, TT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN.
Updated Secrion V.doc Page 15 of 16 OS/18/12
CONTRACT LANGUAGE TO BE ADDED TO ANY CONTRACT AWARDED OR
RENEWED ON OR AFTER JULY 1, 2012 THAT IS FOR OR GREATER THAN
$1.000,000.
Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran
Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible
for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of
Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million
($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or
response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or
engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or
response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for
purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or
Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling,
possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal
property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce.
The certiiication form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted,
along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or
response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If
the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been
placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into
or renewed on or after July l, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification
form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged
in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1,
2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the
submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies
mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole
discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist:
A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List ar the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the
following must occur):
1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011.
2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July
1, 2011.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
contract with the company or entity.
4. The company or entity has adopYed, has publicized and is implementing a formal
plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any
new scrutinized business operations.
'
' B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria:
' 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012.
2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July l, 2012.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
' contract with the company or entity.
4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal
plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new
' business operations in Cuba or Syria.
Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a
' contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than
one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the
above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the
' contract is offered.
The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies
' as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form.
'
�
C'
'
CJ
�
'
'
,
u
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
t
,
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND
SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED PRIOR TO AWARD.
FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR
SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the
requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in
Cuba and Syria; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to
participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum
Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and
' 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging
in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring,
developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment,
' facilities, personnel, products, services; personal property, real property, military
equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
�J
'
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal,
subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing,
no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies wif,li '�.. '
Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in ��a' -
and Syria. ;' �` �•� o �
� a
� . .. � r,? _ .
� `
_ ./
✓ �'
Authorized Signature
►�lona�ca �o �ccvol,
Printed Name
�ceS�c�Q,n� \ \.��
Title
�1J�C,tr -ri3`�- J tY. , Y��. , �c
Name of Entity/Corporation
'
�
'
LJ
�
LJ
L�!
,
'
'
,
'
1
L_ I
'
'
,
L'�
'
STATE OF '�( � ,� ; �Gi,.
COUNTY OF r.'� no�
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 3\ s� day of
, 201 �, by ����� �, ��.� o�: (name of person whose signature
is being n arized) as the ��-. � CE (title) of ��ct��,-Sn:.��, �� •(name of
corporation/entity), rsonall known to me described herein , or produced a
(type o i entification) as identification, and who di id n ake
an oath.
������``\�v�Y'�'pFT �����i
• F .
\�� . GOMMISS/Q •; 9S :
� •.
� * ;' ��eecuary r�'y� �ti
_ : �a
0
�O • �• A y i
: y ; #Op9 �
ss'< :�a �.. �>B& ��'�
.
C�III�I � i%C17��1�►-�: I]L�i
,Q-'l�i��i�'1
ta P 1
Printed Name: . , \ ��..urso�
My Commission
Expires: �-�1-1y
'
t
'
'
'
,
'
SCHEDULE OF EOUIPMENT MANUFAC'I'URERS AND SUppLIERS
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIER REHABII.,ITATION
(PROJECT #11-0053-U�
The Bidder must provide with its Bid the name of the manufacturer/supplier he intends to use for each
item of equipment listed below by circling one of the listed manufacturers/suppliers. If Bidder fails to
circle one of the manufacturers/suppliers listed below, Bidder agrees to provide the equipment or
material item manufactured by the Manufacturer listed as "A". If more than one of the listed
manufacturers/suppliers is circled, the Bidder agrees to provide the equipment or material item
manufactured by the Manufacturer listed as"A": For items not listed below, Bidder declares that Bid is
based on one of the manufacturers/suppliers named in the Contract Document if one or more
manufacturers/suppliers were named.
Suecification Section Eauinment Manufacturer/Suunlier
, 11225
'
'
'
STATE OF Florida
' COUNTY OF Seminole
Clarifier Equipment A. Siemens
B. Ovivo
C. WesTech
�alker�
E. Hi-Tech
:
(s�nature)
Title: JoTin French, Vice President
Date: June 26, 2012
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this 26th day of
' June . 2012 by
John French �name� as
Vice President (title) of
' Wharton-Smith, Inc. (bidder) a Florida corporation on behalf of the
corporation. She is ersonally known to me or has produced
cahon.
' , -.._...�.
__. �'�,��:� G� � .��
(signature)
' Name typed/printed Brenda M. Folsom
Notary Public, State of Florida
Commission No. EE 172299
' My Notary Commission Seal:
BA9'�`�'��2'�99
�..*;.r,.,"'� � �N 1 � �8
* �� * �����
s�
' Updated Section V.doc Page 16 of 16 ���OP�� OS/18/12
'
[J
1
'
'
,
DRUGFREE WORKPLACE FORM
The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that
Wharton-Smith, Inc. does:
(Name of Business)
1. Publish a statement notifying employces �at the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing,
' possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the
actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition.
'
'
'
�
'
LI
'
�
'
'
t
'
2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of
maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee
assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse
violations.
Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services �at are under
bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify d�e employees that, as a condition of working
on the commodities or contractual services that aze under bid, the employee will abide by the
tem�s of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction o� or plea of guilty or �lo
contendere to, any violation of Chapter 893 or of any controlled substance law of the United
States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such
canviction.
Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or
rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is
so convicted.
6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a dYUg-free workplace tluough implementation of
this section.
As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above
reqwrements.
PUR062.036
rev. 10/97
�aa s��
Jo rench, Vice President
June 26, 2012
Date
'
'
'
�
�
�
'
L_JI
'
'
�
1
'
'
'
'
,
�_� �_\� .
� -
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
Table of Contents:
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS
• Instructions for Addendum to Agreement
• ODP Agreement Form
• Addendum to Agreement
• Attachment "A"
• Attachment "B"
• Attachment "C"
• Attachment "D"
• Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and
Receiving/Invoicing
• Request to Requisition Form
PROJECT PERMITS,
The Owner has not obtained any permits for this project. The Contractor shall be
responsible for obtaining all City of Clearwater Building Department Permits and Generic
Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non-Contaminated Site
Activity.
GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
The following geotechnical information is included:
• Test Boring Results and Monitoring Well Installation by Driggers Engineering
Services, Inc. dated March 31, 2011
• Laboratory Report by Southern Analytical Laboratories, Inc. dated June 9, 2011
• Results of Field infiltration and Permeability Testing by Driggers Engineering
Services, Inc. dated September 20, 2011
ASBESTOS REPORT
Not applicable to this project.
� Appendix A.doc
'
u
OS/14/12
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
'
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
� ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR
�
'
'
,
LJ
'
'
�
'
'
1
�
�
CONSTRUCTION OF MARSHALL STREET WRF
CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 11-0053 UT
The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the
Addendum to Agreement for Construction of the MARSHALL STREET WRF
CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION PROJECT.
Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum.
Attachments "B", "C" and "D" relate to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a
Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each
Subcontractor responsible for materiais as part of the Subcontractor's Work.
4. Submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to:
City of Clearwater
Attention: Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager
Phone: 727-562-4758
Fax: 727-562-4755
City of Clearwater Engineering Department
100 South Myrtle Avenue, #220
Clearwater, FL, 33756-5520
5. If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to:
Name, Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager
Phone: 727-562-4758
Fax : 727-562-4755
E-Mail: tara.kivett@myclearwater.com
t
'
'
'
t
' Appendix A.doc
,
OS/14/12
1
�
'
,
l_ J
,
'
'
ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #11-0053-UT:
In reference to contract #11-0053-UT dated , between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and
, the Contractor, it is further AGREED as follows:
1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly
in order to save applicable sales ta�c in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment
of sales tax.
2. The attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and
incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms thereof
shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner.
3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the
normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials
as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects
fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be
used.
4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's
authorization process, as outlined in Attachment "D".
5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However,
� owner acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase
project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of
sales tax.
, This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement.
'
'
'
�
L__J
,
'
��
,
CITY OF CLEARWATER:
Date:
City Manager/Owner
ATTEST:
City Clerk
(City's Corporate Seal)
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Camilo Soto
Assistant City Attorney
Appendix A.doc
GONTRACTOR:
Date:
Contractor
ATTEST:
Secretary
OS/14/12
'
,
�l
ATTACHMENT "A"
FROM: CITY OF CLEARWATER (OWNER)
TO: (CONTRACTOR)
OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
' PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #11-0053-UT:
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicabie taxes for material, supplies,
and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax,
reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's
contract. Owner-purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change
Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number.
2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material
for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors,
as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices.
3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials
furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying
correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and
obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of
the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the
risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site
prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery
schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the
Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the
unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from
any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action
of the Contractor.
4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually
inspect all shipments from the suppfiers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The
Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation
adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist
of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such
additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forvvard the invoice to the Owner for
payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract.
5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and
' determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether
such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the
Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection,
the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead
' shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of
those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform
such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming
' Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an
inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's
incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages.
,
'
'
6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into
Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall
account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession,
indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work.
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees
for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-
repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or
subcontractor.
8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's
possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials.
9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and
penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by
Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination"
shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a
determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor
agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued
with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials.
10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all
suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Contractor
and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's
records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials.
11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the
Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said
goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's
Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such
other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and
remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or
final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive
Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials
shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to
the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option.
12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early
payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications.
13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner-
Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum
due Contractor.
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
'
lJ
G
�
�
'
LJ
'
l__1
�
�
'
'
ATTACHMENT "B"
FROM (CONTRACTOR)
TO
PROJECT:
(SUBCONTRACTOR)
OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #11-0053-UT:
1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies,
and equipment which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax,
reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's
contract. Owner-Purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change
Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number.
2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and
material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from
the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices.
3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials
furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying
correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and
obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of
the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the Owner assumes
the risk of damage or loss during the time that the bu�lding materials are physically stored at the job site prior
to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules,
sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for
the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and
handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all
claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the
Subcontractor.
4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visualty
inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The
Subcontractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation
adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist
of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such
additional information as the Owner may require. The Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner
for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract.
5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications
' and determine prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and
whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If
the Subcontractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual
inspection, the Subcontractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's
� Work and instead shall property notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or
replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor
fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or
, nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by
pertormance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages to the owner, resulting from
Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages.
'
�
�
6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into
Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall
account monthly to the Owner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's
possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's
Work.
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and
guarantees for all materials and products as required bythe Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or
damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier,
vendor, or sub-subcontractor.
8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the
Subcontractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished
Materials.
9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and irrterest
and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by
Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination"
shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a
determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal.
Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of
deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials.
10. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all
suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the
Subcontractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon
Subcontractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials.
11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to
the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt of
said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include
owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item,
and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released,
delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately
obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Subcontractor will be
provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished
Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Subcontractor at the Owner's
direction, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the Subcontractor's option.
'
�
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
�
,
'
�
'
�
'
�
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
�
'
'
'
From:
To:
ATTACHMENT "C"
_ (CONTRACTOR)
(SUBCONTRACTOR)
Project: MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION
� CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #11-0053-UT:
This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the
project. In order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This
' shall be accompiished in the following manner:
1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including
sales tax.
,
'
,
'
l_.I
�
ll
'
'
,
t
'
'
'
2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City
of Clearwater (owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials.
3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase
order on behalf of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read:
To: Supplier
For: Material per attached Subcontractor order,
4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) c/o "Subcontractor" c/o
Contractor. Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same
to City of Clearwater (Owner) for payment.
5. City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be
issued a deductive change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax.
It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of
each month for payment by the . Those received after the will be processed in the next month's
billing cycle.
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
ATTACHMENT "D"
PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX
CREDITS
General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see
vendor application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will
be the sales tax savings amount.
Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and
preparation of electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as
well as correct account number.
3. Project Manager will then request requisition approval from the Finance Director.
4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order
as requested.
5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order
number, owner Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax
savings, amount previously requested, amount of current request, and remaining balance of
P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment requests (monthly).
6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures
and must be submitted for approval as indicated below:
7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following
order:
a. General Contractor
b. Architect
c. Project Manager
d. Engineering/City Manager
e. Purchasing/for processing only
f. Finance/for processing only
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
�
�
'
'
'
t
CI
'
'
'
�
PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO
REQUISITION and RECEIVING/INVOICING
CITY OF CLEARWATER
MARSHALL STREET WRF CLARIFIERS 1-4 REHABILITATION
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #11-0053-UT:
Contractor:
CEL•
Addendum to Aqreement for Construction:
1. See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement.
Process qrocedures for tax savinqs:
2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor.
3. Approved by CEI. Approver(s):
4. Original to Owner's Representative for processing of P.O. requisition.
5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing
Manager to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials
Suppliers. It is important to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as
possible at one time thereby reducing the amount of changes necessaryto Contractor's P.O.
Construction contract will not change and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus
the Contractor's P.O will represent the total contract commitment. Before sendinq to the
Purchasin4 Manaqer, the schedule will be forwarded to the Owner's Representative,
CE/ and Contractor's representative for approval. We will need the e-mail address for
the Coniractor's & CEI's contact person(s) for this process.
6. The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the
primary lines of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will
be added to the Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines
until all materials are purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials
purchases are necessary.
7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a
change order (Recommendation is that it's done on the final C/O).
' Process procedures for reauest to reauisition forms:
'
'
�
'
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc)
Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number.
In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery
instructions.
Indicate whether or not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5%.
Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices.
Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request
to requisition.
City staff will complete the charge code line.
Procedures where a detailed line item aroposal has been received from the ODP supplier:
' Appendix A.doc
'
a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of
system (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount
per for each system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for the addition
OS/14/12
of the City's charge code.
b. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order.
Attachment should include estimated puantities and types of materials. Cost information
is optional.
Procedures where a detailed line item proqosal is not available:
E3
�
c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and
total cost as the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier.
d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major
billing line items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City
will add the appropriate charge codes.
The requesting official will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials.
Contractor's authorized procurer(s):
The official approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be
authorized personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers:
NOTE: Anv materials ordered bv the contractor that are not included on the Citv's issued purchase
order or any amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the Citv issued purchase order MUST
be separatelv ordered pursuant to a qurchase order directiv between the supplier and the
contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced separately from the materials supplied pursuant to
the Citv issued purchase order. Another option would be to submit an additional Request to
Requisition to increase the amount of the ODP qurchase order for that supqlier.
Process procedures for receivinq and invoicinq:
1. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will verifv the materials are in usable
condition and the quantity received.
2. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P.O. to send their original invoice to
the Contractor to the attention of
3. Contractor must sign off on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is
attached, must indicate on the invoice that all materials were received in usable condition. Any
discrepancies with the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials
Supplier. If the invoice is in error, it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for
payment under the following conditions:
a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued
invoice but not in excess of that amount.
b. None of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return
the invoice for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier.
c. If the corrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the
excess must be invoiced separately by the supplier and is to have the same support
documentation and/or approvals as all other invoices to be paid.
4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support
documentation but must follow the approval process as all other invoices.
5. After approval the Contractor will forward the original invoice and any attachments to City of
Clearwater's Owner Representative:
L•'�
City of Clearwater
Attention: Tara Kivett, Engineering Project Manager
Phone: 727-562-4758
Fax: 727-562-4755
City of Clearwater Engineering Department
100 South Myrtle Avenue, #220
Clearwater, FL, 33756-5520
After approval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
u
forward the originai invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment
, processing.
7. Steps 1 through 7 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice.
8. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition
' and at the approval of the Contractor.
9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the
appropriate line(s) on Contractor's P.O.
,
Closinq of Contractor's P.O.:
' 1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of
the Contractor's P.O.
,
�
,
�
'
,
'
�
'
'
'
,
' Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
,
'
L
C3 � ��
�
� ����# ���✓�
�. ,� . ,
� Engineering Department
REQUEST TO REQUISITION
STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER
General Item Description: _
Vendor:
Street Address:
City/State/Zip:
Receiving Location (Ship to):
Street Address:
City/State/Zip:
Requested by:
Phone Number:
Date Needed by:
Expense Code: �City will complete)
Phone No:
Units Detailed Description Price Per
Lin2 # QU3ntit $, 2tC. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each TOtal
Date: Date:
Requesting Official Approving Official
Title and Organization - Contractor Title and Organization — C.E.I. Services
Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according
to City of Clearvvater's Records Management Program.
Appendix A.doc
Page 1 of 2
OS/14/12
REQUEST TO REQUISITION
Requested by:
Phone Number:
Date Needed by:
Expense Code:
�..
� - t ��;
� �� �����'���
�- � _
*- ;�� ,�:,,
U
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER
(Continuation page)
Units Detailed Description Price Per
Line # QUafltlt $, @tC. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each TOta)
Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to
City of Clearwater's Records Management Program.
Page 2 of 2
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
u
'
,
PROJECT PERMITS
� The Owner has not obtained any permits for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining all City of Clearwater Building Department Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge
of Produced Ground Water from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity.
'
,
'
,
'
�
1
'
'
L'
,
�
,
' A endix A.doc OS/14/12
PP
,
,
'
'
GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
' The following geotechnical information and reports were relied upon by Engineer in
preparation of the Drawings and Specifications:
' • Test Boring Results and Monitoring Well Installation, dated March 31, 2011 (14 pgs)
• Laboratory Report Marshall Street Well Groundwater, dated June 9, 2011 (10 pgs)
• Results of Field Infiltration and Permeability Testing, dated September 20, 2011 (4 pgs)
,
'
�
�
'
lJ
'
l _J
,
'
,
�
� A endix A.doc OS/14/12
PP
t
'
LJ
' Not applicable to this project.
'
'
,
'
�
'
�
,
LJ
�
'
'
�
'
ASBESTOS REPORT
'
Appendix A.doc OS/14/12
'
'
'
'
TEST BflRING RESULTS
AND MONITORING �'ELL INSTALLATION
MAItSHALL STREET WWTP
CLEARW.�TER, FLOItIDA
Driggers Engineering Services lncorporated
1
1
'
�
'
�
'
�
LJ
,
,
'
'
- — � .._. ._.� _ _.,...... ...,.,,�„ ,.,o„�, ,o�� ,��,.��,y
King Engineering Assaciates
4921 Memorial Highway Suite 300
Tampa, Florida 33634
Attention: Mr. Thomas A. Traina, P.E.
RE: Test Boring Results and T�Tonitoring Well Installation
lYlarshall Street WWTP
CIearwater, Florida
Our File: DES 11b723
D�ar Mr. Traina:
March 31, 201 i
Pursuant to your request and authorization, DRIGGERS ENGIltiEERII�'G SEItVICE�,
INC. has �erforrned the requested test boring and monitoring well installation at the subject site.
Includeti herein are the results of the test boring and monitaring weil.
SLTBSURFACE INVESTIGATIOiY
STANDARD PENFTRATION TEST BORING - Ta identify subsurface soil and groundwater
' conditions within your requested location at the ?�Iarshail Street WWTP, one (1) Standard
Penetration Test {SPT) boring was requested and conducted in general accordance with ASTM D-
� 1586 at the location s�ecified in the field. The SPT boring was advanced to your requested depth
of 35 feet below existing grade. Standard Penetration method of samplin� and testin� was utilized
to provide spit sarnples for visual classification, pIus to develop Standard Penetration resistance data
1 reflective oftl�e strength and bearing capability ofthe soils penetrated. Representative samples wrere
returned to the laboratory for examinatian by ihe project engineer.
'
'
'
Sarssote Ciearwater Tamps
Phone: 941.371.3949 1222CJ 49th Sireet North • Giearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 813.848,6Q27
fax: 941.371.$982 Rhane: 727.572.1313 • Pax: 727.572.409C1 fax: $13.948.7fi45
sarc�fiice�driggers�ng.aorn c#tvaffiaet�tlriggerseng-c°m tpaoffi�e�driggers�ng.com
2
MONITORiNG �ELL LNSTALLATIOi�T - As requested, we installed on� (1) monitoring weil
�c� a nominal depth of 15 feet below existing grade. Tlae well was cc�nstr�cted of 2 inch flush joint
schadule 40 PVC. The monitaring well has 10 feet of schedule 40, Q.O 10 slotted PVC well screen
followed by 7.$ feet of schedule 44 PVC well casing, The well was excavated using 4-II4 inch
hollow stem augers having a.n 8 inch outside diarrr�eter, The annulus between the 2 inch well and the
borehole was backfilled using 2013a silica sand irom the tip to the top of the �vell screen which was
then backfilled with 34/65 silica sand ta �istin� grade. A detailed sche�natic (PIaLe IIj of the
man�toring well has been attached f�r your review. Also attached as Pl�te I is a monitoring u�ell
lacation plan and the Standard Penetratian Test boring log. The mo�itoring vvell was developed
upoil completion of the monitoring well installatian.
SUBSURFACE SaIL AND GROUNDWATER COl�TDITIONS
SOIL CONDITIONS - Tlle boring predominately identified fine sands to a depth of about 23 f�et
below existing grade. It should be noted that the boi-ing encountered iimestone and concrete debris
within the upper 4 feet of existing grade while also penetrating a seam af fine sand with cemented
clay fragments frorn about 10.5 feet to l� feet below existing grade, '�'hese fine �ands which
primarily cornprise the SP Unified Soi1 Classi`fication desigriatic�n were considereti medium to very
dense in relative densiiy. Below riiese sands, the borings encountered clayey fine sand with seams
of clay to 25 feet below existing grade. These clayey fine sands which comprise the S�ICH IJnified
Soil Classification designation were considered very loose in relative density, At a depih of 26 feet,
the boring penetrated a seam of sand�v clay with variably c�mented clay fragments to about 33 fe�t
�elow existing gr'ade u�here the limestone forrnation was encounter�d to the terrnination depth ofthe
boring at 35 feet below existing grade. These elay sails which comprise ihe CL Unified Soii
Classification designation were considered firrn to very stiff in relative consistency.
Please note that the Unified Glassification was estimated based an visual examination only.
Laboratory classification tests that vvould be need�d to refine the Unified Soil Cias�ification were
not requesi:�d.
At the time ofthis field investigation, the graundwater le�e1 was identified at 1 i�.5 feet beIow
existing grade.
Driggers Fng"sneering Services 3nnorporated
'
�
'
,
,
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
3
DRiGCERS ENGINEE1tING SERVIC'ES, INC. appreciate� this oppomrnity ta be ofservice
� t� y4u on this project. S�ould you l�ave any questions or require furtY�er assistance, please do not hesitate
to coniaet the undersi�ned at your earliest convenience.
'
,
�
'
'
,
'
�
'
'
,
�
�
'
JAI�
JAD-RP1116723
Copies submitted: (3)
Respectfully submitted,
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
�'° . ����,,si`1;i
... ,.�,�,,� A. D/'i'����t�
� . ....,,
, � ���,- �1��1y� k'f�',�(+r�
Je Y , A. Driggers, P.E. • '�, . y,,, }�np •,� �
� � � � f �r v. �v Ji ap � {�i �3
Proj ect Engineer � * : � �� � � � �
.
FL Registration No. 74598 = ' * �
.
-o '. �?"�TE (7F ; � �
�i��Cr,�;� �.i R!� .•'�. t
a O � 1�_ +s
�/
•�� �
�r.����`���.��• � � �
��4�� ��'NA�LE���.�'�
' L7riggers Engineerin� Services Incarperr�ted
5
APPE'VDIX
PLATE I- BORING AND �VIONIT0�2IhTG WELL LOCATION PLAN
PLATE II - MONIT012I1�`G VVELL INSTALLATION DETAIL
STAI�IDARD PENETRATION TE�T BORING LOG
METHOD OF TESTIlVG
C}riggers �ngineering Services in�orporated
'
�
�
�
�I'!
'
'
lJ
�
�
i
C
C'�
1
�
1
1
1
r
PLATE I- BORING AND MONITORING WELL LOCATION PLAN
C7ri�gers EtlC�3Y"3L�3"tl"l� S8C'ViC65 Incorporat�cf
�
� �t � � � � � � i � i � � � � �
CAb / ENGINEE'
R.D.B. / J.A.D.
� L=-�-r..".�
dRIGrERS ENGINEERIN �
N S7ANf1AF�C? pENETRATION TE5T BORING LOCAl10N
d MONITQRING WELL INSTALLATION LOCATIpN
B�F�ING L.C?CATION PLAN
, � . �, +► *
� • s � � w � �
'ROJECT Nb
OES 116�23
AS SNOWh!
�
�
0 25 �o iou
SCAIE M FEET
3/26/11
PLATE I
L�
��
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
'. PLATE II - MO1vITORING WELL Il�TSTALLATION DETAIL
'
t
'
'
'
t
'
Ii�riggers En�ineersng 'Serk�ices inc�rporated
(�rc�nd
S�r#ace
�.o'
�.s'
� .t
�o.t�' _
_ �s
2� Dia.
PV� Cc�sin�
��che�u�e 40�
4.8' 3�fl��5 Sar�d F�t�
2C� f �t? S�ict� S�n�i
2" �ia.
P1/� Sl�tted Screen
Sched�ule 4t��
4
Scr� Size t3.{�� {}��
Baticc�m �c�
CAD F1iE NAA9�: Pd:�A�L71MN\PLA7E1\116??3P2.DWG. �RAiMN BY: 3?.D_S. DA7'E: 4f3J77
��� i ����� ����
��� i ������� ������
�������� ����� ���
CL�A��#f�TE�, F�t����A
� ����
O�1G�i2S �M�#+iEEfi�l�
SER�S> �N��C?R#!73
S!-ii�ET �:�3.
PL�TE Ii
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
ST�DARD PF..NFTRATION TEST BORING LOG
L3riggers En�ineering Services Incorporatsd
'
'
'
'
'
1
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
�
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 116723 BORING NO. B-1
Project Marshall Street VWVTP, Cfearwater, Florida
Location See Plate i Foreman M.J.
Comptetion Depth To
Depth 35.0' Date 3/25/11 Water 1 Q.5' Time Date 3/25/11
E.., Z w � STANDARD
� �� SOIL DESCRIPTION N� Z PENETRATION TEST
O
� � a �� w BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D.
�- �� O a a SAMPLER-740 LB.
O � y m Q p HAMMER, 30" DROP
SURF. EL: �'� 10 20 40 60 80
0 pa : Gray►sh-brown Fine SAND
°'�°� with limestone fragments and pieces of concrete
a::::.: SP
Tannish-brown Fine SAND
�:::�� with trace of limestone fragments (SP)
5 Brown Fine SAND (SP)
Medium dense to dense dark brown and brown 5/12/13
Fine SAND (SP)
10%17/20
10 0:�:« Dense brown and light gray Fine SAND 20/50� '' �.4' Penetration
;';�';'� with trace of rock fra ments SP
Very dense light gray Fine SAND
with cemented cia fta ments SP 12/24/25
Dense brown Fine SAND SP
15 Medium dense to loose light brown and brown
to light brown Fine SAND (SP) 6/7/6
20 •
4/bl5
Very loose light grayish-brown ciayey Fine SAND
with seams of greenish-gray CLAY (SClCH)
25
2/2/4
Firm cream colored and light green calcareous,
silty, sandy CLAY with cemented clay fragments
• {CL) "
Very stiff cream colored and light gray
30 calcareous, sandy CLAY (CL)
9/6/10
Cream colored LIMESTOtVE with chert fragments
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Length
DRIGGERS ENGINEERlNG SERVICES INC(�RPORATED
Project No. DES 116723 BORING NO. B-1
Project Marshall Street W1NTP, Ciearwater, Fiorida
Location See Plate I Foreman M.J.
Completion Depth To
Depth 35.0' Date 3/25/11 Water 90.5' Time Date 3/25/11
t- � Z t� � STANDARD
u" O� �°' � PENETRATION TEST
� m a SOIL DESCRIPTION � W� B�oWSlFT. ON 2" O.D.
w y¢ O a� SAMPLER-140 LB.
o N pp a p HAMMER, 30" DROP
SURF. EL: �� 10 20 40 60 80
3� Cream colored LIMESTONE with chert fra ments 50* * 0.0' Penetration
40
45
50
55
60
65
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Length
METH�D t.3F'TESTING
Driggers Engir�eering 5ervices Incorporated
'
�
'
,
,
'
'
,
'
'
,
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
WITH AUTOMATIC HAMMER
AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION
_��¢.Y --__"-i y�_ +x-_=_-';; ';. - -
- _ =`- ;..`: :, - _� : "_ - = '=.1 = - y` '
.��. r �\, • ' .: .. - �-. �- � .A. � ; �. 1
"'4 ..+� ~ 1" _ • _
._:4?._'�S'_ ..c= � "'
' WATER TABLE
SPLJT BARREL SAMPiFR
FlNE SAND ;= 4 f_'N" YALUE OR
' � 6 BLOW COUNT
MUCK
'
,
,
'
'
'
SILTY FlNE SAND F�-�t�'] 2�
C�AYEY FlNE SAND
SFtELBY 7UBE
SANDY CLAY
STR.ATUM
GLAY CHANGE
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D-15861
In the Standard Pene�ation Test borings, a rotary drilling rig is
used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth. A viscous
drilling fluid is circutated through the drill rods and bit to stabilize the
borehole and to assist in removal of soil and rock cuttings up and out
of the borehole.
Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D. split-harrel
sampler or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes cafled, is attached to an N-
size drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A 140 pound
automatic hammer, attached to the drill string at the ground surface, is
then used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is
successively raised and dropped for a distance of 30 inches using an
automated lifting mechanism. The number of blows is recorded for
each 6 inch interval of penetration or unril virtual refusal is achieved.
In the above manner, the samples are ideally advanced a total of 18
inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final 12 inches of
penetration is called the blowcount, penetratian resistance or "N" value
of the particular material at the sample depth.
After penetration, the rods and sampler are retracted to the ground
surface where the core sampie is removed, sealed in a glass jar and
transported to the laboratory for verification of field classification and
storage.
SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Soil and rock sampies secured in the field sampling operation were
visnally classified as to texture, color and consistency. Soil
classiftcations are presented descriptively and symbolically for easc of
interpretation. The straium idenrification lines represent the
approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, tbis
�ansition may be gradual.
Consistency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear
strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standard Penetration
resistance values of "N" values and industry-accepted standazds. "N"
values, ar biowcounts, are presented in both tabutar and graphical form
on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphicai
plot of blowcount versus depth is for iilustrarion purposes oniy and
does not warrant continuity in soil consistency or linear variation
between sample intervals.
�0/0_3' The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring
UMESTONE locations and sample intervals only. Variations in subsurface
DENOTES �nditions may occur between boring locations. Groundwater depths
CORE RUN 50 BLOYVS F�? shown represent water depths at the dates and time shown only. The
0.3' PENE7RATtQN absencc of water tabte informarion does not necessarily imply that
groundwater was not encountered.
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
n � : � �,-''<Y'ti'I�i1% ���1:�-��� �.r'-s�. C3r �:� G�<.-^-,Fs. �L �+4c��� L;` _�s� �s'�.::r' �.:4 �:. Y � _ '����. '? =.. ��s-
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearwater, FL 33755
Laboratory Report
�o\��� �N ACCpRO4yc�
U �
U �
G S
June 9, 2011
Work Order: 1104349
Revised Report
Project Name Groundwater Discharge Permit
Parameters Units Results' Method PQL MDL Prepared Analyzed By
Sample Description Marshall St Well
Matrix Groundwater
SAL Sample Number 1104349-01
Date/Time Collected 05125H 1 12:22
Collected by Sean Harmon
Date/Time Received 05l25111 12:50
Fieid Parameters
pH SU 11.3 DEP FT11oo 0.1 0.1 05/25/11 12:22 SDH
Volatile Oraanic Comaounds
Benzene ug/L 2.0 I EPA 624 4.0 0.6 06/02/11 13:24 JRW
Polynuclear Aromatic Hvdrocarbons
Naphthalene ug/L 41 EPA 610 5.4 1.2 06/01/11 14:08 06/O6/11 11:19 JKS
Inors�anics
Total Organic Carbon mg/L 230 SM 53�oB 1.0 0.50 06/03/11 15:41 ARM
Metals
Cadmium mg/L 0.00027 � EPA 200.8 0.00050 0.00027 05/26/11 17:41 O6/02/11 23:51 VWC
Chromium mg/L 0.0034 � EPA 200.8 0.0050 0.0�035 05/26/11 17:41 06/02/11 23:51 VWC
Chromium, Hexavalent mg/L 0.0061 I,J6 SM 35ooCr-B 0.040 0.0050 05/26/11 11:45 VWC
Copper mg/L 0.0058 EPA 2oo.s 0.00050 0.00013 05/26h 1 17:41 06/02/11 23:51 VWC
Lead mg/L 0.0032 EPA 200.8 0.00050 0.00025 05/26/11 17:41 O6/02/11 23:51 VWC
Mercury ug/L 0.061 EPA �s3� 0.00�40 0.00020 05/31/11 11:13 06/02/11 08:32 AWS
Zinc mg/L 0.0077 EPa 200.8 0.0050 0.00088 05/26/11 17:41 O6/02/11 23:51 VWC
Sample Description
Matrix
SAL Sample Number
Date/Time Collected
Collected by
Date/Time Received
Metals
Mercury
FDOH Laboratory No.E84129
NELAP Accredited
ug/L
Field Blank
Groundwater
1104349-02
05/25171 12:05
Sean Harmon
05125N1 12:50
0.0030 EPA 1631 0.00040 0.00020 05/31/11 11:13 O6/02/11 08:32 AWS
Page 1 of 10
Franeis I. Daniels, Laboretory Director
Leslie C. Boardman, 4A. Manager
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
�. n i, e �/. . --. —. .M1� /—� t^. —. /� �^-� �. _ .
! i%J '�.^—��' \lF�YY _:�...L:v_i_Vf-��'iLi, t_vt_.L•J�Y�r=.!—Y ''L ..:;SQFJ/% �". �... V /l v"_ .'�� i.�'_'S
v ... i3��..' L��l•'-d �,-.�*: �,:"> �y..�.' ��
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearvvater, FL 33755
Volatile Organic Compounds - Quality Control
��Q �N ACCOq�9
4.0 ycF
� £
U
U �
< Z
June 9, 2071
Work Order: 1104349
Revised Report
Spike Source %REC RPD
Analyte Resuft PQL MDL Units Level Result %REC Limits RPD Limit
Batch BF10237 - VOC - Prep
Blank (BF10237-BLK1) Prepared & Analyzed: OslOV11
Benzene 0.1 � 0.8 0.1 ug/L
Surrogate:4-Bromofluorobenzene 10.2 ug/L 10 102 65-J35
Surrogate:l,2-Dichloroethane�l4 ?0.2 ug/L 10 102 65-135
Surrogate: To/uene-d8 10.0 ug/L 10 100 65-135
Surrogate: Dibromofluoromethane 10.2 ug/L 10 102 65-135
LCS (BF10237-BS7) Prepared & Analyzed: 06/02/11
Benzene 19.9 0.8 0.1 ug/L 20 100 37-151 20
Surrogate:4-Bromofluorobenzene 9.79 ug/L 10 98 65-135
Surrogate:1,2-Dichloroethane-d4 10.1 ug/L 10 101 65-135
Surrogate: To/uene-d8 9.86 ug/L 10 99 65-135
Surrogate: Dibromofluoromethane 9.92 uq/L 10 99 65-135
Matrix Spike (BF10237-MS1) Source: 1104776-02 Prepared & Analyzed: 06/02/11
Benzene 19.4 0.8 0.1 ug/L 20 ND 97 37-151 30
Surroqate:4-Bromofluorobenzene 9.60 ug/L 10 96 65-135
Surrogate:l,2-Dichloroethane-d4 10.2 ug/L 10 102 65-135
Surrogate: To/uene-d8 10.0 ug/L 10 100 65135
Surrogate: Dibromofluoromethane 9.87 ug/L 10 99 65-135
FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director
NELAP Accredited Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager
Page 2 of 10
'
'
'
,
'
t
'
'
'
'
,
'
i
1
1
1
1
1
'
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
" 3 t� '�i�.u\flr_'_�!(lr' c��f�._'._v..^-.Rv, C1i_v._^ ^�.�'. L ._sf-'rEi/% � . _.2. .� 7_.`� .^t'J��_: �t=�
-: >... v: ca_ � v� :�; �,� " ,=r., ; ....
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearwater, FL 33755
Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons - Quality Control
�o\��o �N nccoROAac�
� 4
V
_
June 9, 2017
Work Order: 1104349
Revised Report
Spike Source %REC RPD
Analyte Resuit PQL MDL Units Level Result %REC Limits RPD Limit
Batch BF10118 - Extraction for PAHs by HPLC
Blank (BF10118-BLK1) Prepared: 06/01/11 Analyzed: 06/04l11
Naphthalene 0.22 U 1.0 0.22 ug/L
LCS (BF10118-BS1) Prepared: 06/01/11 Analyzed: O6/04/11
Naphthalene 7.54 1.0 0.22 ug/L 10 75 1-122 41
LCS Dup (BF10118-BSD1) Prepared: 06/01/11 Analyzed: 06/04/11
Naphthalene 7.53 1.0 0.22 ug/L 10 75 1-122 0.1 41
Matrix Spike (BF10178-MS1) Source: 1704350-01 Prepared: os/o1/11 Analyzed: os/o4/11
Naphthalene 7.02 1.1 0.25 ug/L 11 ND 62 21-107 28
FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Franeis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director
NELAP Accredited Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager
Page 3 of 10
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
3 � :3��''V[`J., =:Cl.�.-��=.Fs�, C!�D';"v',^,R, �L .=:4c;ii ..., -i.�t= _. ' i ;'�-1� �,aX S�i "� ��� ��"; t�;
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearwater, FL 33755
Inorganics - Qual'rty Control
��� �N ACCOR�9
�� ycF
� g
V �
< '�
June 9, 2011
Work Order: 1104349
Revised Report
Spike Source %REC RPD
Analyte Result PQL MDL Units Level Result %REC Limits RPD Limit
Batch BF10607 - TOC prep
Blank (BF70607-BLK1) Prepared & Analyzed: O6/03l11
Total Organic Carbon 0.50 � 1.0 0.50 mg/L
LCS (BF10607-BS1) Prepared & Analyzed: 06/06/11
Total Organic Carbon 11.0 1.0 0.50 mg/L 10 110 90-110
Matrix Spike (BF10607-MS7) Source: 1103981-01 Prepared & Analyzed: 06/03/11
Total Organic Carbon 16.0 1.0 0.50 mg/L 10 6.37 96 85-115
Matrix Spike Dup (BF10607-MSDi) Source: 1103981-01 Prepared & Analyzed: 06/03/11
Total Organic Carbon 16.0 1.0 0.50 mg/L 10 6.37 97 85-115 0.6 10
FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director
NELAP Accredited Leslie C. Boardman, 4.A. Manager
Page 4 of 10
�
'
'
'
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
^ f' ..., n`'. ,_.. ; .... . , f� „� � z_.r, r n -'' :'`2. } 1' �_ _��•; i,-�
i ,� ��. ; V(���� �C'rt��_�,,.--.�s�, Cr���, v ,.:R: ' � ��E%7 �,, . �_ �. ^: z,4G: ....A�: ...>.,....�_ ._s
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearwater, FL 33755
Metals - Quality Control
��� �N ACCOq�9
H
� °�
� f
V
June 9, 2011
Work Order: 1104349
Revised Report
Spike Source %REC RPD
Analyte Result PQL MDL Units Level Result %REC Limits RPD Limit
' Batch BE12615 - Hexavalent Chromium
Blank (BE12675-BLK1) Prepared & Anayzed: OS/26/11
Chromium, Hexavalent 0.0050 U 0.040 0.0050 mglL
� LCS (BE12615-BS7) Prepared 8 Anayzed: 05/26l11
Chromium, Hexavalent 0.030 I 0.040 0.0050 mg/L 0.029 103 85-115
' Duplicate (BE12615-DUP1) Source: 1704350-01 Prepared & Anayzed: 05/26/11
Chromium, Hexavalent 0.0050 � 0.040 0.0050 mg/L ND 200
Matrix Spike (BE12615-MS1) Source: 7104349-01 Prepared & Analyzed: OS/26/11
Chromium, Hexavalent 0.0061 I,J6 0.040 0.0050 mg/L 0.029 0.0061 0 71-118
' Matrix Spike Dup (BE12615-MSD1) Source: 1104349-01 Prepared & Analyzed: 05/26/11
Chromium, Hexavalent 0.0061 �,�g 0.040 0.0050 mg/L 0.029 0.0061 0 71-118 0 23
' Batch BE12630 - EPA 3020A
Blank (BE12630-BLK1) Prepared: 05/26/11 Analyzed: Os/o2/11
Copper 0.00013 � 0.00050 0.00013 mg/L
' Zinc 0.00088 U 0.0050 0.00088 mg/L
Chromium 0.00035 � 0.0050 0.00035 mg/L
Lead 0.00025 U 0.00050 0.00025 mg/L
Cadmium 0.00027 � 0.00050 0.00027 mg/L
, LCS (BE12630-BS1)
Cadmium
Zinc
' Copper
Lead
Chromium
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
0.051
0.049
0.049
0.049
0.053
Prepared:05/26l11 Analyzed:06/02/11
0.00050 0.00027 mg/L 0.050 103 80-120
0.0050 0.00088 mg/L 0.050 98 80-120
0.00050 0.00013 mg/L 0.050 98 80-120
0.00050 0.00025 mg/L 0.050 99 80-120
0.0050 0.00035 mg/L 0.050 106 80-120
FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director
NELAP Aceredited Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager
Page 5 of 10
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
. P C ,=ss�Y4%I ,I =CE���':.�:;t=sD, Ci_�,u^.l,:.F'-s, ..-:. :=+�1E;7� z, ,'-��:� : �.�ci Ff=.X. �? ' .,s-���i ?�? �
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearwater, FL 33755
Metals - Quality Control
�0\��0 �N ACCpRO4yc�
� �
U
U
a i
June 9, 2011
Work Order: 1104349
Revised Report
Spike Source %REC RPD
Analyte Result PQL MDL Units Level Result %REC Limits RPD Limit
Batch BE12630 - EPA 3020A
Matrix Spike (BE72630-MS1) Source: 1104149-04 Prepared: 05/26/11 Analyzed: O6/02/11
Cadmium 0.047 0.00050 0.00027 mg/� 0.050 ND 94 70-130
Chromium 0.046 0.0050 0.00035 mg/L 0.050 0.0017 89 70-130
Copper 0.044 0.00050 0.00013 mg/L 0.050 0.0025 83 70-130
Zinc 0.043 0.0050 0.00088 mg/L 0.050 ND 85 70-130
Lead 0.043 0.00050 0.00025 mg/L 0.050 ND 86 70-130
Matrix Spike (BE12630-MS2) Source: 1104204-05 Prepared: 05/26/11 Analyzed: 06/02/11
Cadmium 0.047 0.00050 0.00027 mg/L 0.050 ND 94 70-130
Copper O.Q43 0.00050 0.00013 mg/L 0.050 0.0022 82 70-130
Lead 0.043 0.00050 0.00025 mg/L 0.050 ND 86 70-130
Zinc 0.043 0.0050 0.00088 mg/L 0.050 0.0013 83 70-130
Chromium 0.047 0.0050 0.00035 mg/L 0.050 0.0038 86 70-130
Matrix Spike Dup (BE12630-MSD1) Source: 1104749-04 Prepared: OS/26/11 Analyzed: 06/02/11
Cadmium 0.048 0.00050 0.00027 mg/L 0.050 ND 96 70-130 2 20
Zinc 0.042 0.0050 0.00088 mg/L 0.050 ND 83 70-130 2 20
Chromium 0.046 0.0050 0.00035 mg/L 0.050 0.0017 89 70-130 0.3 20
Lead 0.044 0.00050 0.00025 mg/L 0.050 ND 88 70-130 3 20
Copper 0.044 0.00050 0.00013 mg/L 0.050 0.0025 83 70-130 0.8 20
Matrix Spike Dup (BE12630-MSD2� Source: 1104204-05 Prepared: OS/26/11 Analyzed: os/o2/11
Lead 0.044 0.00050 0.00025 mg/L 0.050 ND 88 70-130 2 20
Copper 0.043 0.00050 0.00013 mg/L 0.050 0.0022 83 70-130 1 20
Chromium 0.047 0.0050 0.00035 mg/L 0.050 0.0038 86 70-130 0.8 20
Zinc 0.043 0.0050 0.00088 mg/L 0.050 0.0013 84 70-130 0.9 20
Cadmium 0.048 0.00050 0.00027 mg/L 0.050 ND 96 70-130 2 20
FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Franeis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director
NELAP Accredked Leslis C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager
Page 6 of 10
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
' 'i f.� �.^,�"�,�(._e<1 =:i��,�='u,�R�<C3-�� .^::�F::='� �4F77 � ; _;.��� : �;=�i �",^-.X � J_�;�- ,�`y `s^.,
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearwater, FL 33755
Metals - Quality Control
��O �N A C C 0l+OH
4,� ynF
� �
V �
< 2
June 9, 2011
Work Order: 7704349
Revised Report
Spike Source %REC RPD
Analyte Result PQL MDL Units Level Result %REC Limits RPD Limit
Batch BE13116 - Diqestion Procedure for Hg Analysis by EPA 1631
Blank (BE13116-BLK1) Prepared: 05/31/11 Analyzed: os/OV11
Mercury 0.00020 U 0.00040 0.00020 ug/L
LCS (BE13716-BS1) Prepared: OS/31/11 Analyzed: 06/02/11
Mercury 0.020 0.00040 0.00020 ug/L 0.020 98 79-123
Matrix Spike (BE13116-MS1) Source: 1104617-01 Prepared: 05/31/11 Analyzed: 06/02/11
Mercury 0.030 0.00040 0.00020 ug/L 0.020 0.0054 120 71-125
Matrix Spike (BE13716-MS2) Source: 1104652-01 Prepared: OS/31/11 Analyzed: 06/02n 1
Mercury 0.020 0.00040 0.00020 ug/L 0.020 0.0045 79 71-125
Matrix Spike Dup (BE13116-MSD7) Source: 1104617-01 Prepared o5/31n 1 Analyzed: O6/02i11
Mercury 0.025 0.00040 0.00020 ug/L 0.020 0.0054 100 71-125 15 36
Matrix Spike Dup (BE13116-MSD2) Source: 1704652-01 Prepared: OS/31/11 Analyzed: 06/02111
Mercury 0.020 0.00040 0.00020 ug/L 0.020 0.0045 75 71-125 4 36
' FDOH Laboratory No.E84129
NELAP Accredited
, Page 7 of 10
Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director
Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
� �} �.G � 11 '_� : ;-� ..... . �.. i-,. 3 �-• -' �, � � .": ^ `..� . .-� y-2 �, �` :
� ,... � (�L?� �tl.,�_v!.^-.r'"3-.�. CL�„� v„-..,-e""s, � �4�77 L; �:� c�44 F..^_..X �-�;�'"� ; G
City of Clearwater Public Utilities
1605 Harbor Drive
Clearwater, FL 33755
�o\��� \N ACCpRO4yc�
_ �
U
V �
a x
June 9, 2011
Work Order: 1104349
Revised Report
' Qualifiers, Notes and Definitions
Results followed by a"U" indicate that the sample was analyzed but the compound was not detected. Results followed by "I"
indicate that the reported value is between the laboratory method detection limts and the laboratory practical quantitation limit.
A statement of estimated uncertainty of test results is available upon request.
For methods marked with "', all QC criteria have been met for this method which is equivalent to a SAL certified method.
Test results in this report meet all the requirements of the NELAC standards. Any applicable qualifiers are shown below.
Questions regarding this report should be directed to Client Services at 813-855-1844.
J6 The sample matrix interfered with the ability to make any accurate determination.
J6 Qualifier on Hexavalent Chromium: The matrix prevented recovery of the matrix spikes in this sample. A second aliquot was
spiked and analyzed undiluted and at a tenth dilution to confirmed matrix interferance. LCS recovery was within established limits
and the method blank was a non-detect.
�.��:--`� �
FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director
NELAP Accredked Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager
Page 8 of 10
� � � � � � � � � � � � � � �■■ � � � �
v
�
�
m
�
0
0
SOLJTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. SAL Project No. � 3-1�
1 9 O BAWIEW B�ULEVARO, OLDSMAF, FL 34677 B9 3-855-'I B44 fax B 13-855-221 B � .
Client Name Contact / Phone:
Cit of Clearwater Public Utilities Tare Kivett 727-224-7520
Project Name / Location
Groundwater Dis r e to S
Samplers: (Signature)
odes:
DW-Drinking Weter WW-Wastewater � �
SW-SuAaceWater SL-Siudge 50-Soil m i°o� �
GW-Groundwater SA-Saline Water O-Other m a �+ c
R-Reagent Weter 10 `'� a o C a
a c J Z� V a ��
usa y o� _ � = a c°v � 0p 5 �q�
Ooly x c' o Uy� �� �C� EUU E� vV p o�
g� Sam le Descrf lion o � � cg t� � m °a � v° O N c� n`� �_ �_ � z° n
01 Marshall Streel Wetl- 2� rZZZ GW X Z 2 2 1 7 1 �, �
02 Field Blank � Ztl� R X 1
03 Tri Blank �1�'�� %/�d R X 1
Caraainare PropareM Date/iime: �� R Date/Time: O�� 3eal ntec�9 y N Instructfons / Remarl�
n��a. 5 f,/ ,� � S( seopeg Mre�� o� er�wan Q N wn
Re&xryished' DetMime: Received: ime: . �
(d� ReceHed on ice9 7ertp Y N wn 62-621- Is groundwah r discharging to
f ZS �� freah or saline surfaar� waterT
aer.quishee: ome�rime: aeceivea: oate/r.ne: RoperpreservaWea:wica�ea7 N wn
Hexavalent Chromlum has 24-hr holding
Rec•a w ro,m noe� an,e� N wn time.
Rdkpuished: Dele/Time: Received: DatelTime:
Vdeties rx'A w/wt headepacE Q N WA
Roper conlefners used7 (�
RNkqWahed: DatdTime: Receivetl: Date/lime: 1Y,N WA
U 1104349
� � ��.�
RnD�N HHGV1 Chain of Custody
SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC.
'I 1 O BAYVIEW BOULEVARD, OLDSMAR, FL 34677 0'I 3-855-1 B44 fax B13-BS�r2216
Sampiing Log
oa�: 65?S l I
e�.���:.... n..a.,
(use back of form ff necessary)
l2if o.z5 i�25 P�^ CoN
(218 �.ZS �Z.�o ���3 Z3z�
r�. 3 'L3a �
IZ21 0.25 Z.ys 2�SS
I�, 3
-F e. r� do
Z7, � D�OI
Z�. � 0•0(
1?, 9 b�o3
SFCri-• IZtO
+u tlo
�D In� ,v� �O C cRdl
�
�awi. t��ti�s (1.3 z�s5 2�.�j o.03 To ��Sti.. �, t�
,�,.� �o �a .�,�
�r.o.m osrmios
Page 10 of 10
'
'
'
'
'
R S E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S I N C O
Geotechnical Eng+neering & Construction Materials Testing
King Engineering Associates
4921 Memorial Highway, Suite 300
Tampa, Floric3a 33634
Attention: Mr. Thomas A. Traina, P.E.
� �
RE: Results of Field Infiltration and Permeability Testiag
'
'
'
'
L�
Marshall Street WWTP
Clearwater, Florida
Our File: DES 116723
Dear Tom:
September 20, 2011
Trarzsmitted herewith are r�esuIts ofthe Double Ring InfiItration (DR� tes�, hand auger classification
boring and fieid permeability (slug) testing conducted at the subject site. The DRI test Iocation was neaz
our previous boring B-1 and monitoring well MW- I as shown on Plate I of our report dated Mazc� 3 I,
2011.
The hand auger boring identified �ayish-brown slightly silty fine sands to the compiztion depth of
' the boring at 7.5 feet beneath pres�nt grade. The soils comprise the SP-SM ciassification. Groundwater
was measured at a depth of 6.4 feet below �ade at the time of otu field testing.
�
�
Results of the DRI test indicate an infiltration rate of 1.2 inches per hour at a depth of 1.0 foot
below grade at the test location. The relatively slow infiltration rate can be attributed, at least in part, to
the silt and clay fines content of the slig,l�t�y silry sands.
' Field permeability (sl� testing was conducted in the previously cons�cted monitoring well. The
well detail, as shown in Plate II of our previotzs report, had a screened interval between about 6 aad 16
feet beIow the �ound surface. Results indicate an average horizontal permeability rate of 79 x 10-5 cm/sec
' (022 ftJday}. The relatively slow rate can be attributed to the dense to very dense, variably cemented
condition of the soil s within the screened interval. Please refer to the log of boring B- I in ozzrprevious
' report. The dark brown color ofthe soils also su�ests the presence of some organic fines which can also
reduce the permeability of fine sands.
' ��� Clearwatsr Tampa
Phone: 941.371.3949 12220 49th SVeet North • Clearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 813_948_fi027
Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: T27.572.4Q90 Fax: 813.945.7645
_, saroffice�driggers-eng.com clwoffic2�driggers�ng.com tpaoffice�driggers-eng.com
2
DRIGGERS ENGTNEERING SER'VICES, INC. appreciates the opportuniry to be of
assistance to you on this pzoject. Should you have any c}uestions, please do not hesitate to contact this
office at your convenience.
JAD-REP\116723a
Copies Submitted:
(3)
Respectfiilly submitted,
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVIC`��1�TC.
p�'` '��
� �S T kO11,'
� ► ,.
% i \G��•��GENSF ��`�►r
'• r
cholas T. Korecki, P.E. ��; � No. 45529 �:� '�
� � 9`2`K'�� •:* i
enior Geotechnical Engineer� * � , �
FL Registration No. 45529 �� �o : S7ATE OF '� �
. ,������;:c�OR10p;G���C'��
—
��ae$,'O `A* E�.=
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
ut-�ivuC�S tNGINEERING SERVICES iNCORP(�RATED
HAND AUGER BORING LOG
PRQJECT: CL[ENT:
Marshall Street WWTP Kin En in erin As ciates lnc.
Clearvvater, Florida WpTER TABLE: DATE:
DES � 16743 g,p� 12_� �
TECHNICIAN: pATE: COMPLEiION DEATH:
R. V. 9-12-11 7.5' .
LOCATION: TEST NUMBER:
RI-1
�� ' DESCRIPTION �EPTM � REMARKS
{FT} }
�
Grayish-brown siightly silty 0 � •
Fine SAND �� �'� � �
i •I•h I•
(SP-SM} :i a: � r
hi•! i•
7:�Ct1
���i�Ci
1.5 .1:�' c r
�ri�ri•
�:rr[7
=i �i� r i
.t : �: C �
. �i���Fi'
�r i: �;;
3 7:�:r i.i .
'L'J: CJ.
.1: I: C �'
:I�PI;j •
I:I: L 7:
�-I� F 4 �
'L'J. C].
-i -1- L F 1
4.�J :I;I:k� �
� :I: G'1:
,�'1'f t•
�G:1:ia.
•I•I� F 1 1
:J:I'Ci .
1 � I - E �!•�
� .1;I;Cf�
�Ea:fa•
i�i�fr
:I:i-Gi
� .�: f ��:
.'1 :I: C 1
�hi.}i.
7:I: C C I
7.5
9
10.5
DDUBLE RING INFILTRATION TEST
Job No: � 16723 Test No. DRI - 9 Date: 9/12/2019
Client : King Engineering Associates, inc.
Project: Marshall Street WW'1"P, Clearwater, Flarida
Location: Near boring B-1 8� MW-4
Test Depth: �.0 ft. Outer (.yl. Diam: 24" lnner Cyl. Diam: 12"
Description of Soil at Test Depth: Grayish-brown sligh�y silty Fine SAND
Depth of Groundwater Below Test Depth: 5.0 ft Infiltretion Rate: 9.2 In/Hr
10 I f
I I
� �
� i
�
a i � � � � ;
� � I� I � �
o � � ' j
Z6 ; •j I .
z I I ;
, �
°r ! � � +
� � ;
� � ' � i
o , � � (
.:., 4 �
� � ! � I
=
: i �
� � , i �
_ �
; � i i
2 ' � i ;
I
� � ;
i i i ; i ;
� ;
� ' � I � I .
0 7 2 3 4
E[apsed Time of Infiltration — HOURS
5 6 7
TEST PROCEDURE: The test was conducted in genera! accordance with ASTM D 3385-75. A seven {7") inch
hydraulic head was utilized. The infrltration rate was determined at selected time intervals by recording the time for
a 1 inch drop in water leve4.. l"he severt (T') inch hea.d was then re-established until the next-test interval. The test .
was continued (minimum 4 hours) unti! stabiiity was achieved and the infiltration rate did not vary in excess af 5%
between successive one (1) hour measurements. Readings were recorded at intervals not exceeding 30 minutes.
The plotted infttration rate above represents the average of all observations during each hour interval.
Technician: R. V. Reviewed by: Gp % ��� ,
/
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
.
'
'
�
�
Not applicable to this project.
Appendix A.doc
ASBESTOS REPORT
11/16/11